Sie sind auf Seite 1von 294

GOVERNMENT OF MONGOLIA

Ministry of Road, Transport, Construction and


Urban Development

Department of Roads

CONSTRUCTION OF CHOIR – SAINSHAND ROAD

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

OCTOBER 2009
Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GENERAL

2. SITE CLEARANCE

3. SOURCES OF MATERIALS AND EARTH WORK

4. SUBBASE, BASE AND SHOULDER

5. ASPHALT PAVEMENT WORKS

6. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND PROTECTION WORKS

7. RCC STRUCTURES

8. MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS

9. ROAD FURNITURE

10. DAYWORKS

11. QUALITY ASSURANCE

12. PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Table of Contents
Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

100 – GENERAL

Section 100. General 1-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 100 - GENERAL

101 LOCATION AND EXTENT OF SITE 1-5


102 EXTENT OF CONTRACT 1-5
103 DRAWINGS 1-5
104 PROGRAM OF WORK 1-6
105 ORDER OF WORK 1-7
106 SUBMISSIONS TO THE ENGINEER 1-7
107 TAKING-OVER CERTIFICATES 1-8
108 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION 1-8
109 PROJECT QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 1-9
110 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT AND ABBREVIATIONS 1-10
(a) Units of measurement 1-10
(b) Abbreviations 1-11
111 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 1-12
112 OTHER CONTRACTORS 1-17
113 TRANSPORT OF WORK FORCE 1-18
114 TEMPORARY WORKS 1-18
115 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 1-18
115-1 GUIDELINES 1-18
115-2 SETTING-OUT 1-21
(a) General 1-21
(b) Detailed setting out 1-22
115-3 PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC 1-24
i) Maintenance of Existing Roads/Tracks 1-24
ii) Construction of Deviations and Maintenance 1-25
iii) Passage of Traffic Through the Works 1-27
iv) Signs, Barriers and Lights 1-28
v) Closure or Diversion of Existing Roads 1-28
vi) Assistance To The Public 1-29
vii) Contractor's Construction Traffic 1-30
116 PROTECTION FROM WATER, SNOW, ICE AND SAND 1-30
117 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ACCIDENTS 1-31
118 PRESERVATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FENCES AND 1-33
GATES
119 USE OF EXPLOSIVES 1-33

Section 100. General 1-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

120 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORKS AND SERVICES 1-35


121 DIVERSION OF SERVICES 1-37
122 LIAISON WITH GOVERNMENT 1-37
123 PROVISION OF LAND 1-37

124 WATER SUPPLY 1-38

125 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES 1-38


126 INFORMATION FROM EXPLORATORY BORING AND TEST 1-39
PITS
127 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED 1-39
ARTICLES
128 TEST CERTIFICATES 1-39
129 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS 1-40
130 SIGN BOARDS 1-40
131 GENERAL SITE FACILITIES 1-40
(a) Site laboratories and office accommodation 1-40
(i) General 1-40
(ii) Engineer’s offices 1-41
(iii) Site laboratories 1-42
(iv) Inspection huts 1-42
(v) Car ports and garages 1-43
(b) Furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories and 1-43
Engineer’s offices
(i) Furniture and equipment for the Engineer’s offices 1-44
(ii) Furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories 1-46
(c) Houses for the Engineer’s supervisory staff 1-52
(d) Furniture for the Engineer’s houses 1-53
132 TIME FOR PROVIDING THE SITE LABORATORIES, THE 1-55
ENGINEER’S STAFF HOUSES AND OFFICES
133 INSURANCE AND OWNERSHIP OF THE SITE 1-55
LABORATORIES AND EQUIPMENT, HOUSES, OFFICES
AND FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE ENGINEER
134 MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE LABORATORIES, 1-55
ENGINEER’S OFFICES, AND FURNITURE AND
EQUIPMENT
1-55
(a) General
1-55
(b) Engineer’s offices
1-56
(c) Site laboratories
135 REMOVAL OF CAMPS 1-56
136 ATTENDANCE UPON THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF 1-56

Section 100. General 1-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

137 PROVISION OF VEHICLES 1-56


(a) New vehicles 1-56
(b) Rented vehicles 1-57
138 PAYMENT OF OVERTIME FOR ENGINEER’S STAFF 1-57
139 PLANTATION OF TREES ALONG THE ROAD 1-58
140 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 1-58
141 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-59
(a) Item: Engineer’s supervisory staff houses 1-59
(b) Item: Engineer’s offices 1-59
(c) Item: Site Laboratories 1-59
(d) Item: Furniture and equipment for the Engineer’s offices 1-60
(e) Item: Furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories 1-60
(f) Item: Maintenance of furniture and equipment for the 1-60
Engineer’s offices
(g) Maintenance of furniture and equipment for the Site I-60
laboratories
(h) Item: Inspection huts 1-61
(i) Item: Vehicles for the Engineer 1-61
(j) Item: Kilometer traveled by vehicles for the Engineer 1-61
(k) Item: Kilometer traveled by rented vehicles for the Engineer 1-61
(l) Item: Signboards 1-61
(m) Item: Maintenance of existing road sections 1-61
(n) Item: Construction and maintenance of deviations 1-62
(p) Item: Environmental Monitoring 1-63

ANNEXURE – 100 LIST OF MNS STANDARDS 1-64

Section 100. General 1-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

101 LOCATION AND EXTENT OF SITE


The road begins at Choir in continuation of the present Nalaikh -Choir- Sainshand-
Zamiin Uud road under progress and ends at 35th railway crossing near Sainshand.
The Works comprising this Contract are situated in Gobisumber aimag. The
alignment may be identified in respect of start and end point as shown in the
Drawing.
Choir Lattitude-460 21’ 00’’ Longitude-1080 23’ 53’’
Sainshand Lattitude-440 55’ 44’’ Longitude-1100 08’ 10’’
102 EXTENT OF CONTRACT
The work consists of construction of 176.4 km length of Choir- Sainshand road. It is
two lane 8 m (7m wide with 0.5m paved shoulder) bituminous carriageway with 1.0 m
gravel shoulder on either side.
The major items of work in the Contract include but are not limited to:
(a) provision and maintenance of Site laboratories and laboratory equipment,
houses, offices, Inspection huts, furniture and equipment, and vehicles for the
Engineer,
(b) site clearance and setting out,
(c) embankment construction and roadway excavations including deep cutting at
mountain pass sections,
(d) operations appurtenant to the extraction of material for incorporation into the
Works,
(e) construction of pipe culverts, box culverts, headwalls, wing walls, aprons and
stone pitching of outlets and inlets,
(f) construction of other drainage facilities including, but not limited to, ditches,
subsoil drains, minor drainage structures, side drains, intercepting drains and
other drains of various types (such as inlet, outfall, mitre, cut-off) linings for
drains etc.,
(g) construction of reinforced concrete bridges,
(h) diversion, protection, raising, removing of services,
(i) construction of non-frost subgrade, subbase and base course layers and
shoulders,
(j) construction of asphalt concrete surfacing .
(k) provision and installation of road furniture,
(l) accommodation of traffic passing through the Works,
(m) ancillary operations to facilitate the execution of the Works, and,
(n) the Care of the Works prior to the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate and
rectification of defects during the Defects Liability Periods.
103 DRAWINGS
The Drawings referred to in the Conditions of Contract are those included in the
contract, and such further Drawings as shall be supplied under the Contract.
Those Drawings are subject to supplementation by way of modifications and
additions, pursuant to Sub-Clause 1.8 of the Conditions of Contract, that may be
instructed by the Engineer from time to time, for the proper execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall construct the Works taking into account all such modifications
and additions to drawings taken together with the drawings included in contract.

Section 100. General 1-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

104 PROGRAM OF WORK


The program of work, referred to in Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of the Contract
to which the Contractor shall adhere in the execution of the Works, shall be based on
computerized CPM /PERT techniques and shall be presented in the form of a
network, and where necessary sub-networks showing all significant mobilization,
materials procurement, and construction operations, their interdependencies and
constraints, also taking into account climatic conditions prevalent in the project road
area. The program of work shall be submitted by the Contractor as per contract data
after receiving of a Letter of Acceptance. All sub-networks shall be complementary to
and derived from the network. The network and sub-networks shall be presented in
the form of time sequenced bar charts. The unit of time for the network, sub-networks
and the derivative charts shall be 1 day. Weekends, public holidays and any
shutdown periods shall be shown on the bar chart. Schedules of labour and staff
requirements shall be superimposed upon the bar chart in the form of monthly
histograms and cumulative “S” curves. The mobilization and demobilization of major
items of equipment shall be indicated on the bar chart and summarized in tabular
form below the bar chart. The cumulative value of the programmed activities shall
also be superimposed on the bar chart. The cumulative value of the programmed
activities shall also be superimposed on the bar chart in the form of an “S” curve, with
a horizontal axis of item and a vertical axis of percentage completion.
For preparing the program of work and updating it from time to time, the Contractor
shall provide for his own use a dedicated computer and appropriate software, the
selection and configuration of which shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall update the program at regular quarterly intervals or at any other
time, as determined by the Engineer The Contractor shall make available for use
by the Engineer all software in original required for the implementation and running
of his program and all information required to update it as and when required.
The Contractor shall, by the first day of each week, provide a weekly program
showing the item-wise quantities of work programmed for execution in that week. If at
any time it should appear to the Engineer that the progress of the work does not
conform in quantity or sequence to the approved program, the Contractor shall,
under the instruction of the Engineer or the Engineer’s Representative, provide
update his program of work along with written details of the updated methods,
procedures and resources proposed to ensure completion of the Works within the
Time for Completion as defined in Sub-Clause 8.2 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of his program of work (including
updating thereof) by incorporating them into, and revising accordingly, the network
and sub-networks referred to above and by subsequently generating revised bar
charts using the approved software. Should those proposals be acceptable to the
Engineer, the Contractor shall implement them without delay and produce revised
supporting schedules. Should the Contractor’s updated program of work be not
acceptable to the Engineer or should this be indicated that completion may not be
achieved within the Time for Completion as defined in Sub-Clause 8.2 of the
Conditions of Contact, the Contractor shall submit, further modified proposals for
achieving the required Time for Completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In preparing his Program of work in terms of Sub-Clause 8.3, the Contractor shall
take cognizance of all necessary factors and conditions to provide for the completion
of the Works in the order and within the times laid down therein. The program has to
be supported with “Resource Loaded” Schedule showing equipment, staff, material
and production rates for each items of work. The program shall be split into at least
two-fronts of works to be commenced simultaneously and resources have to be
mobilized according to work-fronts.

Section 100. General 1-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The information to be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor shall include


drawings showing the general arrangement of the temporary offices and other
temporary buildings or structures proposed, details of the Contractor's equipment,
Temporary Works and all other appurtenances which he proposes to employ for the
construction and completion of the whole of the Works.
Updating of work program (including modification thereof to the satisfaction of the
Engineer) shall be done and submitted to the Engineer as per contract data of the
Contractor’s receiving the instruction to that effect from the Engineer or the
Engineer’s Representative.
The Contractor shall execute the Works in accordance with his program as approved
by the Engineer and the Contractor shall not deviate from that program without the
written consent of the Engineer.
105 ORDER OF WORK
The various operations pertaining to the Works shall be carried out in such a
progressive sequence as will achieve a continuous and consecutive output of fully
completed road sections, inclusive of all bridge works and culverts, within the time
limits specified in the Contract. The Contractor is required to mobilize and commence
works on at least two simultaneous fronts and progress continuously towards the
other without leaving any intermediate isolated sections of incomplete road. The
order of work execution length-wise and work component-wise (e.g. earthwork,
pavement work, culverts and bridges, etc) shall be indicated in the program of work
(including updated program of work) submitted by the Contractor and agreed to by
the Engineer
106 SUBMISSIONS TO THE ENGINEER
Whenever the Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer any proposals,
details, drawings, calculations, information, literature, materials, test reports,
certificates, requests for approval, clearance to proceed or any other documentation
arising from the Contract, the Engineer shall consider each submission and, if
appropriate, shall reply to the Contractor in accordance with the relevant provisions
of the Conditions of Contract. Each such submission shall be made sufficiently in
advance of the date by which the approval is required from the Engineer keeping in
view the relevant provisions in the Conditions of Contract or otherwise as stated
elsewhere in those Specifications or as to be agreed with the Engineer taking into
consideration the approved program and the need to give the Engineer adequate
time to consider each submission.
Documents submitted, other than drawings and manufacturers' literature, shall be A4
in size or as otherwise instructed or agreed to by the Engineer. All documents shall
be in English provided that manufacturers' literature may be submitted in other
languages if accompanied by an accurate translation into English. Any abbreviations
shall be explained. All calculations and technical information shall be in SI units as
set out in BS 5775.
Except as otherwise instructed or agreed to by the Engineer, all drawings shall be A3
in size to the ink border. Notes shall be in English. All dimensions shall be in metres
or millimetres and all weights in SI units.
The Contractor shall submit sample drawings to the Engineer for approval in respect
of the presentation, layout, numbering and titling of drawings. Subsequent drawings
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer in this approved format.
All drawings shall include the title of the Contract at the bottom of the drawing
followed by the specific drawing title. All drawings shall be uniquely numbered and
include the appropriate scales and date of submission. All amendments to drawings

Section 100. General 1-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

shall be noted and dated.


The approval of the Engineer of any submission shall not relieve the Contractor from
his responsibilities under the Contract.
107 TAKING-OVER CERTIFICATES
A Taking-Over Certificate shall not be issued for any Section of road unless in the
opinion of the Engineer it can conveniently and safely be opened to the public and all
works within that road are complete with the exception of the following that may, at
the discretion of the Engineer, be completed during the Defects Liability Period:
x reinstatement of borrow areas and quarries,
x reinstatement of deviations,
x erection of informatory signs, and,
x erection of kilometre marker posts.
108 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a method statement describing his
proposed arrangements and methods for the execution of the Works as per contract.
The method statement shall include but not be limited to details in respect of:
x Engineer’s offices and buildings and field laboratories,
x arrangements for temporary services,
x Contractor's equipment and its intended production output,
x Contractor’s camps and stack yards
x quarrying and stone crushing arrangements and production output,
x production arrangements, output, storage and handling of other aggregates,
x borrow area arrangements including access roads,
x supply, handling and storage of materials required for execution of the Works,
x concrete mixing and handling,
x plant and equipment for bituminous mixes,
x power arrangements,
x diversions and deviations,
x methods of excavation,
x methods of dealing with water,
x working shift arrangements,
x size of the skilled and unskilled labour forces,
x supervision arrangements of Contractor’s operations,
x quality control arrangements, testing methods and facilities.
During the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer
full and detailed particulars of any proposed amendments to the arrangements and
methods submitted in accordance with the foregoing in advance of effecting any
such changes.
The Engineer's normal working hours shall be defined as 8.00 a.m. to 5.00 p.m. on
weekdays and 8.00 a.m. to 1200 noon on Saturdays. Saturday afternoons and
Sundays shall be set aside for rest. If the Contractor wishes to execute Permanent

Section 100. General 1-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Works outside these hours, he shall obtain the written permission of the Engineer at
least one full working day in advance to enable the Engineer to make provision for
the supervision of such work.
109 PROJECT QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the quality of the whole of the
Works. The Contractor shall designate a responsible and qualified engineer in his
team , as agreed by the Engineer, as the Quality Control Manager in the Contract,
who shall be responsible, under the overall direction and control of the Contractor’s
Project Manager, for ensuring that the quality control procedures set out in the
Project Quality Control Plan are adhered to. The Quality Control Manager shall be
authorized to control and coordinate all quality control activities and shall be an
experienced professional reporting directly to the Contractor's Project Manager. The
Contractor shall employ only competent quality control technical staff to carry out
testing and other quality control procedures and any staff not meeting this
requirement, if so determined by the Engineer, shall be replaced with qualified staff
acceptable to the Engineer.
The Project Quality Control shall be developed by the Contractor in consultation with
and entirely to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Notwithstanding his approval of the
Project Quality Control Plan the full provisions of Sub-Clause 4.9 of the Conditions
of Contract shall remain in force and the Engineer shall have the right to direct the
Contractor to amend any part of the Project Quality Control Plan as and when he
deems this necessary to ensure that the quality of the Works is maintained in
compliance with this Specification.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer as in the contract a proposed Project
Quality Control Plan for review and approval by the Engineer. The final Project
Quality Control Plan shall be produced by the Contractor and in its final form shall
comprise a bound manual that defines in separate sections the procedures for the
quality control of materials, equipment and workmanship. The Contractor shall
supply the Engineer with 3 signed copies of the agreed document in its final form as
in the contract to commence the Works pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.1 of the Conditions
of Contract.
The Contractor's Proposed Project Quality Control Plan shall demonstrate his ability
in terms of resources and procedures to control the quality of the Works and shall
include but not be limited to:
x general quality control procedures,
x complete documentation to ensure that all materials that are to be brought to
Site comply with the requirements of this Specification and that such compliance
shall be maintained throughout the currency of the Contract,
x a complete schedule of sampling and testing procedures including test type,
frequency, timing, reporting and signing-off procedures,
x acceptance criteria for payment purposes and procedures in the event of
substandard or late test results,
x procedures for the checking, testing and approval of Temporary Works,
x testing, acceptance and monitoring of Contractor's methods and equipment,
x procedures for assurance of acceptable continuity in methodology and
workmanship quality correlated with levels of supervision including numbers and
type of Contractor's supervisory staff,
x standard report forms for timely submission to the Engineer.

Section 100. General 1-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The schedule of testing in the Project Quality Control Plan shall take cognizance of
the key stages of construction so that tests are timely, informative, relevant and do
not cause unnecessary delay. The purpose of the Project Quality Control Plan is for
the Contractor to provide records that demonstrate to the Engineer, in the fullness of
time, that all the requirements of this Specification have been met.
In preparing the Project Quality Control Plan the Contractor shall take into
consideration that:
(a) no operation shall be carried out without full and complete written notice having
been given to the Engineer by the Contractor sufficiently in advance of the time
of the operation to enable the Engineer to make such arrangements as he may
deem necessary for its inspection and checking,
(b) the Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 48 hours notice in writing of
his intention to set out or give levels for any part of the Works in order that
arrangements may be made for checking.
110 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT AND ABBREVIATIONS
(a) Units of measurement
Symbols for units of measurement conform to the SI system as set out in BS
5775 (ISO 31/1), of which examples are given below, along with the usual
abbreviations.
Where reference is made in the documents to imperial units, the equivalent SI
units shall be substituted.
Pm micron = m x 10-6
mm millimetre
m metre
km kilometre
2
mm square millimetre
m2 square metre
2
km square kilometre
ha hectare
m3 cubic metre
l litre
rad radian
s second
°C degrees Celsius
kg kilogram
g gram = kg x 10-3
mg milligram = kg x 10-6
mg/l milligrams per liter
t tonne = kg x 103
kg/m³ kilogram per cubic metre
t/m³ tones per cubic metre

Section 100. General 1-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

N Newton
N/m² Newton per square metre
Pa Pascal = 1 N/m²
MPa megaPascal = Pa x 106
J Joule
W Watt
Kw kilowatt
A Ampere
V Volt
b) Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used:
ACV Aggregate Crushing Value
ALD Average Least Dimension
BA Bitumen Affinity
CBR California Bearing Ratio
CR Crushing Ratio
CTB Cement Treated Base/Subbase
Fl Flakiness Index
HYSD High Yield Stress Deformed
LAA Los Angeles Abrasion Value
LL Liquid Limit
LS Linear Shrinkage
MC Moisture Content
MDD Maximum Dry Density
OMC Optimum Moisture Content
PI Plasticity Index
PL Plastic Limit
PM Plasticity Modulus, PI x (% passing 0.425 mm sieve)
PP Plasticity Product, PI x (% passing 0.075 mm sieve)
SE Sand Equivalent
SG Specific Gravity
SI International Standard Units of Measurements
SSS Sodium Sulphate Soundness Test, loss on 5-cycles
STV Standard Tar Viscosity
TFOT Thin Film Oven Test
TS Tensile Strength
UC Uniformity Coefficient
UCS Unconfined Compressive Strength

Section 100. General 1-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

VMA Voids in Mineral Aggregates


OPC Ordinary Portland Cement
no. Number (units) as in 6 no.
No. Number (order) as in No. 6
w/c Water cement (ratio)
wt. Weight
% Percent
max. Maximum
min. Minimum
dia. Diameter
h Hour
min Minute
s Second
wk Week
mth Month

111 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS


Certain specifications issued by national or other widely recognized bodies are
referred to in this Specification. Such specifications shall be defined and referred to
hereinafter as Standard Specifications and shall be the latest editions of such
Standard Specifications available as indicated in the contract.
Where a national specification has been designated as the Standard Specification in
respect of the supply of a product from outside Mongolia, it will be open to the
Contractor to propose an alternative national specification so long as that
specification fulfills in all respects the requirements of the Standard Specifications
and is otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. A copy of the alternative specification
proposed by the Contractor , together with its translation into the English language if
it is in another language, shall be submitted to the Engineer with any request that it
be adopted.
In referring to Standard Specifications the following abbreviations are used:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
BS British Standard
BSCP or CP British Standard Code of Practice
ISO International Organization for Standardization
MNS Mongolian National Standards
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer at his office on the Site one complete
set of all Standard Specifications referred to in this Specification and all other
approved Specifications. A set of such Standard and other approved Specifications,
similar in every respect, shall be supplied and maintained by the Contractor in his
office on Site for his own use.
List of Standards, Codes and Other Publications Referred
The latest amendments or editions of the following Standards, Codes and other
publications are referred to in, and are to be read in conjunction with, this part of the

Section 100. General 1-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Specification:
AASHTO-04 Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials
Methods of Sampling and Testing Part 1A & 1B
Specifications
AASHTO-04 Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and
Methods of Sampling and Testing Part 2A & 2B Tests
AASHTO-04 Standard Specification for Highway Bridges
AASHTO M6-03 Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
AASHTO M31M-03 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M33-99 (2003) Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous
Type)
AASHTO M43-88 (2003) Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction
AASHTO M80-87 (2003) Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
AASHTO M81-92 (2002) Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)
AASHTO M82-75 (2000) Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)
AASHTO M85-04 Portland Cement
AASHTO M111-04 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
AASHTO M133-04 Preservatives and Pressure Treatment Process for Timber
AASHTO M140-03 Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M145-91(2000) Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for
Highway Construction Purposes
AASHTO M148-01 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
AASHTO M153-98 (2002)Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
AASHTO M154-00 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
AASHTO M156-97 (2001) Requirements for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO M157-97 (2001)Ready-Mixed Concrete
AASHTO M160-04 General Requirements for Steel, Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling, and Bars for Structural Use
AASHTO M168-96 (2003)Wood Products
AASHTO M 170M-04 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
(Metric)
AASHTO M171-00 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
AASHTO M180-00 Corrugated Sheet Steel Beams for Highway Guardrail
AASHTO M194-00 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
AASHTO M208-01 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M213-01 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and

Section 100. General 1-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient


Bituminous Types)
AASHTO M 221M-03 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M 225M-03 Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
AASHTO M226-80 (2000)Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement
AASHTO M240-04 Blended Hydraulic Cement
AASHTO M241-97 (2001)Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing
AASHTO M247-02 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paint
AASHTO M249-98 (2003)White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic
Striping Material (Solid Form)
AASHTO M251-04 Plain and Laminated Elastomeric Bearings
AASHTO M268-03 Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control
AASHTO M270-04 Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
Shapes, Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered
Alloy Structural Steel Plates for Bridges
AASHTO M280-03 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire
AASHTO M295-00 Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete
AASHTO M297-98 (2002)Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for
Bridges
AASHTO M300-03 Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer
AASHTO M302-00 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
AASHTO R5-03 Selection and Use of Emulsified Asphalts
AASHTO T2-91 (2000) Sampling of Aggregates
AASHTO T11-97 (2000) Material Finer Than 75 Pm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing
AASHTO T21-00 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
AASHTO T24-04 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
AASHTO T26-79 (2000) Quality of water to Be Used in Concrete
AASHTO T27-99 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
AASHTO T30-93 Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate
AASHTO T40-02 Sampling Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T44-03 Solubility of Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T48-04 Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup
AASHTO T49-03 Penetration of Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T51-00 Ductility of Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T53-96 (2000) Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)

Section 100. General 1-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

AASHTO T55-02 Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous


Materials by Distillation
AASHTO T71-93 (2001) Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength
of Mortar
AASHTO T78-96 (2000) Distillation of Cutback Asphaltic (Bituminous) Products
AASHTO T84-00 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T85-91 (2000) Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO T87-86 (2000) Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil Aggregate
Samples for Test
AASHTO T88-00 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
AASHTO T89-02 Determining the Liquid Limits of Soils
AASHTO T90-00 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
AASHTO T96-02 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine
AASHTO T100-03 Specific Gravity of Soils
AASHTO T102-83 (2000) Spot Test of Asphalt Materials
AASHTO T104-99 (2003) Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
AASHTO T106-04 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
AASHTO T119-99 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
AASHTO T121-97 (2001) Weight Per Cubic Foot (or Cubic Metre), Yield and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
AASHTO T127-04 Sampling and Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement
AASHTO T135-97 (2005) Wetting and Drying Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement
Mixture
AASHTO T136-97 (2005) Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement
Mixture
AASHTO T137-04 Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
AASHTO T141-01 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
AASHTO T146-96 (2000) Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for Test
AASHTO T152-01 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure -
Method
AASHTO T157-00 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
AASHTO T158-01 Bleeding of Concrete
AASHTO T160-97 (2001) Length Change of Hardened, Hydraulic Cement Mortar and
Concrete
AASHTO T161-00 Resistance to Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing
AASHTO T162-04 Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and
Mortars of Plastic Consistency
AASHTO T164-01 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving

Section 100. General 1-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Mixtures
AASHTO T166-00 Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
AASHTO T168-03 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T176-02 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the
sand Equivalent Test
AASHTO T179-04 Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film Oven
test)
AASHTO T180-01 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg
Rammer and a 457 mm Drop
AASHTO T188-75 (1999) Evaluation by Freezing and Thawing of Air-Entraining
Additions to Portland Cement
AASHTO T191-02 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method
AASHTO T193-99 The California Bearing Ratio
AASHTO T196-96 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method
AASHTO T197-00 Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration
Resistance
AASHTO T201-03 Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens)
AASHTO T202-03 Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer
AASHTO T209-99 (2004) Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T218-86 (2000) Sampling Hydrated Lime
AASHTO T228-04 Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T230-68 (2000) Determining Degree of Pavement Compaction of
Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
AASHTO T245-97 (2001) Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus
AASHTO T265-93 (2000) Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils
AASHTO T269-97 (2003) Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T280 Concrete pipe, Manhole section or Tile
AASHTO T310-03 In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM C 29-97 Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate
ASTM C 227-97 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement
Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-bar Method)
ASTM C 289-02 Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method).
ASTM D 243-02 Residue of Specified Penetration
ASTM Volume 04.01-03 Cement Lime Gypsum
ASTM Volume 04.02-03 Concrete and Mineral Aggregate

Section 100. General 1-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

ASTM Volume 04.03-03 Road and Paving Materials


ASTM Volume 04.04-03 Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials
ASTM Volume 04.08-03 Natural Building Stones, Soils and Rock
BS 381 BS Colours for Identification, Coding and Special Purposes
BS 812 Aggregate Flakiness Index
BS 812 Elongation Index
BS 812 Aggregate Crushing Value
BS 812 Chloride Content of Fine Aggregates
BS 873 Road Traffic Signs and Internally Illuminated Bollards
BS 1088 Plywood for Marine Craft
BS 1377, Test 14 Density Moisture Content Relationship Vibrating Hammer
BS 1707 Specification for Hot Binder Distributors for Road Surface
Dressing
BS 1881 Part 1 Methods of Sampling Fresh Concrete
BS 1881 Part 2 Methods of Testing Fresh Concrete
BS 1881 Part 3 Methods of Making and Curing Test Specimens
BS 1881 Part 4 Methods of Testing Concrete for Strength
BS 4449 Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 4450 Soundness of Cement
BS 4482 Cold Reduced Steel Wire for the Reinforcement of
Concrete
BS 4483 Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 5607 British Standard Code of Practice for the Use of Explosives
ACI 318 Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
NIST PSI Product Standard for Exterior B-B Class Plywood
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel
DIN 51011 Standard Method of Test for Determination of the Breaking
Point of Solid or Semi-Solid Bitumen (Fraass method)
MNS Mongolian National Standards (List of standards in
Annexure -100)

112 OTHER CONTRACTORS


The Contractor is advised that other contractors employed by the Employer and
employees of the Employer may be working in connection with the Project on and
around the Site.
Pursuant to Sub-Clause 4.6 of the Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall not
interfere in any way with any works, whether the property of the Employer or of a
third party and whether the position of such works is indicated to the Contractor by
the Engineer or not. The Contractor shall respect any works executed by others and

Section 100. General 1-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

articles supplied or installed by others and shall be held responsible for any loss or
damage thereto if caused by him, his employees or his Subcontractors.
113 TRANSPORT OF WORK FORCE
The Contractor shall include in his rates and prices for the transportation of all staff
and labour to and from the various parts of or in connection with the Works and all
costs incurred in securing, recruiting and transporting labour to and from the Site
including but not limited to any expatriate staff.
114 TEMPORARY WORKS
After the Contract is signed and before work commences the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer detailed drawings showing his proposed arrangements in respect of
Temporary Works. The Contractor shall submit full supporting details including but
not limited to:
x calculations,
x diagrams,
x descriptions of how it is proposed to execute such Temporary Works,
x setting-out information,
x any other pertinent information.
All Temporary Works shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate how such Temporary Works fit into his Program,
pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract, for the execution of the
whole of the Works. The liability for the whole of the Temporary Works in regard to
their construction, safety, maintenance and removal on completion and the
equipment and appliances used in their execution shall remain vested in the
Contractor. Any approval by the Engineer of the Contractor's or any of his
Subcontractors' proposals in respect of Temporary Works shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
115 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
115-1: GUIDELINES
The following general requirements shall apply:
(a) The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting whenever work is being executed
at night and shall provide and install any additional lighting that the Engineer
may require in order to gain access to watch and supervise the Works and carry
out any testing and examination of materials.
(b) Materials available on the Site or materials made available or supplied by the
Employer shall be used solely for the execution of the Works.
(c) The Contractor shall ensure that existing access to all properties adjacent to the
Site is maintained for the duration of the Contract.
(d) The Contractor shall comply with the current Government regulations in respect
of the transport, storage and use of explosives and radioactive materials.
(e) The Contractor shall avoid the pollution of lands, roads and other places on and
around the Site and shall take all necessary measures to limit any nuisance or
disturbance arising from the execution of the Works. Such measures shall
whenever practicable suppress the nuisance at source rather than alleviate the
nuisance once generated. The execution of the works and all associated
operations shall be carried out in conformity with all statutory and regulatory
(including environmental) requirements in force in Mongolia. No trees or other

Section 100. General 1-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

vegetation shall be removed except to the extent necessary for the execution of
the Works, as agreed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall instruct the construction workers to protect natural
resources and fauna, including wild animals and aquatic life. Hunting and
unauthorized fishing should be prohibited and this should be ensured by the
Contractor.
(f) The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions:
(i) in connection with any rivers, streams, waterways, drains, watercourses,
lakes and the like to prevent silting by providing silt fence using geo-
textile or other methods with approval of the Engineer, flooding, erosion
of beds and banks and pollution of water so as not to affect adversely the
quality or appearance thereof or cause injury or death to human, animal
or plant life,
(ii) in connection with underground water resources (including percolating
water) to prevent any interference with the supply to or abstraction from
such sources and to prevent any pollution of water such as would
adversely affect the quality thereof.
(g) If any spoil debris or silt arising from the execution of the Works should be
deposited on any adjacent land the Contractor shall expeditiously and at his own
expense remove such material to an approved spoil area and restore the
affected area to its original state all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(h) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove on completion of the Works,
settling lagoons and other facilities to minimize pollution due to the Contractor's
operations including but not limited to dust suppression, quarrying, aggregate
washing, concrete mixing and grouting. The Contractor's proposals in these
respects shall comply with the requirements of Clause 114 of this Specification.
All waste water and other liquid waste products shall be disposed of in a manner
that shall not cause nuisance or pollution. The Contractor shall not discharge or
deposit any matter arising from the execution of the Works into any waters
except with the written consent of the Engineer and the regulatory authorities
concerned. In particular, all vehicles used for hauling water shall be fitted with
effective drip trays that prevent the spillage of any fuel or lubricants.
(i) The Contractor shall adopt methods of working that minimize the occurrence of
dust or other air-borne or gaseous emissions. The Contractor shall employ
effective water sprays in those situations where dust creation is likely. The
Engineer may instruct that stockpiles of material or debris be dampened prior to
their movement. All materials that in the opinion of the Engineer are likely to
create dust shall be transported in vehicles with properly fitting side and tall
boards. Such materials shall be loaded no higher than side and tail boards and
shall be covered with a clean, properly secured tarpaulin in good condition that
extends at least 300 mm beyond the edges of the side and tail boards.
(j) All existing roads used by vehicles of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors
or suppliers of materials or plant and similarly roads which are part of the Work
shall be kept clean of all dust/mud or other extraneous materials dropped by
such vehicles or their types.
(k) The fuel storage and vehicle cleaning areas shall be stationed at least 300 m
away from the nearest drain/water body.
(l) Hot asphalt mixing plant, concrete batching or mixing plant, stone crusher and
wet mix macadam mixing plant shall be located sufficiently away from the
habitation, agricultural operations and industrial establishment. Where possible

Section 100. General 1-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

such plants shall be located at least 1.0 km away from the nearest habitation.
(m) The Contractor shall observe the environmental requirements in force in
Mongolia pertaining to noise emission during the planning and execution of the
Works. The Contractor shall maintain all silencing equipment in good condition
and take all necessary measures to minimize noise emission during the
performance of the Works.
(n) In addition to the requirement of Sub-Clause 1.4 of the Conditions of Contract,
the Contractor shall be deemed to be fully conversant with the requirements of
all current laws, statutes, ordinances, bye-laws, rules, regulations or other
instruments of legal force in Mongolia, including but not limited to those in
respect of:
• addendum to the Specifications,
• the environment,
• health and safety,
• employment including expatriate personnel,
• training,
• taxes, duties, royalties and other levies,
• buildings temporary and permanent,
• temporary camps,
• temporary camps,
• sanitation and water supply.
(o) All buildings erected by the Contractor upon the Site and camp sites, and the
layout of the buildings and the sites, shall comply with laws of Mongolia and all
local bye-laws in so far as they are applicable, including, but not limited to, those
in respect of health and sanitation.
(p) Each structure made available for occupancy shall be of sound construction,
shall assure adequate protection against weather, and shall include essential
facilities to permit maintenance in a clean and operable condition. Comfort and
safety of occupants shall be provided for by adequate heating, lighting,
ventilation or insulation when necessary.
(q) The construction camps shall be located at least 200 to 500 m away from
habitations. The living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour shall be
erected and maintained to standards and scales to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
(r) All sites used for camps must not be subject to periodic flooding, nor located
within 75 m of swamps or other surface collections of water.
(s) The camps shall be located such that the drainage from and through the camps
will not endanger any domestic or public water supply.
(t) Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
location of suitable sources of natural materials for the execution of the Works,
whether such sources are on the Site or not, and for obtaining all necessary
permissions, including certificates of occupancy, quarry licenses and water
rights.
(u) If the Contractor should provide a radio communications network, around the
Site, he shall allow the Engineer reasonable use of those facilities. The
requirements for the provision of communications facilities for the sole use of the
Engineer are stated in Clause 131 of this Specification.

Section 100. General 1-20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(v) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove on completion of the Works,
all necessary fencing around the Site and provide appropriate security measures
but without prejudice to his other obligations including maintenance of free
access for the Employer, the Engineer, other contractors and any other persons
entitled to such access.
(w) The contractor shall be absolutely and solely responsible for the adequacy,
safety and security of Temporary Works and their removal when no longer
required, including, but not limited to:
• stores and yards,
• pilings,
• staging, gangways, ladders and scaffolding,
• formwork and falsework,
• dams, cofferdams and caissons,
• sheet piling, shoring and trenches,
• fencing,
• and other associated works,
and for the Contractor's equipment in connection therewith which may be
erected or provided for the carrying out of the Contact and for the execution of
the Works. This provision shall be applicable to all Temporary Works and
Contractor's equipment whenever provided and erected by the Contractor and/or
his Subcontractors for the purpose of the execution of or in connection with the
Works.
(x) Examination by the Engineer of the Contractor's and/or his Subcontractors'
Temporary Works or of the drawings connected therewith shall not absolve the
Contractor from any liabilities or obligations imposed upon him by the provisions
of the Contract.
(y) If the Contractor should temporarily close down his operation for seasonal or
other reasons he shall be responsible for maintaining all Site facilities throughout
the shutdown period such that they are ready for immediate use upon the
resumption of his operations. The Care of Works, pursuant to Sub-Clause 17.2
of the Conditions of Contract, shall remain vested in the Contractor during
shutdown periods.
(z) If fossils, coins, articles of archeological importance are found during the
Construction, then the Contractor shall immediately inform the Government of
Mongolia and the findings shall be the property of the Government of Mongolia
and shall be dealt with provisions of the relevant legislation. The Contractor shall
ensure that negative impacts are minimized to the cultural properties / religious
structures.
115-2: SETTING-OUT
(a) General
The Engineer shall provide sufficient survey information to enable the Contractor
to set out the Works and the Contractor shall be responsible for the setting-out
of all necessary reference points and for the maintenance thereof. Setting out
shall be considered as the essential work that follows the main works and
carried out at the Contractor’s expense and no separate payment shall be made.
The Contractor shall forthwith satisfy himself as to the accuracy in line, level and
dimension upon receipt of the basic survey information and any setting-out
details provided.

Section 100. General 1-21


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

If the Contractor discovers any error or discrepancy in survey information


provided by the Engineer, he shall immediately inform the Engineer. If the
information is confirmed to be in error, the Engineer shall issue amended
drawings or instructions in respect of the correction of the error.
Before commencing construction, the Contractor shall check primary survey
reference points, comprising benchmarks and horizontal control points (HIP,
start and end points of horizontal alignment etc.) connected to the Mongolian
national datum and geodetic coordinate system and accept them from
Consultant’s Survey Engineer. Primary survey reference points should be
located at intervals not exceeding 2 km along the alignment, mostly outside the
right-of-way and near HIPs. The Contractor shall further establish and fix
secondary benchmarks at intervals not exceeding 200 m along the road, at not
less than 50 m from the centerline and in elevated places as possible. Fixing
should be done as follows: 250x250x400 concrete block will be cast, in which
dia. 25 mm, 200 mm long steel pole shall be fixed. 25 mm of the pole length
shall be above the ground from the top surface of the block. After the concrete
has been hardened, the block shall be fixed into hard soil at the point of
secondary bench marks and the earth around the block shall be compacted. The
top edge of the block should be at the same level as ground level and the
number of the block shall be clearly written on the top surface with a indelible
paint. 200 mm deep channel shall be dug on all sides of the block at 0,5 m from
the block. The earth cut from the channel shall be heaped outside the channel.
In one of the corners of the channel, a steel or wooden peg shall be driven into
the ground, 400-500 mm above the ground. After fixing the secondary
benchmarks, their levels shall be established by connecting them to the primary
survey reference points.
All such reference points, bench marks and horizontal control points shall be of a
type acceptable to the Engineer and shall be maintained by the Contractor until
the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate pursuant to Sub-Clause 10.1 of the
Conditions of Contract and Clause 107 of this Specification for each road section
concerned. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a schedule of the
location, level and coordinates of all reference points, bench marks and
horizontal control points and shall ensure that the Engineer is at all times
provided with up to date survey information.
The Contractor shall not remove, damage, alter or destroy plot beacons or
national survey beacons. Should the Contractor consider that any beacon will be
interfered with by the Works he shall notify the Engineer who shall make the
necessary arrangements with the appropriate authorities for the removal and
relocation of the beacon. If the Contractor removes or disturbs any beacon
without prior instruction from the Engineer, the Contractor shall be liable for the
full costs of its replacement and any ensuing delays to the Contractor's program.
Any additional setting-out required as a result of erroneous survey work on the
part of the Contractor and any abortive works executed arising therefrom shall
be rectified at the expense of the Contractor.
(b) Detailed setting-out
After accepting the benchmarks and horizontal control points, the Contractor
shall check their coordinates and levels in detail and submit the results to the
Engineer for approval. After that levels of secondary benchmarks fixed along
the road shall be connected to the levels of primary survey points and the results
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Along with the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall set out the
line and level of the Works as shown in the Drawings (taking into account any

Section 100. General 1-22


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

revisions thereto as instructed by the Engineer) at intervals of not more than 20


m or such lesser intervals as are required to construct the Works to the
tolerances specified in Sub-Clause115-3 of this Specification.
After setting-out, the Contractor shall check intervals between chainages and
additional survey points, ground levels in detail along the centerline and take a
longitudinal section and cross-sections over the full roadway width. Similarly the
Contractor shall take a longitudinal section and cross-sections along the
centerlines of all existing and proposed culverts and structures. When fixing
ground level along the centerline of the proposed bridges and culverts, the
Contractor shall carry out the survey to the limit and distance from the centerline
of the road, specified by the Engineer.
Reference pegs and rails, clearly and indelibly marked with all relevant
information (such as number, location and levels etc.), shall be provided
perpendicular to the centreline, in such a manner that cut and fill slopes and
pavement layer levels can be directly comprehended at any time. These shall
be maintained by the Contractor for as long as they are needed to check and
monitor the Works.
After completion of the site clearance, the Contractor shall fix 50 x 50 x 1200
mm long timber reference pegs, 400 mm firmly into the ground at 0,5-0,8 m from
the each border of the area, from which the top-soil was removed. The interval
between reference points fixed along the centerline shall not be more than 20 m.
The part above the ground level shall be painted with white. The offset from the
centerline shall be indicated by a 25 mm long nail with its head driven flush with
the top of the peg. Chainage and offset distance shall be clearly and indelibly
indicated on the sides of the peg to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All setting
out shall be maintained, rectified and repainted as necessary by the Contractor
such that they are kept in a clear and legible condition during the required
period.
The surveys should be done using total station survey instruments and data to
be compiled in digital medium according to format and standards of accuracy
approved by the Engineer. Cross-sections shall be plotted to a natural scale of
1:200 utilizing a suitable computer program and plotter and a draft copy of the
plot (along with digital soft copy) shall be submitted to the Engineer for
agreement. Longitudinal sections shall be plotted to a scale of 1:2,000 horizontal
and 1:200 vertical. The centerline of the alignment shall be plotted to a scale of
1:2000 horizontal. The Contractor shall make any amendments as necessary
after the cross-sections have been agreed.
The Engineer shall issue final road, culvert and structure position and levels not
more than 28 days after receiving the amended agreed cross-sections and other
drawings from the Contractor. Those cross-sections shall be submitted for a
minimum length of road of 5 km at any one time. The usual length of road for
submission of cross-sections shall be 10 km. If the Contractor submits cross-
sections for more than 10 km of road within any 28 day period then the initial 28
day period for issuance of final levels by the Engineer shall be extended by 28
days for each additional 10 km or part thereof. The final road, culvert or
structure levels instructed by the Engineer may be different from those levels
shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken the
requirements of this Clause into consideration for the submission of his bid and
preparation of his program pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of condition of contract or
any subsequent program.
On receipt of the final road, culvert and structure levels, the Contractor shall
enter the revised data in the program and the revised cross-sections shall be

Section 100. General 1-23


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

plotted. An original plot and one copy of those cross-sections shall be provided
free of charge by the Contractor to the Engineer.
Formation level is defined as the level of the interface between the top of the
non-frost subgrade and the bottom of the pavement layers. Before the finishing
of the formation layer and prior to the construction of pavement layers, the
Contractor shall establish steel pins at a constant offset to the edges of the
carriageway shoulders. The offset may be changed due to the conditions in cut
and fill areas, in which case pins will be established at the offset approved by the
Engineer. Height of the pin above the fill surface shall not be less than 1 m. The
steel pins shall be clearly and indelibly marked with all the relevant information
necessary to directly establish the centreline and level at any point across the
carriageway. The interval between pins shall be no greater than 20 m and the
pins shall be maintained by the Contractor until the Engineer no longer requires
them to check the work and authorizes their removal.
115-3 PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC
The project road alignment consist of new alignment sections, but in some stretches
it runs parallel to unformed tracks carrying traffic. All existing unformed tracks
carrying traffic (including deviations and branch roads) running parallel to or
interfering with project road and traffic of which may have impact on the construction
activities, shall be maintained at all times during the construction (including during
winter breaks in construction) in good trafficable condition allowing vehicles to travel
at minimum 50 km/hr speed in flat and steppe terrain and minimum 30 km/hr speed
in mountainous terrain. The locations of the existing road stretches are shown in the
Drawings.
From the date of commencement of the Contract to the date of issue of Taking-Over
Certificate for the whole of Works as provided in the Contract the Contractor shall
bear the full responsibility in maintaining the public and vehicular passage along the
Contract road.
Where public traffic using an existing unformed track is affected by the likely to be
subjected to obstruction or inconvenience due to improvement construction or
reconstruction or new construction of the road, and, where shown on the Drawings
or instructed by the Engineer to do so, the Contractor shall carry out necessary
measures in maintaining the traffickabilty and riding comfort of the tracks taking into
account the nature of the obstruction caused by construction activities.
Where traffic cannot be routed along a deviation due to local constraints (such as
steep mountains, water bodies adjoining the road etc.), the Engineer may allow the
Contractor to pass traffic through or over the Works, on being satisfied about the
necessity thereof and the Contractor’s arrangement for keeping the traffic flowing
without damaging the construction in progress. .
The Contractor shall also provide and maintain temporary signs, barriers and lights
along deviations and existing tracks adjacent to the works and shall ensure the safe
passage of traffic during the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all access and haul roads and ensure
access to all parts of the site for his equipment labour and materials.
The Contractor shall protect the Works and adjacent public roads from the effects of
his own construction traffic.
i) Maintenance of Existing Roads/Tracks
The Contractor shall maintain the existing tracks within the limits of the Contract in a
safe and trafficable condition as instructed by the Engineer or shown on the

Section 100. General 1-24


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Drawings from the commencement of the Contract until the adjacent (parallel)
section of new road, or deviation where applicable, is opened to public traffic.
Existing tracks shall be maintained in a fair trafficable condition. to the same standard
as existed at the commencement of the Contract. Maintenance shall include, but not
be limited to:
x filling ruts and holes on earth truck,
x grading,
x watering,
x providing with access to project road if tracks are interfere with project
alignment,
x cutting, re-shaping and deepening side drains and mitre drains, ensuring the
unimpeded flow of water in drainage channels and watercourses,
x providing, erecting and maintaining temporary traffic signs, barriers and lights,
x assistance to public traffic.
ii) Construction of Deviations and Maintenance
(a) General
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall construct, operate and maintain deviations in accordance with this
Specification.
The existing road shall be used to provide passage to bypass public traffic
around the Works wherever to the extent and for the duration of time possible.
The Contractor shall construct deviations only along those parts of the existing
road under construction and closed to traffic for that reasons. Traffic shall pass
over the existing road in adjacent segments. Deviations in those areas where
construction has been completed shall be promptly reinstated.
Deviations shall follow the shortest practicable route, taking into consideration
gradients and obstructions, and their alignment shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, in accordance with Clause 114 of this Specification, submit
to the Engineer detailed drawings showing his proposed arrangements in
respect of passing public traffic over and around the Works and the construction
of deviations. These proposals shall include but not be limited to details and
locations of:
x the extent and alignment of deviations,
x cross-overs,
x two-lane lane traffic operations,
x restricted widths,
x drainage channels,
x protection from snow and sand heaping
x culverts,
x gradients in excess of 7%,
x earthworks,
x surfacing,

Section 100. General 1-25


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x dust prevention measures,


x signs, barriers, lights and traffic lights,
The Contractor shall give at least 28 days written notice of his intention to
commence construction of deviations along any Section of the Works during
which time his proposed arrangements in respect of passing public traffic over
and around the Works and the construction of deviations shall be finalized in
consultation with the Engineer.
Upon receipt of the written approval by the Engineer of those proposals the
Contractor shall assume liability for the safe passage of traffic and any
associated maintenance obligations through any deviations and throughout the
Works in that Section.
In respect of the construction of deviations the Contractor shall be responsible
for and held liable for any costs arising from:
x arrangements and payment for the obtaining acquisition of land outside the
road reserve (if any required),
x negotiations with the land owner, occupiers and appropriate Authorities,
x diversion of services including telephone lines, power lines, water pipes and
the like,
x compensation.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the protection of telephone poles,
power poles or other services which are located outside but adjacent to liable to
be disturbed due to the deviations. The Contractor shall comply with the
requirements of Clause 120 of this Specification and the relevant Authority or
owner in respect of the type of protection required and methods of removing or
replacing stay wires, propping poles and so forth.
Where services cross deviations the Contractor shall protect such services and
shall comply with all the requirements of Clause 120 of this Specification and the
relevant Authority or owner in respect of the method of protection. Where they
are required to be moved, the diversion of services shall be in accordance with
Clause 121 of this Specification.
(b) Geometry
Deviations shall be constructed to the cross-section shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer. The carriageway width of deviations shall be 7 m with
2 lanes unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Single-lane traffic operation shall not be permitted unless in the opinion of the
Engineer, it is impracticable to provide a two-lane deviation. A single-lane
carriageway shall not be less than 4.0 m wide with traffic control and passing
bays provided at approximately 250 metre intervals.
The gradient of any deviation shall not exceed 7% except with the approval of
the Engineer. Any change of gradient shall be formed to a smooth vertical curve
with a length of not less than 60 m.
(c) Construction
Site clearance and any necessary earthworks shall be carried out in accordance
with Sections 400 and 500 of this Specification. Generally deviations will
comprise graded tracks with minimal earthworks and gravel surfacing, if required
by the Engineer, including providing and erecting temporary traffic signs, barriers
and lights and drainage structures. Measurement and payment shall be in
accordance with Clause 910 of this Specification.

Section 100. General 1-26


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(d) Drainage and drifts


During the construction of deviations, the Contractor shall ensure that the
drainage of watercourses crossing the line of deviations remains unimpeded.
Temporary ditches, culverts, drifts and bridges of adequate size and strength
shall be constructed for deviations where considered necessary by the Engineer.
The length of drifts shall be determined after site inspection and due consultation
with the Engineer and in such manner that the water flow is spread out as far as
possible in order to prevent damages to existing trucks, deviations or new road
due to water course. The depth of drifts should not less than 0.6m, and earth
from the drifts shall be stockpiled on the edge of drifts on the road side. If during
construction works the flood water overflows the earth piles, the Contractor shall
deepen the drift and raise the height of piles.
(e) Reinstatement of deviations
Prior to the commencement of construction of, or the use of land provided for,
any deviation the Contractor shall supply to the engineer 1 no. 90 mm by 125
mm colour print of each of a series of photographs taken at a maximum interval
of 500 m along the line of the deviation. The Contractor shall only commence the
construction of any deviation upon written confirmation by the Engineer that
those prints represent a true record of the existing condition of the land.
The Contractor shall reinstate the land provided for deviations to a condition
similar to that prevailing prior to the commencement of construction.
Photographic records may be used by the Engineer to determine if the
reinstatement of deviations has been satisfactorily carried out.
(f) Maintenance of deviations
The Contractor shall maintain deviations constructed as per this Specification to
ensure uninterrupted free flow of traffic and to the standards required for
approval by the Engineer at the time of opening deviations to traffic. Deviations
shall be maintained for the period from the date of opening to traffic until the
adjacent section of new road is opened to public traffic.
Maintenance of deviations shall include but not be limited to:
x watering,
x full width grading,
x re-shaping and compacting,
x ensuring the unimpeded flow of water in drainage channels, watercourses
and culverts,
x minor repairs to culverts and bridges,
x signs, barriers, lights and traffic lights,
x assistance to public traffic.
iii) Passage of Traffic Through the Works
In general, passage of traffic other than Engineer’s vehicles and Contractor’s
construction equipment, through the Works shall be prohibited.
Where it is proposed by the Contractor and agreed shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer that traffic is to be passed through, over or across the
Works, the Contractor shall order his work in half widths or in short lengths to
facilitate the safe passage of traffic.

Section 100. General 1-27


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The frequency and duration of delays to traffic whilst passing through, over or across
the Works, shall be kept to a minimum. Delays shall not exceed 30 minutes without
prior agreement of the Engineer and should normally be less than 5 minutes. If any
proposed method of working should require an anticipated road closure in excess of
30 minutes, the Contractor shall give the Engineer 48 hours prior written notice. In
default of such notice, the Engineer may refuse to allow such closure or may require
such closure to be rescheduled.
Where traffic passes through, over or across the Works, the Constructor shall ensure
that excavations and other hazards are protected with barriers and are clearly
illuminated at night.
Any damage caused to the Works by the passage of public traffic through, over or
across the Works shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor.
iv) Signs, Barriers and Lights
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain temporary signs, barriers, lights and
traffic lights along existing roads shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer and along deviations constructed.
The construction of all warning signs, regulatory signs, prohibitory signs, mandatory
signs and priority signs used for temporary signing shall comply with the
requirements of the Mongolian Standard MNS 4597-98 or as directed by the
Engineer.
All temporary signs shall be of a type approved by the Engineer. Signs shall be kept
clean and maintained in a good condition.
The Contractor shall prepare a traffic control plan at a suitable scale for the direction
and control of traffic. The plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval at
least 14 days prior to the commencement of any Works affecting traffic. The plan
shall take into consideration the relocation and updating of traffic control measures as
construction progresses.
Where single lane traffic operation is necessary the Contractor shall provide maintain
and operate traffic lights. The use of "Stop" and "Go" boards provided, maintained
and operated by the Contractor shall be permitted between 06:30 hours and 18:30
hours in lieu of traffic lights. Traffic lights shall be used at all other hours. The use of
flags in lieu of either "Stop" and "Go" boards or traffic lights shall not be permitted.
Fences and barriers shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be
kept clean and maintained in good condition. Barriers shall be painted with in red and
white stripes and shall be provided with strips of retroreflective film or provided with
alternating red and white reflectors.
Barriers, other hazards and entrances to detours and deviations and single lane
traffic operations shall be illuminated throughout the night by red lamps or amber
flashing lights provided by the Contractor and supported at a height of between 0.7 m
and 1.35 m above the existing road surface. The Contractor shall provide night
watchmen at such locations to ensure the proper bright and continuous operations of
all such lights and deter interference to them by vandals or thieves.
v) Closure or Diversion of Existing Roads
Where, as a result of the Works, an existing tracks is to be permanently closed, or
temporarily diverted or re-opened to public traffic, the Contractor shall give the
Engineer at least 28 days written notice. The Engineer may negotiate with the
appropriate Authority or owner in respect the method, order and time for the
execution of the work and shall issue instructions to the Contractor accordingly.
Where the amount of work involved is small, the Engineer may instruct the

Section 100. General 1-28


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Contractor to make his own arrangements with the appropriate Authority or owner. In
all cases, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s instructions and no road shall be
interfered with in any way until the appropriate Authority's or owner's consent to the
work has been obtained.
vi) Assistance To The Public
The Contractor shall render such assistance to the public as shall be necessary to
allow the safe and convenient passage of traffic at all times.
(a) Access to the Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining, at his own
expense, access to all parts of the Site for his equipment, labour and materials
and local public traffic where no alternative access is available. Where there is
no existing access to or along the new alignment, the Contractor shall construct
and maintain his own access and haul roads as required, all at his own expense.
All such accesses shall be made available for the use of the Employer and the
Engineer.
(b) Public highways
Where the Contractor proposes to use an existing public highway as an access
to a borrow area or as a haulage road for the construction of the Works and his
anticipated construction traffic is such that may give rise to a subsequent claim
for damage caused by extraordinary traffic pursuant to Sub-Clause 4.15 of the
Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 28 days
notice of his intention to use such a road.
The Engineer may call for joint inspections of such roads by the appropriate
Highway Authority, the Contractor and the Engineer, to agree upon a statement
of the existing condition of the road prior to its use by the Contractor and to
determine the extent of any remedial works required upon completion of the
Works.
Where the existing highway is inadequate to withstand the volume and weight of
the Contractor's traffic, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor:
(i) to improve the road,
(ii) to construct a temporary road in lieu, or,
(iii) to use an alternative route.
(c) Private roads
Where the Contractor proposes to use a private road as an access or haul road
he shall comply with any conditions laid down by the owner. The Employer shall
not be held liable for and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all
claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses arising from such
arrangements.
(d) New access roads
Access roads to quarries and stockpile, borrow and spoil areas shall follow the
shortest practicable routes between them and the nearest point on the new
alignment. The alignment of access roads shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Access road shall be provided with drainage channels and culverts of
adequate size and strength. The free drainage of existing water courses shall be
maintained.
The location and layout of junctions of access roads with existing roads shall be
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall comply with the

Section 100. General 1-29


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Engineers instructions in respect of clearance of obstructions, provision of


adequate sight lines, temporary culverts and drainage and the provision of signs
and traffic control.
(e) Reinstatement of access roads
The Contractor shall reinstate all access roads in the same manner as that
specified for the reinstatement of deviations.
(f) Costs
The Contractor shall be wholly liable for all financial arrangements associated
with the construction of access roads and for all costs arising out of them
including, but not limited to:
• all land acquisition arrangements,
• payment for land acquisition,
• negotiation with the land owner, occupiers and appropriate Authorities,
• diversion of services including telephone lines, power lines, water pipes
and the like,
• compensation.
vii) Contractor's Construction Traffic
(a) Use of new road under construction
The Contractor shall not use completed the subgrade and pavement layers
under construction for the plying of construction equipment or trucks carrying
construction materials. For this purpose, subgrade and pavement layers shall be
treated under construction till the pavement construction has been completed
upto the surfacing stage. A completed section of the pavement shall not be used
for the plying of the Contractor’s construction equipment and sections of the new
road of any completed pavement or surfacing layer for hauling earthworks,
pavement or other materials with earth-moving equipment or vehicles having
axle loads exceeding 10 tonnes. The use by the Contractor of completed
sections of the road or completed pavement layers shall be prohibited when, in
the opinion of the Engineer, damage to structures, the subgrade, the formation,
pavement layers or surfacing could ensue.
Any damage to the completed formation, completed pavement layer or surfacing
layer caused by any of the Contractor's vehicles, regardless of their axle loading,
shall be repaired as instructed by the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor plying of vehicles shall not operate vehicles with axle loads
exceeding 10 tonnes on any public road in Mongolia shall be in conformity with
the laws and regulations in Mongolia governing the plying of vehicles on public
roads.
116 PROTECTION FROM WATER, SNOW, ICE AND SAND
Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for dealing
with water, snow and ice whether from existing drainage systems, water courses,
underground springs, precipitation or any other source or cause. In discharging and
diverting water he shall avoid flooding or damaging other works or services, causing
erosion or polluting water courses.
The Contractor shall keep the whole of the works free from water, snow and, ice and
shall provide all dams, cofferdams, pumping, piling, shoring, temporary drains,
sumps, snow ploughs, etc. necessary for that purpose.
Well in advance of commencing the Permanent Works the Contractor shall at his
own expense cut drains and ditches and carry out any other measures necessary to

Section 100. General 1-30


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

effectively render the original ground free from water, snow or ice. The Contractor
shall at his own expense take all necessary precautions to prevent damage due
to erosion, siltation and protect the structures already constructed from being
heaped by sand during construction. Such precautions shall include, but not be
limited to, temporary drainage berms, scour checks, riprap and the like. Spoil
material or stockpile material shall be dumped so as not to interfere with streams,
watercourses or any of the drainage works detailed by the Engineer. Any damage to
the Works or to adjacent properties resulting from the Contractor's failure to take
such necessary precautions shall be made good at his own expense.
On cessation of the works each day the surface of each completed layer shall be
trimmed such that the potentiality for ponding and concentration of surface run-off is
eliminated. Should any water accumulate on any part of the Works either during
construction or thereafter until the expiration of the Defects Liability Period, giving
rise to soaking or eroding conditions, the Contractor shall remove and replace at the
Contractor’s expense, if so instructed by the Engineer, any material or Works that
have been so affected.
Trees shall be planted along the road in some stretches to protect it from snow and
sand.
Any Temporary Works proposed by the Contractor pursuant to this Clause shall be
subject to the provisions of Clause 114 of the Specification.

117 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ACCIDENTS


The Contractor shall take all measures and precautions necessary to ensure the
health, safety and welfare of all persons entitled to be on the Site. Such precautions
shall include those required according to Mongolian national or regional regulations
and also those that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are reasonable to prevent
unauthorized entry upon the Site and to protect members of the public from any
activities under the control of the Contractor. The Contractor's responsibilities shall
include but not be limited to:
(a) The provision and maintenance of the Contractor's equipment in a safe working
condition and the adoption of methods of work that are safe and without risks to
the health of any person entitled to be on the Site.
(b) The execution of suitable arrangements for ensuring safety and absence of risks
to health in connection with the use, handling, storage, transport and disposal of
articles and substances.
(c) The provision of lighting, including standby facilities in the event of failure, that,
in the opinion of the Engineer, is adequate to ensure the safe execution of any
Works that are to be carried out at night.
(d) The provision of protective clothing and safety equipment, with such personnel
and equipment and such information, instruction, training and supervision as are
necessary to ensure the health and safety at work of all persons employed on or
entering on the Site in connection with the Works including the Engineer’s
supervisory staff, all in accordance with the laws of Mongolia.
(e) Such safety equipment shall include but not be limited to:
• safety helmets,
• protective footwear,
• safety glasses, welding goggles and other eye protectors,
• ear defenders,
• safety harnesses,

Section 100. General 1-31


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• high visibility reflective vests,


• safety equipment for working over water,
• rescue equipment,
• fire extinguishers. '
(f) Safety helmets and footwear with integral steel toe-caps shall be worn by all
personnel on Site.
(g) The provision and maintenance of suitably equipped and staffed first aid stations
throughout the extent of the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall allow in his prices and be responsible for the costs of all such
Site welfare arrangements and requirements.
(h) Adequate transport facilities for moving the injured persons to the nearest
hospital shall also be provided in ready move condition.
(i) Designation as Safety Officer of one of his senior staff who shall have
responsibility for all matters concerning health and safety, under the overall
control of the Project Manager. The Safety Officer shall be senior member of the
Contractor’s professional team reporting directly to the Contractor's Project
Manager He shall have specific knowledge of all pertinent safety regulations
and legislation in force in Mongolia and prior responsibility for health and safety
on similar Sites. The Safety Officer shall participate in all matters affecting the
safety of the work force and on measures to be taken to promote such safety.
He shall be authorized to receive instructions from the Engineer or from
Mongolian Government authority and act upon such instructions in respect of
the health and safety of personnel on Site and the safe execution of the Works.
(j) The provision and maintenance of access to all places on the Site in a condition
that is safe and without risk of injury.
(k) Adequate waterborne sanitation, refuse collection and disposal systems shall be
designed, built and operated so that no health hazard occurs and no pollution to
the air, ground or adjacent watercourse takes place, complying with the laws of
Mongolia and all local bye-laws and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for all
houses, offices, workshops, laboratories, Inspection huts, stores, workshops and
labour lines erected on the Site.
(l) Garbage bins shall be provided in the camps and regularly emptied and the
garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner complying to the relevant norms.
(m) On completion of the Works, all such temporary structures shall be cleared
away, all rubbish burnt, excreta tank and other disposal pits or trenches filled in
and effectively sealed off and the outline site left clean and tidy, at the
Contractor’s expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
(n) The provision of an adequate number of suitable latrines and other sanitary
arrangements at locations where work is in progress and ensure that they are
regularly cleaned and maintained in a hygienic state all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and of the public health authorities for the area.
(o) Where the toilet rooms are shared, such as in multifamily shelters and in
barracks type facilities, separated toilet rooms must be provided for each sex.
These rooms must be distinctly marked ‘for men’ and ‘for women’ by signs
printed in English and in the native language of the persons occupying the
camp, or marked with easily understood pictures or symbols. If the facilities for
each sex are in the same building, they must be separated by solid walls or
partitions extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling.

Section 100. General 1-32


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(p) In consultation with the appropriate public health authority, necessary measures
to be taken to control mosquitoes, flies, pests and vermin within the Site,
including labour lines and camp sites. Such measures shall include the
application of suitable pesticides and chemicals to infested area.
(q) Immediately notifying the Engineer of any serious accidents which result in
death, severe injury to or hospitalization of persons for a period exceeding three
days. Although such information may initially be conveyed orally the Contractor
shall submit a detailed written report within 24 hours of the event. The
Contractor shall comply with any requirements in respect of reporting such
serious accidents to the statutory authorities.
(r) Recording details of and reporting any other accident or incident concerning
health, safety and welfare or damage to property to the Engineer and to the
statutory authorities, as appropriate, as soon as possible after its occurrence in
such a format as the Engineer may require.
(s) If the Contractor should temporarily close down his operations for seasonal or
other reasons he shall ensure that the Works are left in a safe condition. He
shall appoint one member of his project management team, acceptable to the
Engineer, to be responsible for the safety of the works throughout the
shutdown period and shall notify the Engineer of the name and contact
telephone number of the responsible person.
(t) The Contractor, his employees, his Subcontractors, their employees and any
other persons authorized by him to be on the Site shall comply in every respect
with the provisions of any statutory requirements as may be applicable to the
Works in respect of health, safety and welfare.
(u) The provisions of this Clause shall apply to the Contractor and, with the
necessary changes, to his Subcontractors. The Contractor shall ensure that
these provisions are included in all subcontracts placed by him.
118 PRESERVATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FENCES AND GATES
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the safety of all persons and
property on the Site and for ensuring that livestock cannot stray as a result of his
work. When existing fences and gates have to be removed or altered for the proper
execution of the Works, the Contractor shall erect temporary fencing and gates and,
if required, provide watchmen to ensure that livestock cannot stray provided always
that such fences or gates have not been the subject of a negotiated agreement for
compensation whereby the owner or tenant has been made responsible for such
removal or alternation.
The Contractor shall discipline his employees to ensure that no fences or gates, with
the exception of those required to be removed or altered for the proper execution of
the Works, are damaged during the currency of the Contract and that no gates are
left open that may allow livestock to stray.
119 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
The Contractor shall keep in his site office the copies of State laws applying to the
supply, transportation, handling, storage and usage of explosives and shall supply
one copy of each of those State laws to the Engineer. The Contractor shall also
submit to the Engineer a copy of any instructions or notices that the Contractor may
issue to his staff or workers or post about the Site in compliance with such State
laws.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of the explosives that he
proposes to use and of his proposals for their storage on and transportation to the
Site.

Section 100. General 1-33


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Explosives shall be used in accordance with the related laws and regulations of
Mongolia.
The Contractor shall use explosives for blasting in connection with the Works only at
such times and places and in such a manner as the Engineer may approve and in
compliance with the License for blasting works always provided that such approval
shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for injury, loss, inconvenience
and annoyance to persons, damage to the Works and adjoining or adjacent
structures, roads, places and things consequent on the use of such explosives.
The Contractor shall be entirely liable for any accident that may occur and shall save
the Employer harmless and indemnified from all claims arising there from. Where the
possibility exists of loss, inconvenience, injury or accident to persons, animals,
works, property, places or objects the Engineer shall have the authority to regulate or
proscribe the use of explosives and, in the event of such regulation or proscription
the Contractor shall have no claim against the Employer.
The Contractor shall give warning each time of his intention to blast and shall station
personnel on the roads and elsewhere with flags, horns and whistles and prevent
persons, animals and traffic entering or remaining within the danger zone. He shall
arrange for control of traffic on main roads by the local police and traffic police of
Mongolia during all blasting operations within 400 m of such main roads.
The Contractor’s supervisor in charge of blasting operations shall have a current
license held valid by the concerned Authorities of Mongolia for all types of blasting
required including restricted blasting, and the license shall be made available to the
Engineer for verification.
The Contractor shall provide proper buildings in suitable locations for the storage of
explosives to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any statutory regulations in force in
Mongolia. Such storage locations shall be clearly marked with “Danger Explosives”
sign in bold script in all languages normally spoken on Site.
The Contractor shall take all proper precautions and comply with all laws or other
statutory regulations governing the handling and use of explosives including the
display on Site of warning notices explaining the procedure to be used in blasting
operations, such notices to be displayed in all languages normally spoken by the
personnel working on Site.
The Contractor shall select the number, position, orientation, depth and spacing of
holes for blasting, the amount and type of explosive to be used per hole and the
number and sequence of delays such that fracturing or otherwise damaging the
ground below or beyond the required excavation limits is avoided. Final holes shall
stop short of the final limits of excavation by the amount required to ensure that, after
detonation and the removal of all loose material, the final surface is in the correct
position.
In areas where it is necessary to restrict blasting in order to protect installations of
significance or whenever he wishes to blast within 400 m of any public road, railway
line, overhead power line or telephone line, the contractor shall:
(a) inform the authority concerned of his intention to carry out blasting within the
vicinity of their property and ensure that all conditions imposed by them,
including attendance by the representatives of such authority, are met,
(b) provide cover to the area to be blasted or use other means, to the approval of
the Engineer and the authority concerned, to prevent damage by flying debris to
such services,
(c) ensure, by the use of controlled delayed detonations or by limiting the amount

Section 100. General 1-34


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

of charge used at any blasting site, that the peak particle velocity at any existing
building, structure or service does not exceed 50 m/s,
(d) provide a suitable vibrometer and, whenever called upon to do so by the
Engineer, demonstrate by the use of this instrument that the charges he
proposes to use comply with this Specification.
Neither the Contractor’s compliance with these restrictions nor any approval given by
the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities or responsibilities in
respect of any damage to any building, structure or service resulting from his use of
explosives.
Notwithstanding all of the above, the Contractor shall cease blasting and continue
excavation in rock by barring, wedging or other approved methods, whenever called
upon to do so by the Engineer.
If firing is to be done electrically, all precautions shall be taken to prevent premature
detonations. If blasting is to be carried out in the vicinity of overhead electrical power
cables the licensed supervisor shall check for stray electric currents at the blasting
site prior to laying charges.
All personnel other than the licensed supervisor and one skilled person shall
withdraw to a safe distance before firing wires are connected to the firing cable. The
connection of the firing cable to the firing battery shall be the last operation. No
charging of firing shall be permitted when there are electrical storms or audible
thunder claps in the vicinity of the blasting site.
After blasting no person shall approach the danger zone until the blasting site has
been examined by the licensed supervisor or other responsible person and, in the
case of misfires, before the proper precautions have been taken.
The Contractor shall keep records of all blasting carried out showing the time and
location of each blast, the type and amount of explosives used and any other
relevant data. Copies of these records shall be sent to the Engineer weekly relating
to the previous week’s work.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his rates for items covering
excavation for the supply of all explosives including, but not limited to, their
transportation, storage, handling, supervision and compliance with requirements of
this Clause of the Specification.
120 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORKS AND SERVICES
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any injury to existing works, utilities or
services (hereinafter referred to as services) , and shall indemnify the Employer
against any claims in this respect including consequential damages. The Contractor
shall be wholly responsible at his own cost for the reinstatement of any services so
affected.
Before commencing any excavation or other work in the vicinity of existing services
or likely to affect otherwise such services, the Contractor shall notify the concerned
authority owning and/or operating such services and shall obtain clearance from that
authority for the Contractor’s work plan for protection and/or reinstatement of such
services before proceeding with the works, under intimation to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the precise location and pertinent
details of all existing services including but not limited to:
x sewers,
x surface water drains,
x cables for electricity telephone and lighting,

Section 100. General 1-35


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x pylons poles and ducts for cables,


x water mains,
x heating water mains.
In those cases where such services are buried, the Contractor shall obtain
information about the location and depths of such services from the owning authority.
The Contractor shall carry out further investigations by means of hand-dug trial holes
and trenches supplemented by electronic or electromagnetic equipment as
appropriate. The identification of each service so exposed shall be confirmed in
consultation with the Engineer and the authority concerned.
Every service at risk shall be fully exposed and such excavations shall be properly
shored. Exposed services shall be fully protected and supported in-place prior to the
commencement of construction in the vicinity. Installations adjacent to the Works,
shall be kept securely in-place until the work is completed and shall then be restored
to a safe and permanent condition.
Upon completion of such construction special care must be exercised in filling and
compacting the ground under mains, cable, etc., and to leave any water meters,
stopcock boxes, manhole covers and similar items accessible. The excavation,
refilling and re-installation (where required) shall be done in accordance with
applicable regulations and under the direction of the owning authority. Wherever the
execution of the Works requires a change in the final level of the road surface, the
level of all affected valve covers, manholes, inspection covers and the like and their
frames shall be altered to suit in a manner subject to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of any services discovered on
the Site that are not shown on the Drawings. If, in the opinion of the Engineer,
damage to services may occur as a result of the Contractor’s operations, the
Contractor shall carry out any measures that the Engineer may instruct to prevent
such damage.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons working in the vicinity of overhead power
lines are aware of the relatively large distance that high voltage electricity can “short”
to earth from such power lines to cranes, or other large masses of steel. Table 1-1
and 1-2 below recommend various safe clearances for high voltage transmission
lines and lower voltage distribution lines. Notwithstanding those recommendations,
the Contractor shall ascertain for himself the safe clearances to be maintained from
power cables of various rated voltages in consultation with the operating authority.
The cost of any safety precautions or which shall be deemed necessary due to the
proximity of the Works to power lines shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
Table 1-1: Recommended Clearances Beneath High Voltage Transmission
Lines

Voltage kV Recommended Clearance


138 7.8 m
230 8.4 m
345 9.4 m
500 10.0 m

Table 1-2: Recommended Clearances Beneath Lower Voltage Distribution


Lines

Voltage V Recommended Clearance

Section 100. General 1-36


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

0 – 750 1m
750 – 38,000 1m
38,000 – 86,000 1.5 m

Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, and without reducing the Contractor’s


responsibility or liability, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately if any
existing works or services are exposed, located or damaged.
The contractor shall make alternative temporary provision for any disrupted public,
private or agricultural access for their vehicular, pedestrian or livestock.
All costs that may be incurred by the Contractor as a result of programming and
coordinating work to enable any alterations to the services to be carried out shall be
at the Contractor’s expense.
121 DIVERSION OF SERVICES
Notwithstanding any locations and details of services shown on the Drawings, the
Contractor shall make such further inquiries and investigations as may be required to
confirm and supplement the information given.
When preparing his Program pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of
Contract and in accordance with the requirements of Clause 104 of this Specification
the Contractor shall take into account the time required to identify, locate, access,
protect, support and divert any existing services, as defined in Clause 120 of this
Specification, in the vicinity of the Works including any necessary periods of notice
required by the appropriate authorities to effect such work.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for liaison with the appropriate authority as
soon as the need to move or alter an existing service is identified. If the Contractor
requires any Governmental facilitation in this matter through the Employer, the
requirement in this regard shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer.
122 LIAISON WITH GOVERNMENT
The Contractor shall consult with officials of the local Governments, railway, police
and other Government bodies pertaining to the control of traffic and other matters
concerning the execution of the Works and shall provide all assistance or facilities
that may be required by such officials in the execution of their duties in these
respects.
123 PROVISION OF LAND
The Government shall make available free of charge to the Contractor land on which
the Permanent Works are to be executed or carried out as indicated on the Drawings
or as detailed in this Specification. Such land shall be limited to the actual land area
on which construction will be done, including space reasonably required for operating
movable construction equipment. The acquisition of all land required for borrow,
stockpile and spoil areas and quarries as defined in Clause 302 of this Specification
and access roads thereto and land for deviations outside the road reserve, the Site
laboratories, the Engineer’s offices, houses, Inspection huts and land required by the
Contractor for his own camps, offices, stores, workshops, houses, Temporary Works
or any other purpose shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
The locations of land to be provided by the Contractor upon which the Site
laboratories, the Engineer’s office, houses and Inspection huts shall be situated and
Site Plans showing their locations and layout shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

Section 100. General 1-37


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Where it is necessary for the Employer, in fulfilling his obligations, to acquire any land
during the Contract, the Contractor shall determine the ownership of and shall pay on
instruction from the Engineer, the cost of the land or rent, and/or compensation for
demolition or shifting of structures or assets or change in landuse required for the
Works as valued by the responsible local authorities. The Contractor’s obligations in
this respect are set out in detail in Clause 303 of this Specification. Although the
Contractor may, in the first instance, provide the money for the purchase of the land,
all such land shall be the property of the Employer. If the Contractor requires any
Governmental facilitation in this matter through the Employer, the requirement in this
regard shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer at least 28 days in advance.
In respect of all land required for borrow, stockpile and spoil areas, quarries, access
roads thereto, deviations outside the road reserve, the Site laboratories, the
Engineer’s offices, houses and Inspection huts and land required by the Contractor
for his own camps, offices, stores, workshops, houses, Temporary Works or any
other purposes, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the
property owners concerned and pay all charges arising there from as per the local
laws and regulations. On or before completion of the Works and when so instructed
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, insofar as in the opinion of the Engineer is
reasonable and practicable, restore all such land to the same condition that it was in
immediately prior to the occupation of that land by the Contractor to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Should the Contractor request the purchase of land for any purpose and this land is
subsequently not used, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated
with the compensation, purchase and disposal of such land.
124 WATER SUPPLY
The Contractor shall provide a clean, sufficient and continuous supply of fresh water
both for construction of the Works and for all houses, offices, Site laboratories,
Inspection huts, stores, workshops and labour lines. He shall undertake all
arrangements including pipelines and meters for connecting to local water mains, the
provision of pumps, storage tanks and the means of water conveyance where
necessary, payment for all fees and water charges and the satisfactory removal of all
such arrangements and provisions on completion of the Works.
The Contractor may use the natural sources of water subject to local regulations in
force and to the provision that any claim arising out of conflicts with other users of the
said natural sources shall be dealt entirely by the Contractor. Where natural sources
of surface water are not available or not otherwise adequate for whatever reasons,
the Contractor shall make arrangements at his own cost for extraction of water from
underground sources subject to local regulations.
The water shall be clear of suspended solids and free from any matter in quantities
considered by the Engineer to be deleterious to the Works. Water supplied to all the
offices, houses, Site laboratories, Inspection huts, stores, workshops and labour lines
shall be wholesome and potable to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the public
health authorities in the area of the Site.
The drinking water system shall be monitored in accordance with the water quality
parameters as prescribed by the Ministry of Nature, Environment and Tourism
(MONET).
Water wells and ancillary facilities including fencing and water delivery pipes shall be
provided to maintain the tree plantation.
125 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES

Section 100. General 1-38


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Materials to be incorporated in the Works shall fully comply with this Specification. If
the Contractor should prefer to supply material of an equal or higher standard under
an alternative specification he shall supply the Engineer with full details of
Specification fully supported by copies of the alternative specification of the material
proposed. Such materials shall be tested at and certified by a laboratory acceptable
to the Engineer and at the Contractor’s expense. Unless provided for elsewhere in
the Contract, all goods, materials, transportation, equipment and services for the
Works shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the identification of sources of materials and their provision,
transportation and storage in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.
Before placing any order for materials and manufactured articles for incorporation in
the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the names of the firms from
whom he proposes to obtain such materials and manufactured articles to be supplied
their origin, the manufacturer’s specification, quality, weight, strength and any other
relevant details. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with samples of such
materials and manufactured articles and, where appropriate shall provide
manufacturer’s certificates of recent tests carried out on similar materials and
manufactured articles.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of all quotations and orders for
the supply of materials and manufactured articles required in connection with the
Works as the Engineer may require.
Should the Engineer at any time determine that any goods or materials intended for
use or already incorporated in the Permanent Works do not satisfy the applicable
specifications, he shall be empowered to reject such goods and materials and shall
instruct their replacement by others of acceptable quality. The costs of any
consequential additional or abortive work together with all costs arising from the
supply of replacement goods or materials shall be borne by the Contractor.
126 INFORMATION FROM EXPLORATORY BORING AND TEST PITS
Any information made available by the Engineer to prospective bidders, including the
Engineer’s report on materials, shall be deemed not to form part of the Contract. The
Contractor shall be held solely responsible for any conclusions that he may reach
from any information concerning exploratory borings, test pits and other
investigations that have been made by the Engineer on the Site of the Works.
The Engineer may adjust foundation levels and other levels for construction below
ground level, in the light of information that becomes available as general excavation
proceeds upon the Site.
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to his obligations in respect of the inspection and
examination of the Site as detailed in Sub-Clause 4.10 of the Conditions of Contract.
127 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES
All materials and manufactured articles shall be stored on Site in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall securely store and protect all work,
materials and manufactured articles form the effects of the weather, flooding or
vermin.
128 TEST CERTIFICATES
When required by these Specifications or otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit to him test certificates from the suppliers of materials and
manufactured articles to be incorporated in the Works. Such test certificates shall
certify that the materials and manufactured articles concerned have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification and shall give the results of all

Section 100. General 1-39


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

the tests carried out. The Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the
materials and manufactured articles delivered to the Site with the corresponding test
certificates.
129 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
Progress photographs shall be taken by the Engineer with a camera provided by the
Contractor accordance with Sub-Clause 131 (b) of this Specification.
130 SIGNBOARDS
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain signboards to the layout, colours
and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Signboards
shall be erected at locations to be instructed by the Engineer, and material of the
vertical member and horizontal board including the writings shall conform to the
requirements of Section 900 of this specification.
The signboards shall be erected within fifty six days of the date of the letter of
Acceptance or within 28 days after receiving the Notice to Proceed, whichever is
later. The Contractor shall remove the signboards at the end of the Defects Liability
Period.
131 GENERAL SITE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall newly construct or reconstruct existing buildings or hire for Site
Laboratories, Inspection huts, house and office for the Engineer and his staff, to
provide laboratory equipment, furniture and equipment for the Engineer and his staff
and maintain them at all times.
(a) SITE LABORATORIES AND OFFICE ACCOMMODATION
i) General
The Contractor shall provide, furnish, equip and maintain for the duration of
the Contract Site laboratories for the joint use of the Contractor and the
Engineer and offices for the sole use of the Engineer's supervisory staff.
The offices and laboratories shall be located adjacent to the Contractor’s
main site offices, as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide the above services in suitable rented buildings
including necessary renovations to suit for Site laboratories and Engineer’s
offices in the nearest town approved by the Engineer.
The terms of any lease for such buildings shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval and, , shall contain provision for extension of the lease, on terms
agreed on beforehand, during any extended time for completion of the
Contract, as well as provision for the lease to be taken over by the Engineer
in the event of default by or insolvency of the Contractor. Notwithstanding
the Engineer’s approval of the conditions of the lease, the Contractor shall
be solely responsible for providing the accommodation for the full period
required and for suitable substitute accommodation should the leased
accommodation no longer be available or otherwise found unfit for use..
The Site laboratories and Engineer’s offices and their appurtenant services
shall be furnished in accordance with these specifications, also taking into
account national and local regulations and practices in Mongolia. The
Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval the detailed location
maps, building plans etc. of his proposals in respect of services for the Site
laboratories and Engineer’s offices in accordance with the guidelines
provided in this Specification.
The location and orientation of the Site laboratories and the Engineer’s

Section 100. General 1-40


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

offices and houses or other accommodation shall be to the Engineer’s


satisfaction and shall be decided upon in consultation with him and
confirmed in writing before furnished.
The Contractor shall provide access roads, fencing and areas of hard
standing around the office and laboratory buildings and provide water,
central heating and power supplies, security guard, external security
lighting, telephone and sewerage services and arrange for the disposal
of refuse all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Drainage ditches shall be
provided to prevent standing water in periods of wet weather and
surrounding area of Engineer’s offices, houses and laboratories should be
paved at least 100 mm thick with approved material to the satisfaction of
Engineer.
The Site laboratories and Engineer’s offices shall be painted with an
approved paint and the paintwork shall be maintained during the currency of
the Contract and, if so instructed by the Engineer, throughout the Defects
Liability Period.
Each door shall be provided with a lock and two keys. 2 no. suitable fire
extinguishers and 2 no. fire axes shall be provided for each building.
All accommodations shall be provided with a continuous 24 hour, 220V,
50Hz AC power supply, adequate earthing protection and a continuous
fresh, pure, portable water supply.
The clear height of all office and laboratory buildings between floor and
ceiling shall be 3.0 m minimum.
The Contractor shall be responsible for regular cleaning and maintenance of
the Site laboratory and Engineer’s office buildings and of the plots on which
they are situated. Clearing of vegetation and cutting of grass inside plot
boundary fences and their disposal shall be carried out on a periodic basis
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall keep all buildings, accesses, services and facilities
provided for the use of the Engineer and his staff, in a well maintained, clean
and fully habitable condition during the currency of the Contract and, if so
instructed by the Engineer, throughout the Defects Liability Period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all sanitary services
necessary to keep water-closets in a clean, odourless and hygienic
condition.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary septic tanks for all water-closets.
Waste water and septic-tank effluent shall be taken into properly soak ways.
The Contractor shall also provide for the remove and proper disposal of all
rubbish.
The power available 220 V, 50 Hz shall not be less 20 kVA for each office
and 45 kVA for each Site laboratory.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing sufficient labour, tools,
brushes, mops, buckets and the like and cleaning products to comply with
the requirements of this Clause. The Contractor shall be deemed to have
made allowance elsewhere in his rates for complying with those
requirements and no separate payment shall be made in respect of them.
(ii) Engineer’s offices
The Engineer’s offices, shall be in Choir/Airag and shall have a internal floor

Section 100. General 1-41


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

area of approximately 300 m2. This shall consist of 1 to 2 no. large rooms, 4
no. regular rooms, kitchen and 2 no. WC in a building plan or as directed by
the Engineer. Window space shall be a minimum of 15% of the floor area
of the office building. All rooms shall be provided with electric fluorescent
strip lighting of a minimum power rating of 240 W per room. 2 no. double
power points shall be provided in office and in the kitchen and 1 no. in the
corridor.
The Contractor shall provide and install adequate central heating and air
conditioning facilities such that ambient temperatures over the range of 18
to 20 °C can be continuously maintained inside the Engineer’s offices.
A piped potable water supply shall be provided to toilets, wash hand basins,
and to the kitchen which shall contain a sink with suitable built in cupboards
and working surfaces. A hot water supply shall be provided to both the
kitchen sink and toilet wash hand basins. If there is no existing waterborne
sewerage system, sewerage shall connect to a septic tank at least 30 m
from the building.
The store shall be fitted with shelving to the approval of the Engineer. Blinds
are to be provided for all office windows.
Each office shall be provided with a telephone with PABX facilities,
independent of the Contractor’s telephone, comprising two external lines,
switchboard and extensions to entire offices and the Site laboratory. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates and prices for of all
telephone and facsimile charges.
The Engineer’s office building shall be equipped with the furniture and
fittings detailed specified in Sub-Clause 131 (b) of this Specification.
(iii) Site laboratories
The location of the laboratory shall be within the Engineer’s office complex,
or in another location if approved by the Engineer.
The Site laboratory, shall be in Choir/Airag, and shall have a internal floor
area of approximately 150 m2. Site laboratory shall consist of one office and
laboratory working area or as directed by the Engineer. Window space
shall be a minimum of 15% of the office floor areas. All rooms shall be
provided with electric fluorescent strip lighting of a minimum power rating of
160 W in the laboratory offices and 480 W in the laboratory working area.
One telephone shall be installed in one of the laboratory offices as an
extension to the telephone exchange located in the Engineer's office
building. A total of 12 no. double power points shall be provided, 2 no. in
each laboratory office and 8 no. in the laboratory working area.
The Contractor shall provide and install central heating and air conditioning
facilities to both offices and the working area within the each laboratory
building. These facilities shall be sufficient to continuously maintain ambient
temperatures inside the Site laboratory building over the range of 15 to 22
°C.
The floor of the each laboratory building shall be constructed of reinforced
concrete with a power floated U3 finish. A strengthened reinforced concrete
floor panel of size 1.5 m x 1.5 m and of total thickness 0.4 m for use as a
compaction area shall be provided. Reinforced concrete plinths are to be
provided for the concrete crushing machine, the CBR machine and the
Marshall test apparatus.
Sturdy metal surfaced benches with integral cupboards below and sturdy

Section 100. General 1-42


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

shelving above shall be provided in the laboratory working area and the
laboratory store shall be fitted with suitable shelving all to the approval of
the Engineer.
Each laboratory building shall be provided with piped potable water and hot
water supplies and continuous 24 hour 220 V, 50 Hz AC electricity supply
for lighting and running the laboratory equipment.
Blinds are to be provided for all windows.
In addition to the each laboratory the Contractor shall provide a separate
but adjacent covered drying shed and soaking tank. The drying shed shall
have a minimum floor area of approximately 25 m2 constructed of raised
concrete floor and weatherproof roof but open on all sides. The soaking
tank shall be 3 m x 1 m x 0.3 m deep and constructed of water-tight
concrete or other materials approved by the Engineer.
The Site laboratories shall be equipped with the furniture and fittings
detailed specified in Sub-Clause 131 (b) of this Specification.
(iv) Inspection huts
The Contractor shall provide, furnish and maintain Inspection huts in 4
places for the duration of the working months only spread over the Contract
period for the sole use of the Engineer’s supervisory staff. The Inspection
huts shall be of such construction that may be dismantled and transported
to other locations and re-erected or they may be ‘Ger’ or equivalent. The
Inspection huts shall be erected on the Site of works or at material
processing Site. The sitting of the Inspection huts shall progressively shift
as the work Site shifts forward and the Contractor shall be required to
dismantle and re-erect these huts or transported them as such as
appropriate or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hut shall have a minimum internal floor area of 25 m2. These shall
have adequate windows, fly-proof net, and well fitted doors fitted with lock.
The arrangement shall be made so that ambient temperatures of 18 to 20
°C can be continuously maintained inside the huts in springs and autumns,
and electric power of 220V, 50 Hz is supplied for 24 hrs in a day to the huts.
Each hut shall be provided with an overhead tank, faucet and an enclosed
toilet and kitchen. Services shall include water supply and sewage disposal
system, adequate electric light, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Furniture shall include 1 no. office table 1.8 m x 0.9 m, 4 no. office chairs, 1
no. 4 drawer lockable steel filing cabinet, 1 no. stool together with an
electric kettle, a twin burner cooker, a kitchen table, utensils and crockery
for the kitchen attached to it, all as approved by the Engineer.
The responsibility for the care of such Inspection huts during shut down
periods shall be vested in the Contractor.
(v) Car ports and garages
Heated garages for Engineer’s cars shall be provided in Khutag Undur near
to Engineer’s houses, and shall be maintained for the full period of Contract
implementation. The design of such garages shall be subject to prior
approval of Engineer.
Car ports shall be so provided that vehicles parked under them shall at all
times are protected from the direct rays of the sun, rain or snow. They shall
have weatherproof roofs and be fully enclosed on three sides with the open
side for access. The configuration and layout of car ports to be provided
adjacent to the Site laboratories and Engineer's office buildings shall be

Section 100. General 1-43


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

sufficient to accommodate 10 no. four wheel drive vehicles.


(b) FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE SITE LABORATORIES AND
ENGINEER'S OFFICES
i) Furniture and equipment for the Engineer's offices
The Contractor shall provide facilities such that regular communication between
the various members of the Engineer's supervisory staff on the Site may be
ensured at all times during the Contract. The Contractor shall provide Engineer's
office with two external telephone connections with full international telephone
and fax facilities. The Contractor shall arrange for the offices in the Engineer's
office and Site laboratory buildings to be inter-connected by an intercom system.
The Engineer's office shall also to be connected by telephone or intercom to the
Contractor's site offices.
(A) The Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Engineer's offices within
the time stipulated in Clause 132 of this Specification the following new
office requisites with the approval of the Engineer as asked for in the BoQ:
These furniture and equipments shall be the property of the MRTCUD and
shall be handed over by the contractor in maintained condition to
MRTCUD at the end of the project.

(1) 1 no. IBM compatible notebook computer (2 GB RAM, 160


GB HDD, Dual Core )

(2) 3 no. Pentium IV Desk Top Popular brand Like Dell, HP or


equivalent (1 GB RAM, 160 GB HDD, Dual Core)

(3) 1 no. A4 and A3 size printer (black), HP Laser Jet 5200 or


HP Laser Jet 8150

(4) 1 no. A4 and A3 size printer (colour), HP Desk Jet 1280

(5) 1 no. A4 and A3 size photocopier, Canon iR 2016

(6) 1no. portable facsimile machine,

(7) 3 no. 35 mm automatic focus motor driven SLR camera


body with 35 x 80 mm zoom lens and wide angle lens,

(8) 3 no. telephone and intercom,

(9) 15 no. mobile sets (Nokia Brand or any equivalent with


charger and functioning connection)
(10) 10 no. approved triangular plastic metric scales,
(11) 5 no. metal straight edge 1 m long,
(12) 3 no. set squares, 2 x 45 degrees and 2 x 60 degrees,
(13) 3 no. adjustable set squares,
(14) 3 no. large protractors 360 degrees,
(15) 9 no. letter punches,
(16) 3 no. heavy duty letter punch,

Section 100. General 1-44


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(17) 9 no. stapling machines,


(18) 3 no. heavy duty stapling machine,
(19) 27 no. stacking filing trays,
(20) 2 no. spico type binding machine,
(21) 5 no. fully equipped first aid box.
(22) 3 Nos. White board (A0 Size)
(B) The Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Engineer's offices within
the time stipulated in Clause 132 of this Specification the following new
office furniture with the approval of the Engineer as asked for in the BoQ:
(1) 6 no. 6 drawer office desk and accompanying high-backed
padded office chair with arms,
(2) 4 no. typist desk and chair,
(3) 28 no. office chairs,
(4) 15 no. office tables 1.8 m x 0.9 m,
(5) 1 set conference table and ten chairs,
(6) 6 no. 4 drawer lockable steel filing cabinet,
(7) 3 no. racks for hanging prints of drawings up to A1 size,
(8) 4 no. 2 door lockable steel office cupboard with shelves,
(9) 1 no. refrigerator capacity 300 litres,
(10) 1 no. electric cooker, 4 rings and oven,
(11) 1 no. gas stove
(12) 5 no. electric kettle, water boiler/water dispenser
(13) 20 no. dustbins with covers.
(C) The Contractor shall provide and maintain the following new survey
equipment with the approval of the Engineer as asked for in the BoQ:
(1) 2 no. Sokkia electronic total station power set 2010 with all
associated equipment, data logger and spare
battery packs or equivalent including minimum 6 prism
set,
(2) 3 no. levels and tripods Sokkia C41 type or equivalent,
(3) 6 no. metric levelling staffs approved by the Engineer,
(4) 3 no. rigid steel straight edge length 3 m,
(5) 5 no. 100 m steel bands,
(6) 3 no. metric survey chains,
(7) and such number of ranging rods, drop arrows, steel
tapes, hammers, road nails, spirit levels, field books,
level books as the Engineer may require.
The survey equipment for sole use of the Engineer’s supervisory staff
must be handed over to the Engineer in its entirety not later than 14 days
after the Engineer's order to commence the Works pursuant to Sub-
Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract.

Section 100. General 1-45


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Any delay to the Contractor's activities owing to the Engineer's inability to


perform survey work as a result of the Contractor's failure to supply
timely or adequately maintain the survey equipment shall be deemed to
have been caused entirely by the Contractor's own actions or inactions
and any consequences of such delays shall be so interpreted.
(D) The Contractor shall supply the following items of clothing for the
Engineer's supervisory Staff as asked for in the BoQ:
(1) 10 no. safety helmets,
(2) 10 no. sets of waterproof clothing,
(3) 10 Nos. Winter clothing suitable for field use for –30oC
temperature
(4) 10 no. pairs steel toe capped boots,
(5) 5no. sets of protective clothing for Site laboratory staff.

ii) Furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories


(C) (A) The Contractor shall provide and deliver to each Site laboratory
building within the time stipulated in Clause 132 of this Specification the
following new office furniture with the approval of the Engineer: These
furniture and equipments shall be the property of the MRTCUD and shall
be handed over by the contractor in maintained condition to MRTCUD at
the end of the project.

(1) 3 no. 4 drawer lockable steel filing cabinet,


(2) 6 no. 6 drawer office desk and accompanying padded high-
backed office chair with arms,
(3) 3 no. 2 door lockable steel office cupboard with shelves,
(4) 3 no. dust bin,
(5) 15 no. office chairs,
(6) 15 no. laboratory stools,
(7) 9 no. wastepaper baskets,
(8) 6 no. office table 1.8 m x 0.9 m.

(B) The Contractor as asked for in the BoQ shall supply and maintain the
following new laboratory equipment and apparatus for the use of the
Engineer. Quantity shown is indicative and minimum. Further
augmentation required to match the magnitude of work as instructed by
the Engineer, shall have to be made by the Contractor for no additional
cost.

Name of the Test Description Unit Quantity

Sl
No.
1. Sampling and Riffle Boxes (max. particle size no. 3
Preparation range 25-75mm)
Porcelain Mortar and Pestle no. 3
Proctor/CBR/Marshall Extruder no. 3

Section 100. General 1-46


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Name of the Test Description Unit Quantity

Sl
No.
2. Moisture Content Speedy Moisture Tester no. 3
3. Soil Index Properties Casagrande Method AASHTO T89
Liquid Limit Device (motorized) no. 3
no. 6
Liquid Limit Device (hand-operated) no. 6
Casagrande Grooving tool
Plastic Limit AASHTO T90 no. 3
Plastic Limit Glass Plate no. 6
Evaporating Dish no. 6
Spatula no. 3
Gas Jar for Specific Gravity and no. 3
Density no. 6
Mechanical Shaker
Pycnometer
4. Particle Size Distribution Stirring Apparatus no. 3
Soil Dispersion Cup no. 3
Soil Hydrometer no. 3
Sedimentation Cylinder no. 6
Set of Woven Wire Mesh Sieves, set 6
Diameter 450 mm: 63, 50, 45, 37.5,
25, 19,16, 13.2, 9.5, 6.3, 4.75
including Lid and Receiver, and
Set of Woven Wire Mesh Sieves,
Frame
Diameter 200 mm: 4.75, 2.36, 2.00,
1.18 mm and 600, 425, 300, 212, no. 12
150 and 75 Pm including Lid and no. 6
Receiver no. 6
Sieve Brush (for both fine & coarse) no. 3
75 Pm Washing Sieve no. 3
Sieve Shaker (450 mm)
Sieve Shaker (200 mm) no. 3
Wet Sieving Attachment
Sand Equivalent Value AASHTO
T176
Sand Equivalent Apparatus
5. Compaction and CBR Compaction Mould AASHTO T180 no. 9
Compaction Rammer no. 6
Straightedge no. 6
Mixing Spoon no. 9
Mixing Trowel no. 6
Spatula no. 6
Sample Tray no. 12
Wash Bottle no. 6
Moisture Content Tin no. 150
CBR Test AASHTO T193
CBR Test Machine no. 3
Force Measurement
10 kN no. 3
50 kN no. 3

Section 100. General 1-47


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Name of the Test Description Unit Quantity

Sl
No.
CBR Mould Complete with Collar no. 36
and Perforated Base plate
CBR Spacing Disc no. 3
Filter Paper box 100
Surcharge Weight no. 36
Slotted Surcharge Weight no. 36
Swell Plate no. 36
Swell Tripod no. 36
Swell Dial Gauge no. 36
Soaking Tank no. 3
CBR Cutting Collar no 3
Dynamic Cone Penetration Test no. 2
Equipment no 2
Standard Penetration Test no 1
Equipment (SPT)
Direct Shear Test equipment
6. In-situ Density Sand Cone 152 mm with Sand no. 9
Container and Density Plate
Nuclear Density & Moisture Gauge no. 3

7. Fresh and Hardened Slump Test with Accessories no. 9


Concrete Concrete Mixer no. 3
Air Entrainment Meter no. 3
Vibrating Table no. 3
150 mm Cube Mould no. 54
150 mm Dia. X 300 mm Long no. 72
Cylinder
Mould no. 3
Compacting Factor Apparatus no. 3
Apparatus for Determining Flow in
Concrete no. 3
Concrete Compression Machine no. 13
(1500 kN) no. 3
Buoyance Balance no. 3
Trowel no. 3
Float
Scoop
8. Aggregates Flakiness Gauge no. 3
Length Gauge no. 3
Wire Basket no. 3
Los Angeles Abrasion Machine no. 3
no. 3
Aggregate Crushing Value no. 3
Apparatus
Buoyancy Balance with Accessories no. 3
for Particle Density and Water no. 3
Absorption
Bulk Density Measures
Density Basket

Section 100. General 1-48


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Name of the Test Description Unit Quantity

Sl
No.
9. Asphalt Asphalt Centrifuge Extractors no. 3
Filter Paper box box 100
Bench-mounting Mixer, 5-litre no. 3
Capacity no. 36
Compaction Mould no. 3
Compaction Pedestal no. 6
Compaction Hammer no. 3
Marshall Test Apparatus with no.
Accessories (25 kN Capacity) no. 3
Flow Meter no. 3
Vacuum Pycnometer no. 3
Water Bath no. 3
Kinematic Viscometer no. 3
Distillation Apparatus for Cutback no. 3
Bitumen no. 6
Ring and Ball Apparatus no. 9
Dial Thermometer (0 to 250 oC)
General Glass Thermometer no. 3
(- 10 to + 250 oC)
Hand-held Digital Thermometer no. 3
(- 30 to + 200 oC)
Core Drilling Machine
10. Drying and Weighing Field and Laboratory Scale 25,000 g no. 3
Capacity including Set of Weights
Field and Laboratory Scale, 10,000 no. 3
g including Set of Weights Triple
Beam Balance 2,610 g Capacity no. 3
including Set of Weights
Electronic Balance 360g capacity no. 3
(0.0019 accuracy)
Electronic Balance 3000 gm no. 3
Capacity
Hotplate no. 3
Drying Oven, 750 litre no. 3
(thermostatically controlled)
11. Accessories, Tools and Sodium Sulfate Kg 30
Consumable Stirring Rod no. 6
Desiccators no. 3
Measuring Cylinder (different sizes) no. 9
Wash Bottle no. 3
Beakers and Covers no. 3
Graduated Pipette no. 9
Bowel (different sizes) no. 36
Sample Tray (different sizes) no. 36
Sample Container no. 36
Crucible Tongs no. 3
Heavy-duty Rubber Gloves pair 15
Heat-resistant Gloves pair 15
Chisel no. 3
Vernier Callipers no. 3

Section 100. General 1-49


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Name of the Test Description Unit Quantity

Sl
No.
Wire Brush no. 9
Trimming Knife no. 6
Strong Plastic Bag no. 300
Plastic Bucket no. 9
Stop Watch no. 3
Scoop no. 6
Aggregate Scoop no. 6
Shovel no. 9
Spatula no. 6
Support Assembly no. 3
Hammer no. 3
Funnels
General Glass Thermometer no. 9
(- 30 to + 100 oC)
Pickaxe no. 9
Hard Bristle Broom with Handle no. 6
12 Pycnometer (glass) 18
Sieves (Ø 200mm, Ø28mm, 6
Ø20mm, Ø14mm, Ø10mm, Ø6mm,
Ø3mm) 3
AASHTO T99 compactors 3
Hammers 3
Moulds 6
AASHTO T 80 moulds 6
Hammers 3
Schmitt hammer 3
Ductilometer 3
Penetrometer
Test equipment for measuring
bitumen frost resistance (using 3
Fraass method) and necessary 15
chemicals 3
Thermometer (+250C) 3
Drying oven
CBR Force Measurement 10 kN, 28 6
kN, 50kN
Steel straight edge, 3m

In addition the Contractor shall supply further jute, plastic or 4-ply brown
paper sacks for sampling, paint, brushes, turpentine or any other
laboratory equipment or materials required for use in the Site
laboratories as may be instructed by the Engineer from time to time.
The laboratory equipment shall be of sound engineering design and
construction and have the dimensions, characteristics and precision
required for the proper sampling procedures and tests intended to be
performed. The laboratory equipment shall be from manufacturers of
international repute conforming to all applicable international standards
indicated in this Specification. The make, model and technical
specifications of all proposed laboratory equipment shall be submitted to

Section 100. General 1-50


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

the Engineer with accompanying manufacturers' literature in accordance


with Clause 125 of this Specification. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's prior approval before any equipment for the Site laboratories
is provided.
The Site laboratories is for the joint use of the Contractor and the
Engineer. The laboratory equipment specified herein represents the
minimum equipment required for the Engineer to perform sampling and
testing in order to meet his obligations in respect of his Quality
Assurance system. The Contractor is hereby advised that other
supplementary equipment necessary for the performance of his own
Project Quality Control Plan in accordance with Clause 109 of this
Specification will be required. In particular the Contractor must ascertain
for himself, taking into consideration the testing and sampling
requirements of the Engineer, the quantities of equipment such as
sample moulds and the size of ovens etc. that will be sufficient to meet
the demands of the Project Quality Control Plan without causing
unnecessary delay to the progress of the Works.
The Contractor shall provide in addition to the requirements of Clause
111 of this Specification, one copy of the following latest editions of
publications all to be kept in the Site laboratories:
1. ASTM Volume 04,01 - Cement, Lime, Gypusm,
2. ASTM Volume 04,02 - Concrete and Mineral Aggregate,
3. ASTM Volume 04,03 - Road and Paving Materials,
4. ASM Volume 04,04 - Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous
Materials,
5. ASTM Volume 04,08 - Natural Building Stones, Soils and
Rock,
6. ASTM STP 599 - Soil Specimen Preparation for laboratory
Testing,
7. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials
and Methods of Sampling and Testing Part 1A & 1B
Specifications,
8. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials
and Methods of Sampling and Testing Part 2A & 2B Tests,
9. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges,
10. BS 812 Methods for Sampling and Testing of Mineral
Aggregates, Sands and Filters,
11. BS 1882 Methods of Testing Concrete.
12. AASHTO T99, R12-85 Bituminous Mixture Design Using the
Marshall and Hveen procedures
13. MS 2 Mix design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot
Mix Types
14. ASTM D242-85, AASHTO T37-91 Specification for Mineral
Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixture
15. ASTM D1664-85 T182-84 Test methot for Coating and
Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures
16. MNS Series as per section 111 of this specification

Section 100. General 1-51


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(c) HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER'S SUPERVISORY STAFF


The Contractor shall provide accommodation in numbers as per
Engineer’s direction/BoQ. suitable rented houses/flats/apartments for
the Engineer's staff near to Engineer’s office in accordance with the
details given below. The location and orientation of the houses shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval the detailed
location maps and apartment plans of his proposals in respect of
services for the houses for the Engineer's staff in accordance with the
guidelines provided in this Specification.
The Contractor shall provide water, central heating and air conditioning
facilities, power, external security lighting, telephone and sewerage
services and arrange for the disposal of refuse all as detailed in this
Specification and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Each house shall have:
• bath, shower, wash basin and internal flush toilet,
• wall-mounted high level type and floor-standing type kitchen
units,
• kitchen-sink unit with stainless-steel basin and draining
boards,
• built-in wardrobes in the bedrooms,
• linen cupboard,
• piped hot and cold water supply system to the bath shower,
wash basins, sink units and toilet,
• four-plate electric stove, complete with grill, oven and splash
back,
• combined refrigerator and freezer of minimum volume 300
litres,
• three double power points in both the kitchen and lounge and
one double power point in each bedroom and passage way,
• electric wall-lights and lamp-shades in bedrooms, lounges and
dining recesses, fluorescent strip lighting of capacity 80 W in
kitchens and electric pendant lamps and lamp-shades in all
other rooms and passages,
• external security lighting,
• separate fuse box with mains switch, trip switches and
automatic cut-out in the event of a leakage to earth, connected
to a continuous 24 hour 220V, 50 Hz AC power supply,
• separate circuits for power ring mains, internal lighting and
external security lighting, all with adequate earthing protection,
• external hardwood timber doors fitted with good-quality five
lever mortice locks, Yale type locks and internal security chains
and bolts,
• windows of the type that can open over the full window area,
• mosquito screens and burglar bars on all outside windows,
external kitchen doors to be provided with additional outward
opening, self-closing fly screen door,

Section 100. General 1-52


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• a sewerage system, including septic tanks and soakaways if


necessary. Such tanks and soakaways shall be deemed to be
part and parcel of the accommodation provided and in respect
of which no separate payment shall be made,
• finished and varnished hardwood shelving in all lounges and
painted timber shelving in store rooms and linen cupboards,
• 2 no. suitable fire extinguishers and 1 no. fire axe,
Houses for the Engineer's staff shall be weatherproof and adequately
insulated against the Mongolian climate. Each house shall have a clear
height from floor to ceiling of at least 3.0 m.
With the exception of kitchens and toilets, the accommodation shall be
fully carpeted throughout. Curtains or blinds shall be provided to all
windows.
The Contractor shall provide and install adequate central heating and air
conditioning facilities such that ambient temperatures over the range of
18 to 22 °C can be continuously maintained throughout the houses for
the Engineer's staff.
Each house shall be properly painted inside and outside with an
approved paint or varnish and that paintwork shall be maintained during
the currency of the Contract and, if instructed by the Engineer,
throughout the Defects Liability Period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for regular maintenance of the
Engineer's staff houses including collection of household refuse and its
disposal on a daily basis, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing sufficient labour, tools and
equipment to comply with the requirements of this Clause. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have made allowance elsewhere in his
rates for complying with those requirements and no separate payment
shall be made in respect thereof.
The Engineer's staff houses shall be equipped with the furniture and
fittings detailed specified in Sub-Clause 131 (d) of this Specification.
Each house shall have minimum two bedrooms, lounge, dining recess,
bathroom, kitchen and store.
(d) FURNITURE FOR THE ENGINEER'S HOUSES
The Contractor shall provide each house within the time stipulated in
Clause 132 of this Specification new furniture subject to the approval of
the Engineer:
1. 2 no. bedside tables,
2. 1 no. bedside lights,
3. 2 no. arm chairs,
4. 1 no. dressing table with mirror and stool,
5. 1 no. full length mirror,
6. 2 no. chests of drawers,
7. 2 no. double beds with interior sprung mattress,
8. 2 sets linen and bedding each set comprising,

Section 100. General 1-53


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• 2 no. pillows
• 1 no. quilt
• 2 no. blankets
• 2 no. quilt cover
• 2 no. fitted sheets
• 8 no. pillow cases
• 2 no. bath towels
• 2 no. hand towels
9. 1 no. desk and cushioned chair,
10. 1 no. sofa and matching chairs to seat 6,
11. 1 no. television, 510 mm screen,
12. 1 no. occasional side tables,
I3. 1 no. standard lamp,
14. 1 no. sideboard,
15. 1 no. table lamp,
16. 1 no. dining table with 6 chairs,
17. 1 no. bathroom cabinet with mirror,
18. 1 no. towel rails,
19. 1 no. water filters, with 3 candles,
20. 1 no. automatic washing machine,
21. 1 no. electric iron and ironing board,
22. 1 no. electric kettle,
23. 1 no. vacuum cleaner
24. 1 set kitchen equipment comprising:
• 1 no. dinner service for 6,
• 1 no. tea service for 6,
• 1 no. canteen of stainless steel cutlery for 6,
• 6 no. tumblers,
• 6 no. water glasses and jug,
• 6 no. mugs,
• 1 set of 3 no. enamel saucepans,
• 1 no. stainless steel frying pan,
• 1 no. cast iron skillet,
• 1 set. of 3 no. ovenproof casserole dishes,
• 1 set kitchen utensils,
• 1 set steel kitchen knives and sharpening steel,
• 1 set serving dishes,
• other kitchen sundries as may be required,
25. 1 no. kitchen waste bin,
26. 1 no. dustbin,

Section 100. General 1-54


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

27. 1 no. Fan 24 (GEC/National)


28. 1 no. Electric heater
132 TIME FOR PROVIDING THE SITE LABORATORIES, THE ENGINEER'S STAFF
HOUSES AND OFFICES
All houses and offices and Site laboratories to be provided under the Contract shall
be handed over to the Engineer in finished and fully habitable condition not later than
90 days after receipt of the Engineer's notice to commence the Works pursuant to
Sub-Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Engineers office, houses and Site laboratory buildings shall be erected on a plot
of not less than 0,25 ha with a 2m high chain link fence topped with barbed wire
overhang and provided with a 5m wide gate secured with padlock and chain.
No construction of the Works shall be permitted until the Engineer's offices and the
Site laboratories have been accepted by the Engineer as fully commissioned,
finished and able to function efficiently.
If the Contractor should fail to hand over the houses or the offices and Site
laboratories within the period specified, the Engineer shall make such alternative
arrangements as he considers necessary. These arrangements may include the use
of hotels, rented accommodation and the hire or purchase of caravans, trailer
mounted cabins, etc. The costs of any such temporary arrangements made by the
Engineer, including those of additional transport shall be reimbursed by the
Contractor to the Engineer including a 25% addition for administrative overheads.
133 INSURANCE AND OWNERSHIP OF THE SITE LABORATORIES AND
EQUIPMENT, HOUSES, OFFICES AND FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE
ENGINEER
All buildings, furniture and equipment provided by the Contractor for the Site
laboratories, offices, and the Engineer’s staff houses shall be insured by the
Contractor against any loss or damage by accident, fire or theft for the duration of the
Contract, including the Defects Liability Period.
On completion of the Contract, the ownership of any item provided and reimbursed
under the Provisional Sum shall revert to the Employer.
134 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICES FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE SITE
LABORATORIES AND ENGINEER'S OFFICES
(a) General
The Contractor shall maintain the furniture and equipment for the Site
laboratories and Engineer’s offices until the issue of Taking-Over Certificate
for the complete Works or as instructed by the Engineer. If at any stage the
Contractor fails to carry out the required maintenance satisfactorily, the
month/months during which, shall not be paid.
If the Contract Works are not completed within the stipulated period or within
the granted extended time of completion, maintenance of furniture and
equipment shall be carried out at Contractor’s expense.
(b) Engineer’s offices
The Contractor shall provide maintenance and running services in a
satisfactory manner of all furniture and equipment scheduled in Sub-Clauses
131 (b) (i) (A), (B), (C) and (E) for the Engineer’s offices in a useable
condition and in such state of repair as may be considered, in the opinion of
the Engineer. The Contractor shall replace promptly any item that becomes
unserviceable or is lost.

Section 100. General 1-55


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(c) Site laboratories


The Contractor shall provide maintenance and running services in a
satisfactory manner of all furniture and equipment scheduled in Sub-Clause
131 (b) (ii) (A) and Sub-Clauses 131 (b) (ii) (B) (1), (2), (3) and (4) for the Site
laboratories in a useable condition and in such state of repair as may be
considered, in the opinion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall replace
promptly any item that becomes unserviceable or is lost. The Contractor shall
provide related supplies, consumables and connected services as and when
necessary as may be instructed by the Engineer.
135 REMOVAL OF CAMPS
Upon receipt of a Taking-Over Certificate issued by the Engineer pursuant to Sub-
Clause 10.1 of the Conditions of Contract and after receiving written instruction from
the Engineer, the Contractor shall take down and remove all structures forming his
own camp and that of the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for the
disconnection of the water supply and remove all culverts, drainage and sewerage
pipes, backfill open ditches, latrine pits, soakaways and other sewage disposal
excavations, with the exception of those items and services that are required to
revert to the ownership of the Employer.
At all times, the Contractor shall ensure that all drainage and waste materials both
from his own camps and from those of the Engineer, are treated and disposed of in a
safe manner that does not result in either pollution or erosion.
The Contractor shall restore the Site, as far as practicable in the opinion of the
Engineer, to its original condition and leave it in a neat and tidy condition.
The Contractor shall carry out similar reinstatement in the event that he relocates his
camp and that of the Engineer.
136 ATTENDANCE UPON THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer's offices, the Site laboratories and
Inspection huts with and replenish as required by the Engineer, supplies of soap,
towels, toilet paper and cleaning products and shall keep those buildings in a well
maintained, clean and habitable condition.
The Contractor shall provide all tools, protective clothing, wooden pegs, iron pins and
pickets, paint, water, cement and aggregate for concreting and any other materials
and all assistance as may be required by the Engineer and his staff for setting out,
field testing, measuring and checking the Works.
The Contractor shall provide adequate security by day and by night for the Site
laboratories, Engineer's office buildings, Inspection huts, vehicles and houses, and
for the Engineer's staff. This shall include the provision of suitable gates and fencing
and the full-time attendance of permanent watchmen.
137 PROVISION OF VEHICLES
(a) New vehicles
The Contractor shall supply new vehicles approved by the Engineer and
maintain them for the exclusive use of the Engineer and his staff for any
purpose whatsoever authorized by the Engineer. Such vehicles shall be
specially adapted in their place of manufacture, and in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications, to suit the extremes of the Mongolian climate.
Types and number of vehicles shall be as given below:
A. to purchase new

Section 100. General 1-56


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1. 4 no. Land Cruiser 4WD, with V6 petrol engine,


2. 6 no. Pajero 4WD, with V6 petrol engine,

All four wheel drive vehicles are to be equipped with Pirelli "Scorpion" 255/75
R15 radial ply tyres or equivalent and alloy wheels to suit.
The vehicles, and any authorized passengers, goods and samples, shall be
comprehensively insured by the Contractor and licensed for use within
Mongolia by any licensed driver authorized by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall pay all tolls and vehicle licensing costs and provide fuel,
lubricants and any repairs or maintenance, including replacing defective or
damaged parts or tyres and the like, whenever required in conformity with the
vehicle manufacturer's recommendations or as may be deemed necessary by
the Engineer. The vehicles shall be fueled, lubricated and maintained as
aforementioned until released by the Engineer. The Contractor will continue to
comply with these requirements during the Defects Liability Period if so
instructed by the Engineer. The ownership of the vehicles on their release
shall revert to the Employer.
Each vehicle shall be equipped with a fire extinguisher, first aid kit, tow hook
and cable, tool kit (including set of metric spanners, set of screwdrivers, water
pump pliers, adjustable wrench and socket set), spare wheel, wheel wrench,
jack and handle and front and rear seat belts all of which shall be maintained
in working order or replaced by the Contractor as necessary.
The Contractor shall immediately provide a similar replacement for any
vehicle out of service for maintenance or through mechanical breakdown or
for any vehicle being unavailable owing to theft or accident or through any
other cause.
The Contractor shall provide house and working clothes and pay, including all
overtime and overnight traveling allowances competent and licensed drivers
approved by the Engineer for each of the vehicles indicated. Sufficient drivers
shall be available at night and at weekends whenever required by the
Engineer.
Vehicles shall remain immobilized on blocks with the wheels removed,
batteries disconnected and garaged in heated facilities during seasonal
shutdown periods. The responsibility for the care of such vehicles during shut
down periods shall be vested in the Contractor. The vehicles shall be fully
serviced and made ready for the use of the Engineer's staff prior to the
resumption of the construction of the Works in the spring.
(b) Rented vehicles
The Contractor in demand shall supply suitable rented vehicles for the use of
the Engineer and his staff, that provides the same standards and services as
specified in Sub-Clause 137 (a) as and when instructed by the Engineer.
138 PAYMENT OF OVERTIME FOR ENGINEER'S STAFF
The Contractor may be instructed by the Engineer to make payment for overtime
worked by the Engineer’s staff. When any such overtime arises from the need for the
Engineer to inspect work which is performed outside normal working hours as
defined in Clause 108 of this Specification, the full cost of such overtime shall be
borne by the Contractor and reimbursed by the Contractor to the Engineer including a
33% addition for administrative overheads.

Section 100. General 1-57


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

If the Contractor should wish to execute work on a regular basis outside such normal
working hours the Engineer shall have the authority to employ additional supervisory
staff for which the Contractor shall provide accommodation and facilities of the same
nature and standard as the Engineer's other supervisory staff. The Engineer shall be
reimbursed in full for the costs of mobilization of such additional supervisory staff and
their salaries including a 25% addition for administrative overheads.
139 PLANTATION OF TREES ALONG THE ROAD
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
excavate for, backfill with topsoil, provide, plant, water and protect tree seedlings
along the road.
Minimum 5 years old of tree species of Populous and Larch shall be planted. The
excavation for each tree species shall be min. 0.6 m deep and 0.3 m in diameter or
as required. Tree species shall be planted on top of a layer of topsoil placed at the
bottom of each excavation. The remaining void around the seedling shall be
backfilled firmly with topsoil provided by the Contractor. All the plants shall be
maintained up to three years from the date of planting. The maintenance work
includes watering, post plantation operation i.e. manuring, weeding and pruning shall
be carried out as and when required.
Protection of tree species shall also be provided in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
140 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
The rivers, streams, waterways along the road may get affected to some extent
during the construction stage. The perennial water bodies existing along the road
under construction should be protected from sedimentation ingress through
protective measures like silt fencing, earth slope protection or other approved
methods. The Contractor may extract water from the identified perennial rivers or
bore wells sources with approval from the Engineer as well as from the local
administrative authorities. The Contractor shall take necessary measures so that the
existing water quality does not get affected due to the construction activities
according to the Surface Water Quality Standards of Mongolia.
Asphalt, concrete, stone crusher and wet mix macadam mixing plants shall be
operated in conformity with Government pollution control legislation and located
minimum 1.0 km away from population centers. Water will be sprayed on earthworks,
temporary haulage, detour roads and different pavement layers on a regular basis to
prevent dust generation. Air quality shall conform to the requirements of National
Ambient Air Quality Standards of Mongolia.
All the construction equipment, plants, machinery and vehicles shall follow prescribed
noise standards. All construction equipment shall conform to a standard of less than
90dB (A). At construction site within 150 m of human settlements, noisy construction
shall be stopped between 10.00 p.m to 6.00 a.m. All the vehicles and construction
machinery shall be monitored regularly with particular attention to silencers and
mufflers to maintain noise levels within the specified limits.
The environmental qualities as well as health of the construction worker, condition of
work site, hygiene, safety etc. shall be monitored as follows, and supported by test
certificates of the qualified/approved agency at every 3 months periodicity.

Section 100. General 1-58


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Component Stage Item


Air Construction Suspended Particulate Matter
(SPM), CO, NO2, SO2
Water Construction Physical, chemical and
biological parameters
Noise Construction Noise Level
Health of Worker Construction Health Checkup
Condition of Work Site, Construction Observation of Site Condition /
Hygiene, Safety etc. Construction Camps

141 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


No separate measurement and payment shall be made for the costs of complying
with the requirements of Clauses 101 to 120 (except 115-3) inclusive, Clause 122,
Clauses 124 to 129 inclusive and Clause 136 of this Specification and the Contractor
shall be deemed to have allowed elsewhere in his rates and prices for all such costs.
(a) Item Engineer's supervisory staff houses
Unit flat-month
The unit of measurement for Engineer's supervisory staff houses shall be flat-
month (flat multiplying by month). The quantity shall be calculated in no. of flat
and duration of month instructed to be provided. The Contractor’s overheads
and profit are deemed to have been included in the unit rate.
The rate for each Engineer's supervisory staff house shall include for the cost
of providing, maintaining and running the services of each flat and
appurtenant fixtures, fittings, equipment, water, sewerage, electricity, air
conditioning and central heating, telephone and internet, and providing
furniture scheduled in Sub-Clause 131 (d) and in accordance with the
requirements of Clauses 101 to 120 inclusive, 122 to 125 inclusive, and 131
to 135 inclusive of this Specification. No Rental charges will be paid for
Engineer’s houses during winter month, when the accommodation is vacated
and consultants demobilized to resume the work in next.
(b) Item: Engineer's offices
Unit: m2-month
The unit of measurement for Engineer's offices shall be m2-month (m2
multiplying by month). The quantity shall be calculated in no. of office, internal
floor area of each office in m2 and, duration of month instructed to be
provided.
The rate for the Engineers offices shall include for the cost of providing the
offices and supplying electricity, air conditioning water, sewerage and
communications facilities including all telephone including internet facility and
facsimile charges in accordance with the requirements of Clauses 101 to 120
inclusive, 122 to 125 inclusive, and 131 to 136 inclusive of this Specification.
(c) Item: Site laboratories
Unit: m2-month
The unit of measurement for the Site laboratories shall be m2-month (m2
multiplying by month). The quantity shall be calculated in no. of Site
laboratory, internal floor area of each Site laboratory in m2, and duration of
month instructed to be provided.

Section 100. General 1-59


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The rate for the Site laboratories shall include for the cost of providing the
laboratories, electricity, water, sewerage, and air conditioning in accordance
with the requirements of Clauses 101 to 120 inclusive, 122 to 125 inclusive,
and 131 to 136 inclusive of this Specification.
(d) Item: Furniture and equipment for the Engineer's offices
Unit: Lump Sum
Reimbursement for the purchase of furniture and equipment for Engineer's
offices shall be on a Lump Sum basis. Reimbursement shall be made for the
purchase of those items scheduled in Sub-Clauses 131 (b) (i) (A), (B), (C) and
(E) of this Specification only. All other obligations in respect of the provision of
equipment and services for the Engineer's offices in accordance with this
Specification shall be deemed to be covered elsewhere in the Contractor's
rates and prices.
(e) Item: Furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories
Unit: Lump Sum
Reimbursement for the purchase of furniture and equipment for the Site
laboratories shall be on a Lump Sum basis. Reimbursement shall be made for
the purchase of those items scheduled in Sub-Clause 131 (b) (ii) (A) and Sub-
Clauses 131 (b) (ii) (B) (1), (2), (3) and (4) of this Specification only. All other
obligations in respect of the provision of equipment and services for the Site
laboratories in accordance with this Specification shall be deemed to be
covered elsewhere in the Contractor's rates and prices.
(f) Item: Maintenance of services, furniture and equipment including
communications and supply of stationery for the Engineer's offices
Unit: month
The unit of measurement for maintenance of furniture and equipment for the
Engineer's offices shall be month. The quantity shall be calculated in no. of
month instructed to be maintained.
The rate for maintenance of furniture and equipment for the Engineer's offices
shall include for the cost of maintenance, running services and related
supplies of those items scheduled in Sub-Clauses 131 (b) (i) (A), (B), (C) and
(D) and in accordance with the requirements of Clauses 131 and 134 of this
Specification. The maintenance of office equipments includes recharging
coupon (limited to US$ 50 for continuous functioning of mobile.
(g) Item: Maintenance of services, furniture and equipment including
communications and supply of stationery, computer supplies and other
consumables for the Site laboratories
Unit: month
The unit of measurement for maintenance of furniture and equipment for the
Site laboratories shall be month. The quantity shall be calculated in no. of
month instructed to be maintained.
The rate for maintenance of furniture and equipment for the Site laboratories
and Engineer's offices shall include for the cost of maintenance, running
services, related supplies and consumables of those items scheduled in Sub-
Clause 131 (b) (ii) (A) and Sub-Clauses 131 (b) (ii) (B) (1), (2), (3) and (4) and
in accordance with the requirements of Clauses 131 and 134 of this
Specification. The rate shall include the cost of providing laboratory
technicians and helpers as directed by the Engineer.

Section 100. General 1-60


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(h) Item: Inspection huts


Unit: hut-month
The unit of measurement for Inspection huts shall be hut-month (hut
multiplying by month). The quantity shall be calculated in no. of hut and
duration of month instructed to be provided.
The rate for each Inspection hut shall include for the cost of providing,
furnishing and maintaining for the duration of the working months only spread
over the Contract period in accordance with the Sub-Clause 131 (a) (iv) and
also the requirements of Clauses 101 to 120 inclusive, 122 to 125 inclusive
and 131 to 136 inclusive of this Specification.
(i) Item: New Vehicles for the Engineer
Unit: no.
If a vehicle requires to be replaced before traveling the number of kilometres
owing to theft or accident or any other cause, the cost of providing any such
replacement shall be deemed to be fully recoverable from the Contractor’s
fully comprehensive insurance policy of those vehicles that is a requirement of
Clause 137 of this Specification and no separate payment shall be made.
Upon completion of the Works, the ownership of any item provided and
reimbursed shall revert to the Employer.
If contractor fails to provide the vehicle or services the Engineer will notify to
the contractor and take the facility from the market for such period and the
cost incurred in this account shall be debited to the contractor.
(j) Item: Kilometre traveled by vehicles for the Engineer
Unit: veh-km for each type of vehicle
Payment shall be made for each vehicle-kilometre traveled by the vehicles for
the Engineer as measured from the odometer of each vehicle.
The rate for each kilometre traveled shall include for the costs of complying
with the requirements of Sub-Clause 137 (a) of this Specification.
(k) Item: Kilometre traveled by rented vehicles for the Engineer
Unit: veh-km for each type of vehicle
The rate for each vehicle-kilometre traveled shall include for the costs of
complying with the requirements of Sub-Clause 137 (b) of this Specification.
If contractor fails to provide the vehicle or services the Engineer will notify to
the contractor and take the facility from the market for such period and the
cost incurred in this account shall be debited to the contractor.
(l) Item: Project signboards
Unit: no.
The unit measurement for signboards shall be the number instructed.
The rate for signboards shall include for the cost of complying with Clause
130 of this Specification.
(m) Item: Maintenance of existing road sections (including providing
Maintenance of existing roads deviations thereto as required) for passage of
traffic
Unit: km

Section 100. General 1-61


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The unit payment for this item for maintenance of existing roads shall be the
kilometer. The length shall be measured by the Engineer in the presence of
the Contractor to the nearest 0.1 km along the centerline of the existing road.
Measurement and payment shall only be made for those lengths of road
where maintenance were instructed by and carried out to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The rate for this item maintenance of existing road shall include for the costs
of complying with all the requirements of Sub-Clauses 115-3(i) and (ii) and
Section 100 of this Specification for the entire duration of construction with the
exception of gravel surfacing for deviations which shall be measured and paid
for separately under Section 400 of this Specification.
Payment for maintenance of existing roads shall be made in accordance with
the following conditions:
80% of the sum total amount shall be paid in equal monthly installments
calculated over the period from the commencement of the Contract to the due
date for completion (taking into account any extension of the completion date)
pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.2 of the Conditions of Contract and the Appendix to
Bid.
Such monthly payments shall be withheld in respect of those portions of the
existing roads (including deviations thereto) which are not maintained by the
Contractor for passage of traffic according to the requirements of 115-3(i) and
(ii), as determined by the Engineer. Further, to make up for the Contractor’s
default, if any, in this respect, the Engineer shall be entitled to get the required
maintenance of existing roads (including deviations thereto) carried out
through another agency and the cost so incurred shall be recoverable from
the payments due to the Contractor.
The remaining 20% of the amount shall be paid to the Contractor after the
date of the issue of the Taking Over Certificate in respect of those lengths of
the existing road for which it is decided by the Engineer deemed to cover the
Contractor’s obligations in respect of maintenance of existing roads in
accordance with Sub-Clause 115-3(i) of this Specification. Part, all or none of
that portion shall be paid, entirely at his the arbitrary discretion, that the
existing road (including deviations thereto) were maintained by the Contractor
for the passage of traffic for the full period of construction and according to
the requirements of Sub-Clauses 115-3(i) and (ii) the Engineer, in
consideration of the Contractor's performance in respect of maintenance of
existing roads, when the Contractor has been notified that the maintenance is
no longer required,
(n) Item: Construction and maintenance of deviations
Unit: km
The unit for construction and maintenance of deviations shall be the
kilometer. The length shall be measured by the Engineer in the presence of
the Contractor to the nearest 0.1 km along the centreline of the deviation.
Measurement and payment shall be made only for the construction of those
lengths of deviation that were instructed by and constructed and maintained
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No payment shall be made for those
sections where the passage of public traffic is accommodated on existing
roads.
The rate for construction and maintenance of deviations shall include for the
cost of complying with all the requirements of Sub-Clause 115-3 (ii) and

Section 100. General 1-62


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Sections 100, 200 and 300 of this Specification.


Payment for construction and maintenance of deviations shall be made in
accordance with the following conditions:
(i) 50% of the amount for construction and maintenance of deviations shall
become payable on construction and formal acceptance of deviations by the
Engineer of a completed section and accesses thereto,
(ii) 25% of the amount shall be deemed to cover the Contractor’s obligations
in respect of maintenance of deviations in accordance with Sub-Clause 115-3
(ii) (f) of this Specification. Part, all or none of that portion shall be paid,
entirely at the arbitrary discretion of the Engineer, in consideration of the
Contractor's performance in respect of maintenance of deviations, when the
Contractor has been notified that the deviation is no longer required,
(iii) the remaining 25% shall be paid when the deviation has been
reinstated in accordance with Sub-Clause 115-3 (ii) (e) of this Specification
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
No measurement and payment is admissible under section 115-2 against
setting out.
(p) Item: Environmental Monitoring Unit: L.S.
Reimbursement shall be made to comply the requirements of clause 140.

Section 100. General 1-63


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Annexure 100
LIST OF MNS STANDARDS

MNS 842:2006 Concrete for roads and guardrails

MNS 1593: 2002 Road concrete deck


MNS 5682: 2006 Road structures. Road path for pedestrian and handicapped
MNS 5683: 2006 Road structures. Road path for bicyclists
MNS 1592: 2002 Asphalt concrete mixture
MNS 2185: 2002 Bitumen -mineral mixture for highways and airports
MNS 2413: 1977 Asphalt concrete mixture for highways and airport runways,
method of testing
MNS 2795: 2002 Mineral powder for asphalt concrete. Method of testing
MNS 4912: 2000 Road structure products. Concrete posts for roads
sings and guard posts.
MNS 5210: 2002 Material for road structures. Method for determining
temperature when bitumen becomes fragile.
MNS 5284: 2003 Checking the soil moisture by fast method
MNS 4597:2003 Road Signs
MNS 0974:2008 Portland Cement
MNS 4759:2003 Road Markings

Section 100. General 1-64


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 200 - SITE CLEARANCE

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 200 - SITE CLEARANCE

201 SITE CLEARANCE 2-3

(a) General 2-3

(b) Clearing, except trees 2-3

(c) Removal of trees 2-3

202 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL 2-4

203 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES, FENCES AND 2-4


OBSTRUCTIONS

204 PROTECTION OF FENCES, TREES AND HEDGES 2-4

205 SHIFT/RAISING OF OVERHEAD COMMUNICATION LINES 2-4


AND ELECTRIC LINES

206 CONSTRUCTION OF WELLS 2-4

207 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2-4

(a) Item: Site clearance 2-4

(b) Item: Shifting/raising of overhead communication and 2-5


electric poles and lines

(c) Item: Removal of existing flexible pavement 2-5

(d) Item: Shifting of Ovoo 2-5


(e) Item: Construction and Commissioning 2-5
(f) Item: Construction of Railway Crossing 2-5
(g) Item: Raising and Shifting of Electrical /Telephone Poles 2-6

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

201 SITE CLEARANCE


(a) General
Site clearance is defined as the clearing, grubbing, removal and disposal of all
obstructions, vegetation, grass, debris, topsoil, scrub, bushes, trees, hedges,
undergrowth, stumps, roots, shrubs, plants and the backfilling and treatment of
holes ensuring from the removal of stumps and roots.
During the Site clearance and disposal of debris the Contractor shall take full
care to ensure that public or private properties are not damaged/affected and the
traffic is not interrupted.
The areas over which site clearance is to be carried out shall be as shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also carry out site clearance over the areas of camps,
quarries, borrow areas, stockpile areas and spoil areas, and other working areas
as instructed by the Engineer. These areas shall not qualify for payment.
The Engineer may give instructions that specific trees, stumps or objects shall
not be removed during the site clearance operation. The Contractor shall take all
precautions necessary to ensure that public or private properties are not
damaged during Site clearance and if any such damage is caused, the
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for making good such damages.
Site clearance shall include stripping of topsoil for a depth upto 150 mm and
compacting to 90 % AASHTO-T 180 as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Clearing, except trees
Where Site clearance is instructed by the Engineer, all cleared material shall be
subject to the provisions of Sub-Clause 4.23 of the Conditions of Contract. The
Contractor shall remove and dispose of spoil materials without infringing on
environmental requirements or causing public or private nuisance. Spoil areas
shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of Section 300 of this
Specification.
If the Contractor clears the Site in advance of the main Works and any
vegetation re-grows prior to the commencement of the main Works, all additional
Site clearance required shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
(c) Removal of trees
Any trees requiring to be cut down as part of site clearance shall not be so cut
down without the prior approval of the Engineer.
Where the Engineer instructs that site clearance is required, trees designated for
removal shall be uprooted or cut down as near to ground level as possible and
shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of Sub-
Clause 201 (b) of this Specification. Provided that, the Engineer may instruct
that the trunks and large branches of certain trees shall be cut into convenient
lengths and stacked neatly off the line of the road. Such timber shall become the
property of the Employer and shall be preserved and protected by the Contractor
until removed by the Employer or until the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
Stumps and tree roots shall be grubbed up and disposed of by the Contractor.
All holes arising from the removal of stumps and roots shall be backfilled with
approval material compacted to 90% MDD (AASHTO T180) up to the existing
ground level or up to formation level if the area is in cut.

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

202 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL


From areas earmarked for Site clearance and as part of site clearance, the
Contractor shall remove topsoil upto 150 mm depth and compacting to 90 %
AASHTO-T 180 density as directed by the Engineer.
In the event that the Contractor strips topsoil to depths greater than specified, he
shall replace the excess depth of stripping with full material at his own cost.
203 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES, FENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
Where shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
demolish wholly or in part, remove and dispose of buildings, foundations, pipe and
timber culverts, fences and any other artificial obstructions including removal or
shifting of monuments, ovoo and other structures.
The Contractor shall carefully take down such buildings, structures, culverts, fences
and the like and the components shall be dismantled, cleaned and stacked in
separate heaps. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer are not fit for re-
use shall be removed from the Site by the Contractor and carted to designated spoil
areas in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 201 (b) of this Specification.
All materials which in the opinion of the Engineer are re-useable shall remain the
property of the Employer and shall be preserved and protected by the Contractor
until removed by the Employer or until the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
Voids resulting from the removal of such buildings, foundations, culverts, structures,
fences and any other artificial obstructions from below ground shall be backfilled and
compacted in accordance with the requirements of Clause 300 of this Specification.
204 PROTECTION OF FENCES, TREES AND HEDGES
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect from damage any
existing paths, fences, walls, hedges, trees, shrubs, lawns and other features that the
Engineer instructs to remain undisturbed by the execution of the Works. If any
damage should occur as a result of the Contractor’s failure to take adequate
preventative measures, then repairs and reparations shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
205 SHIFT/RAISING OF OVERHEAD COMMUNICATION LINES AND
ELECTRIC LINES

The Contractor shall shift and/or raise overhead communication lines and electric
lines in accordance with regulations and standards being followed in Mongolia.

The Contractor shall be paid expenses for shift/raising of overhead communication


lines and electric lines only directed by the Engineer.

206 CONSTRUCTION OF WELLS

The Contractor shall construct wells for the purpose of construction works in
accordance with regulations and standards being followed in Mongolia at his own
cost.

The Contractor shall be paid expenses for the construction of community drinking
water Wells, only directed by the Engineer.

207 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


(a) Item: Site clearance

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Unit: ha
The unit of measurement for Site clearance (except structure) within the road
reserve shall be the hectare measured as the product of the width within the
road reserve and the length of road instructed to be carried out.
Notwithstanding the existence of steep cut slopes and fill slopes this area shall
be measured in plan.
The site clearance over the areas for camps, quarries, borrow areas, stockpiles,
spoil areas and access roads thereto, ditches and drains and all other areas
shall be deemed to be included elsewhere in the Contractor’s rates and prices.
The rate for Site clearance shall include for the costs of:
x clearing, grubbing, removal and disposal of all obstructions, vegetation,
grass, debris, scrub, bushes, hedge etc.,
x stripping of topsoil upto a depth of 150 mm as per direction and
compacting to 90 % AASHTO-T 180.
x cutting of trees of all girths including removal of stumps and roots,
x all hauls as necessary,
x full compensation for all labour, material, tools, equipment and incidentals
required to complete the operation,
x complying with the requirements of Clauses 201, 202, 203 and 204 of this
Specification.
(b) Item: Removal of existing flexible pavement
Unit: m3
The rate includes removal of bituminous surface and compacting final
ground to 98% MDD AASHTO T180
(c) Item: Shifting of Ovoo including expenses for all sorts of religious
performances, labor and equipment.
Unit: no
(d) Item: Construction and Commissioning of Community Drinking Water Well
Unit: m
Each well shall be deemed to supply full year water supply including
making necessary provision against winter freezing. The wells shall be
complete in all respects with its housing, electrical unit pump and pipe
fitting with taps.
Unit
(i) First 30 m m
(ii) Additional depth from 30 m to 40m m
(iii) Additional depth from 40m to 50m m
(iv) Additional depth from 50 m to 60m m
(v) Additional depth above 60m m

(e) Item: Construction of railway crossing


Unit: provisional sum plus % of contractors profit
The reimbursement shall be made on producing necessary receipts in
proof of payment made.
(f) Item: Raising and shifting of electrical/telephone poles.

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Unit: provisional sum plus % of contractors profit


The reimbursement shall be made on producing necessary receipts in
proof of payment made.

Section 200. Site Clearance 2-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 300 - SOURCES OF MATERIALS AND EARTHWORK

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 300 – SOURCES OF MATERIALS AND EARTHWORK

301 SOURCE OF MATERIAL 3-4

302 DEFINITIONS 3-4

303 PROVISION OF LAND 3-4

304 ENTRY UPON LAND 3-6

305 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 3-6

306 ACCESS TRACKS 3-7

307 CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF OVERBURDEN 3-7

308 MIXING, SELECTING AND STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS 3-7

309 MATERIAL UTILISATION 3-8

310 EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE 3-8

311 PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 3-8

312 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION MATERIAL 3-9

313 PREPARATION PRIOR TO FORMING EMBANKMENTS 3-9

314 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS AND NON-FROST


SUBGRADE 3-10

(a) Construction of embankments/ Bed Preparation in Cut Section 3-10

(b) Backfilling material for bridges and culverts 3-10

(c) Frost resistant material 3-11

315 ROCKFILL TO SWAMPS AND MARSHY GROUND 3-12

316 COMPACTION OF EARTHWORKS 3-13

317 SPOIL MATERIAL 3-14

318 BORROW AREAS AND REINSTATEMENT 3-14

319 TRIMMING OF SLOPES 3-15

320 SIDE DRAINS 3-15

321 UNSTABLE MATERIAL IN CUT SLOPES 3-15

322 MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT 3-15

(a-i) Item: Embankment construction using materials from borrow areas 3-16

(a-ii) Item: Embankment construction using materials from roadway


excavation 3-17

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(b) Item: Common excavation to spoil 3-17

(c-i) Item: Soft rock excavation 3-17

(c-ii) Item: Hard rock excavation 3-18

(d) Item: Loosening and re-compaction 3-18

(e) Item: Non Frost Subgrade 3-18

(f) Item: Rockfill to swamps 3-19

(g) Item: Turf laying 3-19

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

301 SOURCE OF MATERIAL


The Contractor shall select the sources of aggregate for concrete works, bituminous
pavement works, graded crushed stone base, stone masonry, riprap, rock fill to
swamps etc. Such sources shall be designated as quarries and are defined in
Clause 302 (a) of this Specification.
The Contractor shall select the sources of natural materials for fill material in the
construction of embankments and gravel for subbase, wearing course, haul roads
and shoulders. Such sources shall be designated as borrow areas and are defined
in Clause 302 (b) of this Specification. The environmental related issues are the sole
responsibility of the contractor and they have to abide by the National environment
requirement including Section 1200 of this specification
The Employer shall not be held liable for the quality and suitability of any material in
any of the quarries or borrow areas identified in the Engineer's report on materials.
Although that document may have been made available to Bidders by the Employer
during the Bid period, it does not constitute part of the Bid documents. The
Contractor shall be held solely responsible for any conclusions that he may draw
from the Engineer's report on materials including their lead in transportation from
source to the site.
302 DEFINITIONS
(a) A quarry is an open surface working from which stone is removed by drilling and
blasting or excavated by any other means for use in the Works.
(b) A borrow area is a site from which materials, other than stone, are removed for
use in the Works.
(c) A stockpile area is a site upon which materiel such as topsoil, fill material, gravel
or aggregate is temporarily heaped prior to its incorporation in the Works.
(d) A spoil area is a site upon which surplus or unsuitable materials arising out of
the Works are spread and disposed of. Surplus or unsuitable material shall not
be placed within the road reserve without the prior written approval of Engineer.
303 PROVISION OF LAND
The Employer shall make available free of charge to the Contractor and be
responsible for the acquisition of all land required for the road reserve (right-of-way)
in accordance with Section 100 of this Specification.
The acquisition of all land required for:
x borrow, stockpile and spoil areas and quarries,
x access roads thereto,
x deviations outside the road reserve,
x the Site laboratory,
x the Engineer's residential and office accommodation,
x the Contractor's camps, offices, stores, workshops, houses, etc.,
x Temporary Works, or,
x any other purpose
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that any
national or local laws and regulations pertaining to locating and exploiting quarries
and borrow areas are satisfied.
The location and size of quarries, borrow areas, spoil areas and stockpile areas

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

proposed by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the location of any proposed quarry, borrow area,
spoil area or stockpile area, or access track to them, should:
x have a potentially detrimental effect on the environment,
x be in or too near an urban centre,
x require an access road that is excessively long,
x cover too large an area,
x constitute a risk to the safety of the public,
x be more distant than another source of suitable material or area,
x result in the obstruction or disruption of existing watercourses or water supplies,
the Engineer's approval may be withheld.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing at least 28 days in advance of any
work being undertaken in each particular quarry, borrow area, spoil area or stockpile
area.
Prospecting will be done prior to such notification and the Contractor shall inform
landowners and get permission from the landowners at least 7 days before
prospecting takes place. The Contractor shall complete all necessary negotiations
with the owners of the land upon which any quarry, borrow area, spoil area or
stockpile area is to be located and shall compensate the owners directly in respect of
royalties, buildings to be demolished or loss of crops to which landowners may be
entitled in accordance with current ordinances.
The Contractor shall also be liable for any taxes, duties, levies and other statutory
payments in respect of land use or the extraction of materials or water.
Prior to the submission of written notice to the Engineer the Contractor shall set out
each quarry, borrow area, spoil area and stockpile area with concrete beacons
clearly identifying the areas required for working areas, stockpile areas, blasting
safety zones and access routes. The Contractor's written notice shall include the
following for each quarry, borrow area, stockpile area and spoil area:
(a) details of the route of the access track proposed,
(b) a plan at 1:500 scale in ink on a stable transparent material giving details of:
x plot boundaries, geometric dimensions,
x owners' names and addresses,
x local details such as buildings, fences, graves, types and areas of
cultivation and, services, all agreed with the land owners, and,
x areas to be used for working areas, stockpile areas, blasting safety zones,
etc
(c) Authorization from the owner and competent national/local authorities indicating
permission to occupy and use the land .
Where a quarry, borrow area, spoil area or stockpile area has insufficient suitable
material or area for the use for which it was intended, the Contractor shall propose in
writing that either an existing quarry, borrow area, spoil area or stockpile area be
extended or that a new quarry, borrow area, spoil area or stockpile area shall be
opened.
The approval and acquisition of such new or extended quarries, borrow areas, spoil

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

areas or stockpile areas shall be in accordance with all the provisions of this Clause
303 of the Specification.
304 ENTRY UPON LAND
The Contractor shall, before entering upon any land provided by the Employer,
satisfy himself that legal rights of entry have been obtained including environmental
clearance.
The Contractor shall not enter any area without the Engineer's written approval.
305 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall comply with the bye-laws of the Local Authority regarding public
health and safety in respect of the operation of quarries, borrow areas, stockpile
areas and spoil areas, and in the absence of, or in addition to such bye-laws, shall
comply with the following conditions:
(a) All areas being worked shall be drained and kept dried. Where a quarry or
borrow area has been excavated such that it will not drain naturally, it shall be
continually pumped dry while being used. Where instructed by the Engineer, on
completion such depressions may be left to form a reservoir for livestock
drinking water. In which case slopes shall be graded back to a slope flatter than
1 in 6 to facilitate access by livestock.
(b) Such areas shall not encompass or be located within or adjacent to
watercourses, settlements or urban areas.
(c) Such areas shall not be located within the boundaries of:
x Strictly Protected Areas,
x National Conservation Parks,
x Peripheral Zones,
x Nature Reserves,
x Monuments,
x Strict Zone Forests,
x Water Zones.
Spoil areas shall be located at least 500 m away from the forest areas and it
shall not contaminate any water sources like rivers, streams, waterways, drains,
watercourses, lakes etc.
The Contractor shall confine his operations solely to the areas provided and
shall demarcate the boundary of the area and erect temporary or permanent
boundary fencing as instructed by the Engineer.
(f) Where the height of any face exceeds 1 metre, the Contractor shall provide,
erect and maintain at his own expense temporary livestock-proof fencing and
gates to prevent unauthorized access to the top of the working face.
(g) On completion of work all faces shall be battered back and neatly trimmed to a
slope flatter than 1 in 6.
(h) On completion of work temporary fences and all temporary structures shall be
demolished and removed, all latrine pits shall be filled in and drained, topsoil
shall be spread and watered and the Site shall be left neat and tidy.
(i) The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent the discharge of any
operational pollutants, including, but not limited to, suspended sediments,
solutes and oils, into ground water or surface drainage systems.

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(j) On completion of work all quarries, borrow areas, spoil and stockpile areas shall
be reinstated such that they represent neither a visual intrusion upon the
landscape nor a hazard to the public and livestock. Slopes shall be stable and
provided with topsoil that shall be regularly watered to promote the growth of
covering vegetation. Land drainage, as far as in the opinion of the Engineer is
practicable, shall be restored to its original state.
306 ACCESS TRACKS
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost for the construction and maintenance of
access tracks and existing roads to quarries, borrow areas, spoil areas and stockpile
areas.
307 CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF OVERBURDEN
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall clear the sites of all
existing quarries, borrow areas, stockpile areas, spoil areas and access tracks
thereto in accordance with the provisions of Section 200 of this Specification, no
measurement and payment will be made for this work.
All existing fences, trees, hedges and other features that the Engineer instructs shall
not be removed or disturbed shall be protected in accordance with the requirements
of Section 200 of this Specification.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall remove topsoil and/or
overburden from quarries, borrow areas, spoil areas, stockpile areas and access
tracks thereto. The Engineer shall direct whether topsoil shall be stripped and
stockpiled separately or shall be excavated together with the overburden. The
Engineer may direct that either topsoil or overburden, if it should prove suitable, be
used in the Works.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in heaps not exceeding 1 m in height. The sides of topsoil
heaps shall be fully terraced to prevent surface water run-off and to harvest rainfall.
The Contractor shall regularly water topsoil heaps as required to promote the re-
establishment of covering vegetation and prevent loss of topsoil by wind erosion.
On completion of work in any quarry, borrow area, spoil area or stockpile area any
overburden and/or topsoil that has not been used in the Works shall be pushed back,
spread and landscaped over the area of the quarry, borrow area, spoil area, stockpile
area or access track thereto. Where topsoil has been stockpiled separately it shall
be held back in reserve for spreading over such areas after landscaping.
308 MIXING, SELECTING AND STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS
The Engineer shall instruct the Contractor as to the type of material to be excavated
and the areas and depths to be worked.
For attaining the specified grading, the Contractor may be required to mix materials
obtained from natural sources using appropriate mechanical equipment such as
bulldozer, grader, loading shovel, rotavator etc . Such materials shall be thoroughly
mixed into a homogeneous composition and formed into stockpiles at least 21 days
before intended use.
The Contractor shall ensure that oversize materials and unacceptable material
components such as , clay, humus or other inferior or deleterious material
encountered in the workings is separated from the suitable materials proposed for
use in the Works. Such undesirable material shall be removed to spoil. Within each
borrow area separate stockpiles shall be used for each type and grading of material.
When removing material from stockpiles, none of the underlying material shall be
mixed with it, and generally at least the bottom 100 mm layer shall be left behind.

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Should any stockpiles prove surplus to requirements the Contractor shall spread the
material over the area of the quarry or borrow area unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer.
309 MATERIAL UTILISATION
The requirements for materials from borrow areas for the Construction of the
Permanent Works shall take precedence over any requirements the Contractor may
have in respect of other works. Where the Contractor requires material from a borrow
area, for the construction of access roads, deviations, detours, haul roads, camps,
Temporary Works or for any other works not forming part of the Permanent Works he
shall require the approval of the Engineer.
310 EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE
This Section covers all excavation of cuttings, which for the purposes of this Section
shall include side drains and benches, the placing and compaction of fill material in
embankments, ground compaction, the formation of the non-frost subgrade,
excavation and rock fill to swamps, and, turfing.
311 PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

Site clearance, grubbing and topsoil stripping, as instructed by the Engineer, shall be
performed by the Contractor prior to commencing earthworks construction. All
earthworks shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer to the specified slopes, levels, depths, widths, tolerances and heights. Any
earthworks not so constructed shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
expense.

The Contractor shall excavate cuttings and place fill in embankments in accordance
with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Only suitable excavated materials
shall be used to form embankments. Any material, that in the opinion of the Engineer
is considered undesirable, shall be deemed to be unsuitable for the construction of
embankment fills. Unsuitable material shall include but not be limited to:
y material containing more than 2% of organic matter such as topsoil, material
from swamps, peat, logs, stumps or any other perishable material,
y flammable material,
y material with a swell of more than 2.5%,
y material containing clays with a Liquid Limit exceeding 45% or Plasticity Index
exceeding 20%.
y boulder, rock fragments and other lumpy material exceeding 75mm in size,
weathered rock, volcanic material

Excess or unsuitable material shall be disposed of only in designated spoil areas


which shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of Section 300 of this
Specification.

Where fill material can be obtained from cuttings, the Contractor shall use this
material before taking material from a borrow pit, unless he is instructed by the
Engineer to take suitable material to spoil. The Contractor shall dispose of unsuitable
or excess suitable excavated material in designated tip areas.

Where the quantity of material required for embankments exceeds that available from
cuttings, the Contractor shall be instructed by the Engineer to widen cuttings and/or
to open borrow areas.

At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not damaged by weather

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

or traffic. If such damage should occur the Engineer may withdraw approval from the
affected Works until the Contractor has carried out remedial works such that the
requirements of this Specification are met., including protection to earth slopes by
turfing or other means where so provided for. The expenses of all such remedial
works and any consequential additional testing requirements shall be borne by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide adequate supervision to ensure that only suitable
materials are incorporated in embankment fills. If any unsuitable materials should be
included it shall be removed and replaced with suitable material at the expense of the
Contractor.

All trimming of cuttings, embankments, side drains, and shoulders to the specified
slopes and shapes shall be carried out concurrently with the earthworks that are
being carried out at that particular location and level.

312 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION MATERIAL

Roadway excavation material shall be classified in the following categories:


(a) Common excavation
Common excavation shall comprise all excavated material other than hard rock
excavation and pavement excavation.
Common excavation shall include waterlogged and swampy material.
(b) Hard rock excavation/soft rock excavation
Hard rock excavation shall comprise hard rock requiring blasting or the use of
hydraulic breaking equipment before removal by excavation, as determined by
the engineer.
The rates for hard rock excavation shall be deemed to include for excavation by
any means as the circumstances require.

Where excavation contains individual boulders greater than 0.75 m³ each in


volume then such boulders shall be classified as hard rock excavation. Solid
boulders less than 0.75 m³ by volume encountered shall be deemed to be
common excavation.

Hard rock material shall not be placed within 600 mm of the formation level in
embankments and shall be removed to a depth of 300 mm or as otherwise
instructed by the Engineer below formation level in cuttings. Further crushing to
aggregate size and finding them suitable for cement concrete work (i.e. Los
Angeles Abrasion less than 30) would confirm hard-rock characteristics.
Alternatively, provision of clause 602 need to checked.

When the ripped lumps crumble to 150mm and smaller under hydraulic rippers,
such material shall be treated as soft rock provided the Section 602
classification is satisfied.

The classification of materials encountered shall be agreed by the Engineer's


Representative and the Contractor as the Works proceed. The use of
explosives for excavation shall not in its self serve as an axiomatic classification
of a material as rock excavation unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, blasting
is clearly necessary to make excavation possible. In the event of a dispute over
the classification of material the ruling of the Engineer shall be final and binding.

313 PREPARATION PRIOR TO FORMING EMBANKMENTS

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall excavate benches in natural ground having a cross-slope


greater than 20% or as instructed by the Engineer. The existing slopes, after the
removal of topsoil shall be benched in accordance with the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. An initial bench at the toe of the fill shall be cut of sufficient
dimensions to permit the operation of placing and compaction equipment. Each
subsequent bench shall be cut as the fill is compacted and built up. The material that
is excavated to form benches shall either be taken to spoil or, if considered suitable
by the Engineer, used as fill. The bench heights will be 200 to 300 mm, as further
instructed by the Engineer.

The existing ground under embankments and bench surfaces shall be tested for FDD
(AASHTO T191) and if this is less than 90% of MDD (AASHTO T180), it shall be
scarified and compacted over the full width of construction to 90% MDD (AASHTO
T180) to a depth of 150 mm or more, if directed by the Engineer. The existing ground
moisture content shall be adjusted prior to compaction by either uniformly mixing in
water or drying out the material such that at the time of compaction the moisture
content shall be within the range 2% above and below of the Optimum Moisture
Content (AASHTO T180). No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for
the construction of benching and initial compaction of 90% density.

Whenever the existing ground is, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable for
receiving fill, the Contractor shall excavate to the depth instructed by the Engineer,
remove the material to a spoil area and replace it with suitable material.
314 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS AND NON-FROST SUBGRADE

(a) Construction of embankments/ Bed Preparation in Cut Section


Material obtained from roadway cuttings shall be used to construct
embankments unless such material is unsuitable. Material from borrow areas
shall be used only where the Contractor has demonstrated and the Engineer
agreed that there is insufficient suitable material obtainable from cuttings.
Material shall not be deemed to be unsuitable solely because it is wet. Wet
material shall be harrowed and allowed to dry until it reaches a moisture
content complying with the requirements of this Specification.
In addition to the requirements stated in Clause 311 of these Specifications fill
material with either:
x CBR greater than 15 % of 4-days soaking (AASHTO T-193) – on 98 %
MDD (AASHTO T-180)
x a MDD (AASHTO T180) less than 1.75 t/m³, or
x a percentage passing the 0.075mm sieve greater than 45% by dry mass
shall not be incorporated in embankments.
All material fractions larger than 75 mm shall be excluded from fill material for
use in embankments unless otherwise provided for elsewhere in this
Specification.
The existing ground after cutting shall be tested to ensure 90% MDD T180 by
proper compaction if so required. This activity is incidental to the rate of
construction of upper layer (Non frost subgrade etc)
(b) Backfilling material for bridges and culverts
Backfill for bridges and culverts shall be selected fill material and shall
meet the following requirements:

a) The plasticity index (PI) shall not exceed 7%.

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

b) The liquid limit (LL) shall not exceed 30%.


c) The percentage passing the 0.075mm sieve shall not exceed 8% by
dry mass.

(c) Frost resistant material


Non-frost subgrade shall be a layer of selected fill 300mm thick, or of such
thickness as instructed by the Engineer, interposed between the bottom of the
pavement structure and the top of the formation in embankment or cutting.
Non-frost subgrade material shall have the following characteristics :
x CBR greater than 20% measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix
compacted to 98% MDD (AASHTO T180),
x swell (during soaking in CBR Test) of less than 1 %,
x Plasticity Index of less than 9%,
x Liquid Limit of less than 25%,
x Plasticity Product of less than 90,
x MDD (AASHTO T180) not less than 1.85 t/m³,
x percentage passing the75 μm sieve less than 10% by weight, and,
x maximum particle size less than 60 mm.

The original ground in cutting occupying the elevation corresponding to that of the
non-frost subgrade shall be tested at representative locations (minimum 2 locations
for every 400 m², if length of cut is less than 100m the frequency of test locations
shall be determined by the Engineer) to determine the suitability with respect to the
above-mentioned characteristics. If suitable in all respects, the original ground may
be treated as the non-frost subgrade. If material is suitable except for in-situ density
being less than 98% MDD (AASHTO T180), the original ground may be thoroughly
loosened for 300mm depth and recompacted to 98% MDD (AASHTO T180). If not
meeting any of these criteria, the original ground for 300mm depth shall be replaced
by selected earth material (CBR not less than 15) satisfying all the required criteria.
The compacted layer thickness shall be 150 mm or less.

Fill materials shall be well-graded to the extent that during Site trials they exhibit no
loosening, instability or other compaction difficulties.
Fill materials containing fraction sizes larger than 75 mm but less than 250 mm but
otherwise not unsuitable specified in Clause 311 will be termed as hard fill materials
and can be used for forming layers 1.5m or lower below non-frost subgrade in high
embankments subject to the requirements stipulated in Clauses 315. Engineer shall
consider properties of material to be used, capability of Contractor’s equipment and
procedures demonstrated by site trials while giving approval for this work to the
Contractor.

The Contractor shall ensure that earthworks proceed towards completion in an


orderly and continuous manner. The Contractor shall submit a written request for
approval of any layer at least 48 hours before he intends to cover a completed layer
and shall afford the Engineer adequate time to complete his Quality Assurance
obligations. The Contractor shall not commence the covering of any compacted layer
until he has been granted written clearance to proceed by the Engineer. Fill material
for subsequent layers shall be placed immediately upon approval of the previous
layer.

If any layer should be left unprotected for more than 24 hours subsequent to approval

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

by the Engineer, the layer shall again be subject to approval by the Engineer and the
Contractor shall again submit a request for approval of that layer. Fill material in
embankments shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted depth
unless, as a result of compaction trials, the Contractor has satisfied the Engineer that
his method of working consistently attains the specified densities at a greater depth.
The absolute maximum permissible depth of compacted layers shall be 250 mm.
Each layer shall extend over the full width of the embankment and shall be
compacted in accordance with Clause 316 of this Specification.

In forming embankments, the Contractor shall make due allowance in height and
width for consolidation, compaction of existing ground, settlement and shrinkage. Any
consolidation, settlement, punching of material into the underlying layer, or shrinkage
during the construction of embankments shall be rectified by the Contractor by
providing, placing and compacting approved fill material to reinstate each layer to the
instructed level and width and shall be at the Contractor's expense.
During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct traffic
so that any vehicle does not ply on unprotected surface for any compacted earthwork
layer. If it is necessary for Contractor’s construction equipments to ply on the
embankment the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the
passage of construction traffic is distributed uniformly over the full embankment
width. If any compacted earthwork layer should become deformed or otherwise
damaged due to the passage of traffic, the Contractor shall scarify and recompact
such a layer to the requirements of this Specification and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer before undertaking the construction of any covering layer. Fill material shall
not be stockpiled on embankments without the express permission of the Engineer.
When constructing embankments up to bridges and up to and over culverts, the
Contractor shall raise the embankment equally on each side of such structures.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer this work shall take place concurrently
with the filling to the structure. The embankment compaction equipment shall be
used as close to the structure as is practicable without damaging the structure. Any
damage to the structure shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
315 ROCKFILL TO SWAMPS AND MARSHY GROUND

Material below embankments in swamps or marshy ground shall be excavated and


carted to spoil by the Contractor where instructed by the Engineer and filled with
rockfill as indicated below

The Contractor shall place approved rockfill to swamps where instructed by the
Engineer. Rockfill shall be placed in uniform layers and rolled and trafficked until it is
fully embedded over the whole area instructed. Provided that, where rockfill is
founded on an unstable base, embankments shall be constructed by end tipping,
whereby material is dumped close to the work front and pushed forward over the end
of the embankment by a bulldozer, until the height of the embankment is sufficient to
bear the weight of construction machinery. The construction of embankments by end
tipping shall be in such a manner that the centre of the advancing fill proceeds in
advance of the shoulders. No tipping of material over the embankment side slopes
shall be allowed. Side slopes shall be constructed to their natural angle of repose.

Rockfill shall be of maximum dimension 250 mm, reasonably well graded and with
not more than 5% finer than 10 mm. The compacted layer thickness shall be 400
mm or less as instructed by the Engineer who may vary the requirement during the
rockfill operation. Each layer shall be blinded with smaller rock fragments and fines
so as to fill as many of the interstices as possible and provide a dense surface before
the next layer is placed. Before additional layers are placed or before normal

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

earthworks commence the Contractor shall proof-roll each layer in accordance with
Clause 319 of this Specification.

Rock material used for fill shall be of maximum dimension 250 mm, and be deposited
in horizontal layers not exceeding 400 mm loose depth and shall extend over the full
width of the embankment except for any specified external cover to slopes. The
material shall be spread and leveled by a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15
tonnes. Each layer shall consist of reasonably well graded rock and shall be blinded
with smaller rock fragments and gravel so as to fill as many of the interstices as
possible before the subsequent layer is placed. Each layer shall be compacted in
accordance with Clause 316 of this Specification. Rock material shall be covered by
a layer of common excavation material such that no rock material is placed within
600 mm of the formation level. The top of rock fill shall not extend above 600mm
below the formation level.

316 COMPACTION OF EARTHWORKS

The moisture content of the material for non-frost material or earthworks fill material
shall be adjusted immediately prior to compaction by either uniformly mixing in water
or drying out the material such that the range moisture content during compaction is
between 1% above and 2% below the Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T180).
The moisture content shall be kept within these limits till compaction is complete.
Each layer of material shall be compacted at a moisture content within the above
limits to a dry density equal to or exceeding those specified below:
General
x all fill material in embankments, except the non-frost subgrade layer shall be
compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T180),
x the 300 mm thick non-frost subgrade layer on embankment or in cuttings shall be
compacted to 98% MDD (AASHTO T180),

x the 300 mm thick subgrade layer below the finished formation level in cuttings, if
it is proved to be suitable by laboratory testing, shall be compacted to 98% MDD
(AASHTO T180) a.

Compaction under and in embankments, and in cuttings, shall be performed utilizing


the methods proposed by the Contractor based on site trials and approved by the
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of Clause 1118 of this Specification. The
300 mm non-frost subgrade layer below formation level in both fill areas and in
cuttings shall be completed in two 150 mm compacted layers.

The Contractor shall compact each layer of hard fill material used in high
embankments by pneumatic tyre roller weighing 18-20 tonnes dead weight, scraper
or dump truck weighing not less than 5 tonnes dead weight.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the compaction of each
main type of material likely to be used in embankments in accordance with the
provisions of Section 1100 of this Specification. Those proposals shall include the
types of equipment, the range of passes and the loose depth of each layer. The
Contractor, in consultation with the Engineer, shall carry out Site compaction trials,
supplemented by any necessary laboratory investigations, using the methods he
proposes to adopt for the construction of earthworks. The Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer that all the specified requirements in respect of compaction can be
achieved utilizing his proposed methods. Site compaction trials of each main type of
material likely to be encountered shall be completed before the commencement of
the Permanent Works.

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The water to be used shall be clean and fresh, free from organic matter, impurities
and deleterious substances. Water shall be obtained from a source approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall, if the Engineer should so require, arrange for the
analysis of water supplies to demonstrate compliance with this Specification.
Water shall be evenly sprinkled on the surface of the fill material by machines of a
type approved by the Engineer and capable of distributing water at a known,
predetermined and constant rate.
317 SPOIL MATERIAL
Spoil material shall be defined as material which, having been obtained from
roadway excavations (including from road subgrades and foundations), is unsuitable
for use as fill in embankments, or otherwise determined by him as not required for
use as fill or non-frost subgrade material, which the Engineer has instructed to be
carted to spoil. No excavated material should be carted to spoil except under the
specific instructions of the Engineer.
Excavated material initially classified as spoil material but latter on used by the
Contractor as fill material, non-frost subgrade, subbase or in any other manner as
part of road construction shall be declassified as spoil material and the measurement
of spoil material shall be adjusted accordingly.
Spoil material shall only be disposed of by deposition in designated spoil areas
located by the Contractor and subject to the prior approval of the Engineer. Land for
spoil areas shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of Section 300 of this
Specification. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice of his
intention to commence spoiling operations at a particular location.
318 BORROW AREAS AND REINSTATEMENT
Fill material that is required in addition to that provided by the excavation, or widening
of existing cuttings shall be obtained from borrow areas. Land for borrow areas shall
be provided in accordance with the provisions of Section 302 of this Specification.
Borrow areas shall be located by the Contractor and shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval.
The Engineer may direct that particular materials in borrow areas shall be selected
for use in a specific section of the Works. Where such selection is instructed, double
handling, stockpiling or excavation in particular areas of a borrow area may be
required.
All borrow material shall be thoroughly mixed in or close to the borrow area and
stockpiled for later use to ensure that material from a particular borrow area is
homogeneous and uniform in nature throughout.
The Contractor shall construct all accesses, to borrow area and clear and remove all
vegetation, boulders and unsuitable, or oversize material from the borrow area.
Overburden shall be removed and may be required to be stockpiled for use during
the reinstatement of the borrow area in accordance with the provisions of Section
300 of this Specification.
The Contractor shall ensure in every borrow area that suitable material is not
contaminated with unsuitable material. Unsuitable material shall be spoiled in
accordance with Clause 317 of this Specification or used to reinstate the excavation
in accordance with Clause 314 of this Specification.
Borrow areas shall be excavated to regular widths and shape and shall be cleaned
up and reinstated on completion. Side slopes of reinstated borrow areas shall have a

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

maximum slope of 6 horizontal to 1 vertical. Borrow area sides shall be neatly


trimmed and their bottoms leveled and drained away from the Works all in
accordance with applicable contractual, regulatory and legal requirements. The
reinstatement is incidental to the item rate at the contractor’s cost.
319 TRIMMING OF SLOPES
The side slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by
approved mechanical means to uniform batters as shown on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. The faces of embankments shall be of properly
compacted material in accordance with the requirements of Clause 316 of this
Specification and any loose improperly compacted or oversize material shall be
trimmed back and removed from embankment faces. Such material shall either be
carted to spoil or, if it should be deemed suitable by the Engineer, incorporated
elsewhere in the Works. The trimming of cutting and embankment slopes shall be
completed within 1 month of completion of earthwork upto formation level.

Any rock, boulder or bitumen-bound/cement-bound pavement appearing in the face


of a cutting or embankment shall be trimmed back to within the tolerance specified. If
any exposed rock or boulder should be unstable, it shall be completely removed and
the resulting void filled with suitable material compacted to the approval of the
Engineer.

Trimming the slopes of embankments and cuttings shall be deemed to be part and
parcel of the excavation of cuttings and side drains and the construction of
embankments and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any separate payment in
respect thereof.

320 SIDE DRAINS

Side drains shall be considered as roadway excavation in accordance with Clauses


310, 311, 312 of this Specification and classified as earthworks. During the course of
the Works, the Engineer may instruct amendments to the dimensions, slopes and
depths of side drains which shall be constructed accordingly.

Grouted stone pitching shall be provided for side drains where required in
accordance with the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.

321 UNSTABLE MATERIAL IN CUT SLOPES

Where unstable material is encountered in cut slopes, the Contractor shall inform the
Engineer and if so directed by the Engineer, shall excavate the unstable material,
cart it to spoil in a designated spoil area and replace it with suitable material.
Removal of unstable soil shall be treated as part of roadway excavation and its
replacement as part of embankment construction.

322 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment and measurement shall be admissible under item 301 to 309.

A suitable computer program utilizing Simpson’s rule and the cross-sections taken in
accordance with the provisions of Section 100 of this Specification at 20 m intervals
shall be used for the computation of earthworks volumes. In irregular ground or tight
curvature the Engineer may direct that cross-sections shall be taken at closer
intervals. Cross section preparation is incidental to work at the contractor’s own cost.

Earthwork fill shall be measured by the cubic metre of compacted material measured
in the completed embankment. No separate measurement or payment shall be made

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

for excavating material to form embankments.

Where fill material is required in addition to that provided by the excavation, including
widening, of cuttings and the Engineer instructs the opening of a borrow area, no
separate measurement and payment shall be made for:

x provision of land,
x provision of access roads,
x negotiation with owners and authorities,
x royalties, duties and levies on extracted material,
x site clearance of the borrow area in accordance with Section 200 of this
Specification,
x removal of topsoil from the borrow area for use in other areas in accordance with
Section 200 of this Specification,
x removal of topsoil and/or overburden to temporary stockpiles for use upon
reinstatement of the borrow area in accordance with Section 300 of this
Specification,
x overhaul,
x crushing and/or screening of material to remove oversize material, excess fines
or part of any other fraction in order to achieve compliance with this Specification,
x double handling or temporary stockpiling of suitable material in borrow areas.

When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall leave depth indicators during
excavations of such shape and size and in such positions as directed so as to
indicate the original ground level as accurately as possible. The Contractor shall see
that such depth indicators remain intact until final measurements are taken.

Unsuitable or unstable material cut to spoil, in accordance with the provisions of


Clauses 317 and 314 of this Specification, shall be measured as the volume of the
excavation formed.

Material cut to spoil shall be measured, utilizing a suitable computer program for
calculation, as the total volume of material removed from cuttings less the volume of
unsuitable material cut to spoil as measured above and less the volume of
compacted fill in embankments.

No allowance shall be made for variations in materials or wastage, consolidation, etc.


in accordance with Clause 314 of this specification.

(a-i) Item: Embankment construction using materials from borrow areas

Unit: m³

The rate for embankment construction shall include for the costs of:

x excavating the material from borrow area,

x loading, transporting and depositing the material in an embankment or


other area requiring fill,

x all necessary hauls,

x trimming, shaping, watering and compacting the material, including initial


rolling of top of the receiving surface to meet density requirement.

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x complying with the requirements of Section 100, 300 and 1100of this
Specification, and,

x complying with the requirements of Clauses 310, 312, 313, 314, 316, 318,
319, 320 and 322 of this Specification.

The volume of embankment construction shall be measured on the basis of


pre-construction and post construction cross-sectional surveys taken at
maximum 20m intervals or at closer intervals in rolling/mountainous ground, as
directed by the Engineer.

(a-ii) Item: Embankment construction using materials from roadway


excavation .

Unit: m³

The rate includes the activities as described in (a-i) and excavation from the
roadway and benching.

(b) Item: Common excavation to spoil


Unit: m³

The rate for common excavation to spoil shall include for the costs of :

x excavating the material,


x loading, transporting and depositing the material in a designated spoil area,
x all necessary hauls,
x providing topsoil,
x topsoiling of spoil areas,
x providing, shaping, trimming and reinstating spoil areas in accordance with
Section 300 of this Specification, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clauses 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 317,
318, 319 and 322 of this Specification.

No separate or additional payment shall be made for the excavation of material


below embankments in swampy ground pursuant to Clause 315 of this
Specification.

(c-i) Item: Soft rock/hard soil excavation


Unit: m³

The rate for soft rock/hard soil excavation to spoil shall include for the costs of :
x excavating the material,
x loading, transporting and depositing the material in a designated spoil area,
x all necessary hauls,
x providing topsoil,
x topsoiling of spoil areas,
x providing, shaping, trimming and reinstating spoil areas in accordance with
Section 300 of this Specification, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clauses 311, 312, 313, 317, 318, 319
and 322 of this Specification.

(c-ii) Item: Hard rock excavation

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Unit: m³

The rate for hard rock excavation to spoil shall include for the costs of :
x excavating the material,
x loading, transporting and depositing the material in a designated spoil area,
x all necessary hauls,
x providing topsoil,
x topsoiling of spoil areas,
x providing, shaping, trimming and reinstating spoil areas in accordance with
Section 300 of this Specification, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clauses 311, 312, 313, 317, 318, 319
and 322 of this Specification.

For payment purposes the volume of Hard material resulting from the
excavation of boulders greater than 0.5 m³ in volume shall be taken as 50% of
their loose volume in hauling vehicles.

(d) Item: Loosening and re-compaction to 98% MDD


(AASHTO T180)

Unit: m³

The unit of measurement for compaction of original ground in cutting to 98%


MDD (AASHTO T180) shall be the cubic metre. The volume of original ground
compacted shall be measured as the product of the instructed plan area
compacted and the vertical compacted thickness specified.

The rates for compaction of original ground in cutting shall include for the costs
of:

x scarifying/loosening 300mm deep


x loading, transporting and depositing the material
x screening and spoiling oversize material
x drying the material, or supplying and mixing in water, to adjust its moisture
content
x grading to the required cross-section,
x trimming and compacting
x complying with the requirements of clauses 314, 316, 319 and 322 of this
specification

(e) Item: Non Frost subgrade


Unit: m³
The unit of measurement for non-frost subgrade layer shall be the cubic meter
placed and compacted below the top of subgrade fill areas and in cuttings. If it
is determined by the Engineer that the existing ground exposed at any cutting
stretch is suitable to serve as non-frost subgrade without any further treatment,
then measurement of non-frost subgrade shall not be taken at such a stretch.
The volume shall be calculated as the product of the compacted sectional area
specified to be laid and the length instructed.

The rate for non-frost subgrade layer shall include the costs of :

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x excavating the material from borrow area or quarry or from roadway


excavation if satisfying suitability criteria,

x selection of material,

x loading, transporting and depositing the material at subgrade level,

x all necessary hauls,

x screening and spoiling oversize material,

x preparing formation to receive the non-frost subgrade to proper grade and


crossfall, including grading and rolling as required.

x compacting the non-frost subgrade material in 150 mm thick layers,

x drying the material, or supplying and mixing in water, to adjust its moisture
content

x grading to the required cross-section,

x trimming and compacting, and,

x complying with the requirements of Sections 100 ,300 and 1100 of this
Specification.

x complying with the requirements of Clauses 311, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318,
319, 321 and 322 of this Specification.

(f) Item: Rockfill to swamps


Unit: m³

The unit of measurement for rockfill to swamps shall be the cubic metre. The
volume shall be calculated as the product of the average of the plan areas at
the base and the top of the rockfill and the depth of rockfill instructed to be
placed.

The rate for rockfill to swamps shall include for the costs of :

x providing the material,

x loading, transporting and depositing the material,

x all necessary hauls,

x placing the rockfill, and compacting

x complying with the requirements of Clauses 314, 315, 317 and 322 of
this Specification.

(g) Item: Turf laying


Unit: sqm

The rate is inclusive of the following

x providing the material,

x loading, transporting and depositing the material,

x all necessary hauls,

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x placing the sod and vegetation

x watering, fertilizing etc

Section 300.Sources of materials and earthwork 3-20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 400 –SUBBASE, BASE AND SHOULDER

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 400 – SUBBASE, BASE AND SHOULDER

401 GRANULAR SUBBASE AND CRUSHED STONE BASE 4-3


(a) Definition 4-3
(b) Sources of materials 4-3
(c) Inspection of Site 4-3
(d) Quarries and Borrow areas 4-3
402 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIAL 4-3
403 CEMENT TREATED SUBBASE AND BASE (plant mix)
(a) GENERAL
(b) MATERIALS
(c) EQUIPMENT
(d) CONSTRUCTION
(e) QUALITY CONTROL
(f) SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
404 SETTING-OUT AND TOLERANCES 4-10
405 DRAINAGE OF NON-FROST SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE 4-10
LAYERS
406 GRAVEL WORK 4-10
407 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 4-10
408 CONSTRUCTION OF GRAVEL SHOULDER 4-11
409 TOLERANCES 4-12
410 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4-12
) (a) Item: Cement treated subbase/base 4-12
) (b) Item: Variation in the quantity of cement 4-13
(c) Item: Gravel shoulders and surfacing 4-13

ANNEXURE – 400 ( WITH APPENDIX TO METHOD A-14) 4-15

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

401 GRANULAR SUBBASE AND CRUSHED STONE BASE


(a) Definition
The term “natural material” shall include but not be limited to gravel, soft stone,
sandy soils or a combination of any of these materials. A natural material is also
referred to as “gravel” as a generalized term.
Materials for subbase may be obtained directly from natural material sources or
otherwise modified by crushing and/or screening, washing and recombining in
appropriate proportions.
“Graded crushed stone aggregates” means natural stone aggregates crushed
from larger size stones with a smooth grading curve which is within a specified
envelope.
Materials for base shall be graded crushed stone aggregates.
(b) Sources of materials
Material for subbase and base may be obtained from the following sources:
(i) quarries,
(ii) borrow areas
(iii) excavation in cuttings, widened if necessary,
In all cases the Contractor shall locate the sources of material to be used,
sources shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
(c) Inspection of Site
The Contractor shall satisfy him self as to the adequacy of those sources of
material available for inspection during the Tender Period in respect of but not
limited to:
y the amount of overburden to be removed,
y the ease with which the material can be removed,
y the quality and hardness or the material,
y the physical and chemical properties of the material,
y the degree of selection necessary,
y the proportion of oversize material,
y the method of extraction,
y the method of processing the material,
y the access to the source.
(d) Quarries and borrow areas
The Contractor shall comply with all national laws and regulations and the
requirements of Section 300 of this Specification in respect of quarries, borrow
areas and stockpile areas and access roads thereto.
402 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIAL
Natural material for subbase shall be material that can be extracted from a quarry,
borrow area or a road cutting using excavating equipment without blasting.
Graded crushed stone aggregate shall be extracted from a rock quarry and produced
by crushing in at least two stages. The stone class shall be as specified or as
instructed by the Engineer and the material to be crushed shall be naturally occurring
rock or boulders of individual least dimension 100 mm or larger.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

403 CEMENT TREATED SUBBASE AND BASE (PLANT MIX)


(a) GENERAL
This section covers the specification requirements for construction of one or two
layers of CTB. The lower layer is subabse and the upper layer is base course.
Both the layers shall be constructed separately in sequence. Finally asphalt
concrete is proposed to be laid over the base course CTB layer.
CTB means cement treated granular base and/or subbase. The granular material
is either natural gravel or crusher run aggregates or mix of them to meet the
materials specification parameters. CTB mix is a product of granular material,
Portland cement and water in a given proportion. The mix to be used shall be
obtained from a centralized mixing plant.
The subbase layer shall be laid over a prepared unbound granular subabse /
nofrost subgrade / compacted embankment fill / cut sections as per site situation.
While preparing the receiving layer, the suitability of material and its field density
shall have to be examined. If suitable material exists, the density of 98%
AASHTO T-180 has to be achieved by loosening the layer in 200/300mm depth
and compacted again. If unsuitable material exists, that has to be scraped and
refilled with selected earth of CBR not less than 15. The higher layer, i.e., the
base course layer of CTB shall be laid over the subbase CTB layer following the
sequence as specified in this section. The specification includes the application
and maintenance of a bituminous curing membrane as well.
(b) MATERIALS
Cement
Cement shall be normal Portland cement of Type I, AASHTO M-85-07 and shall
also conform to MNS 974:99 or other applicable international standard. The
preferable strength grade of cement is 32.5 Mpa.
Granular Materials
The granular material used to be treated and stabilized with cement shall be mix
of sand, gravel, and crushed aggregate and shall satisfy the requirements of
gradation, physical strength and other characteristics noted in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Physical Characteristics of Granular Materials
for Base and Subbase.
Control parameters Base layer Subbase layer
Sieve size mm % passing# % passing#
53 100 100
37.5 85-100 80-100
19 60-90 55-90
4.75 30 - 65 25-65
2.36 20-50 15-50
0.425 10-30 10-30
0.075 5 - 10 5 -10
PI passing 0.425 sieve <5 <7
Linear Shrinkage <3 <5
Ten percent Fine
110 kN 110 kN
Value (TFV)* minimum
Minimum % Ratio of
60 60
wet and dry TFV
% Water absorption** <2 <2
# By weight

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

* As per standard BS-812-part 111


** If the water absorption exceeds 2 %, soundness test shall be carried out
and satisfy the appropriate limits.

Water
The water shall be safe for drinking i.e., palatable and potable, and shall have pH
between 6 and 8.5 as per AASHTO T -26
Curing membrane
The bituminous material to used in curing membrane shall be MC 30 and shall
conform to AASHTO M 82 – 75 (2004).
Cover material
Sand, if used as cover to protect during curing process, shall be free from
deleterious chemical materials.
Mix proportions
The mix design shall be finalized by the strength criteria and for bidding purpose
the water and cement shall have the following upper limits by weight of granular
materials.
Base layer : Cement 6 % , water 8 %
Subbase layer: Cement 4 %, water 8 %
The mix strength shall be governed by 7 days UCS (unconfined compressive
strength) test conducted (refer Annexure 400) in the laboratory during mix
design process. The WDD (wet and dry durability) parameters shall be used to
control the mix design and contents of the mix. Table 4-2 provisions shall be
followed during mix design process.
Table 4-2: Mix Design Control Parameters
Item Base Subbase
course course
7 Days Target UCS* 3.75 - 6.0 1.5 – 3.0
(Mpa) in laboratory
7 Days UCS* (Mpa) in 2.5 – 4.0 1.0 – 2.0
field
Wet and Dry Durability 20 – 30 % 20 – 30 %
as per AASHTO T-135-
97 (2005)
Freeze and Thaw 20 – 30 % 20 – 30 %
Durability as per
AASHTO T-136-97
(2005)
Note: * is cylinder strength of the size of AASHTO T-180 mould as given in Appendix-
11 here after
Natural material for subbase shall be material that can be extracted from a quarry,
borrow area or a road cutting using excavating equipment without blasting.
Graded crushed stone aggregate shall be extracted from a rock quarry and produced
by crushing in at least two stages. The stone class shall be as specified or as
instructed by the Engineer and the material to be crushed shall be naturally occurring

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

rock or boulders of individual least dimension 100 mm or larger.

(c) EQUIPMENT
Mixing Equipment
A central mixing plant either of the batch type or continuous type capable of
mixing granular material, cement and water producing not less than 180 t/hour
shall be used with the following conditions.
(i) For batch type plant using pugmill the dry materials shall be measured by
weight.
(ii) For a continuous type mixing plant the dry materials may be proportioned
by volume.
(iii) A cement diversion chute shall be used to effect supply of cement
diverted from the main belt to a sampling weighing scale. The cement
diversion chute shall be constructed such as to provide control over the
cement test time.
(iv) At batch mixing plant cement shall be weighed on separate scales than
that of aggregate batching scales. If the cement compartment is separate
in the aggregate hopper and cement is weighed before weighing the
aggregates, cement may be weighed on the same scales of weighing
aggregates.
(v) Cement shall be added steadily to the granular material to ensure its
uniform distribution to the aggregates during the mixing process.
(vi) Approved feeder and metering devices shall be used for measuring
cement, water, and aggregates in case of continuous type mixing plant.
To ensure this feeder and metering devices shall have to be interlocked
and synchronized so that constant ratio of cement and aggregate is
followed throughout the mixing operation. The continuous batch type
plant shall be equipped with a proper signal system capable of indicating
bins strike off capacity and minimum metering level. The gate opening
calibration and functioning of the plant must be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
(vii) The charge mass in batch type, and rate of feed in the continuous type
shall not exceed their uniform mixing capacity.
(viii) The dead areas in the mixer where material is neither agitated nor move
shall be corrected by controlling the rate of feed.
(ix) Water may be measured either by mass or volume. The quantity, rate
and time of adding water to the aggregate and cement shall be as
directed by the Engineer.
(x) Mixing shall ensure uniform distribution of cement and water in the entire
granular mix. In no case shall the mixing period be less than 30 sec once
all the materials are fed in the mixer.
Transport Equipment
Trucks carrying mixed material from central plant to the laying site shall be
properly covered as directed by the Engineer.
Grader
Graders shall be self-propelled equipped for scarifying and have sufficient gross
mass, blade length, wheel base and power to shape in one pass the full width.
Finishing graders shall be equipped with automatic grade and slope controls.
Paver finisher
The laying of CTB layers shall be done by using paver finisher capable of laying

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

and paving at least lane width having extension provisions to cover the additional
width. The use of grader in combination with paver finisher is acceptable. The
paver finisher shall be self propelled with the following features.
(i) Loading hoppers and suitable distribution mechanism
(ii) The screed shall have tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial
compaction to the layer as it is spread without rutting or otherwise
deforming the surface profile.
(iii) The paver shall have provision of sensor for slope and grade control.
(iv) The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to
ensure that the finished surface is free from surface deformities.
Compaction Equipment
Compaction equipment shall be self propelled and separately having steel
wheeled and rubber tired provisions. They shall have vibratory mode rolling
capabilities by proper control on amplitude as well as frequency. The rollers shall
weigh in static condition not less than 8 - 10 t. For microcracking stage 12 t steel
wheeled roller would be needed. The rubber tired roller shall have 20 – 30 t
weight with tyre pressure 0.7 Mpa.
Pressure Distributor
(i) Water curing: The pressure distributors shall be truck mounted and
capable of applying a fog or fine mist of water to the road surface without
direct impact.
(ii) Bituminous curing membrane: Self propelled asphalt distributors having
appropriate features shall be used.
Stiffness Gauge
After completion of the CTB layer its stiffness shall be measured using any
appropriate stiffness gauge. One such equipment is Humboldt Stiffness Gauge
(HSG). The reading indicates the force required to effect unit deformation in the
CTB layer.
(d) CONSTRUCTION
General
The construction shall be carried out in a manner that the CTB layers shall have
uniformly distributed cement, free from loose or segregated areas. The layers
shall be of uniform density and moisture content in its full depth with a smooth
surface. A trial patch of about 100 m length shall first be executed to ascertain
the extent of compaction rolling, control on density and moisture, and final
surface finishes. The main work shall follow once the trial patch is approved.
Preparation of receiving surface
Subbase course CTB layer: Before laying CTB subbase layer, the receiving
surface shall be proof rolled and checked for minimum 98 % heavy proctor
compaction AASHTO T-180. All soft and loose spots shall be fully corrected. The
surface tolerance shall not deviate by more than 15 mm from the specified grade
and cross section at any place on a 3 m template. The surface shall be kept
moist and not wet before laying the CTB layer.
Base course CTB layer: The top of subbase CTB layer shall be cleaned of
unacceptable materials and shall be kept moist before receiving the base
materials.
Weather Restrictions
(i) Temperature: The construction of CTB shall not commence if the falling air

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

temperature reaches 5°C or the work shall not resume until rising air temperature
have reached 5°C.
(ii) Rain / snowing : CTB shall not be laid if it is raining / snowing or likely to rain /
snow. Already laid surface shall be protected against precipitation until it is
sufficiently hardened.
Time Restrictions
The mixed material shall be placed on the prepared surface within 45 min of
adding of water to the cement in the mixer. The placing, compacting, and
finishing of the CTB shall be completed within a period of 2 hour from the time of
adding of water. Not more than 30 min shall pass between the placing of the
material in the adjacent lanes unless vertical faces are prepared as specified
under joint preparation.
Compaction
The compacted dry unit mass of the finished CTB layer shall be not less than 98
% of the maximum dry density conforming to AASHTO T-180 heavy proctor
compaction.
Construction Joints
Longitudinal : Where material is to be placed against compacted material, which
has been in place more than 30 min, a vertical joint shall be prepared by cutting
back the compacted material to a sound vertical face, to the full depth. Cutting
back to the full depth shall always be done prior to the conclusion of the day’s
work.
Transverse: While carrying out the work if the work is stopped to be resumed for
the next day or for more than 2 hours, the end shall be tapered in a distance of 6
m along longitudinal direction to half the thickness of the CTB layer. When the
work resumes, the successive pour shall cover the tapered portion to its full
depth.
Surface finish
Finishing to the required grade and camber shall be done by means of a blade
grader, using automatic control, or a cutting attachments to paving machine
using automatic controls for the control of longitudinal grade and transverse
slope which could be operated from a string line set to grade adjacent to the
mechanical equipment used. Following paver proper rolling and compaction shall
be continued by vibratory mode rolling and static rolling. Final surface shall be
rolled after removing the loose materials by a pneumatic tyred roller adding small
moisture if so needed during rolling.
The finished surface of CTB layers shall be checked with a 3 m straight edge
which when placed anywhere on the surface in any direction shall not show a
gap more than 10 mm between straight edge and the finished surface.
Initial Curing
During finishing and the period after that the surface shall be kept moist by
applying a fine spray or fog of water as such intervals as may be required to
maintain the surface at not less than its optimum moisture content as specified in
the mix design. In no case a jet of water shall impinge on the finished surface.
The initial curing shall be done for a period of 24 hours after completion of the
compaction.
Microcracking:
After first 24 hours of water spray curing the stiffness of the CTB layer shall be
measured by an appropriate device such as Humboldt Stiffness Gauge (HSG) or

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

its equivalent. If the stiffness reading is in the range of 50 – 60 MN/m or kN/mm,


the microcracking rolling shall commence. If the stiffness reading is less than the
stated value range, further curing of water spray shall continue till another 24
hours or so unless the desired stiffness of 50-60 MN/m is observed. The stiffness
reading shall be taken at every 30 m spacing along the road axis and the reading
spots shall be duly marked to be identified for subsequent readings after
microcracking rolling.
The microcracking of the finished CTB layer shall be accomplished by active
rolling using a 12 ton vibratory steel wheeled roller in vibratory mode with full
amplitude approximately at a speed of 3 km/h. The rolling shall cover full width
except 0.3 m edge strips on either side. The microcracking shall be deemed to
be completed if the stiffness reading at the marked spots where initial reading
were taken have reduced by 40 % compared to the initial reading after one or
more passes of the rolling. The reading shall be taken after every single pass of
rolling and when the target of 40 % reduction is observed the rolling shall stop.
Such regular stiffness reading shall determine the number of passes required to
achieve the 40 % reduction in the stiffness.
Final Curing:
After completion of the mircrocracking the section shall be moist cured for at
least another 48 hours, after which the surface shall be provided with curing
membrane by coating the surface with MC-30 cutback asphalt @ 0.8 to 1.2 kg/
sqm as is done for prime coat before doing the asphalting work. If significant
cracks are observed after doing the prime coat, the cracks shall be sealed using
proper grade of bituminous material. The moist curing over the coated
membrane shall continue for 3 days from the date of application of the curing
membrane.
Traffic Restrictions
In no case any vehicle including construction equipment traffic shall be permitted
to be hauled over the CTB surface until 7 days of curing have been completed.
Shouldering
Shoulder construction shall follow immediately after the compaction and finishing
of the respective CTB layer. The spillage of shoulder material over CTB shall be
removed and cleaned in a manner approved by the Engineer without causing
any damage to CTB.
(e) QUALITY CONTROL
Compressive strength
The compressive strength shall be verified during construction by obtaining field
samples in the cylinder size conforming to AASHTO T-180 of the mixed material
from the site twice each day of placing of the CTB. For each time two sets of 3
samples shall be molded. The material shall be compacted in the above
designated moulds at the site and shall be moist cured as is being done at the
site for surface curing. Preferably the cubes shall be kept at the surface and shall
be cured as the main surface is being cured and should be protected from any
damage or loss. To be on safer side similar number of samples shall be
maintained in the laboratory also. Two of the three samples of each set of
collected cubes and cured shall be tested at 7 days and the third one shall be
tested as directed by the Engineer.
Field moisture and density:
Moisture: While compacting field moisture could be ± 2 % of optimum moisture
determined in the laboratory during AASHTO T-180 heavy compaction proctor.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The field moisture and density shall be determined for each 300 m stretch of the
CTB using AASHTO T-318-02.
Density: As per section 1104.5 above using AASHTO T-191
Surface regularity as per section 1104.6 above.
(f) SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
(i) Laying of subabse course of CTB layer over prepared granular subabse /
embankment fill top / cut section top

(ii) After minimum of 2 weeks of micocracking of subbase course, the base


course CTB shall be laid

(iii) After minimum of 2 weeks of microcracking of base course, the asphalt


concrete shall be laid
404 SETTING-OUT AND TOLERANCES
Subbase and base layers shall be set out and constructed to the appropriate
tolerances specified in Section 100 and 1100 of this Specification.
405 DRAINAGE OF NON-FROST SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE LAYERS
The non-frost subgrade, subbase and base shall be kept continuously drained and
any damage caused by water accumulating on or running off the surface shall be
made good at the Contractor’s expense. In particular, the drainage requirements of
Section 100 and this section shall apply.
Should water accumulate on any part of the non-frost subgrade, subbase or base the
Contractor shall remove and dispose of any material that becomes saturated or
cannot then be compacted to the required density, and shall replace it with material
complying with this Specification, all at his own expense.
406 GRAVEL WORK
The term ‘gravel’ used means naturally occurring granular material and shall include
natural gravel, crushed gravel and crushed rock.
A "gravel shoulders” means a granular surfacing course constructed from one or a
combination of these materials placed on a prepared and approved subbase for the
purpose of protecting the edges of pavement.
Gravel materials may be obtained directly from natural material sources or otherwise
modified by crushing and/or screening, washing and and blenders in appropriate
proportions.
The Contractor shall comply with all national laws and regulations and the
requirements of Section 300 of this Specification in respect of natural sources and
stockpile areas and access roads thereto.
407 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
The grading of gravel after placing and compaction shall be a smooth curve within
and approximately parallel to the envelopes shown in Table 4-3. Grading B shall be
used for forming the top 100 mm thick of the gravel shoulders or gravel surfacing and
Grading A shall be used for forming the lower remaining thickness of the gravel
shoulders or gravel surfacing. The exact designated thickness of the top and lower
layer shall be indicated by the Engineer. Provided further that the Engineer at his
discretion can omit the Grading A where the total gravel shoulders or gravel surfacing
thickness in 200 mm or less. The Engineer can also omit the Grading B where the
gravel shoulders is proposed to be laid with Grading A material and overlaid with

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

base material. The grading shall be required to satisfy when the material after
compaction is sieved and found to fall in the grading envelope.
Table 4-3 Gradation Requirements for Gravel Shoulders and Gravel Surfacing

Mass Percent Passing


Sieve Size Grading
A B
37.5 mm 100 -

19.0 mm 95-100 100

9.5 mm 60 – 90 80 - 100
4.75 mm 40 – 70 60 - 75
2.36 mm 25 - 50 35 - 55

425 μm 15 - 35 18 - 27

75 μm 5 - 20 10 - 15

Material for gravel shoulders or surfacing shall have a minimum CBR of 20% at 98%
MDD (AASHTO T180) and 4 days soaking.
The Plasticity Index of the material shall lie within the range of 3 - 7%.
408 CONSTRUCTION OF GRAVEL SHOULDERS
“Shoulder” means that part of the road construction placed on the subbase at the
edge of the pavement to the width specified in the Drawings.

The gravel material brought to site shall satisfy grading, CBR and plasticity criteria
indicated above (Clause 409) and no blending at site will be allowed.
The procedure and selection of equipment for construction of gravel shoulders and
surfacing shall be determined through trial construction as instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall construct shoulders concurrently with the construction of the
adjacent pavement layers and shall ensure that the method of construction is such
that at no time is water prevented from draining off any of the pavement layers.

Shoulders shall neither be constructed ahead of nor lagging behind adjacent layers
of asphalt concrete surfacing or selected granular base course of main road or
pavement layers of link roads specified in the Contract.

The gravel material shall be deposited in sufficient quantity and spread in a uniform
layer across the full width required such that the final compacted thickness is
nowhere less than shown upon the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Every
reasonable effort shall be made to prevent segregation of gravel material during the
loading, hauling, placing, processing and compacting operations.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid processed and compacted at one time
shall not exceed 200 mm. Where a greater compacted thickness is required, the
material shall be laid and processed in two or more layers. The minimum layer
thickness shall be 100 mm.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The moisture content of the gravel shall be adjusted by either uniformly mixing in
water or drying out the material such that the moisture content during compaction is
between 1% above and 2% below the Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T180).
It shall be graded and trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may be
applied prior to final trimming. The Contractor shall not carry out any further trimming
or correction of surface irregularities once 25% of the compactive effort has been
applied.
The final trim shall be in cut and the Contractor shall ensure that material from the
trim is neither deposited in low areas nor spread across the section but graded clear
of the Works.
Following the final trim the material shall be compacted to a dry density of at least
98% MDD (AASHTO T180). During the grading, trimming and compaction of the
material the Contractor shall ensure that the surface and/or the material does not dry
out by applying fog sprays of water or other approved means sufficient to maintain
the surface and/or material within the specified limits of moisture content.
On completion of compaction, the surface shall be well closed, free from movement
under compaction planes, ridges, cracks and loose or segregated material. If the
surface fails to achieve the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall
take the same action as that for subbase as set out in Section 1100 of this
Specification or any other such action as the Engineer may require or agree.
The construction of shoulders shall be in compliance with Section 100 and 1100 of
this Specification.
409 TOLERANCES
The gravel shoulders or gravel surfacing shall be constructed to the same tolerances
as those specified in Section 1100 of this Specification for subbase or adjacent
pavement layers as applicable.
410 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) Item: Cement Treated Subbase/Base
Unit: m3
The unit of measurement for subbase shall be the cubic metre placed and
compacted upon the road as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the
Engineer. The volume shall be calculated as the product of the compacted
sectional area specified to be laid and the length instructed.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made in respect of overhaul.
The rate for subbase shall include for the costs of:
x site clearance of borrow areas, stockpile areas, processing areas and
access tracks thereto,
x removing and stockpiling separately as required topsoil and overburden
from such areas and access tracks thereto,
x drainage of such areas and access tracks and their landscaping, top soiling
and reinstatement on completion,
x borrow area fencing,
x constructing and maintaining access roads and complying with conditions of
access,
x traffic control, safety and public health requirements,
x excavation and selection of material,

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x processing and modifying the natural gravel/aggregates for compliance with


this Specification including any plasticity modifying agents,
x carrying and mix design in laboratory and field checking for density,
stiffness, and UCS of site materials.
x plant mixing and transporting to site
x trial/test patch preparation
x removal and disposal of oversize material, if any,
x excavation of existing pavement layers and temporary stockpiling of
material,
x double handling and stockpiling material,
x loading, transporting and dumping the stockpiled material,
x all necessary hauls of cement, aggregate and water including their
properties testing
x providing and mixing water or drying out the material,
x mixing and processing, including normal grid rolling, spreading and
compacting the material, during initial stage and microcracking stage
x providing and admixing of fines if necessary,
x brooming, making good defective areas and maintenance of the surface,
and, water curing including bituminous membrane laying for curing
x complying with the requirements of Sections 100, and 1100 of this
Specification, including checking of stiffness of the compacted layer using
Humboldt Stiffness Gauge. The contractor shall provide HSG at his own
cost.
(b) Item: Variation in the quantity of cement
Unit: kg
The bid rate is based on use of 6% cement in base layer, and 4 % cement in
subabse layer with respect to the mass of the dry aggregate of the respective
layers. Any variation shall be charged separately as determined by mix design,
and successful laying and compaction, and acceptance of the respective
layers. Variation means that higher % of cement used shall be paid to the
contractor, and lesser % of cement used shall form rebate to be realized from
the contractor.
(c) Item: Gravel shoulders base and surfacing
Unit: m3
The unit of measurement for gravel shoulders shall be the cubic metre placed
and compacted upon the subbase as shoulders to pavement. The volume shall
be calculated as the product of the width and the compacted instructed
thickness multiplied by the length instructed to be laid.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made in respect of overhaul.
The rate for gravel shoulders and gravel surfacing shall include for the costs of
the following:
x site clearance of borrow areas and access tracks thereto,
x removing and stockpiling separately as required topsoil and overburden
from borrow areas and access tracks thereto,

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x borrow area fencing,


x constructing and maintaining access roads and complying with conditions of
access,
x drainage of borrow areas and access tracks and their landscaping,
topsoiling and reinstatement on completion,
x traffic control, safety and public health requirements,
x excavation and selection of material,
x crushing, screening, washing and removing oversize material,
x double handling and stockpiling material,
x loading, transporting and dumping the material,
x all necessary hauls,
x providing and mixing water or drying out the material,
x mixing and processing including normal grid rolling, spreading, and
compacting the material,
x providing and admixing of fines if necessary,
x brooming, making good defective areas and maintenance of the surface,
and,
x complying with the requirements of Sections 100, 400 and 1100 of this
Specification.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Annexure 400

THE DETERMINATION OF THE UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH


OF SOILS, GRAVELS AND SANDS

1. SCOPE

General

In this method the unconfined compressive strength of stabilized material as defined


below is determined by subjecting prepared specimens to an increasing load until
failure.

Definition

The unconfined compressive strength (UCS) of a stabilized material is the load in


kilopascals required to crush a cylindrical specimen 127.0 mm high and 152.4 mm in
diameter to total failure at a rate of application of load of 140kPa/s.

2. APPARATUS

2.1 A moisture-curing room capable of maintaining a relative humidity of 95 to 100


percent and a temperature of 22 to 25 oC, or suitable plastic bags to hold
specimens and carried in an airtight condition in a water bath as described in 2.2
below.

2.2 A suitable water bath with thermostatic control capable of maintaining a


temperature of 22 to 25 oC.

2.3 A suitable compression testing machine capable of applying a rate of loading of


140kPa/s and capable of measuring a load of 200kN accurately to 1kN.

3. METHOD

3.1 Preparations of specimens

Prepare specimens in accordance with the procedure described in the Appendix to


Method A 14(see 5.1)

3.2 Curing of specimens

Cure the specimens for seven days at a relative humidity of 95 to 100 per cent and
a temperature of 22 to 25 oC in a suitable curing room or in plastic bags and
suitable water bath.
After seven days, remove the specimens from the curing room or plastic bags and
submerge them in water for four hours. The temperature of the water should be
controlled at 22 to 25 oC.

3.3 Compressive strength determination

Remove the specimens from the water and crush each specimen to total failure in
the compression testing machine. The load must be applied to the flat faces of the
specimen and the rate of application of load shall be 140kPa/s. (This is equivalent

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

to a rate of 153 kN/min for 152 mm diameter specimens.) Record the load to
the nearest 1kN.

4. CALCULATIONS

Calculate the unconfined compressive strength to the nearest 10 kPa as follows:

where

U = unconfined compressive strength (kPa)


kN = load required to crush specimen (kN)
r = radius of specimen face (0.0762)(m)

Report the UCS to the nearest 10kPa on Form A14/1 or A14/2 or any similar form.

5. NOTES

5.1 In order to establish the required stabilizer content to produce a mixture


conforming to a specified USC, three specimens are necessary for each stabilizer
contents. In the case of samples for field control, one specimen per field sample is
sufficient.

5.2 To establish the required stabilizer content to produce a soil-cement mixture


conforming to a specified strength, the USC results should be recorded and a
graph of stabilizer content against strength should be plotted on a suitable sheet.
For the graph the average USC of the three specimens of each stabilizer contents
should be used but an obvious incorrect result, due to possible damage to a
specimen before testing should be ignored.

5.3 Mixtures of cement, milled blast furnace slag, lime or other additives usually take
longer to reach the same strength as that of ordinary Portland cement. To achieve
comparable strengths it is therefore necessary to determine the hardening time
that gives equivalent cement strengths for each mixture, and to adapt the
procedure accordingly. Thus, for example, it has been found that some
lime/cement mixtures achieve equivalent strength after eleven days. However, the
actual hardening time has to be determined in each case. If a hardening time other
than seven days is used, this must be stated on the report sheet.

REFERENCES

1. Portland cement Association: Soil Cement laboratory handbook

2. South Africa TMH-1

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

APPENDIX TO METHOD A14

PROCEDURE FOR THE MAKING OF SPECIMENS FOR THE DERTERMINATION


OF THE UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF STABILIZED SOILS,
GRAVELS AND SANDS

1. APPARATUS

1.1 Compaction moulds, two or three segment split type, 152 mm in diameter and 152.4
mm high with a detachable collar and base plate and a 25.4 mm thick spacer plate
fixed to the base plate, or compaction moulds 152.4 mm in diameter and 152.4 mm
high with a detachable collar and compaction base plate, with a fixed 25.4 mm thick
spacer plate and a suitable extrusion jack to extrude specimens from the mould.
In both cases the base plate should be fixed to a concrete block at least 150mm thick
and weighing at least 200kg.

1.2 A 4.536 kg ± 20g tamper with a 50.8 ± 1,0 mm diameter face and with a sheath to
give a 457.2 ± 2mm drop.
1.3 A steel straight –edge, about 300mm in length and having one beveled edge.
1.4 A riffler
1.5 A balance to weigh up to 15 kg, accurate to 5g.
1.6 A balance to weigh up to 2 kg, accurate to 0.1g.
1.7 A steel tamper or a small laboratory crusher.
1.8 Sieves: 19.0 mm and 4.75 mm.
1.9 An iron mortar and pestle and a rubber-tipped pestle.
1.10 Basins, approximately 350 mm in diameter.
1.11 A mixing basin, approximately 500 mm in diameter.
1.12 A garden trowel.
1.13 A spatula.
1.14 Suitable containers to hold about 1000 g of material for the determination of
moisture contents.
1.15 A drying oven, thermostatically controlled and capable of maintaining a temperature
of 105 to 110 oC.
1.16 Measuring cylinders, 1000 ml and 500 ml in capacity.
1.17 A spray-can or sprinkler.
1.18 Filter paper, 150 mm rounds.
1.19 Galvanized iron mixing baths 450 x 650 x 200mm deep (at least three)
1.20 Suitable carrier plates to hold specimens.
1.21 Airtight containers with lids, about 20 ml in capacity (at least four).
For calibrating moulds:
1.22 A 180 x 180 mm glass plate approximately 7 mm thick.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1.23 Lubricating grease.


1.24 A 5 ml pipette.
1.25 A thermometer measuring 0 to 50 oC.
2. PROCEDURE

2.1 Preparation
Prepare an adequate quantity (approximately 150kg) of the air-dried material as
described below;
An adequate quantity of the air-dried sample is sieved through a 19.0 mm sieve. The
aggregate retained on the 19.0 mm sieve is crushed lightly by means of a steel
tamper (or laboratory crusher) to pass the 19.0 mm sieve, and added to the portion
passing the sieve. Care should be taken that the aggregate is not crushed
unnecessarily small. If the material contains soil aggregations, these should be
disintegrated as finely as possible with a mortal and pestle without reducing the
natural size of the individual particles. Where the material contains soft and friable
aggregate which will break up during compaction, e.g. certain types of ferricrete,
calcrete, soft sandstone, etc., such aggregate should be disintegrated. The operator
should use his discretion in borderline cases and also as regards the extent to which
particles should be disintegrated.
Mix the material thoroughly and quarter out a specimen of approximately 35 kg,
which in turn is again quartered so as to obtain five basins of exactly similar material.
This is best done by dividing the sample into 16 equal portions by means of the riffler
and using three portions, Le. 3/16 of the sample, for the determination of one point
on the moisture-density relationship curve. The one portion which is surplus may be
discarded. The mass of the material in each of the five basins should be between 6
and 7 kg, the higher mass to be used for material with a high relative density. For
convenience the mass in the five basins may be made the same.

2.2 Determination of hygroscopic moisture content


Take two representative samples of between 500 and 1000 g each of the remaining
material and place them in suitable containers to determine the moisture content.
The more coarsely graded the material, the larger the sample should be. Weight the
samples immediately to the nearest 0.1 g and dry them to constant mass in an oven
at 105 to 110 oC. Transfer the remaining material to airtight tins.

2.3 Determination of optimum moisture content (OMC) and maximum dry


density (MDD) of stabilized material.
Weigh out 4 per cent of stabilizer by mass of the air-dried raw material for each of the
five lots as prepared in 2.1 above. Determine the optimum moisture content and
maximum dry density for the stabilized material as described in AASHTO-180. The
stabilizer should be admixed with the raw material immediately before the admixing
of the water. In order to simulate conditions on the road, compaction of the stabilized
material is delayed for four hours after the mixing-in of the stabilizer and water. The
moist material is covered with damp hessian and every half hour it is thoroughly
mixed with a trowel.

2.4 Making of specimens for the determination of compressive strength


Using the remaining air-dry material in the airtight tins (see 2.2), divide out three
similar lots of material of approximately 21 kg (oven-dry) each. For convenience the
mass of the three lots may be made the same by adding or scooping out some of the
material so as to bring the mass of each lot to 21 kg oven-dry (calculate the mass of

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

air-dry material required for each lot by taking into account the moisture content of
the air-dry material as determined on the samples in 2.2 above). Select three
different stabilizer contents at which the specimens for compressive strength
determination are to be made. These are usually in increments of two percentage
points, e.g.2 per cent, 4 per cent and 6 per cent by mass of the total oven-dry
material (2 per cent means two parts stabilizer to 100 parts oven-dry raw material)
Calculate and weigh out the three quantities of stabilizer required for the above three
lots of raw material.
Calculate and measure out the required quantity of water to bring each lot to OMC
(see 4.2). The quantity of water required is the difference between the quantity of
water present in the air-dry material (as determined by the hydroscopic moisture
content) and the quantity of water required to obtain the optimum moisture content as
determined in 2.3 above. Mix in the stabilizer and then the water and treat for four
hours as for 2.3 above. Compact three specimens from each lot according to
AASHTO T-180.
Weigh the moulds with compacted specimens. Remove the specimens from the
moulds either by dismantling the split moulds or, if ordinary moulds are used, extrude
the specimens with the extrusion jack (see 4.3). The specimens are now placed on
the carrier plates and are ready for curing.

3. CALCULATIONS

3.1 Moisture content (%)

where
d = moisture content expressed as a percentage of the dry material
a = mass of container and wet material (g)
b = mass of container and dry material (g)
c = mass of container only (g)

3.2 Quantity of stabilizer to be –added for specimens

where

C = mass of stabilizer required (g)


Y = percentage of stabilizer required
W = mass of oven-dry material (g)

3.3 Quantity of water to be admixed with the material for specimens

where
V = volume of water (ml)
Q = optimum moisture content
P = mass of material (oven-dry) to be used (g)
C = mass of stabilizer to be added (g)
M = mass of material (air-dry) (g)

3.4 Percentage of stabilizer by volume

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

where

v = % of stabilizer by volume of the total stabilized material


A = % of stabilizer by mass of the total raw material (as obtained from graph of cement
content against strength)
m = maximum dry density (kg/m3) as obtained according to Subsection 2.3
B = density of stabilizer (kg/m3)

3.5 Dry density of USC specimens

D = dry density (kg/m2 )


W = mass of wet specimen immediately after compaction (g)
V = volume of mould (cm3)
d = moulding moisture content expressed as a percentage of the dry stabilized material.

3.6 Accuracy of calculation


3.6.1 Moisture content: to the nearest 0.1 per cent
3.6.2 Dry density: to the nearest 5kg/m3
3.6.3 Quantity of water to be admixed to the material for specimens: to the nearest
milliliter.
3.6.4 Quantity of stabilizer to be added to the raw material for specimens: to the
nearest gram
3.6.5 Stabilizer content: to the nearest 0.1 per cent (for mass as well as volume).

4. NOTES

4.1 Where the material contains soft and friable aggregate which will break up during
compaction, e.g. certain types of ferricrete, calcrete, soft sandstone, etc., such
aggregate should be disintegrated. In borderline cases, the operator should use his
discretion as to the extent to which particles should be disintegrated.
4.2 In calculating the required amount of water to be admixed, it is advisable to allow for
evaporation by adding slightly more water-say about 0.3 to 0.5 per cent depending
on weather conditions. The actual quantity is left to the discretion of the operator.
4.3 With certain materials lacking cohesion it may be necessary to leave the samples in
their moulds for 24 hours to develop some strength before the moulds are removed.
If this is necessary, the specimens in the moulds should be kept in the damp-room or
covered with hessian for 24 hours.

Section 400. Subbase, Base and Shoulder 4-20


AnnexuretoSection400
FormAͲ14/1
UNCONFINEDCOMPRESSIVESTREGTHTESTRESULTS

ROAD_________ SECTION__________
MODIFIEDAASHTOTͲ180
SPECIMENDATA
DATA
CEMENT
7DAYCOMPRESSIVESTRENGTH
CONTENT(%) OPT
MAX,DRYDENS, DRYDENSE (KPa)
MOISTUR MOISTURE(%)
(kg/m3) (kg/m3)
E(%) INDIVIDUAL AVERAGE
COMPRESSIVESTREGTH(KPa)

CEMENTCONTENT(%)
FORMA14/1
Recordingsheetunconfinedcompressivestrength
Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 500: ASPHALT PAVEMENT WORKS

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 500 - ASPHALT PAVEMENT WORKS

501 SCOPE 0F OF SECTION 5-4


502 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF ASPHALT WORK 5-4
503 ASPHALT BINDER SPECIFICATIONS 5-4
504 ASPHALT BINDER STORAGE AND HANDLING 5-4
505 HEATING OF ASPHALT BINDER 5-4
506 ADHESION AGENT 5-5
507 LIMITATIONS TO CONSTRUCTION 5-5
508 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5-5
509 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION 5-5
510 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 5-5
511 MATERIALS FOR PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 5-6
512 PREPARATION OF SURFACE 5-7
513 SPRAYING OF PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 5-7
514 TEMPERATURES OF APPLICATION 5-8
515 CURING AND BLINDING OF PRIME COAT 5-8
516 TOLERANCES 5-8
517 ASPHALT CONCRETE 5-8

518 MATERIALS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE 5-8

(a) Penetration grade bitumen 5-8

(b) Aggregate 5-9

(c) Mineral filler 5-9

519 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND GRADING REQUIREMENTS 5-9

520 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT 5-11

(a) General 5-11

(b) Mixing plant 5-11

(c) Laying equipment 5-11

(d) Compaction equipment 5-11

521 PREPARATION OF SURFACE 5-12

522 DESIGN OF ASPHALT MIXES 5-12

523 SITE TRIALS 5-13

524 MIXING OF AGGREGATES AND BITUMEN 5-14

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

525 LAYING THE MIXTURE 5-15

526 COMPACTION OF THE MIXTURE 5-16

527 FINISHING, JOINTS AND EDGES 5-17

528 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF ASPHALT MIXTURES 5-17

529 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING 5-17

530 TOLERANCES 5-18

531 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5-18

(a) Item: Prime coat or tack coat 5-19

(b) Item: Asphalt concrete surfacing 5-19

(c) Item: Variation Binder Content 5-20

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

501 SCOPE OF SECTION

This Section covers the application of different Asphalt binders and aggregates to
road surfaces and asphaltic concrete. This Section is divided into the following parts:
x General Requirements of Asphalt work
x Prime Coat and Tack Coat
x Asphalt Concrete for Surfacing
502 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF ASPHALT WORK
This comprises all the general requirements for Asphalt binder and aggregates.
503 ASPHALT BINDER SPECIFICATIONS
All Asphalt binders shall comply with the relevant requirements set out in Section
1100 of this Specification.
504 ASPHALT BINDER STORAGE AND HANDLING
If Asphalt binders should be carried in bulk containers, the Contractor shall keep
records, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, of binder temperature and binder
quantity against time for each trip. Any asphalt binder which fails to meet the
requirements of Clause 505 of this Specification may be rejected by the Engineer as
unsuitable for use in the Works.
The Contractor shall keep the bitumen storage area and heating station neat and
tidy. The storage area shall be cleared of vegetation. Drums shall be stacked on their
sides in small quantities with sufficient gaps between stacks to minimize the risk of
fire.
Bitumen distributors and boilers shall be kept clean at all times. When the grade of
bitumen is to be changed and at the end of each day's work, all boilers and
distributors shall be thoroughly cleaned out with an approved solvent. The flushings
from boilers and distributors shall be led via lined drainage channels to purpose built
sumps. The Contractor shall ensure that such flushings do not pollute stormwater
ditches or streams or underground water sources. The Contractor shall empty the
sumps periodically and dispose of the flushings in a safe manner to the approval of
the Engineer. Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove the sumps
and drains and reinstate all such areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall keep all boilers, pre-heating pits, tools and equipment
scrupulously clean.
When the bitumen distributor is filled from either boilers or bulk containers, the
bitumen shall be passed through a fine wire gauze filter.
If asphalt binder should be transported by railway, care should be taken to avoid any
contamination of rails, pillows and other parts by bitumen and to keep them clean at
all times to ensure safety of traffic.
505 HEATING OF ASPHALT BINDER
During storage the temperature of the asphalt binder shall be kept as low as
possible, consistent with a suitable viscosity for pumping.
The Contractor shall only heat asphalt binder in boilers or bulk storage containers
that are equipped with compatible pumps and accurate thermometers. Asphalt
binders shall not be heated in a boiler with a broken or inaccurate thermometer.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

For slot-jets the viscosity for spraying shall be 70 to 100 centistokes and for
atomizing jet 35 to 65 centistokes.
No penetration grade bitumen to be incorporated in the Works shall be heated above
a temperature of 170 °C. If any bitumen should be overheated it shall be removed
from the Site and disposed of by the Contractor.
The rates of application of binder specified or instructed by the Engineer refer to
volumes of binder corrected to 15.6 °C using the Standard Petroleum Measurement
Table (ASTM D 1250).
506 ADHESION AGENT
An adhesion agent may be proposed to be added to the asphalt binder to improve
binding properties of bitumen. The adhesion agent and the amount to be added shall
be to the approval of the Engineer and the application shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
507 LIMITATIONS TO CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall not carry out asphalt construction work in adverse weather
conditions or when proscribed by the Engineer.
Asphalt material shall not be applied to wet or frozen surfaces or when weather
conditions otherwise prevent the proper handling and finishing of the mixture.
Provided that the Engineer may otherwise instruct surfaces to be damped prior to the
application of bitumen emulsions and certain types of prime coat.
The Contractor shall only place asphalt material when both the ambient temperatures
and road surface temperatures are greater than 10 °C and rising and the wind
velocity is less than 36 km/hr.
508 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid fire. The Contractor shall
ensure that his operations in respect of asphalt construction work are not hazardous
to the health and safety of the public or his labour. In particular the Contractor shall
ensure that:
(a) bitumen is heated only to the temperature required for the particular application,
(b) hot bitumen does not come in contact with water,
(c) suitable protective clothing, footwear and gloves are used when handling hot
bitumen, and,
(d) dust is reduced to a minimum,
(e) the hot bins and containers with bitumen are covered tightly, if bitumen is stored
in open sheds, fence steel wire net are erected to avoid access of livestock and
animals thereto.
509 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Protection of natural environment is required to be given due attention. The location
of hot mix plant shall be chosen in due consultation with local environment officer/
inspector of the Aimag/ province. For related activities section 1200 need to be
referred.
510 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
A prime coat is an application of low viscosity asphalt binder to an absorbent non-
asphalt surface.
A tack coat is a light application of asphalt binder to an asphalt or concrete surface.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

511 MATERIALS FOR PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT


The binder for prime coat shall be MC-30 or MC-70 cutback bitumen, conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO M82, sprayed at a rate of between 0.8-1.4 l/m2 or as
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Bitumen emulsions shall not be used for prime
coats. The depth of penetration of the prime coat shall be between 3-10 mm.
Penetration of the prime coat shall be such that the surface is dry within 24 hours. If
the Contractor should propose to traffic his equipment over the prime coat or it is to
be trafficked by the public, it shall first be protected with a suitable layer of blinding
material.
Blinding material shall be applied on prime coat and shall consist of clean fine
aggregate, sand, or crusher dust free from organic, clayey or other harmful material.
The grading of blinding material shall be in accordance with AASHTO M43, Size
Number 10 or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
The rate of spray shall be as per the Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 for prime coat and tack
coat respectively.
Table 5-1: Prime Coat Application Rate
Primer Kinematics Quantity of Liquid Bituminous
Surface Viscosity at 60 0C Material
(Centistokes) (Kg per 10 sqm)
Low Porosity
30-60 6-9
(WMM,WBM)
Medium Porosity
(Cement stabilized 70-140 9-12
base)
High Porosity
250-500 12-15
(Gravel base)

Table 5-2: Tack Coat Application Rate


Quantity of Liquid Bituminous material
Surface
(Kg per 10 sqm)
i) Normal bituminous surface 2.0-.25
ii)Dry and hungry bituminous surface 2.5-3.0
iii) Granular surface treated with primer 2.5-3.0
iv) Non bituminous surface
a) Granular base not primed 3.5-4.0
b) Cement concrete pavement 3.0-3.5

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the diesel fuel can be used as a
solvent.
The appropriate grading of binder and solvent to be used in tack coat and prime coat
shall be tested by the Contractor in laboratory and checked by the Engineer. Then
after site trial of selected grade the Contractor can apply the binder subject to prior
approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall keep a record showing temperature of binder at time of
application, grading of ingredients, location of application etc. at all times during the

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

placement of prime coat and tack coat. Such records shall be signed by the
Contractor’s and the Engineer’s concerned persons.
512 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the surface to be sprayed by sweeping with
mechanical brooms and/or washing or other approved means. All laitance of soil and
loose and foreign material shall be removed.
All loose material shall be swept clear of the Works to expose the full width of the
layer.
The surface to be sprayed shall be checked for line, camber and level, and the
surface corrected, made good as necessary and approved by the Engineer before
any asphalt spray is applied. Immediately prior to the commencement of all asphalt
spraying operations the Contractor shall request the Engineer's approval of the
surface to be sprayed.
Upon receipt of the Engineer's clearance to proceed and immediately prior to the
application of the prime coat, the complete surface of the layer shall be lightly and
evenly sprayed with water. Ponding or saturation of the layer shall be avoided. Water
shall be applied to the surface in small increments in order to achieve the required
condition. Any water remaining on the surface shall be allowed to drain away before
the prime coat is applied.
513 SPRAYING OF PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
As soon as practical after the surface preparation has been carried out to the
approval of the Engineer, the prime or tack coat shall be sprayed at the specified
rate. Spraying shall be carried out not later than 4 hours after the surface preparation
has been approved.
The quantity of binder used shall give complete coverage of the surface with a slight
trace of run-off in places. If the specified spray rate should appear to be incorrect, the
Contractor shall immediately stop spraying and inform the Engineer. The Engineer
shall instruct an amended spray rate.
The edge of the area to be sprayed shall be marked out with a line of string or wire
pegged down al intervals not exceeding 15 m on straights or 7.5 m on curves.
Bitumen shall be sprayed from a constant pressure distributor of minimum capacity
7,000 litres. Hand-spraying shall be permitted only at the discretion of the Engineer in
small areas or to make good defective areas such as those caused by a blocked
nozzle.
Nozzles shall be arranged to give a uniform spray and shall be tested prior to
spraying by discharging on to suitable material (such as building paper, metal sheets,
etc.,) or into purpose made troughs. Testing shall not take place on the road, and any
bitumen spilt on the ground shall be cleaned off.
If during spraying, a nozzle becomes blocked or develops a defect, the spraying shall
be immediately stopped. Any area incompletely sprayed shall be made good with a
hand-spray. The machine shall be repaired before further spraying is commenced.
When commencing and stopping spraying, sheets of building paper or metal at least
2 m wide shall be spread across the full width to be sprayed to give a clean sharp
edge.
The metal sheets used for stopping and starting work shall be cleaned after each run
and the troughs used for testing shall be cleaned at the end of each day's work.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

During spraying all kerbs, road furniture, culvert headwalls, tree boles and the like
which are liable to be disfigured by splashing of bitumen shall be protected, and any
such feature which is accidentally marred by bitumen shall be cleaned off with a
suitable solvent and made good.
514 TEMPERATURES OF APPLICATION
The minimum pumping temperatures, the range of spraying temperatures, and the
maximum heating temperatures of cut-back bitumen specified for use in the Works
are set out in Table 5-1.
Table 5-3 Pumping, Spraying and Heating Temperatures of Medium
Curing Cut-back Bitumens

Temperature (°C )*
Binder Minimum for Spraying Maximum
Pumping Slot Jets Atomizing Jets Heating
MC30 10 40 - 50 50 - 60 65
MC70 25 55 - 70 65 - 80 85

* These spraying temperatures are for guidance only, the optimum spraying
temperature is dependent upon the temperature/viscosity relationship of the
bitumen, climatic conditions and road conditions and shall be determined by the
Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. For slot jets the viscosity for
spraying shall be 70 - 100 centistokes, and for atomizing jets 35 - 60 centistokes.

515 CURING AND BLINDING OF PRIME COAT


If, after the application of the prime coat, the asphalt material fail to penetrate within
the time specified in Clause 511 of this Specification or the road must be used by
traffic, blinding material shall be spread in the amount required to absorb any excess
asphalt material and to protect the primed surface. Blinding material shall be spread
in such a manner that no wheel shall travel on uncovered asphalt material.
All loose material on the sprayed surface, including any blinding material, shall be
removed before any further asphalt binder is sprayed.
516 TOLERANCES
The rate of application of asphalt binder across the width of each spray run shall not
vary by more than ± 10% of the rate ordered. The average rate of binder for each
single run of the spray truck shall be at least equal to the instructed rate. Tray tests
shall be taken at least once a day during operations to check calculations based on
dipping of spray trucks.

517 ASPHALT CONCRETE


Asphalt concrete work shall consists of a surfacing of dense grade hot mixed hot-laid
asphalt concrete, constructed on a primed base course of crushed stone plant
material in accordance with these Specifications and the lines, grade, dimensions
and cross sections shown in the Drawings.
518 MATERIALS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE
(a) Penetration grade bitumen
Binder shall be penetration grade 90/130 straight run bitumen shall comply with
Section 1100 of this Specification.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(b) Aggregate
Coarse aggregate (retained on a 4.75 mm sieve) shall consist of crushed
angular stone free from weathered matter, inclusions, air bubbles, plate-like
substances (e.g. mica), clay, silt, organic matter and other deleterious
substances. Rocks which are highly jointed or fissured in-situ or breaks into
platy fragments or have a polished appearance along the fracture planes shall
not be used as aggregate sources. The minimum size of the stone to be
crushed to produce the chippings shall be at least 4 times the nominal size of
the chippings. At least 75% by weight of the coarse aggregate shall have two or
more faces split by the crushing. The percentage passing the 75 μm sieve shall
not exceed 0.5% by weight. The physical characteristics of the aggregate shall
comply with the following requirements.
x Los Angeles Abrasion max. 30%
x Sodium Sulphate Soundness max. 12%
x Water Absorption max. 2%
x Flakiness and Elongation Index max. 30%
Fine aggregate (passing a 4.75 mm sieve) shall consist of clean coarse sand,
crushed gravels or crushed stone screenings entirely produced from stone. It
shall consist of hard, tough grains, free of injurious amounts of clay, loam, mica
or other deleterious substances. The fine aggregate shall have a sand
equivalent value (AASHTO T176) of not less than 50, the plasticity index of the
fraction passing the 425 ȝm sieve shall not exceed 4 and the fine aggregate,
when subjected to five cycles of the soundness test according to AASHTO
T104, shall have a weighted loss not more than 15%.
The Contractor shall take such measures necessary to prevent the segregation
of aggregates in storage heaps. Stockpiles shall be built up in horizontal layers
and shall not exceed 1.5 m in height.
(c) Mineral filler
Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust,
hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineral matter approved by
the Engineer. At the time of use, it shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and
essentially free from agglomerations.
Mineral filler shall be graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size Mass Percent Passing
600 ȝm 100
300 ȝm 95 to 100
75 ȝm 70 to 100
Mineral filler prepared from rock dust and similar materials shall be essentially
free from micaceous matter, organic matter or other impurities and have a
plasticity index not greater than 4%. Plasticity index limits are not appropriate
for hydraulic lime and cement.
519 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND GRADING REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the grading of the mixture of coarse and
fine aggregate and mineral filler when combined in the proportions required by the
standard mix formula shall be within and approximately parallel to the grading
envelope given in Table 5-6.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The grading limits may be varied, if necessary, at the discretion of the Engineer
based on laboratory test results, Site trials and field experience, and Table 5-6 is for
guidance.
Table 5-6: Grading Requirements of Aggregate for Asphalt Concrete

Passing % Cumulative by weight


Sieve size (mm)
Thick 50-75mm Thick 30-45mm

26.5 100 -

19 79-100 100

13.2 59-79 79-100

9.5 52-72 70-88

4.75 35-55 53-71

2.36 28-44 42-58

1.18 20-34 34-48

0.6 15-27 26-38

0.3 10-20 18-28

0.15 5-13 12-20

0.075 2-8 4-10

The mixture for in-place asphalt concrete shall comply with the requirements given in
Table 5-7.
Table 5-7: Control Limits for Asphalt Concrete Design Mix

Design Parameters Control Limits

Marshall Stability (kN, 60qC) 4.5 - 6.5

Flow Value (mm) 3-5

75 blows on each of the two faces


Compaction level (number of blows)
of the specimen

Voids in total mix (%) 3–5

Voids in Mineral Aggregate (%) 14 – 16

% Voids filled with asphalt (VFA) 65-75

Loss of stability on immersion in water at 60


Min. 75% retained strength
°C (ASTM D1075)

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The binder content of the standard mix shall initially be proposed by the Contractor
and amended as necessary in consultation with and to the approval of the Engineer
following laboratory and Site trials.

520 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT


(a) General
In accordance with Section 100 of this Specification, full details of the Contractor's
equipment and methods proposed to carry out the Permanent Works shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer.
The Engineer shall at all times have access to Contractor's equipment for the
purposes of inspection. The Contractor shall carry out regular calibration checks in the
presence of the Engineer and shall correct forthwith any faults that are found.
All Contractor’s equipment used in the mixing, laying and compacting of asphalt mixes
shall be of adequate rated capacity, in good working condition, and shall be acceptable
to the Engineer. No obsolete, worn-out or malfunctioning equipment shall be used in
the Works.
(b) Mixing plant
The Contractor shall mix asphalt materials in a mixing plant complying with AASHTO
M156, that shall be located on the Site. It shall be equipped with at least three bins for
the storage of heated aggregates and a separate bin for filler. All bins shall be covered
to prevent the ingress of moisture.
The mixing plant shall be the batch-mix type and shall be capable of regulating the
composition of the mixture to within the tolerances specified of this Specification.
The mixing plant shall be equipped with modern computerized control panel
including the software for accurate recording of the weights of all mixed
materials, identifying clearly the individual trucks and the weights carried and of
all deliveries of aggregates and bitumen. Such records shall be printable and
accessible to the Engineer and his staff when required. The mixing plant shall
be equipped with a hot bin of capacity of not less than 100 tonnes for storage of
hot mixtures.

The bitumen tank shall be capable of maintaining its contents at the specified
temperature within a tolerance of ±5 °C and shall be equipped with a thermostat to
prevent the temperature rising above 170 °C and a fixed thermometer easily-read from
outside the tank. The Contractor shall remove from the plant and dispose of any
bitumen which has been heated above 170 °C or has suffered carbonization from
prolonged heating.
(c) Laying equipment
The Contractor shall lay asphalt materials by a self-propelled spreader finisher
equipped with a hopper, delivery augers and a heated adjustable vibrating screed. It
shall be capable of laying asphalt materials to the width not less than 8m with no
segregation, dragging, burning or other defects and within the specified level and
surface regularity tolerances. Laying equipment shall be equipped with automatic
control systems for control of surface levels and crossfalls of the finished layer.
The control sytem shall be capable to adjust the screed to the specified cross
fall within ±1% tolerances. In addition to automatic control system, the laying
equipment shall have manual control system.
(d) Compaction equipment

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall provide sufficient rollers of appropriate types, sizes and weights to
achieve the specified compaction. Rollers shall be self-propelled and of steel wheel,
pneumatic tyre and vibratory types, including combinations thereof, capable of
reversing without shoving or tearing the mixture. Prior to laying of asphalt mixes in the
Permanent Works the Contractor shall carry out Site trials in accordance with Section
1100 of this Specification to demonstrate the adequacy of his plant and to determine
the optimum method of use and sequence of operation of the rollers.
521 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Immediately before placing the asphalt mix in the pavement, the Contractor shall
clean the existing surface of all loose material and foreign matter with mechanical
brooms, high pressure pneumatic jets or other approved means. He shall dispose of
the debris well clear of the surface to be covered.
The Contractor shall make good any defect of the surface, and he shall not lay any
asphalt mix until the surface has been approved by the Engineer.
Tacked or primed surfaces shall be cured prior to the placement of asphalt mixes. The tack
coat shall be applied only as far ahead of the placing of mix as necessary to obtain the
minimum curing period.
The Contractor shall repair damaged areas of tack-coated or primed surfaces before laying
asphalt mixes. Before the Contractor commences the placement of asphalt mixes he shall
apply a tack coat to the surfaces of curbs, gutters and other structures that will be in contact
with the asphalt mix. Irregularities in the surface of the existing pavement or base shall be
corrected. Any raveled, pot-holed, heaved or otherwise damaged areas in base layers shall
be cleanly excavated and replaced before asphalt mixes are placed.
The Contractor shall seal all longitudinal and transverse joints and cracks with an approved
joint sealing compound or asphalt sealing material before the placement of asphalt mixes on
the existing surface. In all cases, the Contractor shall obtain clearance to proceed from the
Engineer before commencing laying operations.
If the Engineer considers a tack coat is required prior to laying the asphalt mix or
between layers of the asphalt mix solely as a result of delays occurring in the
Contractor's method of working, then such tack coat shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
522 DESIGN OF ASPHALT MIXES
Asphalt Concrete shall be composed of a mixture of aggregates, bitumen and
mineral filler as specified. A standard mix formula shall be established by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer for the mixture to be supplied for the
Contract. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded, and
proportioned such that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the
standard mix formula.
The standard mix formula, within specific allowable tolerances, shall be within the
ranges specified for the asphalt mixture and shall establish:
(a) a single percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve size,
(b) a single percentage of bitumen and mineral powder to be added to the aggregate,
(c) a temperature range within which the mixture is to be mixed,
(d) a recommended temperature range for compaction of the mixture after being laid.
At least 56 days prior to production, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in
writing a standard mix formula for each mixture supported by laboratory test data,
samples, and sources of the components, and asphalt cement viscosity-temperature
relationships for his information and for approval. The Engineer may at his discretion

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

require more tests to be done, including for alternative mixes, as part of his
evaluation and approval process. The Contractor shall only use the standard mix
formula as approved for the production of asphalt mixture. No modifications to a
standard mix or changes in the nature or source of the constituent materials shall be
made without a written submission by the Contractor to the Engineer detailing the
proposed modifications with relevant supporting data and the subsequent approval of
the Engineer.
If a standard mix formula proves unsatisfactory, a new standard mix formula together
with supporting test data shall be submitted by the Contractor for review and
approval by the Engineer prior to production.
Aggregate shall be conditionally accepted or rejected in the stockpiles at the mixing
plant site. Asphalt shall be conditionally accepted or rejected at the mixing plant. The
plant-mixed material will be tested for conformance with the standard mix after laying
and before compaction.
If the standard mix formula includes additives, their sources shall be approved by the
Engineer. Additives shall be added at the rate determined by the Contractor and approved by
Engineer based on laboratory analysis and laboratory mix design procedures. The rate of
additive addition shall be confirmed by the field laboratory during production. Appropriate in-
line blending or other approved methods for addition of additives to the mixture shall be
used.
The procedures set out above shall be followed in establishing each new standard mix
formula.
523 SITE TRIALS
The Contractor shall carry out full-scale laying and compaction trials on all asphalt
pavement materials and treatments proposed for the Permanent Works using the
plant and methods proposed. The trials shall be carried out with the agreement, and
under supervision of the Engineer at a locations approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out the trials to demonstrate the suitability of his plant,
equipment and work procedures to provide and compact the material to the specified
proportions, density and voids content and to confirm that the other specified
requirements of the completed asphalt pavement can be achieved.
Each trial area shall be at least 100m long and to the full construction width and
depth for the material. It may form part of the Permanent Works providing it complies
with the requirements of the Specification and is approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall remove materials laid during trials from any areas that do not comply
with the Specification.
The Contractor shall allow in his program, pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the
Conditions of Contract, for conducting Site trials and carrying out the appropriate
tests. The trial of any pavement layer shall be undertaken at least 14 days ahead of
the Contractor proposing to commence full-scale work on that layer.
The Contractor shall compact each section of the trial area over the range of
compactive effort be proposed. He shall record the following data for each level of
compactive effort at each Site trial:
(a) the composition and grading of the material including the bitumen content, type
and grade of bitumen used,
(b) the moisture content of aggregate in the asphalt plant hot bins,
(c) the temperature of the bitumen and aggregate immediately prior to entering the
mixer, and the temperature of the mix on discharge from the mixer, on

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

commencement of laying, on commencement of compaction and on completion


of compaction,
(d) the type, size, mass, width of roll, number of wheels, wheel-load, tyre
pressures, frequency of vibration and the number of passes of the compaction
equipment, as appropriate for each roller type,
(e) the target voids and other target properties of the mix together with the results
of the laboratory tests on the mix,
(f) the density and voids achieved,
(g) the compacted thickness of the layer including tolerances achieved,
(h) any other relevant information required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Engineer, carry out at least eight sets of
tests on each 100 m length of trial section for each level of compactive effort. The
Site trial shall be deemed to be successful if all eight sets of results over the range of
compactive effort proposed by the Contractor meet the specified requirements for the
material. The above data as recorded in the Site trial shall become the agreed basis
on which the particular material shall be provided and processed to achieve the
specified requirements.
If, during the execution of the Works, the construction control tests should indicate
that the requirements for a material are not being consistently met, the Contractor
shall cease work on that layer and investigate the cause. Such investigations may
include further laboratory and/or Site trials of the material to determine a revised set
of criteria and data that, when approved, shall be the basis on which all subsequent
material is provided and processed to achieve the specified requirements.
Acceptance by the Engineer of a set of data recorded in a Site trial shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his responsibilities to comply with the requirements of this
Specification.
524 MIXING OF AGGREGATES AND BITUMEN
Mixing plants shall conform to AASHTO M156 as modified herein:
(a) the minimum capacity of the mixing plant shall be 120 t/h (tonnes per hour),
(b) the dryer shall be of the rotating drum type capable of heating the aggregates to
the temperatures set forth in this Specification,
(c) asphalt shall be heated to the specified temperature in approved tanks and
delivered to the mixing plant via insulated pipes such that heat losses are
minimized,
(d) for batching plants, when dry mixing is required, the minimum dry mixing period
shall be 10 seconds and the minimum wet mixing period shall be 30 seconds,
(e) the wet mixing period shall not normally exceed 60 seconds,
(f) batching plants shall have automatic controls that co-ordinate the proportioning,
timing, and discharge of the mixer.
The Contractor shall heat the bitumen so that it can be distributed uniformly and he
shall take care not to overheat it. The temperature of the heated bitumen shall not
exceed
170 °C. The maximum continuous storage temperature for bitumen over a 24 hour
period shall not exceed 125 °C.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall dry and heat the aggregates so that they are mixed within the
temperature range of 125 °C to 165 °C. The temperature of the bitumen when mixed
with the aggregate shall lie within the temperature range of 140 °C to 160 °C and the
difference in temperature between the binder and the aggregate shall at no time
exceed
14 °C.
The Contractor shall combine the dried aggregates in the mixer in the amount of
each fraction required to give the specified grading and then introduce bitumen into
the mixer in the amount specified. The materials shall then be mixed until a complete
and uniform coating of the aggregate is obtained.
Asphalt mixes shall be kept free of contamination and segregation during
transportation. Each load shall be covered with a tightly fitting and firmly secured
canvas or similar covering of sufficient size to overhang the loaded truck box on all
sides. Covers shall be used to protect the mixture from the weather and dust at all
times including during the discharging of the load into the paver. If the covers are
found to have holes or to be torn they shall be replaced immediately. Loads not
properly covered shall be rejected. Trucks used for hauling asphalt mixture shall be
adequately insulated with tight, clean, smooth beds that are free of petroleum oils,
solvents or other materials that adversely affect asphalt mixture. A thin coating of an
approved release agent may be used to prevent the mixture from adhering to the
beds.
The Contractor shall be deemed responsible to ensure that hot mixes are supplied, in
accordance with the specified standard mix formula.
525 LAYING THE MIXTURE
Immediately after the surface has been prepared and approved, the mixture shall be spread
to line and level by the laying plant without segregation or dragging. The line and level of
laying shall be checked and identified by theodolite to the both sides from centerline. Use of
hand tools with low accuracy such as ordinary rulers for the fixing the level wire will be
prohibited.
The Contractor shall place the mixture in full widths of carriageway unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer. The compacted thickness of asphaltic concrete layer shall be in
accordance with the drawings.
Self-propelled asphalt pavers shall be used for laying. Pavers shall be capable of spreading
and finishing the asphalt plant-mix material in widths applicable to the typical section and
thickness, elevations, grades and camber shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer. Prior to start paving operations the screed assembly shall be heated and receiving
hopper and delivery augers are cleaned. If the screed is not heated as required or is not
vibrating, the operation of the paver shall not be permitted.
The paver shall be capable of operating at forward speeds consistent with uniform and
continuous laying of the mixture.
The Contractor shall appoint a competent person to supervise all paving operations,
operation mixing plants correlations between them.
The Contractor shall not operate the paver in a continual stop and start fashion and shall
minimize a number of cross joints.
Automatic controls in the paver shall be backed by manual controls that can be optionally
activated. If the automatic controls fail or malfunction, the equipment may be operated
manually for the remainder of the normal working day, provided that the specified
requirements are met.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

If the Contractor fails to obtain and maintain the specified surface tolerance, the paving
operations shall be suspended until satisfactory corrections, repairs or equipment
replacement are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

If during the paving operations unqualified mixture such as overheated, with high
content of bitumen, segregated, with below etc. such mixture shall be removed from
the site and disposed.

Hand laying and hand raking of any asphalt material shall generally not be permitted.
Handwork will be allowed in the immediate vicinity of joints and at difficult corners
where the finisher screed cannot reach. The Contractor remains responsible for the
quality of finish in any area which has been hand raked and may be required to
remove the laid asphalt and relay it if the quality of surface is, in the opinion of the
Engineer, markedly inferior to adjacent, acceptable, machine laid surfaces.

526 COMPACTION OF THE MIXTURE


Immediately after spreading the asphalt mixture, the Contractor shall compact it
thoroughly and uniformly by rolling.
The minimum temperature of the mixture at the commencement of compaction shall
be 125oC. The minimum temperature at completion of compaction shall be 90-
110oC.
The Contractor shall roll the layer when the mixture is neither too workable, such that
rolling causes undue displacement or shoving, nor too stiff, offering resistance to the
desired degree of compaction.
The number, weight and type of rollers supplied by the Contractor shall be sufficient
to obtain the required compaction while the mixture is in a workable condition. The
equipment to be used, sequence of rolling operations and number of passes shall be
proven during Site trials and agreed with the Engineer.
Rolling, in compliance with the general procedures outlined below, shall continue until
the layer under compaction has attained the specified requirements.
Prior to commencement of rolling, the fuel delivering system of the roller shall be
properly checked, and repaid if any leakage of the fuel is observed. Also, Drum
watering system shall be in working condition.
Initial rolling with a vibratory steel tandem roller with 6 to 8 tonnes weight shall follow
the laying plant as closely as possible. The roller shall roll every first pass there
without vibration and every other pass back shall be vibrated.
Intermediate rolling with a pneumatic tyred roller with 12 to 16 tonnes width shall
follow immediately upon initial rolling. Final rolling with a 3 steel wheels roller shall be
used to eliminate marks from previous rolling.
The rollers shall be operated with the drive roll nearest the laying plant, at a uniform
speed not exceeding 5 km/h.
Rolling shall normally commence from the outer edge and proceed longitudinally
parallel to the centreline, each pass overlapping the previous pass by one half of the
roller width. On superelevated curves, rolling shall begin at the low side and progress
to the high side. The rollers should not make sharp turns to the sides especially
during initial and intermediate rollings. For the short stops the rollers should move to
the compacted area.
The field density of asphalt concrete layer shall be checked from the average density
of pairs of cores cut through the full thickness of the layer at the frequency indicated

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

in the Project Quality Control Plan subject to a minimum of 1 pair of cores for each
calendar day that asphaltic concrete work take place.
Asphalt concrete layer shall be compacted to an average field density which shall be
equal to or greater than the specified density and not more than 1 in any consecutive
10 results shall be more than 2% below the specified density.
The specified minimum density of compaction shall be 98% of the density of Marshall
specimens compacted from the approved standard mix. Areas of asphaltic concrete
where the standard of compaction specified above has not been achieved shall be
identified and further pairs of cores shall be taken and tested.
Where the average density of compaction of such an area is greater than 1% below
the specified minimum density, the Contractor shall forthwith remove the asphaltic
concrete and replace it with asphaltic concrete complying with the specified
requirements.
It is strictly prohibited to charge construction equipment with fuel in any area of
asphalt concrete pavement. Sharp turn of the roller shall be prohibited in any rolling
operations.
The Contractor shall keep roller wheels and drums lightly moistened with water to
prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers. The water shall not contain any
chemicals neither using the diesel fuel instead of water will not be permitted.
In areas too small for rollers, a vibrating plate compactor may be used to achieve the
specified compaction.
527 FINISHING, JOINTS AND EDGES
The Contractor shall remove any mixture that becomes loose or broken, mixed with
dirt or foreign matter, or is in any way defective, and replace it with fresh hot mixture
compacted to conform to the surrounding area.
The Contractor shall spread the mixture in a continuous operation. Where the mixture
is to be placed against previously placed asphalt material he shall form transverse
joints by cutting neatly in a straight line across the previous face to expose the full
depth of the course. The vertical face so formed shall be heated with a propane joint
heater and painted lightly with hot 90/130 penetration grade bitumen immediately
prior to the new mixture being place against it. The paver shall be positioned to
spread material overlapping the joint face by 20 to 30 mm.
After positioning the paver, the hot mixture pulled out by delivering augers shall be
left on the edge of previously placed asphalt surface for 5 to 10 minutes and then the
paver shall start paving. The excess mixture on joint area shall be raked off and
discarded. The joints shall be spread by the mixture with fine aggregate and carefully
leveled by hand and immediately compacted by a roller.
The finish at joints shall comply with the surface requirements and shall present the
same uniformity of finish, texture and density as other sections of the surface.
If during paving operations segregation of aggregate occurred The Contractor shall
take hot mixture and sift it through a small sized sieve on the segregated surface,
then level it with wooden plate and compact it by a roller.
528 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF ASPHALT MIXTURES
The Contractor shall carry out sampling of asphalt mixtures in accordance with
AASHTO T168.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

529 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING


During mixing and laying of asphalt materials the Contractor shall carry out control
tests on the constituents and on the mixed material in accordance with his Project
Quality Control Plan, Section 1100 of this Specification.
If the results of any tests show a trend towards the constituent materials failing to
comply with the Specification, the Contractor shall identify whatever changes are
necessary to the materials and work procedure to ensure compliance, and obtain the
Engineer's approval before implementing such changes.
If the results of more than one test in ten successive tests on the mixed material
show that the material fails to comply with the Specification, the Contractor shall
immediately cease laying operations until he has identified and corrected the reason
for the failure. The Contractor shall at his own cost remove all faulty material and
replace it with material complying with this Specification.
530 TOLERANCES
The Contractor shall construct surfacing courses and base courses within the
geometric tolerances specified in Section 1100 of this Specification.
The Contractor shall maintain the composition of the mixture as determined from the
standard mix and Site trials within the tolerances, per single test, set out in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8: Tolerances for Asphalt Mixes

Constituent Tolerance

Bitumen content ± 0.3% by total weight of total mix

± 6% by total weight of dry aggregate


Passing 4.75 mm and larger sieves
including mineral filler

Passing 2.36 mm to 0.15 mm ± 4% by total weight of dry aggregate


sieves including mineral filler

± 2% by total weight of dry aggregate


Passing 75 μm sieves
including mineral filler

Mixture temperature ± 10 °C

The average amount of bitumen in any length of the layer, calculated as the product
of the bitumen contents obtained from single test and the weight of mixture
represented by each test, shall not be less than the amount instructed.
The average amount of bitumen for each day's production calculated from the check
weights of mixes shall not be less than the amount instructed.
The final average overall width of the upper surface of a asphalt mix layer measured
at six equidistant points over a length of 100 m shall be not less than the width
specified. At no point shall the distance between the centreline of the road and the
edge of the upper surface of a asphalt mix layer be narrower than that specified by
more than 10 mm.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

531 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


No separate payment shall be made for activities related to sections 501 through 509.
(a) Item: Prime coat or tack coat
Unit: m2
The unit of measurement for prime coat or tack coat complying with Clause 510
to 516 of these Specifications shall be the square meter. The area of prime coat
or tack coat shall be calculated as the product of the net constructed width and
the plan length instructed measured along the centre line of the road. The net
constructed width of prime coat or tack coat shall be taken as average of widths
measured at every 25m of the length constructed. The area exceeding the
instructed area shall not be subject to payment.
The rate for prime coat or tack coat shall include for the costs of:
• providing, hauling and spraying the prime or tack coat at the instructed
application rate,
• extending the coat 150 mm each side of the carriageway,
• working on steep slopes,
• blinding,
• complying with the requirements of Section 1100 of this Specification.

(b) Item: Asphalt concrete surfacing


Unit: m3
The unit of measurement for asphalt concrete surfacing shall be the cubic
metre measured compacted on the road. The volume of asphalt concrete
surfacing shall be calculated as the product of the compacted cross sectional
area shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer and the plan length
of asphalt concrete instructed to be laid measured along the centerline of the
road.
The rate for asphalt concrete surfacing shall include the costs of plant mixing,
and:
x Preparation of surface as required
x supplying, heating and mixing aggregates and binder,
x supplying and mixing mineral filler,
x supplying and mixing additives, if necessary,
x variations in the quantities of aggregates and filler,
x variations in the quantities of additives,
x preparation of the surface to receive the surfacing,
x working on steep gradients,
x all necessary hauls,
x laying the plant mixed heated mixture to the specified compacted thickness,
x rolling,

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x achieving the specified surface finish, and,


x complying with all the requirements of Section 500 through 510 of this
Specification.
The rate for asphalt concrete surfacing shall also include for the costs of:
x establishment and operation of crushing and screening equipment,
x quarry operations,
x land acquisition, compensation and fees,
x reinstatement of quarries on completion, and,
x complying with all the requirements of Sections 100, 300 and 1100 of this
Specification.
x Arrangement of traffic

The rate shall include the provision of asphalt, at 5.50 per cent by weight of the
total mixture. The variance in actual percentage of bitumen used will be
assessed and the payment adjusted, up or down, accordingly.
(c) Item: Variation Binder Content
Unit: tonne
The bid price shall be based on using 5.5 % asphalt of the total mixture. If in
actual execution asphalt quantity is more than 5.5 %, the extra quantity of
asphalt binder shall be paid as variation to the contractor. If the quantity of
asphalt used is less than 5.5 %, the difference shall be recovered from
contractor as variation in binder content.

Section 500. Asphalt pavement works 5-20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 600 –DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND PROTECTION WORKS

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 600 –DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND PROTECTION WORKS

601 SCOPE OF SECTION 6-4


602 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION 6-4
603 EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES 6-5
604 EXCAVATIONS TO BE KEPT DRY 6-5
605 FOUNDATIONS AND ABUTMENTS CAST AGAINST EXCAVATED
SURFACES 6-5
606 SURPLUS EXCAVATED AND BACKFILLING MATERIALS 6-6
607 BACKFILLING OF EXCAVATIONS AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES 6-6
608 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES 6-6
609 EXCAVATIONS FOR RIVER TRAINING AND NEW WATERCOURSES 6-6
610 STONE PITCHING 6-7
611 RIPRAP 6-8
612 BREAST AND RETAINING WALLS 6-8
613 BEDDING AND LAYING OF PIPE CULVERTS 6-8
(a) Bedding and laying of concrete pipe culverts on 6-8
in-place or selected material
(b) Bedding and laying of concrete pipes on a concrete bed 6-9
614 JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES 6-9
(a) Rigid joints 6-9
(b) Flexible joints 6-10
(c) Collar Joints 6-10
(c) Pipe ends 6-10
615 CONCRETE BEDS, SURROUNDS AND HAUNCHES 6-10
616 SUBSOIL DRAINS 6-10
617 PROTECTION WORKS 6-11
618 MINOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 6-11
619 DRAINS, STONE PITCHING AND FLEXIBLE BOULDER APRON 6-12
620 STONE MASONRY LINING 6-12
621 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6-13
(a) Item: Excavate for culverts, subsoil drains, minor drainage
structures, inlet, outfall, mitre and cut-off drains in Soft
material 6-13
(b) Item: Channel excavation in soft material 6-14
(c) Item: Extra over Sub-Clause 613 (a) to (b) for excavation in hard
material 6-15

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(d) Item: Intercepting drains 6-15


(e) Item: Selected granular backfill material 6-15
(f) Item: Coarse fill material for subsoil drains 6-15
(g) Item: Provide, lay and joint reinforced concrete pipe and box culvert 6-16
(h) Item: Concrete Grade M 20 to beds, surrounds and haunches 6-16
(i) Item: Reinforced concrete Grade M 20 to minor drainage structures 6-16
(j) Item: Stone pitching 6-16
(k) Item: Flexible boulder apron 6-17
(l) Item: Grouted stone pitching 6-17
(m) Item: Close-jointed riprap 6-17

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

601 SCOPE OF SECTION


(i) General: This section covers all excavation and filling operations to bridges, box
culverts, retaining walls and other structures. It also covers river training and bridge
protection works. It does not cover roadway excavations and embankment
construction.
(ii) Order of Works: The Drawings give an initial guide only to the location and size
of each structure / culvert. Precise details of length, skew and invert levels shall be
issued to the Contractor from time to time as construction proceeds. Longitudinal
sections, cross-sections and other information pursuant to Section 100 of this
Specification shall be submitted. The Contractor shall allow in his program, to be
submitted in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of
Contract, for the intervening period between submission of those data and the issue
of precise structure / culvert details in accordance with the requirements of Section
100 of this Specification.
All structure / culverts and drainage works shall be carefully programmed. The
Contractor shall allow in his program, pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions
of Contract, for the completion of all structure / culverts and drainage works prior to
the construction of embankments over or beside them, unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.
If the Contractor should consider that drainage conditions are such that it is not
necessary to construct a structure / culvert ahead of embankment construction he
shall make a written request to the Engineer to vary the normal order of work. The
Engineer may accede to such a request provided that:
(a) the Contractor shall be held liable for any damage or delays to the structure /
culvert or to the embankment earthworks, and,
(b) the construction of the structure / culvert shall follow immediately upon the
substantial completion of the embankment earthworks.
Where structure / culverts are to be constructed under a road formation in cutting,
excavation and backfill shall be carried out after the bulk earthworks are complete but
before the processing of the 100 mm layer below formation level in cuttings. If the
Contractor should wish to vary this order of work he shall make a written request to
the Engineer. The Engineer may consent to the Contractor's request that excavation
for such structure / culverts be carried out before the earthworks are completed
provided that payment for the excavation of the trench shall only be made for that
volume excavated below formation level.
602 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
Material shall be classified as either “hard” or “soft” material as defined below:
Hard material shall comprise material which can be excavated only after blasting with
explosives or barring and wedging or the use of a pneumatic or hydraulic mechanical
breaker fitted with a rock point in good condition and operated correctly. Isolated
boulders of more than 0.75 m3 occurring in soft material shall be classified as hard
material.
Excavation requiring ripping equipment of rated capacity of 250 flywheel horse power
may be taken as hard rock (provided unconfined compressive strength is more than
50 MPa). Excavation with ripping equipment from 150 to 250 horse power, if found
workable, shall be termed as soft rock provided the unconfined compressive strength
is in the range of 12.5 to 50 MPa. Excavation other than this termed as common
excavation.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

603 EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES


The excavation of foundations for structures and any associated drainage works shall
be kept to the minimum. The sides of the excavation shall be kept vertical and shall
be properly timbered or sheet piled, shored and strutted as necessary to prevent
subsidence/slippage or collapse of the surrounding soil.
All excavated surfaces, in material other than hard material, on which foundation for
structures are to be placed shall be compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
immediately before foundations are constructed.
Excavated surfaces in hard material shall provide for a minimum thickness of 50 mm
of blinding concrete.
Where a combination of hard and soft materials exist in the excavated surfaces then,
dependent on the proportions of existing materials, the Contractor shall, at the
instruction of the Engineer, either remove a minimum of 100 mm of soft material from
below the level of the underside of the foundation and replace it with non-structural
concrete to the top of blinding level or removal a minimum of 100 mm of hard
material from below the level of the underside of the foundation and replace it with
soft material compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T180).
Where ground conditions are such that a satisfactory foundation cannot be achieved
at the specified foundation base level the Contractor shall, if instructed by the
Engineer, remove the unsuitable material until a suitable founding material is
encountered or to the depth and width instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall backfill the resultant additional excavation to the specified level of the underside
of blinding concrete with approved material compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO
T180).
The Engineer's approval of any excavation shall be obtained prior to any construction
thereon.
604 EXCAVATIONS TO BE KEPT DRY
All excavations shall be kept dry and the Contractor shall take all necessary
measures to maintain excavations free from water, snow and ice.
Where required by the Engineer, the sumps from which dewatering pumps operate
shall be constructed outside the area of the foundation base. Excessive pumping
from the excavation that is liable to cause settlement, disturbance, or washing out of
fine particles from the neighboring ground shall not be permitted.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the foundation has become soft or unstable
and additional excavation is required due solely to the Contractor’s method of
working, the resulting backfill shall be with approved material compacted to 95%
MDD (AASHTO T180) or concrete as instructed by the Engineer. All such
excavation and backfill shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
605 FOUNDATIONS AND ABUTMENTS CAST AGAINST EXCAVATED
SURFACES
Foundations and/or abutments shall be cast against an excavated surface where
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Excavations for such
foundations or abutments shall be neatly excavated and trimmed to the shape
required. If any over-excavation should occur, the space between the foundation
and/or abutment and the excavated surface shall be backfilled with the same grade
of concrete as specified for leveling course. Such concrete backfill shall be placed in
advance of the concrete for the foundation and/or abutment and shall be at the
Contractor's expense.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

606 SURPLUS EXCAVATED AND BACKFILLING MATERIALS


Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of in designated spoil areas in
accordance with Section 300 of this Specification or may be used in earthworks if
considered suitable by the Engineer.
Backfilling and filling behind and around structures shall only be carried out using
materials that have been approved by the Engineer.
607 BACKFILLING OF EXCAVATIONS AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval prior to commencing any filling
around a structure or backfilling a trench or excavation, or to loading any structure.
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval to his proposed sequence of
filling and backfilling behind and around a structure and to the height of fill at any time
between fill levels.
The Contractor shall carry out filling and backfilling operations with selected materials
approved by the Engineer in horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted
thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly mixed, watered or dried as necessary, and
compacted to a minimum dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T180).
Timbering and sheeting left in for the purpose of supporting the sides of the
excavation shall be eased up 150 mm at a time in steps with the backfill layer.
Where instructed by the Engineer, timbering or sheeting shall be left permanently in
place.
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
place selected granular fill materials conforming to the grading in accordance with
AASHTO M6/AASHTO M43 for size No. 89 (9.5-1.189 mm) and/or granular filter
materials conforming to the grading in accordance with AASHTO M43 for size No.
467 (37.5-4.75mm) approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use a sliding
form or other means approved by the Engineer during backfilling such that the filter
layer is brought up and compacted at least 150 mm ahead of the selected granular fill
materials, and that the selected granular fill materials is brought up and compacted at
least 150 mm ahead of the adjacent earthworks fill. The interface between selected
granular fill materials to this Section 600 and the adjacent earthworks carried out in
accordance with Section 300 of the Specification shall be as shown on the Drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer. Above ground level the Contractor shall use the
same material as that being used for the adjacent embankment.
608 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall furnish, construct and maintain all necessary cofferdams,
caissons, cribs, channels, flumes and other diversions and protection works and shall
furnish install, operate and maintain all necessary pumping and other equipment for
the exclusion or removal of water from various parts of the Works.
Drawings for cofferdams and other proposed temporary installations shall be
submitted to the Engineer before commencement of the Temporary Works in
accordance with Clause 114 of this Specification. The Contractor shall avoid any
measures in the proposed installations that may cause flooding or endanger the
safety of persons or property on upstream or downstream of the Site.
All such Temporary Works shall be removed on completion of the Works unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
609 EXCAVATIONS FOR RIVER TRAINING AND NEW WATERCOURSES
Excavations carried out for the diversion, enlargement, deepening or straightening of
streams and rivers or for the formation of new watercourses shall be carried out as

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Such excavations shall


include Site clearance, trimming of slopes, grading of beds and disposal of the
excavated materials.
Where watercourses are required to be diverted or instructed by the Engineer the
original channels shall be cleared of all vegetative growth and soft deposits and
carefully backfilled with approved materials, placed and compacted to 95% MDD
(AASHTO T180). The borrow area should be sufficiently away from the channels.
Backfill to existing channels shall be taken in hand alongwith the construction of the
bridge. Every effort shall be made to complete the backfill work in one working
season. Where there is any doubt about completion of the whole backfill work within
one working season, the Contractor shall take suitable measures for protection of the
completed work.
River training and protection measures shall include construction of stone pitching
and riprap as required for ensuring the safe preservation of the bridge structure and
its approaches against damage by flood water and ice.
610 STONE PITCHING
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
excavate for, trim to line and level, provide and lay stone pitching.
Stone pitching shall be formed of stone which is sound, hard, durable and fairly
regular in shape. Quarry stone shall be used. Rounded boulders shall not be allowed.
The stones subject to marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be
accepted. The largest stones shall be used and in no case shall any fragment weigh
less than 35 kg unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The sizes of spalls shall
be minimum 25 mm and shall be suitable to fill the voids in the pitching. The apparent
specific gravity for stone pitching shall be at least 2.40.
The area to be pitched shall be prepared by excavating, shaping and trimming to
accommodate the stonework and shall be compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T180).
A trench shall be excavated along the toe of any slope to be pitched or along the
unprotected edge of the pitching in the beds of watercourses. Commencing at the
bottom of the trench stones shall be laid and firmly bedded into the slope and against
adjoining stones. The stones shall be set on edge with their largest dimension at right
angles to the slope unless such dimension exceeds that of the instructed thickness of
the stone pitching. The stones shall be securely rammed into the surface to be
protected. The stones shall be fitted closely together so as to leave only a minimum
of interstices which shall be filled with suitably shaped and tightly wedged spalls. The
top of the pitching shall be finished flush with the adjacent material.
Where grout is specified, the surfaces of the stones shall be thoroughly cleaned and
free from adhering dirt and clay. Grout, composed of one part cement to three parts
sand, shall be rammed into the wetted interstices between the stones so as to ensure
all voids are completely filled, provided that the Engineer may instruct that 20% of
vertical joints be left open as weep holes. The grout shall be smoothed off flush with
the pitched face and the stones shall be thoroughly brushed such that their top
surfaces are exposed. The grouted stone pitching shall be cured with wet sacking or
other approved method and protected from the effects of the climate for a period of
not less than seven days after grouting.
Filter media shall be placed on the prepared slope or area before placement of slope
pitching to prevent leaching of the embankment through the voids of stone pitching
as well as to allow free movement of water with out creating any uplift on the pitching.
One layer of graded filter media of specified thickness shall be provided underneath
the pitching. The aggregates for filter media shall conform to Section 600 of AASHTO
Guide Specifications for Highway Construction.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Flexible Boulder Apron: Stones used in apron shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly
regular in shape. Stones subject to deterioration by water or weather shall not be
used. Angular shape stones shall be preferred to rounded boulders. The size of stone
should be as indicated in the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. The surface
on which the apron is to be laid shall be leveled and prepared for the length and
width as shown in the drawings.
611 RIPRAP
Stone for riprap shall consist of hard, durable, crushed, quarried, or natural stone
aggregate. Stone at least 75 mm thick, with a minimum 23 kg mass; at least 60
percent shall have a mass of more than 35 kg including fragments or spalls sized to
wedge between the stones or using smaller stones graded to ensure even
distribution through the riprap. The apparent specific gravity for riprap stone shall be
at least 2.40.
The surface of areas to receive riprap shall be neatly trimmed to line and level and
compacted to maximum dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T180). Riprap
construction shall be bounded by 1 m thick dry masonry walls constructed in
perimeter trenches 600 mm deep and extending to the full height of the specified
thickness of riprap.
Where instructed by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings, a granular filter,
consisting of one or more thick layers of graded permeable material, shall be placed
on the prepared surface to the required thickness and with an even surface finish for
each layer placed. The grading requirements of such granular filter material shall be
in accordance with Clause 607 of the Specification or instructed by the Engineer.
The stones shall be laid with close joints from the bottom of the slope of
embankment, or existing ground upward, the larger of the stones being laid at the
bottom. The surface shall be hand packed, carefully bedded and tightly wedged with
suitable spalls to form an even, densely packed surface.
612 BREAST AND RETAINING WALLS
The Contractor shall furnish and placing structural concrete and incidental
construction of breast and retaining walls in conformity with the lines, grades and
dimensions, as shown in details on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
All materials shall conform to Section 700, “Concrete Works.” of this Specification.
Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 700, “Concrete
Works.”
Filter media/granular filter materials shall be in accordance with Clause 607 of this
Specification.
Weep holes shall be 50 mm dia and shall extend through the full width of the walls
with slope of about 1 vertical to 20 horizontal towards the draining face. The spacing
of weep holes shall not exceeding 1.0 m in either direction and shall be staggered or
as directed by the Engineer and shall be contractor’s own cost incidental to
concreting rate.
613 BEDDING AND LAYING OF PIPE CULVERTS
Pipe culverts shall normally be bedded directly on in-place soft material. Where the
in-place material is unsuitable the invert shall be excavated and backfilled as
specified in Clause 604 and Clause 604 of this Specification. Concrete pipes shall be
laid with the spigot ends placed downstream.
(a) Bedding and laying of concrete pipe culverts on in-place or selected granular
material

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Selected granular material shall be in accordance Clause 611 of this


Specification.
The bottom of the excavation shall be compacted to at least 98% MDD
(AASHTO T180) and shaped to the lower part of the pipe such that the barrel of
the culvert rests on it over a width of at least one quarter of its circumference,
and throughout the length of barrel.
Voids shall be formed in the bedding under the joints and sockets such that
adequate space is provided under the pipe to form the joint. After the joint has
been formed the void shall be packed hard with bedding material. The underside
of the barrel shall be packed hard with selected fill material at a moisture content
of between 1% above and 2% below the Optimum Moisture Content, and
rammed solid.
(b) Bedding and laying of concrete pipes on a concrete bed
Where pipes are laid on a concrete bed the pipes shall be bedded on 1:3
cement to sand mortar at least 50 mm thick, 150 mm wide and extending the full
length of the barrel.
After the joints have been formed, concrete Grade M 20/ as specified in the
drawing, complying with the requirements of Section 700 of this Specification,
shall be packed hard under the barrel and sockets of the culvert and extending
upwards on each side of the pipe to the height shown on the Drawings.
Multiple installations shall be laid with parallel centrelines and longitudinal
movement joints through the concrete bed. The clear distance between barrels
of adjacent pipes shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
614 JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES
(a) Rigid joints
When laying rigid jointed concrete pipes with integral sockets, the Contractor
shall, before entering a pipe spigot into its socket, ensure that both spigot and
socket are clean and free from mud, oil, grease or other deleterious matter. A
gasket of tarred hemp yarn, cut to length such that it forms a butt joint at the
crown of the pipe, shall be wrapped round the spigot which shall then be fully
entered into the socket and the gasket caulked up hard into the joint. The joint
shall then be filled completely with a plastic mortar composed of one part of
cement to two parts of sand and finished off with a fillet at an angle of 45°.
Rigid jointed sleeves used to join two spigots shall be jointed in the same
manner as integral sockets.
If the Drawings require ogee-jointed pipes to be laid with mortar joints, the
Contractor shall make them at the time of laying. A plastic mortar composed of
one part of cement to two parts of sand shall be applied to the lower semi-
circumference of the socket and to the upper semi-circumference of the spigot
and the pipe shall be drawn hard into the socket. The outside of the joint shall be
pointed up with a fillet of the same mortar, 75 mm wide and 25 mm thick all the
way round and central over the joint.
All pipes shall be saturated with water before jointing and shall be scraped and
cleaned inside and the joint flushed up with a plastic mortar composed of one
part of cement to two parts of sand.
All joints shall be protected from the wind, sun, frost and rain by a covering
approved by the Engineer, and shall be kept constantly damp for a period of at

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

least three days.


The pipes shall not be disturbed in any way for at least 48 hours after jointing.
(b) Flexible joints
Flexible joints between concrete pipes having integral sockets may be formed by
a shaped rubber gasket fitted within the socket or by a rubber ring of circular
cross section (O-ring) placed on the pipe spigot. The type of flexible joint to be
used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Before any joint is made all parts of the joint shall be clean and free from mud,
oil, grease or other deleterious matter.
The Contractor shall lubricate fixed gaskets strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. O-ring gaskets shall not be lubricated.
Components of flexible joints from different manufacturers shall not be used
together.
The spigot of the pipe to be laid shall be entered into the socket of the previous
pipe with the two pipes in line, and a firm steady pressure exerted on the end of
the pipe being laid. If necessary a jack anchored round the collar of the previous
pipe shall be used to pull the subsequent pipe into position. The spigot shall be
pulled hard into the socket and then eased back the distance recommended by
the manufacturer to provide flexibility in the joint.
After jointing, the Contractor shall test the position of O-rings with a feeler to
ensure that they are correctly positioned. If any ring shows a significant
departure from a line following a pipe circumference, the joint shall be broken
and remade using a new ring.
Where plain ended pipes are connected by a sleeve incorporating flexible joints
the joints shall be made as described for pipes with integral sockets. The joint
between the first pipe and the sleeve shall be completed before the second pipe
is inserted into the sleeve.
The Contractor shall fill the annular space inside the socket of each pipe or
sleeve but outside the gasket with puddled clay, uncaulked yarn or other suitable
material approved by the Engineer to prevent the ingress of stones.
(c) Collar Joints: The pipe joints laid close shall be covered with collar (RCC of
same grade and strength as of pipe) as shown in the drawing. The annular
space between the collar and pipe shall be duly filled with mortar as shown in
the drawing/ Engineer’s instruction.
(d) Pipe ends
Unless otherwise specified pipe ends shall be left square.
615 CONCRETE BEDS, SURROUNDS AND HAUNCHES
The Contractor shall thoroughly trim, compact and clean the surface of any bed,
surround or haunch to the satisfaction of the Engineer before commencing
concreting.
Where instructed by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide 150 mm thick concrete surrounds to concrete pipes. All concrete for beds,
surrounds and haunches shall be concrete Grade M 20 or as specified in the
drawing, complying with Section 700 of this Specification, formed to the dimensions
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
616 SUBSOIL DRAINS

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

For the purposes of this Specification, subsoil drains shall include any type of drain
designed to collect groundwater whether this is rising from below or percolating from
the surface above and may or may not include pipes. Instructions for subsoil drains in
cuttings shall not generally be given until bulk earthworks are complete within that
particular cutting. Any subsoil drains that may be instructed shall be completed
before the work on the adjacent 300 mm layer below formation commences.
Trenches for subsoil drains shall be not less than 0.5 m wide or the outside diameter
of the pipe plus 0.3 m whichever is the greater. The minimum depth of the subsoil
drain invert below the side drain invert shall be as shown on the Drawings or
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Concrete pipes shall comply with Section 1100
of this Specification and shall be laid with joints open by 10mrn.
Course fill material for subsoil drains shall be clean hard, crushed rock or gravel with
the fraction passing the 75 Pm sieve screened out. The grading of such fill material
shall generally be evenly graded between the limits shown in Table 6-1 for 37.5 mm
maximum size graded aggregate or as otherwise instructed by the Engineers.
Table 6-1: Gradation Requirements for
Coarse Fill Material in Subsoil Drains

Sieve Size Mass Percent Passing


50 mm 100
37.5 mm 80 – 100
19 mm 60 - 80
9.5 mm 45 - 65
4.75 mm 30 - 50
2.36 mm 15 – 40
425 μm 5 - 25
75 μm 0

Fine fill material for subsoil drains shall be clean hard sand from an approved borrow
area. The Engineer shall indicate the grading of granular filter materials conforming
with AASHTO M43 for size No. 467 (37.5-4.75 mm) or any other suitable grading to
be used to suit each situation. Where more than one grading of such fill materials is
required in a trench, the different sizes shall be kept separate by temporary metal or
plywood baffles which shall be removed when the filling is complete, or by other
suitable means acceptable to the Engineer.
617 PROTECTION WORKS
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
provide and place protection works. Protection work in connection with drainage
channels, culvert inlets and outfalls and river training will consist generally of stone
pitching or rip-rap in accordance with Section 700 of this Specification.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not remove cobbles
and boulders from stream beds for masonry or other works.
618 MINOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Minor drainage structures shall include culvert inlet and outlet structures, catchpits,
cascades, spillways and the like. Typical details are shown on the Drawings but
working details shall be issued by the Engineer from time to time during the Contract.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Concrete for minor drainage structures shall be concrete Grade M 20 as specified in


the drawing in accordance with Section 700 of this Specification unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings. The surface finish shall be Class U1 for unformed surfaces,
formed surfaces shall have an ordinary surface finish.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, concrete shall be reinforced in
the back and front faces of walls and in the top and bottom of all slabs with 10 mm
diameter high yield deformed bars placed at 200 mm centres on both axes of the
plane concerned to form a mesh. Reinforcement shall be fixed in accordance with,
and shall comply with the requirements of, Section 700 of this Specification.
619 DRAINS, STONE PITCHING AND FLEXIBLE BOULDER APRON
(a) Drains, stone pitching and flexible boulder apron shall be formed at the
locations and to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings or as instructed
by the Engineer.
(b) Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the Contractor
shall construct, intercepting drains, mitre (chute), cutoff and outfall drains to
direct the flow of water in the drainage works. This work shall include
excavation, removal and satisfactory disposal of all materials. After the Site
has been cleared the limits of excavation shall be set out true to lines, slopes,
grades and sections as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not excavate outside the slopes or below the
established grades or loosen any material outside the limits of excavation.
Any excess depth excavated below the specified levels shall be made good at
the expense of the Contractor. The excavated base and sides of the drains
shall be trimmed, dressed and compacted properly to bring these in close
conformity with the specified dimensions, levels and slopes.
(c) Earth dyke shall be formed in fill material and compacted by the plate
compactor as part of the intercepting drains to the lines, levels grades,
dimensions and sections shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
(d) Where directed by the Engineer, drains shall be stone masonry lined or turfed
in accordance with the relevant Clauses.
(e) Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the Contractor
shall provide stone pitching to the specified thickness and the shape in
accordance with Section 700 of this Specification.
(f) The Contractor shall provide flexible boulder apron in conformity with the
lines, grades and dimensions, as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer.
The stone shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. The
stones subject to marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be
accepted. The apparent specific gravity of stone shall be at least 2.40. The
size of stone for flexible boulder apron shall be large as possible. In no case
any fragment shall weigh less than 40 kg. To ensure regular and orderly
disposition of the full intended quantity of stone, apron construction shall be
bounded by 1m thick dry masonry walls constructed in perimeter trenches
600 mm deep and extending to the full height of the specified thickness of
apron. The surface on which the stone apron is to be laid shall be leveled,
compacted and prepared for the length and width as shown on the drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer.
620 STONE MASONRY LINING

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall provide stone masonry lining 200mm thick for drains conforming
to Drawings and as further directed by the Engineer. The stone masonry lining shall
consist of sized stones set in sand-cement mortar, laid on the sides and bottom of
drains.
The stones used in stone masonry lining shall be hard, sound and unweathered
pieces free of seams, laminations, cracks, hollows, inclusions or any other defects.
The individual stone pieces shall be approximately parallelepiped in shape, 180mm
to 220mm thick, 220mm to 280mm wide and 300mm to 450mm long. The stones
with rounded or triangular face/s or flaky in shape shall not be used. The stones shall
be rough finished, with variation from the pitch line not exceeding 12mm, on the
exposed face and fine finished, with variation from the pitch line not exceeding 6mm,
on all other faces. Prior to bringing stones to the site of work, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer for his approval 5 (five) representative samples of the stones
proposed to be used along with geological and locational details of the quarry from
which the stones are to be procured. Only stones of quality and origin so approved
by the Engineer shall be used in the works. The stones shall be fully sized and
dressed before laying and not attempted to be sized during laying so as not to disturb
the mortar already in place..
The mortar used for setting the stones shall have the following ingredients:
Portland cement and water, Section 700 of these specifications
Hydrated lime (ASTM C207)
Sand aggregate (AASHTO M45)
The cementitious binder for the mortar shall comprise 1 part of Portland cement to
between ¼ to ½ parts of hydrated lime. The proportion of sand to cementitious binder
shall be such that that the volume of sand in a damp, loose condition is 3 times the
volume of the cementitious binder. Premixed materials conforming to these
proportions shall be used. The water to be used shall be just sufficient to provide a
workable mix, with no water dripping from the prepared mortar. After being mixed with
water, the mortar must be used within 1 ½ hours or otherwise rejected..
The stones shall be sufficiently wetted and surface-dried before laying to prevent
absorption of water from mortar. The bed which is to receive the stone shall be
cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of fresh mortar. If the bed is loose, it shall
be moistened and tamped firm before wetting and applying mortar. Loose and
cohesionless materials (if any) in the bed shall be replaced with gravelly soil with
some cohesion tamped in place.
The stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and in the joints and settled
carefully in place with a wooden mallet immediately on placement and well
embedded in mortar before it has set. No dry or hollow space shall be left anywhere
within the masonry and each stone shall have all the embedded faces completely
covered with mortar. The joints should be pointed, with excess mortar cleaned off.
The stones should be laid to line and roughly leveled, with vertical joints offset by
minimum 150mm.
No laying shall be done if the atmospheric or ground temperature is below 5 degree
C. The stone masonry lining after being laid should be lightly sprinkled with water to
be kept in a moist condition (without causing water to flow) for 2 (two) days so as to
ensure initial hardening of mortar.
Any stone masonry lining constructed using materials or work procedure not
conforming to those indicated above shall be rejected and reconstructed under
instructions from the Engineer.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

621 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


(a) Item : Excavate for structure / culverts, subsoil drains, minor drainage
structures, inlet, outfall, mitre and cut-off drains in soft material
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for excavate for structure / culverts, subsoil drains,
minor drainage structures, inlet, outfall, mitre and cut-off drains in soft material
shall be the cubic metre.
The volume excavated for structure / culverts and subsoil drains shall be
calculated as the product of the specified width of the excavation and the
sectional area of the excavation measured along its length.
The volume excavated for minor drainage structures shall be taken as the
product of the plan area and the average depth of the excavation.
The volume excavated for inlet, outfall and mitre drains shall be calculated as
the product of the average end areas of excavation measured at intervals of not
greater than 10 m along the centreline of the drain and the length of the drain.
The volume of excavation for cut-off drains shall be calculated as the product of
the average end areas of excavation measured at intervals of not greater than
10 m along the centreline of the drain and the length of the drain.
No allowance shall be made beyond those limits for working space or
overbreak.
The rate for excavate in soft material shall include for the cost of:
x excavation to any depth,
x trimming base and sides to the lines and levels for inlet, outfall and mitre
drains,
x compaction of the base and sides of the excavation,
x removing the excavated material to spoil if it is unsuitable or surplus to
requirements,
x forming and compacting the bank on the lower side of the cut-off drains,
x all necessary hauls, and,
x the rate shall include for the cost of excavation to any depth
x comply with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
The additional excavated space/pockets around the structure shall be backfilled
after construction with suitable excavated or selected materials for which no
additional payment shall be made.
(b) Item : Excavation in soft rock/hard soil material
Unit : m3
When the instructed bed width for an inlet, outfall or mitre drain is greater than
2.5 m it shall be classified as channel excavation which shall be measured by
the cubic metre calculated in the same way as item 621 (a) of this Specification.
The rate for channel excavation in soft material shall include for the costs of:
x excavation to any depth,
x trimming base and sides to the lines and levels,
x compaction of the base and sides of the excavation,
x disposal of the excavated material to spoil,

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x all necessary hauls, and,


x compliance with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
x The rate shall include for the cost of excavation to any depth
(c) Item : excavation in hard rock material
Unit : m3
The rate shall include for the cost of excavation to any depth, and compliance
with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(d) Item : Intercepting drains
Unit : m
The unit of measurement for provide intercepting drains shall be the linear
metre. The length of intercepting drains shall be calculated as shown on the
Drawings or the instructed length measured along the centerline of the drains.
The rate for provide intercepting drains shall include for the cost of:
x excavation to any depth,
x trimming the base and sides to the lines and levels,
x compaction of the base and sides of the excavation,
x forming and compacting earth dyke adjacent to the excavated drains as
shown on the Drawing and as directed by the Engineer,
x all necessary hauls, and,
x comply with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(e) Item : Selected granular backfill material
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for selected backfill material shall be the cubic metre.
The volume of backfill for structure / culverts shall be calculated as the product
of the average end area and the length of selected backfill material instructed to
be placed less the volume occupied by the structure / culvert and any concrete
bedding or surround.
The rate for selected backfill material shall include for the costs of:
x providing the material,
x backfilling at any depth,
x all necessary hauls, and,
x complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(f) Item : Grannular filter material
Unit : m3
The rate for Grannular filter material shall include for the costs of :
y providing the material,
y all necessary hauls, and,
y complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(g) Item : Provide, lay and joint. reinforced concrete culvert pipes
Unit : m

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The unit of measurement for provide, lay and joint reinforced concrete culvert
pipes shall be the linear metre. The length of pipe shall be calculated as shown
on the Drawings or the instructed length measured along the centerline of the
culvert.
The rate for provide lay and joint reinforced concrete culvert pipes shall include
for the costs of providing the pipes and complying with the requirements of
related Clauses of this Specification.
(h) Item : Concrete Grade M12/M20 as specified in the drawing to beds,
surrounds and haunches
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for concrete Grade as specified in the drawing to
beds, surrounds and haunches shall be the cubic metre. The volume of
concrete shall be calculated as the product of the end area and the instructed
length of bed, surround or haunch. The end area shall be as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer and shall exclude the area of the pipe.
The rate for concrete Grade as specified in the drawing to beds, surrounds and
haunches shall include for the costs of:
y providing and placing the concrete,
y Reinforcement as per drawing/Engineer’s instruction,
y formwork and false work,
y ordinary surface finish, and,
y complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
No additional payment beyond the rates for excavation shall be made in respect
of the preparation of excavated surfaces to receive concrete cast against them.
(i) Item : Reinforced concrete as specified in the drawing to minor drainage
structures
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for reinforced concrete Grade as specified in the
drawing to minor drainage structures shall be the cubic metre. The volume of
concrete shall be calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.
The rate for reinforced concrete Grade as specified in the drawing to minor
drainage structures shall include for the costs of:
y reinforcement as per drawing/Engineer’s instruction,
y formwork and false work,
y ordinary surface finish, and,
y complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
No additional payment beyond the rates for excavation shall be made in respect
of the preparation of excavated surfaces to receive concrete cast against them.
(j) Item : Stone pitching
Unit : m2
The unit of measurement for stone pitching shall be the square metre. The area
shall be calculated as the net area, measured on the slope, instructed by the
Engineer to be pitched.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The rate for stone pitching shall include for the costs of:
x excavating,
x disposal of excavated material in a designated spoil area,
x trimming to line and level,
x compacting the sides and base of the excavation,
x providing and laying stone pitching,
x all necessary hauls, and,
x complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(k) Item : Flexible boulder apron
Unit : m3
The unit measurement for flexible boulder apron shall be the cubic metre. The
volume of flexible boulder apron instructed to be placed shall be calculated from
the dimensions given on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
The rate for flexible boulder apron shall include for the cost of:
y excavating,
y excavation for dry masonry perimeter walls,
y disposal of excavated materials in a designated spoil area,
y trimming to line and level,
y compacting the sides and base of the excavation,
y providing, placing and dressing the flexible boulder apron,
y all necessary hauls, and,
y complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(l) Item : Grouted stone pitching
Unit : m2
The unit of measurement for grouted stone pitching shall be the square meter.
The area shall be calculated as the net area, measured on the slope, instructed
by the Engineer to be pitched.
The rate for grouted stone pitching shall include for the costs of:
x excavating,
x disposal of excavated material in a designated spoil area,
x trimming to line and level,
x compacting the sides and base of the excavation,
x providing and laying stone pitching,
x all necessary hauls,
x grouting, and,
x complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.
(m) Item : Close-jointed riprap
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for close-jointed riprap shall be the cubic meter. The
volume of those jointed riprap instructed to be placed shall be calculated from the

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

dimensions given or the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.


The rate for close-jointed riprap shall include for the costs of :
x excavation for dry masonry perimeter walls,
x disposal of excavated material in designated spoil area,
x providing, placing and close-jointing the riprap,
x all necessary hauls, and,
x complying with the requirements of related Clauses of this Specification.

Section 600.Drainage structures and protection works 6-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 700 – RCC STRUCTURES

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 700 – RCC STRUCTURES

701 SCOPE OF SECTION 7-6


702 DEFINITIONS 7-6
703 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE 7-6
(a) General 7-6
(b) Cement 7-6
(c) General requirements for aggregates 7-7
(d) Fine aggregate 7-8
(e) Coarse aggregate 7-9
(f) Testing aggregates 7-10
(i) Acceptance testing 7-10
(ii) Compliance testing 7-10
(g) Water for concrete and mortar 7-11
(h) Admixtures and cementitious extenders 7-12
704 THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES 7-13
(a) Grade of concrete and relationship between cube and 7-13
cylinder compressive strengths
(b) Maximum water/cement ratios 7-13
(c) Design of proposed mixes 7-14
705 SITE TRIAL MIXES 7-15
706 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE PRODUCTION 7-16
(a) Sampling 7-16
(b) Testing 7-17
(i) Consistence 7-17
(ii) Water/cement ratio 7-17
(iii) Air content 7-17
(iv) Flakiness Index 7-17
(v) Crushing concrete cubes/cylinders 7-17
(c) Valid cube results 7-18
(d) Acceptance criteria for characteristic strength concrete 7-18
(e) Non-compliant test results 7-18
(f) Method for testing of impermeability of concrete 7-19
(g) Testing methods for determination of frost resistance of 7-21
concrete
707 MIXING CONCRETE 7-26
708 TRANSPORT OF CONCRETE 7-28
709 PLACING OF CONCRETE 7-29

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(a) Consent for placing 7-29


(b) Preparation of surface to receive concrete 7-29
(c) Placing procedures 7-29
(d) Placing concrete under water 7-31
(e) Interruptions to placing 7-32
(f) Dimensions of pours 7-33
(g) Placing sequence 7-33
710 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM THE ENVIRONMENT 7-33
(a) General 7-33
(b) Protection from rain 7-33
(c) Hot weather precautions 7-33
(d) Cold weather precautions 7-34
(i) Mixing and placing 7-34
(ii) Initial curing 7-35
(iii) Placing concrete under water 7-35
(e) Protection from soil or water with high sulphate content 7-35
711 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE 7-36
712 CURING OF CONCRETE 7-37
(a) General 7-37
(b) Materials 7-38
(i) Water 7-38
(ii) Liquid membranes 7-38
(iii) Waterproof sheet materials 7-38
(c) Methods of curing concrete 7-38
(i) Formwork in-place method 7-38
(ii) Water method 7-38
(iii) Liquid membrane curing compound method 7-38
(iv) Waterproof cover method 7-39
(v) Heated housing method 7-39
(vi) Accelerated curing by steam or radiant heat 7-39
(d) Limiting temperature differentials in newly placed concrete 7-40
713 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 7-41
714 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS 7-42
715 WATERSTOPS 7-42
716 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES 7-43
(a) UF 1 finish 7-43

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(b) UF 2 finish 7-43


(c) UF 3 finish 7-43
(d) Roadway surface finish 7-44
717 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACES 7-45
(a) Ordinary surface finish 7-45
(b) Rubbed surface finish 7-46
718 FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK 7-46
(a) Falsework 7-46
(i) Loads 7-47
(ii) Foundations 7-47
(iii) Deflections 7-48
(iv) Clearances 7-48
(v) Construction 7-48
(b) Formwork 7-48
(i) General 7-48
(ii) Design 7-49
(iii) Construction 7-50
(iv) Preparation of formwork before placing concrete 7-50
(c) Removal of falsework and forms 7-51
(i) General 7-51
(ii) Striking times 7-51
(iii) Extent of removal 7-52
719 MORTAR AND GROUT 7-53
(a) General 7-53
(b) Mortar for general purposes 7-53
(c) Grouting of pockets and holes 7-53
(d) Underpinning of baseplates 7-53
720 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING 7-54
721 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 7-54
722 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE 7-55
(a) General 7-55
(b) Testing requirements 7-55
(c) Delivery and storage of reinforcement 7-55
(d) Bar bending schedules 7-56
(e) Fabrication 7-56

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(i) Cutting and bending 7-56


(ii) Identification 7-56
(f) Handling and surface condition of reinforcement 7-57
(g) Placing and fastening 7-57
(i) General 7-57
(ii) Support Systems 7-57
(iii) Mortar blocks 7-57
(iv) Stools and high chairs 7-57
(v) Welding of reinforcement 7-58
(vi) Splicing of Bars 7-58
723 SUBSTITUTION BY BARS OF DIFFERENT SIZES 7-58
724 PRE-CAST CONCRETE 7-58
(a) General 7-58
(b) Formwork 7-58
(c) Reinforcement for pre-cast concrete structure 7-59
(d) Fabrication 7-59
(e) Curing 7-59
(f) Surface finish 7-59
(g) Delivery and storage 7-60
(h) Testing and trial 7-60
725 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7-61
(a) Item: Reinforced concrete excluding the cost of reinforcing 7-61
steel
(b) Item: Plain concrete Grade without reinforcement 7-61
(c) Item: Reinforcing Steel 7-62

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

701 SCOPE OF SECTION


This section covers the materials, design of mixes, mixing, transport, placing,
compaction and curing of concrete and mortar required in the Works. It also covers
formwork and reinforcement for concrete.
702 DEFINITIONS
Structural concrete is any class of concrete, which is used, in reinforced or non-
reinforced concrete construction, that is subject to stress.
Non-structural concrete is composed of materials complying with this Specification
and is used only for filling voids, blinding foundations and similar purposes where it is
not subjected to significant stress.
A formed surface is a face that has been cast against formwork.
An unformed surface is a horizontal or nearly horizontal surface produced by
screeding or trowelling to the level and finish required.
A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould, bay or formwork,
etc., and also to the volume that has to be filled. Pours in vertical succession are
referred to as lifts.
Falsework comprises the structural elements that initially support both the formwork
and the placed concrete.
Formwork is a structure, either temporary or permanent, provided to contain fresh
concrete and support it in the required shape until it has hardened.
Consistence refers to fresh concrete's resistance to flow and is most commonly
measured by the slump test. Other methods of measuring consistence include the
compacting factor apparatus and the Vebe consistometer.
703 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
(a) General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all materials that he
proposes to use for making concrete. Concrete shall not be placed in the Works
until the Engineer has approved the materials of which it is composed. Approved
materials shall not thereafter be altered or substituted by other materials without
the consent of the Engineer.
(b) Cement
Cement shall comply with the requirements of Type II AASHTO M85
Specification for Portland cement.
Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the
manufacturer's sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement shall be
transported in vehicles provided with effective means of ensuring that it is
protected from the weather.
Bulk cement shall be transported in suitably equipped purpose-built vehicles or
containers.
Cement in bags shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof structure the interior
of which shall be kept dry and well ventilated at all times. The floor shall be
raised above the surrounding ground level and shall be constructed so that no
moisture rises through it.
Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked together in one place. The
bags shall be closely stacked so as to reduce air circulation but shall not be
stacked against an outside wall. If pallets are used, they shall be constructed so

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

that bags are not damaged during handling and stacking. No stack of cement
bags shall exceed
3 m in height. Different types of cement in bags shall be clearly distinguished by
visible markings and shall be stored in separate stacks.
Cement from broken bags shall not be used in the Works.
Cement in bags shall be used in the order that it is delivered.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weatherproof silos which shall bear a clear
indication of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement
shall not be mixed in the same silo.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient storage capacity on Site to ensure that his
anticipated program of work is not disrupted as a result of lack of cement, taking
due cognisance of factors such as transport, climatic conditions, holidays and
breakdowns.
Cement, which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with this
Specification in any way, shall be removed from the Site.
All cement for any one structure shall be from the same source.
All cement used in the Works shall be tested by the manufacturer or the
Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. The tests to be performed
shall be those set out in Section 1100 of this Specification. The Contractor shall
supply two copies of each test certificate to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
not deliver any cement to Site until such results and analyses have been
submitted to and approved in writing by the Engineer.
Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer or Contractor shall relate to not
more than one day's out output of each cement plant, and shall be made on
samples taken from cement which is subsequently delivered to the Site.
Alternatively, subject to the discretion of the Engineer, the frequency of testing
shall be one set of tests for every 100 tonnes of cement delivered to Site from
each cement plant.
The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the manufacture,
delivery, testing and use of all cement used in the Works and shall provide the
Engineer with two copies thereof.
Cement, which is stored on Site for longer than 42 days, shall be re-tested in an
approved laboratory as directed by the Engineer.
Cement, which does not comply with this Specification shall not be used in the
Works and it shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
(c) General requirements for aggregates
The sources of all aggregates shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall immediately remove from the Site any aggregates that are,
in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable for incorporation into the Works.
Aggregates shall be delivered to Site in clean and suitable vehicles. Different
types or sizes of aggregate shall not be delivered in the same load.
Washing of aggregates may only be carried out using fresh clean water from a
source approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make his own
arrangements in respect of water procurement and storage facilities. Water used
for washing aggregate shall not be directly discharged into water courses or
surface water drains.
Silty water shall only be disposed of in one of the following ways and subject to

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

the approval of the Engineer:


• pump and spread over grassland
• pump to excavated soakaway
• pump to sewer
• pump to settling lagoon
• pass through a filtration system with or without flocculating agents
Each type or size of aggregate shall be stored in a separate bin or compartment
with gently sloping concrete base. Dividing walls between compartments shall be
substantial, continuous and of sufficient dimensions to ensure that no mixing of
types or sizes of aggregates occurs. The Contractor shall take such measures
necessary to prevent the segregation of aggregates in storage heaps. Stockpiles
shall be built up in horizontal layers and shall not exceed 1.5 m in height.
Storage heaps shall be capable of draining freely in order to avoid sudden
fluctuations in the moisture content of the aggregates during batching. The
Contractor shall not use wet aggregates until, in the opinion of the Engineer,
they have completely drained. The Contractor shall measure the moisture
content of fine aggregates continually and adjust the amounts of aggregates and
water in each batch of concrete mixed to make allowance for the water content
of the aggregates. The Contractor shall protect the aggregate storage heaps
from inclement weather as necessary.
(d) Fine aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be natural sand,
crushed gravel sand or crushed rock sand complying with AASHTO M6. All the
material shall pass through the 9.5 mm sieve and the grading shall be in
accordance with and approximately parallel to the grading envelopes in Table 7-
1. In order to achieve an acceptable grading, it may be necessary to blend
materials from more than one source.
The fine aggregate shall not contain iron pyrites or iron oxides It shall not contain
mica, shale, coal or other laminar, soft or porous materials or organic matter
unless the Contractor can show by comparative tests, on the strength of mortar
in accordance with AASHTO T71, that the presence of such materials does not
reduce the relative strength at 7 days to lower than 98%.
Table 7-1: Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate for
Portland Cement Concrete

Mass Percent Passing


Sieve Size Non-structural Air-entrained or structural
concrete concrete

9.5 mm 100 100


4.75 mm 95 – 100 95 - 100
1.18 mm 45 – 80 45 - 80
300 μm 10 – 30 5 – 30
150 μm 2 – 10 0 – 10

The amount of fine aggregate retained between any pair of successive sieves
shall not exceed 45 %.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Other properties of fine aggregate shall be as set out below:


(i) the fineness modulus shall be between 2.3 and 3.1,
(ii) the content passing the 75 μm sieve shall not exceed 3 per cent for
natural or crushed gravel sand or 15 per cent for crushed rock sand,
(iii) the chloride content when tested with a Quantab chloride titrator shall not
exceed 0.03 per cent by weight,
(iv) after five cycles of the test in AASHTO T104 using sodium sulphate the
weight loss shall be less than 10 per cent,
(v) the aggregate shall non-reactive when tested in accordance with ASTM C
289 for alkali silica reaction.
(e) Coarse aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock, crushed gravel,
natural gravel or a combination thereof, conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M 80. The material shall not contain any iron pyrites, iron oxides, flaky
or laminated material, hollow shells, coal or other soft or porous material, or
organic matter in sufficient quantity to adversely affect the properties of the
Concrete. The shape of the coarse aggregate shall be angular, rounded or
irregular with a flakiness index of less than 30%.
The maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be 20 mm for structural
concrete and 40 mm for non-structural concrete.
Grading of nominal sized coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with and
approximately parallel to the grading envelopes in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2: Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate for
Portland Cement Concrete
Mass Percent Passing
Sieve
Nominal Size Aggregate
Size
10mm 20 mm 40 mm
50 mrn - - 100
37.5 -
- 95 -100
mm
25.0 -
100 65 - 85
mm
19.0 -
90 - 100 35 - 70
mm
12.5 100
55 - 80 25 - 50
mm
9.5 mm 85-100 20 - 55 10 - 30
4.75 10-30
0 - 10 0-5
mm
2.36 0-10
0-5
mm
1.18 0-5
mm

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The amount of coarse aggregate retained between any pair of successive sieves
shall not exceed 45%.
Other properties of course aggregate shall be as set out below:
(i) the proportion of clay, silt and other impurities passing a 75 μm sieve shall
be not more than one per cent by weight,
(ii) The total shell content of aggregate shall not be more than the following:
x 40 mm nominal size and above 2% of dry weight
x 20 mm nominal size and lower 5% of dry weight
(iii) the chloride content shall not exceed 0.05 per cent by weight when tested
with a Quantab chloride titrator,
(iv) after five cycles of the test in AASHTO T104 using sodium sulphate the
weight loss shall be less than 10 per cent,
(v) the aggregate shall non-reactive when tested in accordance with ASTM C
289 for alkali silica reaction,
(vi) the aggregate shall have a water absorption of less than 2.5 percent when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T85,
(vii) the aggregate shall have an Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV) in
accordance with BS 812 of less than 30%,
(viii) the aggregate shall have a Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA) in accordance
with AASHTO T96 of less than 35%.
(f) Testing aggregates
(i) Acceptance testing
Before casting any concrete, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer
sample loads of all aggregates that he proposes to use in the Works.
Representative samples of each proposed source of aggregate shall be
prepared by the Contractor in accordance with AASHTO T2, of minimum
mass 50 kg for fine aggregate and 100 kg for coarse aggregate, and
forwarded to the Engineer together with such further samples as the
Engineer may require. Each, sample shall be clearly labeled to show its
origin and shall be accompanied by all the information called for in AASHTO
T2.
Tests to determine compliance of the aggregates with the requirements of
Sub-Clause 703 (c) to (e) shall be carried out by the Contractor in a
laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
If at any time tests reveal that previously accepted materials fail to comply
with the Specification, their use in the Works shall forthwith be suspended
pending further tests that shall be made in the presence of the Contractor
and the Engineer. Thereafter acceptance or rejection of the material shall be
based on such tests.
A material shall be accepted if not less than three consecutive sets of test
results show compliance with the Specification.
(ii) Compliance testing
The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of aggregates for compliance
with the Specification and Project Quality Control Plan during the period that
concrete is being produced for the Works. The tests set out below shall be
performed on aggregates from each separate source on the basis of one

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

set of tests for each day on which aggregates are delivered to Site provided
that no set of tests shall represent more than 250 tonnes of fine aggregates
nor more than 500 tonnes of coarse aggregate, and provided also that the
aggregates are of uniform quality. If the aggregate from any source is
variable, the frequency of testing shall be increased as instructed by the
Engineer.
• Grading AASHTO T27
• Flakiness Index BS 812
• Plastic fines AASHTO T176
• Moisture content "Speedy" Apparatus
• Check on organic impurities AASHTO T21
In addition to the above routine tests, the Contractor shall carry out the
following tests at the intervals stated:
• Moisture content: as frequently as may be required in order to control
the water content of the concrete as required by the Specification.
• Chloride content: as frequently as may be required to ensure that the
proportion of chlorides in the aggregates does not exceed the limit
stated in Sub-Clauses 703 (d) and (e) of this Specification.
The Contractor shall take account of the fact that when the chloride content
is variable it may be necessary to test every load in order to prevent
excessive amounts of chloride contaminating the concrete. For this purpose
the Contractor may elect to use a rapid field test such as the Quantab test.
In the event of disagreement regarding the results of such rapid field tests,
the chloride content of the aggregate shall be determined in the laboratory
as described in BS 812 (the Volhard test).
(g) Water for concrete and mortar
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts
of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other deleterious
substances. The water shall have a pH value between 6.0 and 8.5 and shall
subject to the approval of the Engineer and tested in accordance with AASHTO
T26.
Water with following properties shall not be used for mixing or curing concrete:
x saline or brackish water,
x containing more than 500 mg/l chloride ion,
x containing more than 1000 mg/l sulphate ion,
x containing more than 1000 mg/l alkali carbonates and bicarbonates, or,
x containing more than 2000 mg/l total suspended matter.
In case of doubt regarding development of strength, the suitability of water for
making concrete shall be ascertained by carrying out tests for compressive
strength and time of set as specified in Table 1 of AASHTO M157.
The Engineer may at his discretion allow use of water having pH exceeding 8.5,
but otherwise satisfying the criteria given above subject to the following
additional criteria being satisfied.
First establish the source of alkali i.e. from carbonates of calcium and

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

magnesium or from sodium and potassium oxides (Na2O and K2O).


1. In case the source of alkalinity is from sodium and potassium oxides (Na2O
and K2O), the water may be allowed for mixing and curing provided it
satisfies the following criteria:
x total contents of alkali from all the possible sources should not exceed
more than 3 kg/m3 of freshly mixed concrete,
x both coarse and fine aggregates are not reactive.
2. In case the source of alkalinity is from the carbonates of calcium and
potassium, the water can be used, even if the aggregates are reactive
provided the total contents of alkali from all the possible sources should not
exceed more than 3 kg/m3 of freshly mixed concrete.
(h) Admixtures and cementitious extenders
The use of admixtures in concrete may be proposed by the Contractor to assist
him in compliance with the Specification or in placing the fresh concrete.
Admixtures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Air-entraining
agents shall be used to increase the durability of concrete subject to frost action
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of any admixture he
proposes to use and the manner in which he proposes to add it to the mix. The
information provided shall include but not be limited to:
(i) the typical dosage, the method of dosing and the detrimental effects of an
excess or deficiency in the dosage,
(ii) the chemical names of the main active ingredients in the admixture,
(iii) the chloride ion content, if any, expressed as a percentage by weight of
admixture,
(iv) the extent, if any, that the admixture causes air-entraining when used at
the manufacturer's recommended dosage,
(v) details of any previous uses of the admixture in Mongolia.
Chemical admixtures used in concrete shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO M194. Air-entraining admixtures shall comply with AASHTO M154. The
Contractor shall have all proposed air-entraining admixtures tested, at a
laboratory acceptable to the Engineer, in accordance with AASHTO T157.
In addition to the general requirements, air-entraining agents shall be capable of
producing an air content in concrete mixes within the limits stated in the
Specification or on the Drawings without any tendency to produce excessive air
content in the event of prolonged mixing times.
The effects of a proposed air-entraining agent shall be tested by the Contractor
in trial mixes produced in the plant which he proposes to use for the Permanent
Works.
Workability agents shall not have any adverse effect on the properties of the
concrete.
The chloride ion content of any admixture shall not exceed 2 per cent by weight
of the admixture nor 0.03 per cent by weight of the cement in the mix.
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
Admixtures shall not be mixed together without the consent of the Engineer.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The use of pozzolanic admixtures, whether as a separate material or


incorporated in the cement before delivery to Site, may be permitted subject to
the agreement of the Engineer.
The proportion of pozzolanic material used shall not exceed 50 percent by
weight of the cement in the mix except in the case of ground iron blast furnace
slag when the proportion shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
When ground iron blast furnace slag is incorporated during concrete batching
the mixture shall comply with AASHTO M302. When ground iron blast furnace
slag is blended with cement the mixture shall comply with AASHTO M240.
Fly ash shall have a carbon content not exceeding seven percent by weight.
The maximum sulphate content expressed as SO3 shall be 2.0 percent by
weight. The fineness shall be in accordance with that Specified in Table 2 of
AASHTO M295. Fly ash shall only be used in conjunction with cement complying
with ASTM C150 and the total sulphate content of the mix from all sources,
expressed as SO3 shall not exceed four percent of the weight of cement.
704 THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
(a) Grades of Concrete and relationship between cube and cylinder compressive
strengths
The Grades of concrete are designated herein in terms of compressive strength
at 28 days of cylinder specimens (150 mm diameter x 300 mm long) as shown in
Table 13.3. As an alternative to cylindrical strength, it will be acceptable to
characterize concrete Grades on the basis of compressive strength at 28 days of
150 mm cubes, adopting the cube strengths shown against respective concrete
Grades in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3: Grades of Concrete Designated According to 28 - day
Compressive Strengths of Cylinder and Cube Specimens

Grades of Characteristic Characterize Concrete


Concrete Concrete Compressive Strength at
Compressive Strength 28 days of Cubes
at 28 days of Cylinder Specimens
Specimens
Grade M 12 12 MPa 15 MPa
Grade M 20 20 MPa 25 MPa
Grade M 24 24 MPa 30 MPa
Grade M 28 28 MPa 35 MPa
Grade M 30 30 MPa 38 MPa
(b) Maximum water/cement ratio
The Grades of concrete to be used in the Works and the corresponding
maximum water/cement ratios to be maintained shall be as indicated in Table 7-
4 under different maximum nominal size of aggregates. In the Table 7-4, column
‘A’ refers to concrete sections in situations where some protection from exposure
is likely (such retaining walls, piers, beams, exterior portions of mass concrete)
and column ‘B’ refers to more exposed sections (such as thin sections,
reinforced piles, bridge decks).

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 7-4: Concrete grade, strength and maximum Water/Cement Ratio


Maximum Maximum Target Mean Strength
Grade Nominal Water/Cement ratio at 28 Days on
Designatio Size of 150mmX300mm
n Aggregate A B cylinder
mm Specimens, MPa
Grade M 40 0.48 0.45 22
12 20 0.48 0.45 22

Grade M 40 0.46 0.42 30


20 20 0.46 0.42 30

Grade M 20 0.45 0.43 35


24 10 0.45 0.43 35

Grade M 20 0.41 0.40 40


28 10 0.41 0.40 40

Grade M 20 0.40 0.40 42


30 10 0.40 0.40 42

(c) Design of proposed mixes


The Contractor shall design all concrete mixes called for in the Specification,
using only those constituents that have been approved by the Engineer for use
in the Works and in compliance with the following requirements:
(i) the aggregate portion shall be well graded from the nominal maximum size
of stone down to the 150 μm size,
(ii) the cement content shall be such as to achieve the target strengths called
for in Table 7-4,
(iii) for durability and low permeability the minimum cement content shall be as
shown in Table 7-5. The degree of exposure applicable to individual
structural elements shall be designated by the Engineer.
Table 7-5: Minimum Cement Content for Durability and low Permeability
Structural Member Minimum Cement Content
(in kg/m3 of Compacted Concrete)

Plain Concrete 360

Reinforced Concrete 400

(iv) workability shall be consistent with ease of placing and proper compaction
having regard to the presence of reinforcement and other obstructions,
(v) air-entraining agents shall be added to the Concrete in sufficient quantity to
produce the air contents set out in Table 7-6.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 7-6: Air Content for Frost Resistance


Nominal maximum size of
Entrained air content
aggregate

40 mm 5.5 %

20 mm 6.0 %

10 mm 7.5 %

(i) the water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with adequate
workability but in any case not greater than that shown in Table 7-4 taking
cognizance of any water contained in the aggregates,
(ii) the length change of hardened concrete determined in accordance with
AASHTO T160 shall not be greater than 0.05 per cent,
(iii) the total chloride content, expressed as chloride ion, arising from all
constituents in a mix including cement, water and admixtures shall not
exceed the following limits, expressed as a percentage of the weight of
cement in the mix:
x for steam cured concrete or concrete containing sulphate resisting
cement: 0.05 percent by weight,
x for any other reinforced concrete: 0.3 per cent in 95 per cent of all test
results provided no result is more than 0.5 per cent,
(iv) the total sulphate content, expressed as SO3, of all the ingredients in a mix
including cement, water and admixtures shall not exceed 0.4% by weight
of the aggregate or 4.0% of the weight of cement in the mix, whichever is
the lesser.
At least 56 days before commencing placement of concrete in the Permanent
Works, the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with concrete mix designs for
each proposed class of concrete and specific consistence requirement.
The proposed concrete mix designs shall include details of:
x the cement type,
x the cement content in kg/m3,
x designated sizes and grading of aggregates,
x the weights, in the saturated surface-dry condition, of aggregates in kg/m3,
x the water content in kg/m3, which shall be taken to mean the mixing water,
the water in any admixtures and any water in the aggregates in excess of
the saturated surface-dry condition,
x the design slump, measured in accordance with AASHTO T119,
x the manufacturer of the air-entraining agent and the required dose per m3,
x the limits for air content,
x the manufacturers of any plasticisers, dispersing agents or other proposed
admixtures and their required doses per m3.
705 SITE TRIAL MIXES
After the Engineer has approved the concrete mix designs, the Contractor shall

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

prepare Site trial mixes for each class of concrete specified and for each consistence
requirement envisaged.
For each Site trial mix of concrete the Contractor shall prepare three separate
batches of concrete using materials that have been approved for use in the Works
and the mixing plant proposed for the execution of the Works. The volumes of each
batch shall be the capacity of the concrete mixer proposed for full production.
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the following tests carried out:
(a) the slump of the concrete shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO
T119,
(b) from each batch six test cubes/cylinders shall be cast, cured and tested in
accordance with BS 1881,
(c) three cubes/cylinders from each batch shall be tested for compressive strength
at seven days and the remaining three at twenty eight days,
(d) the density of all the cubes/cylinders shall be determined before the strength
tests are carried out,
(e) the length change of hardened concrete shall be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T160 shall not be greater than 0.05 percent.
Subject to the agreement of the Engineer, the compacting factor apparatus may be
used in place of a slump cone. In this case the correlation between slump and
compacting factor shall be established during preparation of the trial mixes.
The average strength of the nine cubes/cylinders tested at 28 days shall be not less
than the applicable target mean strength shown in Table 7-4 and no single cube shall
have a strength of less than 3 MPa lower than the applicable target strength shown in
Table 7-4.
After Site trials have confirmed it's full compliance with the requirements of this
Specification, a design mix for a particular class and consistence of concrete shall be
designated the approved mix for that class and consistence of concrete. The
Contractor shall only use approved mixes in the Works and shall not depart therefrom
without the prior written permission of the Engineer. If the Contractor intends to make
a change to a mix in the source of materials or their proportions, he shall prepare
further Site trial mixes, conduct the corresponding tests and seek the Engineer's
approval before any such changes are put into effect.
The Contractor shall allow in his Program, pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the
Conditions of Contract, for designing concrete mixes, conducting Site trial mixes and
for the preparation and testing of test specimen as required.
706 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE PRODUCTION
(a) Sampling
For each consistence and class of concrete in production at each plant, samples
of concrete for use in the Works shall be taken at the point of mixing or of
deposition as required by the Project Quality Control Plan or as instructed by the
Engineer, all in accordance with the sampling procedures described in BS 1881
and with the further requirements set out in this Specification.
Six 150 mm size cubes/cylinders/150mm X 300mm shall be made from each
sample and shall be cured and tested all in accordance with BS 1881 Part 3,
three at seven days and three at 28 days.
Each set of six samples shall be taken from one batch selected at random and
at intervals such that each sample represents not more than 50 m3 of concrete.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Until compliance with the Specification has been established the frequency of
sampling shall be such that each sample represents not more than 20 m3 of
concrete or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer to be present during the sampling
of the concrete and the manufacture, storing and curing of the test
cubes/cylinders. Should the Contractor fail to arrange for the Engineer to be
present the test cubes/cylinders shall not be deemed acceptable for quality
control purposes.
(b) Testing
(i) Consistence
The slump or compacting factor of the concrete shall be determined for all
batches at the frequency instructed by the Engineer.
The slump of the concrete in any batch shall not differ from the value
established by the Site trial mixes by more than 20 mm or one third of the
value, whichever is the greater.
The variation in value of the compacting factor, if used in place of a slump
value, shall be within the following limits:
x for a value of 0.9 or more ±0.03
x for a value of between 0.8 and 0.9 ±0.04
x for a value of 0.8 or less ±0.05
(ii) Water/cement ratio
The water/cement ratio as estimated from the results of (i) above,
determined by samples from any batch, shall not vary by more than five
per cent from the value established during Site trial mixes.
(iii) Air content
The air content of air-entrained concrete in any batch shall be within 1.5
percentage points of the values specified in Table 7-6 in Sub-Clause 704
(c) (v) and the averaged value of four consecutive measurements shall be
within 1.0 percentage points of the specified value, expressed as a
percentage of the volume of freshly mixed concrete. Testing shall be in
accordance with AASHTO T196.
(iv) Flakiness Index
If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate should vary by more than
five units from the average value of the aggregate used in the approved
mix and if the workability of the mixes should be adversely affected by
such variation, a new set of Site trial mixes and corresponding tests shall
be carried out.
(v) Crushing concrete cubes/cylinders
The compressive strength of test cubes/cylinders shall be determined in
accordance with BS 1881 Part 4.
The results of all cube tests shall be shown on an approved form that shall
include, but not be limited to, the following information:
• the cube reference number,
• the cube size and weight,

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• the date the cube was made,


• the grade of concrete from which the cube was made,
• the location in the structure at which the concrete sample was taken,
• the slump of the concrete,
• the date on which the cube was tested,
• the total load at failure, and,
• the stress in MPa at failure.
Two copies of each test certificate, containing all the information
mentioned above, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his retention and
a third copy retained in the Site laboratory.
(c) Valid cubes/cylinders results
A result is defined as the average 28 day compressive strength from testing a
set of three cubes/cylinders from one batch of concrete. The testing of a set of
three cubes/cylinders shall be deemed valid only if the range in compressive
strength of the three cubes/cylinders tested is less than 15% of their average
compressive strength.
Until such time as sufficient valid test results are available to apply the method of
control described in Sub-Clause 706 (d) of this Specification the compressive
strength of the concrete at 28 days shall be such that no single result is less
than the characteristic strength minus 3 MPa and the average value of any three
consecutive results shall be greater than the characteristic strength plus 2 MPa.
If the average of any three consecutive results is less than the characteristic
strength plus 2 MPa but at least equal to the characteristic strength, the concrete
shall be considered acceptable but the Contractor shall adjust the mix design
and the standard of control.
The 7-day cube result may be used as an early strength indicator, at the
discretion of the Engineer.
(d) Acceptance criteria for characteristic strength concrete
When valid cube results are available for at least 30 consecutive batches of any
class of concrete of the same consistence mixed in any one plant, the mean
compressive strength shall be greater or equal to the characteristic strength plus
1.7 times their standard deviation and each individual cube tested shall be
greater than 85 per cent of the characteristic strength.

(e) Non-compliant test results


If any one test cube result in a group of three consecutive results is less than 85
per cent of the characteristic strength but the average of the group of three
results of which it is part satisfies the strength requirements of Sub-Clauses 706
(c) or (d) of this Specification, then only the batch from which the failed cube was
taken shall be deemed not to comply with the Specification.
If more than one test cube result in a group of three consecutive results is less
than 85 per cent of the characteristic strength or if the average strength of the
group of three results fails to satisfy the specified strength requirements then all
the batches between those represented by the first and last cubes/cylinders in
the group of three results shall be deemed not to comply with the Specification,
and the Contractor shall immediately adjust the mix design, subject to the

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

approval of the Engineer, to restore compliance with the Specification. After


adjustment of the mix design the Contractor shall again comply with the
requirements of Clause 705 of this Specification.
The Contractor shall take necessary action to remedy concrete which does not
comply with this Specification. Such action may include but is not limited to:
• increasing the frequency of sampling until control is again established,
• cutting test cores from the concrete and testing in accordance with AASHTO
T24,
• carrying out strengthening or other remedial work to the concrete,
• carrying out non-destructive testing such as load tests on beams,
• removing and replacing the concrete.
If the mean compressive strength of three test cores is more than 85 % of the
characteristic strength and no single test core has a compressive strength of
less than 75 % of the characteristic strength, the Engineer may, at his discretion,
consider leaving the defective concrete in place.

(f) Methods for determination of impermeability of concrete

1. General requirements

1.1 Tests for determining of impermeability of concrete shall be made on


specimens taken from concrete mixture or concrete structures taken by
digging or by cutting with a saw.
1.2 Regulations and guidelines for taking samples, regulations on quality
control acceptance criteria for taking over shall be in accordance with
Clause 706 (a).
1.3 The specimen for testing can be either correct or incorrect geometry or
shape. During production quality control, the weight of porous concrete
and light concrete with porous filler is tested on specimens with right
geometry. Impermeability of concrete is determined using the cylinder
samples with 150mm height and diameter purposely cast in advance or
taken from concrete structures by drilling.
1.4 Dimension of right shaped specimen, methods for preparing or cutting or
drilling them from structures shall be in accordance with MNS 1272-99.

2. Testing of impermeability of concrete

2.1 Equipment and material for testing

- equipment which allows to observe the top surface of specimen while


water is filled up to the equipment in the space under the bottom of
specimen with increasing pressure,
- steel cylinder mould with 150mm height and 155mm inside diameter
for fixing the specimen in the equipment prepared by cutting steel pipe
- wax or bitumen
- equipment for testing percolation coefficient of concrete can be used
for fixing of specimen.

2.2 Preparation for testing

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

2.2.1 the specimen should be kept in container with ambient temperature 20 ±


2qC, relative air humidity not less than 95%.
2.2.2 prior to testing the specimen shall be kept in room temperature for 1 day
2.2.3 the specimen shall be placed in the cylinder mould and the space
between specimen and mould shall be filled with wax or bitumen filler. The
mold shall be heated in advance to the temperature of heated and melted
filler.
2.2.4 Prior to fixing specimen to the mold the top and bottom surfaces shall be
properly cleaned from filler or cement mix

2.3 Testing

2.3.1 The mold with specimen shall be placed in the testing equipment and
safely fixed
2.3.2 Trial will start with water pressure 1 kg/sq cm
2.3.3 Pressure will be increased by 1 kg/sq cm at every 8 hours until signs of
penetration like water drop or wet spot are observed on the top surface of
specimen

2.4 Processing of results

2.4.1 impermeability value of concrete shall be defined by maximum pressure of


water when no penetration sign is observed on top surface of specimen.
2.4.2 impermeability of particular group of specimens is defined by maximum
pressure of water when no penetration sign is observed on top surface of
4 nos. of specimen out of total 6.
2.43 Testing results should be noted down in special notebook where the
following shall be recorded:
 Serial number and grade of specimen
 Time of concrete set, date of testing
 Impermeability of each and group of specimens

(g) Testing methods for determination of frost resistance of concrete

1. General

1.1 frost resistance of concrete is measured by freezing the concrete at 15 to


20ºC below 0 and thawing at 15 to 20 deg C above 0 (basic method), also
fast method by measuring the remaining deformation is used.
1.2 For taking over structures made of hydrotechnical concrete, prefabricated
structures and for preparing concrete mix design the basic method shall
be used.
1.3 Fast method is allowed to be used for carrying out fast quality control on
manufactured products, adjustment of mix design, taking over of various
constructions and structures except for those mentioned in 1.2 and 1.3.
Where fast method is applied, the concrete frost resistance shall be
checked using the basic method at least once a quarter.
If there is any discrepancy between basic and fast methods, then a basic
method will prevail.
1.4 Frost resistance requirements (including number of freezing-thawing
cycles) of concrete shall be as per Table 7-7.

2. Basic method for determining of frost resistance of concrete

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

2.1 Frost resistance grade of concrete is determined by maximum number of


freezing-thawing cycles where decrease of compressive strength after the
testing is not more than 15%, loss of strength of road concrete is not more
than 15% and loss of weight is not more than 5% compared to concrete
specimens set and tested for compressive strength in same conditions
and time duration.
2.2 Frost resistance grade of certain concrete and reinforced concrete shall
be taken as specified in norms and specifications for the given type of
concrete or reinforced concrete structures.
2.3 Sampling of concrete mixture shall be carried out as per MNS 1272:99.
2.4 The samples shall be prepared in accordance with relevant norms,
specifications and standards for concrete or reinforced concrete
structures. Number of specimens to be prepared is given in Table 7-7.

Table 7.7

Frost resistant grade of concrete


Description
F 300
1. Number of cycles till compressive strength 200
test are applied 300
2. Number of cycles till weighing and 175
checking the appearance of specimen 250
3. Number of main specimen to test 6

4. Number of supplementary specimen for 9


comparison

2.5 Size of specimen is defined depending on maximum size of aggregate as


given in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8

Maximum size of aggregate (mm) Minimum size of specimen


20 100x100x100
40 150x150x150

2.6 maximum size of aggregate for concrete mixture shall not exceed the size
given on Table 7-8.
2.7 The specimens (main) for frost-thaw testing shall be numbered and
checked for defects (edges of specimen etc.), and if any defects found
shall be registered in testing record-book in accordance with sub-clause
706 (g) 2.25. First, the specimens numbered 1,2 and3 will be tested then
specimens with Nos. 4,5 and 6.
2.8 Main specimen, after setting 28 days in ordinary conditions or after
treatment by heating, shall be kept in ordinary conditions for 7 days prior
to frost-thaw testing.
2.9 Additional specimens for comparison will be kept in container with relative
air humidity not less than 90%, ambient temperature 20 ± 2qC in ordinary
conditions.
2.10 Compressive strength testing on main and comparison specimens shall
be carried out as per MNS 1272:99.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-21


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

2.11 Main specimens for frost-thaw testing and supplementary specimens for
comparison purposes to be checked for compressive strength after 7 and
28 days, shall be soaked in water with temperature of 15 to 20º C for 96
hours without preliminary heating. The height of water surface above the
top surface of specimen shall be not less than 20mm.
2.12 Samples taken from concrete mixtures for structures and buildings which
are to be subjected to salty or mineral water of lakes shall be soaked in
the water with same chemical content as lake etc., and thawed in water
after each freezing. Specimen from concrete for road pavement shall be
soaked in 5% sodium chloride solution before testing and thawed in this
solution after each freezing.
2.13 Samples soaked with water shall be put on special net shelf with not less
than 50mm spacing in between and put to freezer. Space between the
bottom of shelf and wall of freezer shall not be less than 50mm.
2.14 The samples should be frozen in freezers capable to freeze upto -15 to -
20ºC and keep this temperature constantly. The temperature inside the
freezer shall be measured at the half height of freezer. The freezer should
have constant air conditioning device.
2.15 First the freezer shall be cooled down to -15 ºC, and then samples shall
be inserted. If temperature rises up than -15 ºC after the specimens were
inserted then freezing time will be counted from time when the
temperature has again come down to -15 ºC.
2.16 Duration of 1 freezing cycle at constant temperature of -15 ºC of shall be
not less than 4 hours for specimen with sizes of 100x100x100mm and
150x150x150mm specimen.
2.17 After the specimens (100x100x100mm and 150x150x150mm) are taken
out from freezer they shall be put in vessel filled with water with
temperature 15 to 20 ºC, (as per 2.12) for not less than 4 hours. The
spacing of specimens in the water shall be not less than 20mm.
2.18 The specimens shall be checked in the course of testing, and if there any
defects are found to be more than 15% of total surface area of specimen
on 4 samples out of 6 or on two samples out of 3, and then frost testing
shall be stopped.
2.19 After the freezing and thawing operations are carried out as per number of
cycles given in table 7-7, the samples will be tested for compressive
strength in accordance with sub-clause 706 (g) 2.10.
The surface of specimens will be checked for defects prior to testing.
Specimen surface which will contact with pressure plate will be leveled
with fast hardening cement mortar for not more than 2mm thickness. Such
treated specimen shall be kept in humid environment first day, then
soaked 2 days in water with 15 to 20ºC temperature and tested for
strength.
2.20 Prior to start freezing main specimens, first 3 nos. of supplementary
specimens which have been already soaked in water, shall be tested for
compressive strength. Before testing the surface of pressure plates shall
be cleaned with wet cloth. Supplementary specimens will be tested for
same time duration as main specimens.
A supplementary specimen with frost resistance grade upto 5ºC cycle
which has been cured in autoclave, shall be tested for compressive
strength before freezing.
2.21 In order to determine frost resistance of concrete it is required to take
average compressive strength of three main specimens of one batch and
compare it with average compressive strength of three supplementary
specimens tested for compressive strength for same time duration as
main samples.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-22


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

2.22 The equivalent time for set of concrete specimen will established using
the following equation:

For the specimens with 1 cycle per day (4+20H) and side size of 100mm
and 150mm:
Ta = D + 0.8n (1)

For the specimens with 1 cycle per day (6+18h) and side size of 200mm:
Ta = D + 0.7n (2)

For the specimens with 2 cycles per day (4+8h) and side size of 100mm
and 150mm:
Ta = D + 0.35n (3)

For the specimens with 2 cycle per day (6+6h) and side size of 200mm:
Ta = D + 0.25n (4)

For the specimens with 3 cycles per day (4+4h) and side size of 100mm
and 150mm:
Ta = D + 0.2n (5)

Where

D - concrete setting time before freezing (days)


n – number of frost-thaw cycles done till specimen is tested for strength

2.23 If compressive strength of three main specimens out of six tested after
any intermediate cycle during frost resistance testing decreased by more
than 15% and their weight loss of road concrete is more than 5%
compared to those of supplementary specimens with same setting time,
then testing of main specimens shall be stopped. In order to confirm test
results of previous group, compressive strength and weight loss of
specimens will be determined.
2.24 To determine the weight loss of specimen soaked in water, the specimen
shall be taken out of water, cleaned with wet cloth weighed before
applying freezing test. When certain number of frost-thaw cycles is carried
out as per Table 7-7, each specimen shall be checked for surface defects
and weighed. The weight loss will be checked with 0.1%accuracy using
the following equation:

m1  m 2
ǻm= x 100 (6)
m1

Where

m1 – weight of specimen before soaking with water, g


m2 - weight of specimen after soaking with water, g

The weight loss will be determined as average of weight loss values of


three specimens.
2.25 During testing on frost resistance of concrete test record book shall be
maintained.

The following should be recorded in the book:

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-23


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1. For all specimens:


a) Mix design no., mark
b) Date of mix design
c) Concrete mix content
d) Concrete frost resistance grade
e) Conditions of concrete setting
f) Specimen dimension /size/, cm
g) Specimen volume, cm3
h) Specimen weight, kg
i) Defects observed in specimen before testing

2. For main specimens


a) Defects observed in the specimen after certain number of cycles
b) Date and time of checking specimen surface for defects
c) Date and time of compressive strength testing
d) Number of cycles
e) Specimen dimension /size/, cm
f) Specimen volume, cm3
g) Specimen weight, kg
h) Maximum compressive strength

3. For supplementary specimen for comparison:


a) Date and time of testing
b) Equivalent setting time
c) Maximum compressive strength

4. Test regime:
a) Temperature regime inside the freezer
b) Time for cooling the specimen to -150C after putting it in the freezer
c) Date and time, duration of each cycle of freezing and thawing

707 MIXING CONCRETE


The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details, including drawings, of all the
equipment for batching, mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and finishing
concrete that he proposes to use and the arrangements he proposes to make before
any equipment is ordered or delivered to Site.
Concrete shall not be mixed by hand. Concrete for the Works shall be batched and
mixed in one or more central plants unless the Engineer agrees to some other
arrangement. If the Contractor should propose to use ready mixed concrete, he shall
submit to the Engineer for approval full details and test results of the concrete mixes
proposed. The Engineer may approve the use of ready mixed concrete provided that:
(a) the proposed mixes, the materials to be used and the methods of storage and
mixing comply with the requirements of this Specification,
(b) adequate control is exercise during mixing,
(c) the ready mixed concrete complies with the requirements of AASHTO M157.
Approval for the use of ready mixed concrete shall be revoked if the Engineer should
be dissatisfied with the control exercised in respect of the materials being used or
during mixing.
Batching and mixing plants shall be modern efficient equipment and capable of
producing thoroughly homogeneous concrete complying with the uniformity

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-24


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

requirements of AASHTO M241. Truck mixers shall comply with the requirements of
BS 4251 and shall only be used with the prior agreement of the Engineer.
All mixing operations shall be controlled by an experienced supervisor.
The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities arranged such
that drainage water is not discharged into the weigh hoppers. Each bin shall be
drawn down at least once per week and any accumulations of mud or silt removed.
Cement and aggregates shall be batched by weight. Water may be measured by
weight or volume. Liquid admixtures shall be dispensed by an electrically controlled
flowmeter.
The weighing and water dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order.
Their accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances described in AASHTO M241
and checked against accurate weights and volumes when required by the Engineer.
The weights of cement, water, admixtures and of each size of aggregate as indicated
by the mechanisms employed shall be within the tolerance shown in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10: Allowable Tolerances in the Proportioning of Concrete Mixes
Allowable tolerance in Percent by weight
proportioning
Mass of cement 0 to + 4
Mass of fine aggregate -2 to + 2
Mass of coarse aggregate -2 to + 2
Admixtures -2 to + 3
Water -1 to + 1
The Contractor shall provide standard test weights at least equivalent to the
maximum working load used on the most heavily loaded scale and other auxiliary
equipment required for checking the satisfactory operation of each scale or other
measuring device.
Tests shall be made by the Contractor at least once a week or at intervals to be
determined by the Engineer and shall be carried out in his presence. For the purpose
of carrying out these tests, there shall be easy access for personnel to the weigh
hoppers. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the complete
results of all check tests.
The Contractor shall make any adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to
ensure the continuous satisfactory performance of weighing and water dispensing
mechanisms and their compliance with this Specification.
The measured materials shall be batched and charged into the mixer by means that
prevent loss of any materials due to effects of wind or other causes. The Contractor
shall conduct Site trials to determine the most suitable method and order in which
materials are to be fed into the mixer to consistently produce a uniform concrete mix.
Once the optimum combination for the particular plant arrangement has been
established, it shall be adhered to.
The nominal drum or pan capacity of the mixer shall not be exceeded. The turning
speed and the mixing time shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but in
addition, when water is the last ingredient to be added, mixing shall continue for at
least one minute after all the water has been added to the drum or pan. Mixing shall
continue until there is a thorough distribution of the materials, and the mass is of a
uniform colour and consistency.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-25


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer
possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustment.
Mixers shall be fitted with an automatic recorder registering the number of batches
discharged.
The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the amount of free water
contained in the coarse and fine aggregates. This amount shall be determined by
the Contractor by a method agreed by the Engineer immediately before mixing
begins each day and thereafter at least once per hour during concreting and for each
delivery of aggregates during concreting. When the correct quantity of water,
determined as set out in the Specification, has been added to the mix, no further
water shall be added, either during mixing or subsequently. The Contractor shall
ensure that all specified moisture adjustments are accurately made in order to obtain
the desired slump within the tolerances set out in Sub-Clause 706 (b) (i) of this
Specification.
After mixing for the required time, each batch shall be discharged completely from
the mixer before any materials for the succeeding batch are introduced.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed and thereafter the first batch of concrete
through the mixers shall contain only half the normal quantity of coarse aggregate.
This batch shall be mixed for one minute longer than the time applicable to a normal
batch.
Mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned out before changing from one type of cement to
another.
Water that has been used for washing out mixers shall not be allowed to drain
directly into streams or surface water drains but shall be disposed of in accordance
with one of the methods outlined in Sub-Clause 703 (c) of this Specification and in a
manner that is acceptable to the Engineer.
708 TRANSPORT OF CONCRETE
Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means
which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and which shall
ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.
The loss of slump between discharge from the mixer and placing shall not exceed 25
mm.
The time elapsing between mixing and placing a batch of concrete shall be as short
as practicable and in no case longer than shall permit completion of placing and
compaction before the onset of initial set Concrete shall not be incorporated in the
Works after the onset of initial set has occurred.
The rate of delivery of concrete shall be such that the interval between batches shall
not exceed 20 minutes and shall be sufficient to produce a monolithic unit and
preclude the formation of cold joints within a structure. During transportation the
concrete shall be protected from any adverse effects of sun, rain and wind. Concrete
shall not be transported over or near to recent work that has not fully hardened.
709 PLACING OF CONCRETE
(a) Consent for placing
Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the Works until the Engineer's
consent has been given in writing. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at
least 24 hours notice of his intention to place concrete.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-26


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

All mortar from previous concreting, debris and foreign material shall be
removed from the forms and steel prior to commencing the placing of concrete.
Concrete placing shall commence within 24 hours of the Engineer's consent. If
the Contractor should fail to commence placing concrete within this period the
Engineer's consent shall be deemed to be withdrawn and the Contractor shall
again request consent as specified above.
(b) Preparation of surface to receive concrete
Excavated surfaces against which concrete is to be cast shall be prepared as
set out in Section 600 of this Specification.
Any flow of water into an excavation shall be diverted through proper side drains
to a sump, or be removed by other suitable methods. The Contractor shall
ensure that the freshly deposited concrete or any of its constituents are not
washed away by any such flow. Any under-drains constructed for this purpose
shall be completely grouted up when they are no longer required by a method
agreed by the Engineer.
The treatment for existing concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete is to
be cast shall be as follows:
x whilst the existing concrete is still green surface aggregate shall be exposed
by washing and brushing with a stiff bristled brush,
x fresh concrete shall be cast against the dry exposed aggregate surface,
x surfaces shall be clean, hard, dry and sound.
If any fissures have been cleaned out as described in Section 600 of this
Specification they shall be filled with mortar or with concrete as instructed by the
Engineer. The amount of mortar placed at any one time shall be limited so that it
does not dry out or set before being covered with concrete.
(c) Placing procedures
Whenever a concrete placement plan or schedule is specified or approved, the
sequence of placement shall conform to that plan.
All equipment used to place concrete shall be of adequate design and capacity
and operated so as to prevent segregation of the mix or loss of mortar. Such
equipment shall not cause vibrations that might damage the freshly placed
concrete. Equipment shall not have any aluminium parts that come in contact
with the concrete. The Contractor shall ensure that any mortar coating on
placing equipment that sets or dries out between the placing of successive
batches of concrete is cleaned from the equipment before placing is resumed.
Concrete pumps shall be operated such that a continuous stream of concrete
without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete
remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected in such a manner that precludes
contamination of the freshly placed concrete.
When discharged above its place of final deposition, the Contractor shall ensure
that concrete shall in no circumstances fall freely through a height exceeding 1.5
m. Elephant trunking shall be used to reduce the free fall height to less than 1.5
m. The use of chutes, other than those forming standard accessories to truck
mixers, shall not be permitted.
Forms for walls, columns and other thin sections of significant height shall be
provided with openings or other devices that prevent segregation and
accumulation of hardened concrete on the formwork or reinforcement above the
level of the placed concrete.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-27


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The first batch of any fresh concrete to be placed shall contain only half the
normal quantity of coarse aggregate.
Concrete shall be placed and consolidated prior to initial set and in no case
more than 2 hours after cement has been added to the mix. The Contractor shall
not retemper any concrete by adding water to the mix.
Concrete that has partially hardened during transit shall not be used in the
Works. The methods of transportation of fresh concrete from the mixer to the
point of placing shall be such that this requirement is complied with.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall
be placed so as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the
reinforcement, other embedded items, or formwork.
The Contractor shall move fresh concrete within formwork by shoveling and not
with mechanical vibrators. Separate gangs of workers shall be employed by the
Contractor for placing and compacting concrete.
Concrete shall be brought up in layers approximately parallel to the construction
joint planes and not exceeding 500 mm in compacted thickness unless
otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer. Such layers shall not be thinner
than four times the maximum nominal size of aggregate.
Layers shall be placed such that the formation of feather edges is avoided. The
Contractor shall place concrete in each section of the structure continuously and
without interruption between the construction or expansion joints indicated on
the Drawings. The delivery rate, placing sequence and methods shall be such
that formation of cold joints is precluded and in no circumstances shall fresh
concrete be cast against previously placed material in which the initial set has
occurred.
All the concrete in a single bay or pour shall be placed as a continuous operation
and each unit shall form a monolith without joints. Concrete shall be carefully
worked round all obstructions, irregularities in the foundations and the like such
that all parts are completely full of compacted concrete with no segregation or
honeycombing. Concrete shall be carefully worked round and between
waterstops, reinforcement, embedded steelwork and similar items which
protrude above the surface of the completed pour.
All work shall be completed on each batch of concrete before its initial set
commences and thereafter the concrete shall not be disturbed before it has set
hard.
During and after placement of concrete, care shall be taken not to injure the
concrete or break the bond with reinforcing steel. Workmen shall not walk
through fresh concrete. Platforms for workmen and equipment shall not be
supported on reinforcement. Once the concrete has set, no forces shall be
applied to the forms or to reinforcing bars projecting from the concrete, until the
concrete is sufficiently hardened to resist damage.
(d) Placing concrete under water
When it is necessary to place concrete under mineral slurry or water the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the method and
equipment to be employed. Concrete shall be deposited either through funnel-
shaped tremies which shall have discharging bottom fitted with a trapdoor or by
concrete pumps fitted with a device at the end of the discharge tube to prevent
the ingress of water whilst the tube fills with concrete.
A tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube, constructed in sections joined by

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-28


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

flange couplings and watertight gaskets, having a diameter of not less than 250
mm and fitted with a hopper at the top. Tremies shall be supported so as to
permit both free movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of
the work and to allow rapid lowering to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The
discharge end shall be sealed closed at the start of work so as to prevent water
from entering the tremie before it fills with concrete. Tremies shall be kept
continuously full of concrete up to the level of the bottom of their hopper and
shall be kept immersed in the concrete in order to reduce to a minimum the
contact area of the concrete with the water, if water enters the tube after placing
has started, the tremie shall be withdrawn and emptied, the discharge end
resealed and the tremie refilled with fresh concrete before placing is resumed.
The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed.
During pumping, once the delivery of concrete has started, the end of the
discharge tube shall be kept full of concrete and below the surface of the
deposited concrete until placement is completed.
In both circumstances, special care, shall be taken to avoid segregation.
The cement content of concrete that is to be placed under water shall be 10 per
cent more than the standard mix for the corresponding grade and workability to
compensate for loss due to washing.
Concrete that is to be placed under mineral slurry or water by tremie shall be
compacted before placing as follows:
(i) a poker vibrator shall be lowered to the bottom of the tremie pipe prior to
filling it with concrete,
(ii) the gate at the base of the tremie shall be shut,
(iii) as concrete is fed into the hopper and the tremie begins to fill, the poker
vibrator shall be gradually withdrawn in such a manner that all the air is
removed from the fresh concrete in the tremie pipe,
(iv) the poker vibrator shall then be fixed in position where the hopper
discharges into the tremie pipe in such a way that air shall be removed
from the fresh concrete without transmitting vibration to the sides of the
tremie,
(v) as placing proceeds, the poker vibrator shall be switched on and off as
necessary to avoid over vibration of the concrete in the hopper between
batches as the placing of Concrete proceeds.
Concrete to be placed underwater by pump shall be similarly be compacted in
the hopper that discharges into the pump.
Concrete shall be placed under mineral slurry or water in one continuous
operation and the surface of the concrete during placement shall be kept as near
to horizontal as practicable. Still water shall be maintained at the discharge point
of pumps and tremies.
To ensure thorough bonding, each successive layer of concrete shall be placed
before the initial set of the preceding layer has taken place. The Contractor shall
have sufficient equipment available to fulfill this requirement when placing large
pours.
During and after concreting under water, pumping or de-watering in the
immediate vicinity shall be suspended if there is any danger that such work will
disturb the freshly placed concrete.
Cofferdams shall be vented during the placing and curing of concrete to equalize
the hydrostatic pressure and thus prevent flow of water through the concrete.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-29


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

In addition to the testing requirements outlined in Clause 706 of this


Specification, 7 days after the completion of the pour the Contractor shall take
two continuous test cores from separate locations in each pile or pier at
locations to be instructed by the Engineer. The cores shall be taken vertically
through the full depth of concrete placed underwater and complete recovery of
the cores shall be required. The minimum diameter of the cores shall be 50 mm.
Each pile or pier shall be investigated utilizing an ultrasonic cross-hole pile
integrity testing system. In the event that concrete placed underwater proves to
be unsound the Engineer may require further test cores be taken to establish the
condition of the entire pour. The Contractor shall then correct the unsound
condition by pressure grouting the entire mass, removing the unsound concrete
or by other methods that meet with, the approval of the Engineer. All expenses
incurred in testing and correcting unsound concrete placed underwater and
grouting holes left by test coring shall be at the Contractor's expense.
(e) Interruptions to placing
If concrete placing is interrupted for any reason and the duration of the
interruption cannot be forecast or is likely to be prolonged, the Contractor shall
immediately take the necessary action to form a construction joint so as to
eliminate as far as possible feather edges and sloping top surfaces. Any
concrete already placed shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with
Clause 711 of this Specification. All work on the concrete shall be completed
while it is still plastic and it shall not thereafter be disturbed until it has hardened
enough to resist damage. Equipment and materials to comply with these
requirements shall be readily available at all times during concrete placing.
Before concreting is resumed after such an interruption the Contractor shall cut
out and remove all damaged or uncompacted concrete, feather edges or any
other undesirable features and shall leave a clean, sound surface prepared in
accordance with Sub-Clause 709 (b) of this Specification against which fresh
concrete may be placed.
The Contractor shall ensure that a competent shuttering joiner and a competent
steel fixer are in attendance during all concreting operations. They shall be
responsible for ensuring that the formwork is maintained in accordance with this
Specification, temporary construction joints are inserted as necessary, and steel
reinforcement and fittings are maintained in place as placing proceeds.
If it should become possible to resume concrete placing without contravening
this Specification and with the Engineer's consent, new concrete shall be
thoroughly worked into the existing concrete and compacted so as to eliminate
any cold joints.
(f) Dimensions of pours
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall be no more than two
metres high. Pours shall as far as possible have a uniform thickness over the
plan area of the pour. Concrete shall be placed to the full planned height of the
pour.
The Contractor shall plan the dimensions and sequence of pours in such a way
that cracking of the concrete due to thermal or shrinkage stresses is eliminated.
(g) Placing sequence
The Contractor shall arrange that as far as possible the intervals between
placing successive lifts of concrete in one section of the Works are of equal
duration. This duration shall normally be not less than three or more than seven

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-30


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

days under temperate weather conditions unless otherwise agreed by the


Engineer.
Where required by the Engineer to limit the opening of construction joints due to
shrinkage, fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete which is less than
21 days old. When the Drawings call for contraction gaps in concrete, these
shall be of the widths and in the locations shown on the Drawings and they shall
not be filled until the full time interval shown on the Drawings has elapsed.
710 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM THE ENVIRONMENT
(a) General
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect concrete from
damage due to climatic or other environmental conditions during placing and
curing operations. Concrete that has been frozen or otherwise damaged by
climatic conditions shall be either repaired to a condition acceptable to the
Engineer or removed and replaced.
The temperature of the concrete immediately before placing shall be between
10° C and 32° C, except as provided elsewhere in this Specification. The
maximum temperature of the concrete at time of placement for bridge decks
shall be 27° C.
(b) Protection from rain
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, rain is sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash
mortar from coarse aggregate on the exposed faces of fresh concrete, the
Contractor shall suspend the placing of concrete unless adequate protection and
means to remove any water accumulating on the surface of the placed concrete
are provided. Concrete shall not be deposited into such accumulations of water.
(c) Hot weather precautions
When ambient temperatures are above 32° C, formwork, steel reinforcement,
steel beam flanges and other surfaces that will come into contact with the fresh
concrete shall be cooled to below 32° C by means of water sprays or other
approved methods.
The temperature of the concrete at time of placement shall be maintained within
the specified temperature range by any combination of the following:
x shading the materials storage areas,
x shading the production equipment,
x cooling the aggregates by sprinkling with water,
x cooling the aggregates or water by refrigeration or replacing a portion or all
the mix water with ice that is flaked or crushed to the extent that the ice will
completely melt during mixing of the concrete,
x liquid nitrogen injection.
In drying weather and whenever instructed by the Engineer, all fresh concrete
surfaces shall be protected from evaporation by a combination of:
x suitable covers
x sun shades
x wind breaks
or be wet-cured with a fine mist spray that maintains a sheen of water on the
exposed surface.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-31


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Engineer may require that the placing of concrete be rescheduled to take
advantage of the cooler parts of the day.
(d) Cold weather precautions
(i) Mixing and placing
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and install
two maximum-minimum type thermometers at each structure site.
Concrete shall not be placed without heating and protection from freezing
if either:
• the ambient air temperature is falling and falls below 7° C
• the ambient air temperature is rising and is below 3° C
When the ambient air temperature is below 5° C, the temperature of the
concrete at the time of placement in sections less than 300 mm thick shall
be not less than 15° C. Irrespective of air temperature, aggregates shall
be free of ice, frost and frozen lumps when batched and concrete shall not
be placed against any material whose temperature is 0° C or less.
If concrete is to be placed when, in the opinion of the Engineer, sub-zero
ambient temperatures are likely the Contractor shall make provision for
heating water and aggregates. The newly placed concrete shall be
protected against freezing for 8 full days after the completion of the pour.
Aggregates shall be heated to a temperature of between 20° C and 65° C
and water shall be heated to a temperature of between 55° C and 65° C.
The temperature of the mixed concrete shall be between 15° C and 25° C
when placed in the formwork. The apparatus for heating aggregated shall
heat them uniformly without the occurrence of hot spots.
The heating apparatus and housing shall be sufficient to enclose and
protect the structure such that the air surrounding the fresh concrete is
kept at a temperature of between 20° C and 30° C for 5 full days after the
completion of the pour. Over the next three days the concrete shall be
allowed to cool to a temperature of not less than 5° C. The heating
apparatus shall be positioned so that there is no direct discharge of heat
on either the formwork or concrete surfaces.
When the outside ambient temperature is below -15° C, the housing shall
be constructed so as to allow the concrete to be placed without the
housing having to be opened. If mixing is to take place externally, the
concrete shall be placed via hoppers installed through the housing, such
hoppers shall be plugged when not in use.
When the outside ambient temperatures are above -15° C, the Contractor
may open small areas in the housing for short periods to facilitate the
placing of concrete.
Before any concrete is placed in sub-zero outside ambient temperatures,
the Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacies of his heating
arrangements by bringing up the temperature to the 20 °C specified
herein and maintaining it for a continuous 24 hour period prior to
concreting.
The Contractor shall supply all heating apparatus and fuel necessary.
(ii) Initial curing
When dry heat is proposed for heating the housing, the Contractor shall

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-32


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

propose measures, to the approval of the Engineer, for maintaining the


atmospheric humidity and preventing the concrete from drying out. If
heated by apparatus that releases smoke or gas fumes, the housing shall
be adequately ventilated in such a way as to carry away all such fumes.
The housing shall be of sufficient dimensions to enable the unimpeded
placing of fresh concrete and the subsequent removal of formwork such
that any required rub finishing of the exposed concrete can be completed
3 days before the heating of the housing is discontinued.
The Contractor shall provide around the clock supervision and monitoring
of heating operations.
Sufficient fuel and stand-by heating apparatus shall be available to allow
for any sudden drop in outside temperature and any breakdowns of
equipment that may occur.
(iii) Placing concrete under water
Where concrete is to be placed under water in sub-zero ambient outside
temperatures, the Contractor shall heat water inside cofferdams to a
minimum temperature of 5 °C before placing any concrete. After placing
the concrete, and before dewatering the Contractor shall maintain the
temperature of the water above the concrete in the cofferdam above 5° C.
(e) Protection from soil or water with high sulphate content
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the high sulphate content of water and/or
soil areas. All concrete for piles, pile caps and sub-structure shall be made with
Portland cement complying with the requirements of AASHTO M85 Type II.
Water from such locations shall not be used for making or curing concrete.
The water content of the mix shall be carefully controlled and regulated so as to
produce concrete of minimum permeability. The concrete shall be thoroughly
compacted to maximum density. The concrete matrix shall be without rock
pockets. The depth of cover from the face of the concrete to the reinforcing steel
shall be not less than 60 mm. Formwork shall be left in place for a minimum of 7
days after casting to protect newly formed concrete surfaces from attack.
Except for the repair of any surface cavities and the plugging of form tie holes,
the original formed surface of the concrete shall be left undisturbed. Special
handling shall be provided for pre-cast members to avoid even slight
deformation cracks.
711 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
Concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the placed layer.
Concrete shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around any
reinforcement and other embedded items, without displacing them. Particular care
shall be taken at arises and other confined spaces. Successive layers of the same
pour shall be thoroughly worked together.
Concrete shall generally be compacted with the assistance of mechanical poker
(immersion) vibrators. The Contractor may, for the compaction of slabs and bridge
decks, use supplementary twin beam vibrators at the surface in the event that a
satisfactory surface finish cannot be produced by poker vibrators alone.
Poker vibrators shall operate at a frequency of between 7,000 and 10,000 impulses
per minute. The Contractor shall ensure that vibrators are operated at pressures and
voltages not less than those recommended by the manufacturer in order that the
compactive effort is not reduced. Table 7-11 shows a range of poker vibrator sizes
and applications.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-33


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 7-11: Poker Vibrator Sizes and Applications

Diameter in Radius of Rate of Application


mm Effective Action Compaction in
in mm m3/h
20 - 30 80 - 150 0.8 - 2 slumps of 50 mm and
above in very thin
sections and highly
confined or
congested places
35 - 40 130 - 250 2-4 slumps of 50 mm and
above in thin
columns and walls or
moderately confined
places
50 - 75 180 - 350 3-8 slumps of 25 mm and
above general
construction in places
free from restrictions

The Contractor shall provide, in accordance with Table 7-11 above, sufficient number
and sizes of poker vibrators to enable the entire quantity of concrete being placed to
be vibrated for the period necessary to achieve full compaction. Stand-by poker
vibrators shall be available for instant use at each place where concrete is being
placed.
Where the concrete contains aggregate with a nominal size of 75 mm or more,
vibrators with a diameter of 100 mm or more shall be used.
Compaction of fresh concrete shall take place at the point it is placed in the works.
Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally. The poker shall be inserted
vertically into the concrete under its own weight. The poker vibrator shall penetrate
the layer of concrete placed previously to avoid the formation of laminated strata.
Vibration shall be continued at each point for a short period until the concrete ceases
to contract, a thin layer of mortar appears on the surface and the formation of air
bubbles stops. The poker shall be withdrawn slowly to fully close the void that would
otherwise ensue.
Vibration shall be of a sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly compact the
concrete, but shall not continue long enough to cause segregation. Vibration shall not
be continued at any one point to the extent that localized pools of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than
1.5 times the radius over which vibration is visibly effective.
Vibration shall not be applied directly to, or through the reinforcement nor shall
vibrators be allowed to touch reinforcement, the formwork or other embedded items.
Vibrators of small diameter shall be supplemented by such tamping as is necessary
to ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners.
Concrete for columns, substructure and culvert walls, and other similar vertical
members shall be placed and allowed to settle for a period of time and then re-
vibrated after 1 to 2 hours to reduce plastic settlement cracking before concrete for
integral horizontal members is placed.
The Engineer may also instruct that concrete be re-vibrated to improve the surface
finish of the concrete by reducing blowholes or to eliminate plastic shrinkage cracks.
Concrete may be re-vibrated provided that it is still in a plastic state, the vibrator can

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-34


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

penetrate the concrete under its own weight and the concrete closes behind it upon
its removal. The Contractor shall conduct Site trials to determine the optimum waiting
period for various grades and consistencies of concrete.
712 CURING OF CONCRETE
(a) General
Concrete shall be protected during hardening from loss of moisture and from the
development of temperature differentials within the concrete sufficient to cause
thermal cracking.
The methods used for curing shall not cause damage of any kind to the
concrete. Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to achieve
the above objectives but in any case for at least seven days or until the concrete
is covered by later construction.
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough to
resist damage from the process, and in the case of large areas or continuous
pours, shall commence on the completed sections of the pour before the rest of
the pour is finished.
All newly placed concrete shall be cured so as to prevent loss of water by use of
one or more of the methods specified herein. If the surface of the concrete
begins to dry before the selected cure method can be applied, the surface of the
concrete shall be kept moist by a fog spray applied so as not to damage the
surface.
Curing by other than steam or radiant heat methods shah continue uninterrupted
for the periods shown in Table 7-12.
Table 7-12: Minimum Curing Periods
Average
Ambient Average Average
Temperature Ambient Ambient
Cement Type
Greater than Temperature Temperature
5° C to 15° C Less than 5° C
15° C

Portland Cement
with less than 10% 7 days 10 days 14 days
added pozzolans
Portland Cement
with more than
10 days 15 days 20 days
10% added
pozzolans

When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot weather, water
shall be applied to concrete surfaces being cured by the liquid membrane
method or by the forms-in-place method, until the Engineer determines that a
cooling effect is no longer required.
If, instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, in addition to the curing
provisions set out below, provide suitable sunshades and windshields to prevent
the direct rays of the sun or drying winds from reaching concrete surfaces.
(b) Materials
(i) Water
Water shall conform to the requirements of Sub-Clause 703 (g).

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-35


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(ii) Liquid membranes


Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M148.
(iii) Waterproof sheet materials
Waterproof paper, polyethylene film and white burlap polyethylene sheet
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M171.
(c) Methods of curing concrete
(i) Formwork in-place method
Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the formwork in-
place, without loosening, for the required duration.
(ii) Water method
Concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet by ponding, spraying or
covering with materials that are kept continuously and thoroughly wet.
Such materials may consist of cotton mats, multiple layers of burlap or
other approved materials that do not discolor or otherwise damage the
concrete.
(iii) Liquid membrane curing compound method
The liquid membrane method shall not be used on surfaces where a
rubbed finish is required or on surfaces of construction joints unless it is
removed by sand blasting prior to placement of concrete against the joint.
Type 2, white pigmented, liquid membranes may be used only on the
surfaces of bridge decks, on surfaces that will not be exposed to view in
the completed work or on surfaces where their use has been approved by
the Engineer.
When membrane curing is used, the exposed concrete shall be
thoroughly sealed immediately after the free water has left the surface.
Formed surfaces shall be sealed immediately after the formwork is
removed and necessary finishing has been carried out. The solution shall
be applied by power-operated atomizing spray equipment in one or two
separate applications. Hand-operated sprayers may only be used for
coating small areas at the discretion of the Engineer.
Membrane solutions containing pigments shall be thoroughly mixed prior
to use and agitated during application. If the solution is applied in two
increments, the second application shall follow the first application within
30 minutes. Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface, in such a
manner that provides a uniform coverage, at the rate of 0.2 l/m2 (litres per
square metre) on smooth surfaces. The rate of application on textured
shall be 0.5 l/m2 or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
If rain should fall on newly applied concrete curing membrane before the
film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, or if the film is damaged in any
other manner during the curing period, a new coat shall be applied to the
affected areas at the same rates of application specified above.
(iv) Waterproof cover method
This method shall consist of covering the surface with a waterproof sheet
material so as to prevent moisture loss from the concrete. This method
may be used only when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the covering can
be adequately secured to prevent moisture loss.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-36


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The concrete surface shall be wet when the cover is placed. Sheets shall
be of the widest practicable width. Adjacent sheets shall overlap by a
minimum of 300 mm and shall be tightly sealed with pressure sensitive
tape, mastic, glue, or other approved methods to form a complete
waterproof cover of the entire concrete surface.
Covers shall be secured against displacement by the wind. Any part of the
cover that becomes defective before expiration of the curing period shall
be immediately repaired. Sheeting that has lost its waterproof property
shall not be used.
(v) Heated housing method
Concrete placed in cold weather shall be cured in accordance with the
requirements of Sub-Clause 710 (d) of this Specification.
(vi) Accelerated curing by steam or radiant heat
These methods shall be used only for pre-cast concrete elements
manufactured in established plants.
Steam curing or radiant heat curing shall be done inside a suitable
enclosure to contain the live steam or the heat. Only low pressure,
saturated steam shall be utilized. Temperature recording devices shall be
employed as necessary to verify that temperatures are uniform throughout
the enclosure and within the limits specified.
There shall be a delay period of 3 to 5 hours before the initial application
of steam or heat after the final placing of concrete to allow its initial set to
take place. If retarding agents are used, the delay period shall be
increased in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. If the time
of initial set is determined in accordance with AASHTO T197 delay period
shall be adjusted accordingly.
During the delay period, the temperature within the curing chamber shall
be maintained at not be less than 10° C and live steam or radiant heat
may employed to do so. During this period the surface of the concrete
shall be kept wet.
Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete or on the
forms so as to cause localized high temperatures. During accelerated
curing by steam or radiant heat the rate of increase of ambient
temperature within the curing enclosure shall not exceed 20° C per hour and
the maximum ambient temperature shall not exceed 71° C.
The maximum temperature shall be held until the concrete has reached
the specified strength, and the cubes/cylinders used to determine the
concrete strength shall be cured alongside and under the same conditions
as the pre-stressed concrete.
An ambient temperature recording device of a type approved by the
Engineer shall be placed on top of the element after the placing of
concrete is complete. The thermometer shall not be moved until after
accelerated curing is complete. A graph of ambient temperature against
time shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion of accelerated
curing for each element. The graph shall indicate :
• element identification No.,
• hour, day, month and year,
• time of completion of concrete placing,
• start of heating,

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-37


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• end of heating,
• end of accelerated curing.
Once accelerated curing has been completed, the ambient temperature
shall not be allowed to fall at a rate exceeding 20° C per hour until a
temperature of 6° C above the temperature of the air to which the
concrete will be exposed has been reached.
Elements shall not be subjected to freezing temperatures before reaching
their specified design strength.
Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, hot oil
or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat curing shall be
done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat, and moisture loss
shall be minimized by covering all exposed concrete surfaces with a
plastic sheeting or by applying an approved liquid membrane curing
compound to all exposed concrete surfaces.
Top surfaces of concrete members to be used in composite construction
and surfaces to which other material is to be bounded in the finished
structure shall be thoroughly cleaned of concrete curing membrane
residue so as to enable bond 7 design limits to be met.
Details of the Contractor's proposals for curing concrete shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to any placing of concrete in
the Works.
(d) Limiting temperature differentials in newly placed concrete
The Contractor shall limit the development of temperature differentials in
concrete after placing by any means appropriate to the circumstances
including the following:
x limiting concrete temperatures at placing as set out in Sub-Clause
710 (c),
x use of low heat cement, subject to the agreement of the Engineer,
x insulation of exposed concrete surfaces,
x insulated formwork left in-place,
x preventing rapid dissipation of heat from surfaces by shielding
from wind,
x avoiding the use of ponding or sprayed water when such use
would cause rapid cooling of the surface.
713 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Whenever concrete is to be bonded to other concrete that has hardened, the surface
of contact between the sections shall be deemed a construction joint.
Where construction joints are shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall form such
joints in those positions. The location of joints which the Contractor requires to make
for the purpose of construction shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
Construction joints shall be in vertical or horizontal planes except in sloping slabs
where they shall be normal to the exposed surface or elsewhere where the Drawings
require a different arrangement.
The Contractor shall form construction joints in all classes of work as tongue and
groove joints against which concrete can subsequently be properly compacted.
There shall be no construction joints in pre-cast members nor in reinforced concrete
deck slabs of minor spans.
Construction joints shall be so arranged as to reduce to a minimum the effects of

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-38


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

shrinkage in the concrete after placing, and shall be placed in the most
advantageous positions with regard to stresses in the structures and the desirability
of staggering joints.
Feather edges of concrete at joints shall be avoided and any feather edges which
may have formed where reinforcing bars project through a joint shall be cut back until
sound concrete has been reached.
The intersections of horizontal or near horizontal joints and exposed faces of
concrete shall appear as straight lines produced by use of a guide strip fixed to the
formwork at the top of the concrete lift, or by other means acceptable to the Engineer.
The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal joints shall be
thoroughly cleaned and roughened by means of high pressure water and air jets
and/or by washing and brushing the surface with a bristle brush shortly after casting
but when the concrete is hard enough to withstand the treatment without the leaching
of cement.
The surface of vertical or near vertical joints shall be similarly treated if circumstances
permit the removal of formwork at a suitable time. At vertical joints a retarding agent
may be painted onto the form face provided that the formwork is removed within 72
hours of casting and the concrete surface cleaned by washing and brushing to
expose the aggregate.
The treatment for forming construction joints shall be as follows:
x whilst the existing concrete is still green surface aggregate shall be exposed by
washing and brushing with a stiff bristled brush,
x fresh concrete shall be cast against the dry exposed aggregate surface.
x surfaces shall be clean, hard, dry and sound.

Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be successful, the
surface whether formed or free is to be thoroughly scabbled by mechanical means or
wet sand blasted or prepared by air-driven needle guns. The indentations produced
by scabbling shall be not less than 10 mm deep and shall not extend closer than 40
mm to a finished face. The surfaces so formed shall be washed clean and left to dry
before concreting and any grit or other deleterious or loose material removed from
the vicinity.
The Contractor shall clean and remove all concrete or other matter adhering to
fittings or reinforcement that project from the existing concrete surface taking care
not to break the bond between the steel and the existing concrete.
The amount of coarse aggregate in the first layer of concrete to be cast against
hardened concrete surfaces shall be reduced by 50% to allow for the effective loss of
mortar required to initially coat placing equipment, the joint, reinforcement and
formwork. Pre-placed grouts or mortars shall not be used unless otherwise instructed
by the Engineer.
No concrete shall be placed in position or against a construction joint until the joint
has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
Epoxy resins especially designed for bonding old concrete to new shall be used at
construction joints where directed by the Engineer. The preparation of the
construction joint surface and the application of the epoxy resin shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Engineer's
instructions. The brand and type of resin used shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
Where a joint is to be formed to prevent bonding between contiguous structural
elements, the Contractor shall place two intermediate layers of approved waterproof

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-39


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

building paper at the location specified. The paper shall be cut to fit the surfaces
accurately without creases or wrinkles. Overlapping edges shall be covered with
adhesive tape on both faces of the overlap. There shall be not less than two layers of
approved waterproof building paper over the full area of the joint. When carrying out
concreting operations the Contractor shall ensure that the paper remains
undamaged.
714 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
Expansion joints for bridges are covered in detail in Section 900 of this Specification.
Expansion and contraction joints are discontinuities in concrete designed to allow for
thermal or other movements in the concrete.
Expansion joints are formed with a gap between the concrete faces to permit both
subsequent expansion and contraction of the concrete. Contraction joints are formed
to accommodate the contraction of adjacent concrete and may include provision for
subsequent filling.
Expansion and contraction joints shall be formed in the positions and in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications.
When forming joints by saw-cutting, the cut shall be made as soon as the concrete
can be cut without spalling or raveling of the edges and before any cracks form in the
concrete.
715 WATERSTOPS
All references to waterstops include groutstops
Waterstops shall be of the material and form shown on the Drawings. No waterstop
material shall be brought onto site until the Contractor has submitted full details of the
materials he proposes to use, including samples, and these have been approved by
the Engineer. All samples shall be of adequate length for testing.
Waterstops shall be made of material resistant to chlorides, sulphates, or other
deleterious substances which may be present in the environment of the Works.
Rubber waterstops may be of natural or synthetic rubber and shall have an
elongation at breaking stress of at least 500 per cent at 25 °C and shall allow a joint
movement of at least 50 mm.
Poly vinyl chloride (PVC) waterstops shall be extruded from an unfilled plasticised
PVC polymer or copolymer which does not contain any reclaimed or scrap PVC. PVC
waterstops shall have an elongation at breaking stress of at least 225 per cent at 25°
C and shall allow a joint movement of at least 10 mm.
Low modulus waterstops shall be of rubber or PVC as described above but shall
have an elongation of at least 200 per cent at 25° C under a tensile stress of 6
N/mm2 and shall allow a joint movement of at least 50 mm.
Waterstops shall be supplied in lengths as long as possible consistent with ease of
handling and construction requirements. In rubber or plastic material joints other than
butt joints shall be supplied ready made by the manufacturer. Butt joints shall be
made on site in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with equipment
supplied for the purpose by the manufacturer.
Waterstop material shall be stored carefully on Site to avoid damage and
contamination with oil, grease, or other pollutants. Rubber and plastic waterstops
shall be stored in cool well ventilated places away from direct sunlight. Rubber and
plastic waterstops which are embedded in one side of a joint more than one month
before the scheduled date of placing concrete on the other side, shall be protected
from the sun.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-40


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Waterstops shall be firmly fixed in the formwork so that they cannot be displaced
during concrete placing and shall be completely free of all dirt, grease, oil, etc. before
placing concrete. Where eyelets are provided these shall be fully wired to the
reinforcement and be the only means whereby the waterstop is fixed. In no
circumstances shall a waterstop be punctured with nails, etc. as a means of fixing.
Concrete shall be placed carefully round waterstops so as to avoid distortion or
displacement and shall be fully compacted. Where waterstops lie in a horizontal or
nearly horizontal plane the Contractor shall ensure that no voids are left on the
underside of the waterstop.
Formwork adjoining waterstops shall be carefully removed to avoid damage. If
waterstops suffer any damage which cannot be properly repaired in situ the Engineer
may require a section of concrete to be removed and the waterstop replaced.
716 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES
Horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces, which are not cast against formwork shall be
finished to the class shown on the Drawings and defined hereunder :
(a) UF 1 finish
All surfaces on which no higher class of finish is called for on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer shall be given a UF 1 finish.
The concrete shall be leveled and screeded to produce a uniform plain or ridged
surface, surplus concrete being struck off by a straight edge immediately after
compaction.
(b) UF 2 finish
This is a floated finish for roof or floor slabs and other surfaces where a hard
trowelled surface is not required.
The surface shall first be treated as a Class UF 1 finish and after the concrete
has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated with a wooden or cork surfaced hand
or power float sufficient only to produce a uniform surface free from screed
marks.
(c) UF 3 finish
This is a hard trowelled surface for use on bearing areas, where weather
resistance or appearance is important, or on areas subject to high velocity water
flow.
The surface shall be floated as for a UF 2 finish but to the tolerance slated
below. When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, it shall be power
floated to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free from trowel marks.
(d) Roadway surface finish
The surfaces of bridge decks and approach slabs shall be struck-off by screed
equipment traveling on rails. The equipment shall be constructed to span the full
deck width. The rails shall be of sufficient strength and supported and fixed at
such intervals to prevent deflection during screeding operations. Equipment and
rails shall be adjusted so that the concrete surface after strike-off conforms to
the specified profile and cross section.
The rails shall be fully in place and firmly secured for the entire scheduled length
before placing of concrete commences. Rails shall extend beyond both ends of
the scheduled length for a distance sufficient to permit the screed equipment to
clear the concrete to be placed. The elevation of rails shall be adjusted and set

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-41


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

to allow for anticipated settlement, camber, and deflection of falsework, as


necessary. The screed equipment shall have the capability of uninterrupted
operation over the entire surface to be struck-off. Rails shall have the capacity to
be adjusted as necessary to correct for unanticipated settlement or deflection
that may occur during the operation of screed equipment.
Rail supports located within the area to be concreted shall be cut back to at least
50 mm below the screeded surface and removed as soon as they are no longer
needed and the resulting voids made good with fresh concrete.
The Contractor shall provide a movable work bridge normal to the centreline of
the roadway in order to facilitate inspection of the concrete surface, remedial
works, making good holes left by rail supports, power floating, texturing and the
application of curing compound. After the surface has been screeded all further
work that may be required shall be carrieded out from the work bridge.
The Contractor shall install a sturdy and robust walkway with safety railing on
each side of the work area to provide access to the work bridge.
The Contractor shall operate the screed equipment over the entire area to be
concreted to check rail deflections, deck thickness and depth of cover to
reinforcing steel, and to verify the satisfactory operation of all equipment before
the delivery of concrete begins. Any necessary adjustments shall be made
before concrete placing commences.
The Contractor shall not use any recently poured parts of the bridge deck or
approach slabs as an access for light equipment until a minimum period of 48
hours has elapsed after completion of the pour. This minimum period shall be
extended if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the deck has not attained sufficient
strength.
No heavy equipment shall travel on the bridge deck or approaches until the
concrete has gained 80% of the design strength.
The screed equipment shall go over the surface as many times as necessary to
obtain the required profile and cross section. A slight excess of concrete shall be
kept in front of the screed equipment at all times. This excess of concrete shall
be carried through to the edge of the pour and disposed of. It shall not be
worked into the placed concrete.
During finishing operations, excess water, laitance or foreign materials brought
to the surface shall not be reworked into the slab, but shall be removed by
means of a "squeegee" or straightedge drawn from the centre of the slab
towards either edge.
The addition of water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing
operations will not be permitted.
After the surface has been struck-off it shall be finished with a power float to give
a UF 3 surface finish as detailed in Sub-Clause 716 (c) above.
After finishing the entire surface shall be checked by the Contractor with 3 m
metal straightedge placed parallel to the centreline of the bridge. Lines along the
edges, the centreline and the mid points in between the centreline and edges
shall all be checked. For deck surfaces that are to be overlaid by 25 mm or more
of another material the deviation from the straight edge shall not exceed 10 mm.
Deviations in excess of this requirement shall be corrected before the concrete
sets. The checking operation shall progress by overlapping half of the preceding
check.
All other unformed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the
Drawings within the tolerances set out in Table 7-13 and there shall be no

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-42


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

sudden change of level in the surface. Provided that where dimensional


tolerances are given on the Drawings they shall take precedence over those
given in Table 7-13.
Table 7-13: Allowable Tolerances of Unformed Concrete Surfaces.
Class of Maximum Gap between Maximum Difference in Level
Finish the Surface and a 3 m or Position between a 3 m
Straight Edge or Correctly Straight Edge or Correctly
Shaped Template Placed Shaped Template Placed on
on the Surface the Surface and the Specified
Level or Position

UF1 5 mm + 10 mm or - 10 mm
UF2 5 mm + 10 mm or - 10 mm
UF3 3mm + 5 mm or- 5 mm

717 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACES


The classes of surface finish to be achieved on formed concrete surfaces shall be as
shown on the Drawings and defined hereunder:
(a) Ordinary surface finish
All exposed concrete surfaces shall receive an ordinary surface finish unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. This finish
shall be a smooth even concrete surface free of honeycombing, objectionable
fins, projections, bulges, offsets, streaks, surface discolouration or other surface
imperfections . The formwork shall be faced with plywood complying with the
National Institute of Standards and Technology Product Standard PS1 for
Exterior B-B Class I Plywood or BS 1088 Plywood for Marine Craft or equivalent
material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved uniform
pattern. Wherever possible, joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide
with an architectural feature or a change in direction of the surface. The
thickness of boards or sheets shall be such that there shall be no visible
deflection under the pressure exerted by the concrete placed against them.
Joints between boards or panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless
otherwise directed.
A satisfactory ordinary surface finish shall be defined as one that, in the opinion
of the Engineer, requires no remedial measures, such as general filling of
surface pitting, other than the filling of holes or cavities caused by the removal of
ties and tie rods. All objectionable fins, projections, bulges, offsets, streaks,
surface discolouration and other surface imperfections shall be remedied by
methods agreed by the Engineer. Cement washes and plasters shall not be
used.
Immediately after the removal of formwork, all defects in concrete surfaces shall
be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Defects shall be repaired in
accordance with this Specification or as directed by the Engineer. Cavities or
holes shall be filled carefully and to their full depth, with a cement-sand grout of
the same quality and mix as that used in the surrounding concrete but with the
fraction remaining on the 2.36 mm sieve discarded. Grout used for pointing shall
be not more than 1 hour old. Patched areas shall be rubbed flush with the
surrounding surface after the cement grout has hardened.
Honeycombed concrete and localized poorly bonded rock pockets shall be
removed and replaced with sound concrete or packed mortar in accordance with
Clause 721 of this Specification.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-43


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete surface does not conform to the
requirements for ordinary surface finish described herein, the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, and as may be directed by the Engineer, provide the entire
surface or designated areas thereof with a rubbed finish in accordance with Sub-
Clause 717 (b) of this Specification.
(b) Rubbed surface finish
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, this finish shall only apply as a
corrective measure at the expense of the Contractor.
The rubbed finish shall be provided as soon as formwork is removed. The
concrete shall first be given an ordinary surface finish in accordance with Sub-
Clause 717 (a) of this Specification. After the grout for pointing has sufficiently
set the entire surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water using a brush.
The surface shall be rubbed with a power operated stone to bring the surface to
a paste. Rubbing shall be continued sufficiently to remove all formwork marks,
projections and other surface irregularities to produce a smooth dense surface
free from blemishes or pits.
Material which has been ground to a paste during rubbing shall be spread
uniformly over the entire surface and allowed to take a set. The final finish shall
be obtained through a second rubbing with a fine carborundum stone that shall
continue until the entire surface is of a smooth even texture and a uniform
colour.
After the final rubbing has been completed and the surface has dried it shall be
rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder. The final surface shall be free from
unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks. Under no
circumstances shall a cement wash or plaster be applied.
718 FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
(a) Falsework
Falsework shall be designed by a structural engineering firm experienced in the
design of formwork and falsework and acceptable to the Engineer. At least 21
days before he proposes to commence concreting, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer design calculations and detailed working drawings showing
details of the proposed formwork and falsework. The drawings and calculations
shall be certified by the designing structural engineering firm. The calculations
shall take into consideration the sequence and rate of placing and the equipment
proposed for placing, compacting and finishing the concrete.
Notwithstanding any approval given by the Engineer for the drawings and
calculations submitted by the Contractor for the falsework and formwork and the
acceptance of the falsework and formwork as constructed, the Contractor shall
be held solely responsible for the safety and adequacy of the falsework and
formwork. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer and the Engineer and
keep them indemnified against any losses, claims or damages whatsoever to
persons or property which may arise out of or in consequence of the design,
construction or maintenance of the falsework or formwork.
Formwork and falsework shall be designed and constructed so that they support
the loads imposed on them, including but not limited to, those imposed by the
fresh concrete, by the rate of placing concrete and by the methods of placing
and compacting concrete such that, after the concrete has hardened, the formed
faces shall be in the positions shown on the Drawings within the tolerances set
out in Clause 721 of this Specification.
After the drawings have been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-44


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

construct the falsework in accordance with the submitted drawings. Variations to


the construction of falsework from that show on the drawings shall not be
permitted without the approval of the designer and the submission to the
Engineer of revised drawings.
(i) Loads
The design loads for falsework shall consist of the sum of dead and live
vertical loads and any horizontal loads.
Dead loads shall include the weight of the falsework and all construction
material to be supported. The combined weight of concrete, reinforcing
and pre-stressing steel and formwork shall be assumed to be not less
than 2.60 t/m3 of normal weight concrete.
Live loads shall consist of the operating weight of any equipment to be
supported applied as concentrated loads at the points of contact and a
uniform loads of not less than 98 kg/m2 applied over the area supported,
plus 112 kg/m applied at the outside edge of deck overhangs.
The horizontal load for the design of the falsework bracing system shall be
taken as the sum of the horizontal loads due to equipment, construction
sequence, including unbalanced hydrostatic forces from fluid concrete,
stream flow when applicable and an allowance for wind. However, the
minimum horizontal load in any direction shall be taken as 2 percent of the
total dead load.
Loads imposed by falsework onto existing, new or partially completed
structures shall not exceed those permitted Clause 8.15, "Application of
Loads", of Division II, AASHTO Specifications for highway bridges.
(ii) Foundations
Falsework shall be supported on solid footings designed to prevent
settlement and properly founded on material capable of supporting the
loads imposed on it. Due consideration shall be given to the effects on the
foundation material if it should become wet. When instructed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall conduct suitable load tests to demonstrate
that the soil bearing values assumed for the design of the falsework
footings do not exceed the supporting capacity of the soil.
If falsework cannot be founded on satisfactory footings it shall be
supported on piling that shall be spaced, driven, tested and removed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iii) Deflections
Falsework shall be constructed and set, utilizing variable depth camber
strips between falsework beams and soffit forms if so instructed by the
Engineer, to impart the specified camber and profile to the completed
structure. The Contractor shall make necessary allowances for dead load
deflection and any other deformations caused by the placing of concrete.
For cast-in-place concrete structures, the calculated deflection of
falsework flexural members shall not exceed 1/240 of their span
irrespective of the fact that the deflection may be compensated for by
camber strips.
(iv) Clearances
Unless otherwise provided for or instructed by the Engineer, the minimum
dimensions of clear openings to be provided through falsework for

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-45


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

roadways that are to remain open to traffic during construction shall be at


least 1.5 m greater than the width of the approach travelled way and 4.5
m high.
(v) Construction
Falsework shall be constructed from structural steel sections. Structural
steel tubes shall have a minimum wall thickness of 4 mm.
Screw jacks, pairs of wedges or other approved devices shall be
employed at each post to set falsework to grade, to facilitate minor
adjustments during the placing of concrete and to allow for the gradual
release of the falsework.
The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the formwork and
extending to fixed reference points, or other approved means for the
accurate measurement of falsework settlement during the placing of the
concrete.
(b) Formwork
(i) General
Formwork shall of an approved construction surfaced with wood, steel or
other approved sheet material.
Formwork for concrete shall be constructed to withstand, without
distortion, all the forces to which it will be subjected.
Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the
work without damage to the faces of the concrete, it shall also incorporate
provisions for making minor adjustments in position, if required, to ensure
the correct location of concrete faces. Due allowance shall be made in the
position of all formwork for any movement, deflection or settlement under
the weight of fresh concrete.
The inner surfaces of the forms shall produce a smooth surface of uniform
texture and colour substantially equal, in the opinion of the Engineer, to
that which would be obtained using of plywood conforming to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology Product Standard PS1 for Exterior
B-B Class I Plywood or BS 1088 Plywood for Marine Craft.
Joints in formwork for exposed faces shall, unless otherwise specified, be
evenly spaced horizontally and vertically and shall be continuous or form
a regular pattern. The same type of formwork surfacing material shall be
used throughout each element of a structure.
Where overhangs in formwork occur, means shall be provided to permit
the escape of air and to ensure that the space is filled completely with fully
compacted concrete.
Formwork shall be provided for concrete surfaces at slopes of 30° to the
horizontal or steeper. Surfaces at slopes less than 20° may be formed by
screeding. Surfaces at slopes between 20° and 30° shall generally be
formed unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Engineer that such slopes can be screeded with the use of special screed
boards to hold the concrete in place during vibration.
Horizontal or inclined formwork to the upper surface of concrete shall be
adequately secured against uplift due to the hydraulic pressure of fresh
concrete. Formwork for voids within the body of the concrete shall be
secured against floatation.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-46


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Formwork shall not be re-used after it has suffered damage, which is


sufficient to impair the finished surfaces of the concrete.
Where pre-cast concrete elements are specified or proposed by the
Contractor and agreed by the Engineer for use as permanent formwork,
they shall comply with the requirements of this Specification. Such
elements shall be set true to line and level within the tolerances
prescribed for the appropriate class of finish in Clause 721 and fixed so
that they cannot move when concrete is placed against them.
All formwork surfaces that are to make contact with the concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned and treated with an approved chemical or wax emulsion
release agent before the reinforcing steel is placed. Neat mineral oils and
water-soluble emulsions shall not be used. The Contractor shall construct
trial panels to demonstrate the suitability of any release agents proposed.
Release agents shall not be approved if their use causes any of the
following properties:
x inhibited adhesion of any material to be subsequently applied to the
formed surface,
x the retarded set of the formed surface,
x poor surface durability,
x blowholes,
x staining,
x efflorescence,
x colour variation.

(ii) Design
The structural design of formwork shall conform to ACI Standard,
"Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347) or some
other internationally recognized standard acceptable to the Engineer. In
selecting the hydrostatic pressure to be used in the design of formwork,
factors to be taken into consideration shall include, but not be limited to:
x the maximum proposed rate of placing concrete,
x the workability and consistence of the proposed mix,
x the effects of vibration,
x the temperature of the concrete,
x ambient temperatures,
x any proposed use of retarding agents, plasticisers or pozzolanic
materials in the concrete mix.
(iii) Construction
Prior to reuse, forms shall be cleaned with power driven mechanical
equipment, inspected for damage and repaired as necessary. When
forms appear to be defective in any manner, either before or during the
placement of concrete, the Engineer may suspend operations pending the
correction of defects.
The Contractor shall construct formwork in such a manner that the sides
can be removed without disturbing the soffit forms and, if props are to be
left in place when the soffit forms are removed, these props remain
undisturbed during striking. The Contractor shall not remove supports
temporarily for the purpose of stripping formwork and subsequently
replace them.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-47


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Metal ties or anchorages within the forms shall be so constructed as to


permit their removal to a depth of at least 60 mm from the face without
injury to the concrete. Fittings for metal ties shall be of such design that,
upon their removal, the cavities that are left will be of the smallest possible
size. The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left
sound in accordance with Sub-Clause 717 (a) of this Specification.
Supports for formwork may be bolted to previously placed concrete
provided the type of bolt used is acceptable to the Engineer. If metal ties
through the concrete should be used in conjunction with bolts, the metal
left in place shall not be closer than 60 mm from the face of the concrete.
Where circumstances prevent easy access within the form for cleaning
and inspection, temporary openings for this purpose shall be provided
through the formwork.
The internal and external angles on concrete surfaces shall be formed to
a chamfer utilizing 20 mm x 20 mm hardwood timber fillets of new
material. New 25 mm square hardwood timber shall be incorporated in the
formwork to form a clean, level horizontal joint on exposed concrete
surfaces at the top of each lift unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.
Formwork shall be constructed such that it is mortar tight and the
dimensions and alignment of the concrete enclosed by the formwork
complies in every respect to the particulars indicated on the Drawings.
Where reinforcement projects through formwork the form shall fit closely
round the bars.
(iv) Preparation of formwork before placing concrete
After construction of the falsework and formwork and prior to the placing
of any reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the
falsework and formwork. Dimensions shall be controlled, unevenness of
surface shall be corrected and special attention shall be paid to the
adequacy and tightness of bolts, ties, bracings and ledgings and to the
soundness of foundations.
Before any reinforcement is placed into position within formwork, the latter
shall be thoroughly cleaned and then dressed with a release agent in
accordance with Sub-Clause 718 (b) (i) of this Specification. In order to
avoid colour differences on adjacent concrete surfaces, only one type of
release agent shall be used on any one structure.
In cases where it is necessary to fix reinforcement before placing
formwork, all surface preparation of formwork shall be carried out before it
is placed into its final position. Reinforcement shall not be contaminated
with formwork release agent.
Before placing concrete all dirt, construction debris and other foreign
matter shall be removed completely from the placement space.
Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting
devices shall be secured against movement during concrete placing and
the Contractor shall maintain a watch on the formwork during placing to
ensure that no movement occurs.
After construction of the falsework and formwork and the fixing of
reinforcing steel the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice at
least 24 hours in advance of his intention to place concrete. The

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-48


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Contractor shall satisfy himself that the work complies with the
requirements of this Specification in all respects prior to giving such
notification to the Engineer. The Contractor shall not commence the
placing of concrete without the written authorization by the Engineer to do
so.
(c) Removal of falsework and forms
(i) General
The Contractor shall not remove falsework or formwork without the prior
written consent of the Engineer. In the determination of the time for the
removal of falsework and forms, consideration shall be given to the
location and character of the structure, climatic conditions, the materials
used in the mix and other factors influencing the early strength of the
concrete.
Formwork shall be carefully removed without shock or disturbance to the
concrete. No formwork shall be removed until the concrete has gained
sufficient strength to withstand safely any stresses to which it may thereby
be subjected. Methods of removal likely to cause overstressing of the
concrete or damage to its surface shall not be used. Supports shall be
removed in such a manner so as to permit the structure to uniformly and
gradually assume the stresses due to its own weight.
Unless otherwise instructed falsework shall be released before bridge
railings, copings or barriers are constructed.
(ii) Striking times
The minimum periods which shall elapse between completion of placing
concrete and removal of formwork and falsework are given in Table 7-14
and apply to ambient temperatures of between 0° C - 25° C. At lower
temperatures or if cement other than ordinary or sulphate-resisting
Portland cement is used, the Engineer may instruct different periods.
Table 7-14: Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork
(Ordinary or Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement Concrete)

Average Ambient Temperature


Formwork Type
Minimum Period Before Striking

25° C 20° C 15° C 10° C 5° C 0° C

Vertical
formwork to
9 10 12 15 20 30
columns, walls
hours hours hours hours hours hours
and large
beams
Soffit formwork 10
3 days 3 days 4 days 5 days 7 days
to slabs days
Soffit formwork
10 13 17 25
to beams and 7 days 8 days
days days days days
props to slabs
10 12 14 18 24 36
Props to beams
days days days days days days

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-49


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Alternatively, formwork and falsework may be removed when the concrete


has attained the strength set out in Table 7-15, provided that the attained
strength is determined by making test cubes/cylinders and curing them under
the same conditions as the concrete to which they refer.
Table 7-15: Minimum Concrete Cube Crushing Strengths to be Attained
Before Striking Formwork
(Ordinary or Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement Concrete)

Percentage of Characteristic 28
Type of Formwork/Falsework day Compressive Cube
Strength to be Attained Before
Striking Formwork
Vertical formwork to columns, walls 30
and large beams
Soffit formwork to slabs 35
Soffit formwork to beams and 40
props to Slabs
Props to beams 50

Compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to delay removal of formwork and falsework until removal can
be completed without damage to the concrete.
As soon as the formwork has been removed, bolt holes in concrete faces
that are not required for subsequent operations shall be completely filled
with mortar and made good in accordance with Sub-Clause 717 (a) of this
Specification.
(iii) Extent of removal
All falsework and forms shall be removed except:
x elements of driven falsework piles more than 0.30 m below non-frost
subgrade within roadbeds, or 0.6 m below the original ground or
finished grade outside of roadbeds, or 0.6 m below the established
limits of any navigation channel,
x footing forms where their removal would endanger the safety of
cofferdams or other work,
x forms from enclosed cells where access is not provided,
x deck forms in the cells of box girder bridges that do not interfere with
the future installation of utilities shown on the plans.
719 MORTAR AND GROUT
(a) General
This Section covers the making and placing of mortar and grout for use in
concrete structures. Such uses include mortar for filling under masonry plates,
mortar used to fill voids and repair surface defects, grout used to fill sleeves for
anchor bolts, and mortar and grout for other such uses as necessary.
Surfaces to receive mortar or grout shall be cleaned from all loose or foreign
material that would inhibit bonding with the mortar. They shall then be flushed
with water and allowed to dry to a surface dry condition immediately prior to
placing the mortar or grout.
Small quantities of mortar or grout may be hand-mixed but for amounts over 0.5

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-50


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

m3 a mechanical mixer shall be used. Once mixed, mortar or grout shall not be
retempered by the addition of water and shall be placed within one hour.
After placing, all surfaces of mortar or grout shall be cured by the water method
in accordance with Sub-Clause 712 (c) (ii) of this Specification for a period of
not less than five days.
(b) Mortar for general purposes
Mortar shall be composed of fine aggregate complying with Sub-Clause 703 (d)
of this Specification and Portland cement Type IA complying with AASHTO M85.
The mix proportions shall be as stated on the Drawings or elsewhere in this
Specification or if not stated shall be one part of cement to two parts of fine
aggregate by weight.
The water content of the mortar shall be as low as possible consistent with the
use for which it is required but in any case the water/cement ratio shall not be
more than 0.5.
Mortar which is specified as "dry pack" shall be mixed with sufficient water for
the mix to become cohesive but not plastic when squeezed in the hand. Dry
pack mortar shall be rammed into the cavity it is required to fill, using a hand
rammer with sufficient force to ensure full compaction.
(c) Grouting of pockets and holes
Pockets and holding-down bolt holes shall be thoroughly cleaned out using
compressed air and water jets. Holes drilled by diamond bit shall be roughened.
Pockets and holes shall be filled with grout consisting of cement and clean fresh
water mixed in proportion of two parts by weight of cement to one part by weight
of water. The pouring of liquid grout shall cease as soon as each hole is filled
and any excess grout on the surface of the concrete foundation shall be
completely removed and the surface dried off before the next operation
proceeds.
(d) Underpinning of baseplates
The space between the top surface of foundation concrete and the underside of
baseplates shall be filled with a special mortar made up of materials in the
proportions of one part Portland cement to one part fine aggregate. An additive
to counteract shrinkage, acceptable to the Engineer and in accordance with
ASTM C845, shall be added in the proportions recommended by the
manufacturer. The special mortar shall have the minimum water-cement ratio
compatible with sufficient workability to enable maximum compaction to be
achieved.
The special mortar shall be well rammed in horizontally below the baseplate
from one edge only, until it is extruded from the other three sides. The mortar
which has extruded shall then be rammed back to ensure complete support
without voids.
720 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING
Records, in a form agreed by the Engineer, shall be kept by the Contractor of the
details of every pour of concrete placed in the Works. These records shall include,
but not be limited to:
x class of concrete,
x slump,
x location of pour,

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-51


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x date of pour,
x ambient temperature and concrete temperature at time of placing,
x moisture contents of aggregates,
x details of mixes,
x batch numbers,
x cement batch number,
x ambient temperatures during curing,
x results of all tests undertaken,
x location of test cube sample points, and,
x details of any cores taken.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of these records each week
covering work carried out during the preceding week. In addition he shall supply to
the Engineer monthly histograms of all 28 day cube strengths together with
cumulative and monthly standard deviations and any other information that the
Engineer may require concerning the concrete placed in the Works.
721 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
If, on stripping any formwork, the exposed concrete should be found to be defective
in any way, the Contractor shall make no attempt to remedy such defects prior to the
Engineer's inspection and the receipt of any instructions, which the Engineer may
give.
Defective surfaces shall not be made good by plastering. Remedial works to surface
defects shall be carried out in accordance with Sub-Clause 717 (b) of this
Specification.
Areas of honeycombing that the Engineer agrees may be repaired shall be cut back
to sound concrete or to 75 mm which ever is the greater distance. In the case of
reinforced concrete the area shall be cut back to at least 25 mm clear distance
behind the reinforcement or to 75 mm, whichever is the greater distance. The cavity
shall have sides at right angles to the face of the concrete. After cleaning out with
water and compressed air the cavity shall be coated with an approved epoxy resin
and then be filled immediately with concrete of the same class as the main body but
with aggregate larger than 10 mm nominal size removed. A form shall be used
against the cavity, provided with a lip to enable concrete to be placed. The form shall
be filled to a point above the top edge of the cavity.
After seven days the lip of concrete shall be broken off and the surface ground
smooth.
Surface irregularities which are outside the limits of tolerance set out in Sub-Clause
302 (k) of this Specification shall be ground down to achieve transition slopes of less
than 1 in 50 between adjacent surfaces in the manner and to the extent instructed by
the Engineer.
Defects other than those mentioned above shall be dealt with as instructed by the
Engineer.
722 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE
(a) General
This Clause covers deformed bar reinforcement and steel fabric to be cast into
concrete in any part of the Works.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-52


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

All reinforcing bars shall be high yield stress deformed. Reinforcement shall
comply with either of the following British Standards or AASHTO Specifications :
BS 4449 Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 4482 Cold Reduced Steel Wire for the Reinforcement of
Concrete
BS 4483 Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete
AASHTO M 31 M Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M 221 M Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M 225 M Steel wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
MNS 1272-99 Method for strength determination.
(b) Testing requirements
The Contractor shall obtain reinforcement from an approved manufacturer and
shall submit manufacturer's test certificates to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall test all reinforcement intended for use in the Works for
compliance with the applicable AASHTO Standard in a laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer, and supply two copies of each test certificate to the Engineer. The
frequency of testing shall be as set out in the appropriate AASHTO Standard.
In addition to the testing requirements described above, the Contractor shall be
required to carry out such additional tests as may be instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor, shall promptly remove from Site any reinforcement that does not
comply with this Specification.
(c) Delivery and storage of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be delivered to Site either in straight lengths, or cut and
bent in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Reinforcement shall
be rejected if it should be delivered to Site in long lengths which have been bent
over double for ease of transportation.
Reinforcement shall be stored on site on racks or on skids on a hard
impermeable base such that it remains straight and free from mechanical injury
or contamination. Any reinforcement, which is likely to remain in storage for a
long period, shall be protected from the weather so as to avoid corrosion and
pitting. All reinforcement which has become corroded or pitted to an extent
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will adversely affect its properties shall
either be removed from Site or may be tested for compliance with the applicable
AASHTO Standard in accordance with Sub-Clause 722 (b) of this Specification
at the Contractor's cost.
(d) Bar bending schedules
When not included on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit bar bending
schedules to the Engineer for review and approval. Bar bending schedules shall
include the following information :
x bar location and placing details,
x reference mark,
x grade of steel,
x size designation,

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-53


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x number of bars,
x length of bars,
x shape code of bars,
x comments.
Fabrication of reinforcement shall only commence after such lists have been
approved by the Engineer. The approval of bar bending schedules shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for their accuracy. Any costs
incident to the revision of material furnished in accordance with such bending
schedules to achieve compliance with the Drawings shall be at the expense of
the Contractor.
e) Fabrication
(i) Cutting and bending
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, cutting and bending shall
comply with ACI 318 building code requirement for reinforced concrete.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of any bar bending
schedules and shall be responsible for cutting and bending the
reinforcement in accordance with the Drawings. The Contractor shall
immediately notify the Engineer if there should be a discrepancy between
a schedule and the Drawing to which it relates.
Bars shall be bent cold by the application of slow steady pressure. At
temperatures below 5° C the rate of bending shall be reduced if
necessary to prevent fracture of the steel. Fabrication tolerances shall be
in accordance with ACI 315.
After bending, the Contractor shall tie bars together securely in bundles or
groups, legibly labelled as set out in ACI 318.
Heating and bending of high yield bars shall not be permitted.
(ii) Identification
Bar reinforcement shall be shipped in standard bundles, tagged and
marked in accordance with the "Manual of Standard Practice of the
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute".
(f) Handling and surface condition of reinforcement
When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, loose rust or
scale, mortar, paint, grease, oil, or other materials that would reduce bond.
Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and
laminations. Bonded rust, surface seams, surface irregularities, or mill scale
shall not be deemed just cause for rejection provided that the surface is
thoroughly cleaned prior to fixing in the works. Provided also that the minimum
dimensions, cross-sectional area, and tensile properties of a hand wire brushed
specimen meet the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel
specified.
(g) Placing and fastening
(i) General
Steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed as shown on the Drawings
and held firmly in position prior to and during the placing of concrete.
Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur during
concrete placing. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all
intersecting bars shall be tied together with annealed galvanized iron wire

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-54


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

of not less than 1.25 mm diameter with the ends of the tying wire turned
back into the main body of the concrete.
The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the Works
shall not suffer distortion, displacement or other damage. When it is
necessary to bend protruding reinforcement aside temporarily, the radius
of the bend shall not be less than four times the bar diameter for mild steel
bars or six times the bar diameter for high yield bars. Such bends shall be
carefully straightened before concrete placing continues, without leaving
residual kinks or damaging the concrete round them.
(ii) Support systems
Reinforcing steel shall be supported in its proper position by use of mortar
blocks, wire bar supports, supplementary bars or other approved devices.
Such devices shall be of such height and placed at intervals sufficient to
maintain the distance between the reinforcement and the formed surface
or the top surface of deck slabs within 5 mm of that indicated on the
Drawings.
Platforms for the support of men and equipment during the placing of
concrete shall not be supported on the reinforcement.
(iii) Mortar blocks
Mortar blocks shall have a compressive strength of not less than that of
the concrete in which they are to be embedded. The face of blocks in
contact with forms for exposed surfaces shall not exceed 50 mm by 50
mm in size and shall have a colour and texture that will match the
concrete surface. Mortar blocks shall have an embedded annealed
galvanized iron wire of diameter 1.25 mm for securing the block to the
reinforcement. An alternative type of spacer block may be used subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
(iv) Stools and high chairs
Such supports shall conform to industry practice as described in the
"Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute".
Chairs or stools that bear against forms for exposed surfaces shall be
either Class 1 - Maximum Protection (Plastic Protected) or Class 2. Type
B-Moderate Protection (Stainless Steel Tipped) for which the stainless
steel conforms to ASTM A493, Type 430.
(v) Welding of reinforcement
Reinforcement in structures may only be welded with the prior written
approval of the Engineer. Welding shall conform to the Structural Welding
Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4 of the American Welding Society and
applicable special provisions.
(vi) Splicing of Bars
All reinforcement shall be fabricated in the full length indicated on the
plans unless otherwise permitted. Except where shown on the Drawings
splicing of bars shall be subject to the written approval of the Engineer.
Splices shall be staggered as far as possible.
Lapped splices shall be of the lengths shown on the Drawings. If not
dimensioned on the Drawings, the length of lapped splices shall be in
accordance with Division I, Clause 8.32 of AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges or as instructed by the Engineer.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-55


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Bars in lapped splices shall be placed and wired in such a manner that
their minimum depth of cover complies with that indicated on the
Drawings and the requirements of Sub-Clause 710 (e) of this
Specification.
Welded splices, in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 722 (g)
(v), may be allowed at the discretion of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not use mechanical couplings for splicing
reinforcement without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
Mechanical couplings shall develop both in tension and compression at
least 125% of the specific yield strength of the bar.
Two field splices out of each 100, or portion thereof, placed in the work,
shall be selected by the Engineer, removed by the Contractor and tested
to 125% of the specified yield strength.
Sheets of welded mesh reinforcement shall be spliced by a lap of one and
a half times the spacing of the mesh with all ends and edges securely
tied.
723 SUBSTITUTION BY BARS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
Substitution of the bars indicated on the Drawings with bars of different sizes or yield
strengths will be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer and only with his prior
written authorization. The product of the area and yield strength of the substituted
bars shall be at least equal to that of the bars indicated on the Drawings and shall
conform to the requirements of Division I, Clause 8.16.8.4 of AASHTO Standard
Specification for Highway Bridges.
724 PRE-CAST CONCRETE
(a) General
This includes all pre-cast concrete mentioned in the Contract document or the
once which the Contractor intends to use.
(b) Formwork
Formwork for precast concrete structure shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 718 of this Technical Specification. The formwork shall be constructed
and set such that the alignment and dimensions are not changed and fine
grained concrete and concrete slurry are not leaked while using it.
Formwork for concrete shall be constructed on hard base to withstand, all the
forces to which it will be subjected.
Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the work
without damage to the faces of the concrete.
The Contractor shall use the removal substances which meets the
requirements of Sub-Clause 718 (c) (i).
(c) Reinforcement for pre-cast concrete
Reinforcement for pre-cast concrete should comply with the requirments of
Clauses 722, 723 of this Technical Specifications. If ready made formwork is
to be used, it shall be rigidly fixed on the jig for replacing the reinforcement
steel in order to provide the accuracy, and supported with forms so that no
movement can occur during concrete placing.
Concrete cover shall be of the type mentioned in the Woking Drawing and if it
is not mentioned shall be not less than 50mm or reinforcement diameter.
Reinforcement shall be placed such that the net space between them shall be

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-56


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

equal to the nominal size of the stone plus 5mm or not less than the
reinforcement diameter in any case.
(d) Fabrication
Concrete to be used for the pre-cast concrete structure shall be of Grade as
shown in the Working Drawing and meet the requirements of 703 to 710 of
this Technical Specification. Lightweight aggregate shall comply with the
Requirements of AASHTO M195.
The fabrication yard shall be properly protected from the water, rain, sun, and
wind.
The structures shall be fabricated and formed in as per the dimensions and
tolerances given in the Working Drawings.
(e) Curing
Curing works shall comply with the requiements of Clause 712 of this
Technical Specifications.
Concrete shall be protected during hardening from loss of moisture and from
the development of temperature differentials within the concrete for at least 4
days after fabrication. If the concrete surfaces shall be watered during
hardening the water temperature shall be within 50C of the temperature of the
structure.
If the Contractor intends to use the methodology of curing in higher
temperature he shall obtain approval form the Engineer and use the device
that heats and cools without developing temperature difference for that
methodology.
(f) Surface finish
Unless otherwise mentioned in the Working Drawing, the unformed surface of
the structure shall be finished in accordance with the Sub-Clause 717 (a) to
produce a uniform plain surface.
Unless otherwise mentioned in the Working Drawing, the unformed surface of
the pre-cast structure shall be finished in accordance with the Sub-Clause
717 (c) to produce UF3 surface.
If the special surface is required the Contractor shall construct trial panel and
store at the manufactured site for testing after the Engineer’s approval. Pre-
cast structures to be further manufactured shall be of same as trial panel.
The area that contacts with other structures or cast-in-place concrete shall be
screed with steel brush and thoroughly washed with water before concrete is
hardened. If the concrete requires hardening the surface shall be screed with
sand and cement mix.
(g) Delivery and storage
Precast structures shall be delivered in a manner preventing them from any
damages and shall be stored on a hard, water-proof base. During storage of
pre-cast structures and large size cast-in-place structures, reinforced in an
ordinary way, they shall be placed such that they shall not have any additional
load, exceeding that which shall be given to them in their final position in the
works.
As shown in the working drawings, the structures shall be provided with
proper hooks, loops and openings, which shall be used for handling the
structures. If it is impossible to provide hooks or openings, the place suitable

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-57


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

for handling, shall be indicated on the structure with oil paint.


The number of the structure and date of casting shall be indelibly marked on
precast structures. Structers shall be piled on sutable slabs or cushions so
that any damage is not caused to the concrete or surface. Slabs under every
structure should be not more than 2. They shall be firmly supported and be
placed in the position, in which the structures shall have a minimum load on
them.
(h) Testing and trial
Precast structures should bear the rated load. The Contractor shall test the
structures selected by the Engineer by giving them a load similar to that in
working conditions. Details of the test should be agreed by the Engineer and
the Contractor.
Precast structures to be used for testing, shall be supported below along its
total length and a load equal to 1.25 times sum of static and dynamic loads
taken in the calculation of structure, shall be put and kept for 1 hour on the
structures. During this period, there should not be any signs of damage.
Return to its initial position in an hour after removal of loads, shall be not less
than 75 per cent of bending during the period of full load.
If tested precast structures do not meet the above-mentioned requirements,
test should be conducted again on 2 structures and if these structures do not
meet the requirements, all the structures shall be disposed off.
If so required by the Engineer, a break test shall be conducted on the
structures. Structures shall be supported below along its total length and
loads shall be given up to 95 per cent of maximum rated load as instructed by
the Engineer. The load shall be kept for 15 minutes. Bending at the end of
this period shall be not more than 2.5 per cent of its length. Loads will be
added until the structure breaks.
If the structure does not bear the load within the specified time or its bending
exceeds the specified limit, the Engineer will instruct to conduct two additional
tests and if the structures again do not meet the requirements, the structures
in the section shall be disposed off.
725 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) Item : Reinforced concrete excluding the cost of reinforcing steel
Unit : m3 of each concrete Grade
The unit of measurement for reinforced concrete excluding the cost of
reinforcing steel shall be the cubic metre of each concrete Grade in particular
locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The volume
shall be calculated from the dimensions given on the Drawings or instructed by
the Engineer. No deduction shall be made in the measurement for:
(i) bolt holes, pockets, box outs and cast in components provided that the
volume of each is less than 0.15 cubic metres, deductions shall be made
for volumes greater than this limit,
(ii) mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves, chamfers and the
like of 100 mm total width or less, deductions shall be made for widths
greater than this limit,
(iii) reinforcement.
(iv) duct

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-58


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The rate for reinforced concrete excluding the cost of reinforcing steel shall
include for the costs of:
x provision and transport of cement, aggregates, water, admixtures and
workability agents including submission of details,
x batching, mixing, transporting, lifting, placing, compacting, curing,
protection from the environment and heating,
x the unformed surfaced finishes indicated on the Drawings,
x an ordinary surface finish to formed surfaces,
x all formwork and falsework,
x laying to sloping surfaces and to falls,
x placing and compacting against excavated surfaces where required and
including any additional concrete to fill overbreak or working space,
x provision and installation of weepholes to abutments, wing walls and
return walls,
x provision and installation of deck drainage spout and collection pit
assemblies,
x complying with the requirements of Sections 100 and 1100 of this
Specification, and,
x complying with the requirements of relevant material, mix, placing and
compaction Clauses of this Specification.
No additional payment beyond the rates for excavation shall be made for the
preparation of excavated surfaces against which concrete is to be cast.
(b) Item : Plain concrete Grade without reinforcement
Unit : m3
The unit of measurement for plain concrete Grade without reinforcement shall
be the cubic metre of concrete at locations shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The volume shall be calculated from the dimensions
given on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. This item includes
concrete placed in leveling courses below pile caps and approach slabs,
concrete footpaths and blinding concrete. Blinding concrete upon hard material
shall be measured as the volume placed provided that the maximum thickness
of 150 mm allowed for overbreak is not exceeded. Any concrete placed in
excess of this limit shall be to the Contractor's expense.
The rate for plain concrete without reinforcement shall include for all the costs
stated in Sub-Clause 725 (a) of this Specification.
(c) Item : Reinforcing steel
Unit : Tonne
The unit of measurement for reinforcing steel shall be the tonne.
The mass of HYSD reinforcing steel shall be calculated from the bending
schedules. No allowance shall be made in the measurement for rolling margin
of cutting waste. The density of steel shall be taken as 7.850 tonnes per cubic
metre. The weight of the reinforcing shall be calculated based on the bar
bending schedule. This does not include any cost for the waste occurs due to
bar bending or time for winding of bars.
The rate for reinforcing steel shall include for the costs of:

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-59


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x Conducting necessary tests for strength and constituents and


Engineer supervision for the test.
x providing, transporting, handling and storing the reinforcing steel,
x cutting to length,
x splice lengths additional to those shown on the Drawings,
x laps, bending and hooking,
x waste incurred by cutting,
x cleaning reinforcing steel,
x spacer blocks,
x provision and fixing of chairs or other types of supports,
x welding,
x fixing the reinforcing steel in position including the provision of wire or
other material for supporting and tying the reinforcing steel in place,
x bending steel reinforcement aside temporarily and straightening,
x placing and compacting concrete around reinforcing steel,
x complying with the requirements of Section 1100 of this Specification,
and,
x complying with the requirements of Clauses 722 and 723 of this
Specification.
.

Section 700. RCC Structures 7-60


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 800 - MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 800 - MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS

801 BRIDGE BEARINGS 8-4


(a) General 8-4
(b) Materials 8-4
(i) Properties of the elastomer 8-4
(ii) Steel laminates 8-4
(iii) Bond 8-4
(iv) Fabrication 8-6
(v) Acceptance specification 8-7
(vi) Quality control certificate 8-7
(vii) Certification and Marking 8-8
(viii) Storage and Handling 8-8
(ix) Installation 8-8
(x) Maintenance 8-9
(c) Tar paper bearing 8-9
802 STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINTS 8-9
(a) Components 8-9
(b) Materials 8-9
(c) Fabrication 8-10
(d) Installation 8-10
(e) Acceptance testing 8-11
803 FILLER-TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS 8-11
804 BRIDGE RAILINGS 8-12
(a) General 8-12
(i) Cast-in-place concrete railings 8-12
(ii) Pre-cast concrete handrails 8-12
805 DRAINAGE SPOUTS 8-13
806 DECK WATERPROOFING UNDER AC WEARING COAT 8-13
807 ANCHOR STEEL BOLTS 8-13
808 FLOOR PLATES TO INSPECTION GALLERY 8-14
809 PAINTING OF THE EXISTING STEEL COMPONENTS 8-14
810 LUBRICATING THE STEEL BEARINGS 8-14
811 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8-14
(a) Item: Elastomeric bearings 8-14
(b) Item: Tar paper bearings 8-14
(c) Item: Strip seal expansion joints 8-15

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(d) Item: Filler-type expansion joints 8-15


(e) Item: Bridge railings 8-16
(f) Drainage spouts, 8-16
(g) weep holes
(h) Waterproofing of deck under AC wearing coat 8-16
(i) High strength anchor bolts 8-16
(j) Chequered floor plates 8-17
(k) Painting steel components 8-17
(l) Lubricating steel bearings 8-17

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

801 BRIDGE BEARINGS


(a) General
Bearings shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M251 and shall be
designed in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges. Bearings shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings or as described in this Specification. They shall
adequately provide for the thermal expansion and contraction, rotation, tilting,
creep and shrinkage of the structural elements that they support.
Bearing surfaces of bearings shall be kept free from contamination and after the
deck has been completed, each bearing and the area around it shall be left
clean.
All bearings shall be indelibly marked with their appropriate type and
identification numbers that shall be visible after installation.
Bearings shall not be dispatched to the Site until they have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification and the certified results of
such tests approved by the Engineer.
(b) Materials
(i) Properties of the elastomer
The raw elastomer shall be vergin Neoprene (polychloroprene). The
elastomer compound shall be classified as being of low temperature
grade 0, 2, 3, 4, or 5. The grades are defined by the testing requirements
in Table 8-1. A higher grade of elastomer may be substituted for a lower
one.
The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum requirements of Tables
8-1 except as otherwise specified by the Engineer. Test requirements
may be interpolated for intermediate hardnesses. If the material is
specified by its shear modulus, its measured shear modulus shall lie
within 14 percent of the specified value. A consistent value of hardness
shall also be supplied for the purpose of defining limits for the tests in
Table 8-1. If the hardness is specified, the measured shear modulus must
fall within the range of Table 8-2. When test specimens are cut from the
finished product, the physical properties shall be permitted to vary from
those specified in Table 8-1 by 10 percent. All material tests shall be
carried out at 23° C ± 2° C unless otherwise noted. Shear modulus tests
shall be carried out using the apparatus and procedure described in
annex A of ASTM D4014.
(ii) Steel laminates
Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild
steel conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 570M or equivalent,
unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. Holes in plates for
manufacturing purposes will not be permitted unless they have been
accounted for in the design, as shown on the plans.
(iii) Bond
The vulcanized bond between fabric and reinforcement shall have a
minimum peel strength of 5.2 KN/m. Steel laminated bearings shall
develop a minimum peel strength of 6.9 KN/m. Peel strength tests shall be
performed by ASTM D429 Method B.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 8-1: Neoprene Quality Control Test. Note in the Table that ASTM D1043 Refers to
“Modulus of Rigidity,” while ASTM D4014 Refers to “Shear Modulus Stiffness.” The
Word “Stiffness” is used here to Cover Both Terms
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
ASTM D Hardness (Shore A Durometer) 50 + 5 60 + 5 70 + 5
2240
D 412 Tensile Strength, Minimum Mpa 15.50 15.50 15.50
Ultimate Elongation, Minimum 400 350 300
%
HEAT RESISTANCE
ASTM D 573 Change in Durometer 15 15 15
70 Hours at Hardness,
100oC Maximum Points
Change in Tensile Strength, -15 -15 -15
Maximum %
Change in Ultimate Elongation, -40 -40 -40
Maximum %
COMPRESSION SET
ASTM D 395 22 Hours @ 100oC, Maximum 35 35 35
Method B %
OZONE 100pphm ozone in air by
ASTM D volume, 20% strain 38oC + 1oC
1149 100 Hours mounting procedure No Cracks No Cracks No Cracks
D518, Procedure A
LOW-TEMPERATURE BRITTLENESS
ASTM D 746 Grades 0 & 2 – No Test
Procedure B Required
Grade 3 Brittleness at -40oC No Failure No Failure No Failure
o
Grade 4 Brittleness at -48 C No Failure No Failure No Failure
o
Grade 5 Brittleness at -57 C No Failure No Failure No Failure
INSTANTANEOUS THERMAL STIFFENING
D1043 Grade 0 & 2 – Tested @ -31oC Stiffness at test temperature shall not exceed 4
times the stiffness measured at 23oC
Grade 3 – Tested @ -40oC Stiffness at test temperature shall not exceed 4
Grade 4 – Tested @ o
-45 C times the stiffness measured at 23oC

Grade 5 – Tested @ -54oC


LOW-TEMPERATURE CRYSTALLIZATION
Quad Shear Grade 0 – No test required Stiffness at test time and temperature shall not
Test as Grade 2 – 7 days @ o
-18 C exceed 4 times the stiffness measured at 23oC
Described with no time delay. The stiffness shall be
Grade 3 – 14 days @ -26oC measured with a quad shear test rig in an
Grade 4-21 days @ -37oC enclosed freezer unit. The test specimens shall
be taken from a randomly selected bearing. A +
Grade 5 – 28 days @ -37oC 25% strain cycle shall be used, and a complete
cycle of strain shall be applied with a period of
100 seconds. The first ¾ cycle of strain shall
be discarded and the stiffness shall be
determined by the slope of the force deflection
curve for the next ½ cycle of loading.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 8-2: Elastomer Properties at Different Hardnesses

Hardness (Shore ‘A’) 50 60 70


Shear Modulus (G) (psi) 95-130 130-200 200-300
At 73 degrees F (Mpa) 0.68-0.93 0.93-1.43 1.43-2.14
Creep deflection at 25 years 25% 35% 45%
Instantaneous deflection
k 0.75 0.6 0.55

(iv) Fabrication
Bearings with steel laminates shall be cast as a single unit in a mould and
vulcanised under heat and pressure.
Casting of elements in separate units and subsequent bonding shall not
be permitted, nor shall cutting from large size cast be permitted.
Bearings of similar size to be used in particular bridge shall be produced
by identical process and in one lot.
The moulds used shall have standard surface finish adequate to produce
bearings free from any surface blemishes.
Steel plates for laminates shall be sand blasted, clean of all mill scales
and shall be free from all contaminants prior to bonding by vulcanisation.
Rusted plates with pitting shall not be used. All edges of plates shall be
rounded.
Spacers used in mould to ensure cover and location of laminates shall be
of maximum size and number practicable. Any hole at surface or in edge
cover shall be filled in subsequently.
Care shall be taken to ensure uniform vulcanising conditions and
homogeneity of elastomer through the surface and body of bearings.
Flash tolerance, finish, and appearance shall meet the requirements of
the latest edition of the Rubber Handbook, published by the Rubber
Manufacturers Association, Inc., RMA F3 and T.063 for molded bearings
and RMA F2 for extruded bearings.
The bearings shall be fabricated to the design dimensions and this
Specification within the tolerances specified in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3: Tolerances
Items Tolerances
1 Overall vertical dimensions:
Design thickness 32mm or less -0, +3
Design thickness over 32mm -0, +6
2 Overall horizontal dimensions:
For measurements 914mm and less -0, +6
For measurements over 914mm -0, +12
3 Thickness of individual layers of elastomer + 20 percent of design value
(laminated bearings only) at any point within but no more than +3mm
the bearings
4 Variation from a plane parallel to the
theoretical surface: (as determined by
measurement at the edge of the bearings):

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Items Tolerances
Top Slope relative to the bottom
of no more than 0.005
radians
Slides 6
5 Position of exposed connection members +3
6 Edge cover of embedded laminates of -0, +3
connection members
7 Size of holes, slots, or inserts +3
8 Position of holes, slots, or inserts +3
(v) Acceptance specification
The manufacturer shall have all the test facilities required for the process
and acceptance control tests installed at his plant to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer. The test facilities and their operation shall be
open to inspection by the Engineer on demand.
All acceptance and process control tests shall be conducted at the
manufacturer’s plant or at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs arising therefrom,
including, but not limitedto:
x laboratory testing charges,
x provision of samples,
x transportation of samples
x attendance on laboratory personnel.
Acceptance testing shall be commenced with the prior submittal of testing
program by the manufacturer to the Engineer and after obtaining his
approval.
Any acceptance testing delayed beyond 180 days of production shall
require special approval of the Engineer and modified acceptance
specification, if deemed necessary by him.
All acceptance testing shall be conducted by the Inspector with aid of the
personnel having adequate expertise and experience in rubber testing
provided by the manufacturer, working under the supervision of the
Inspector and to his complete satisfaction.
(vi) Quality control certificate
The manufacturer shall certify for each lot of bearing under acceptance:
That the entire process remained in control during the production of the lot
of bearings under acceptance as verified from the quality control
records/charts which shall be open to inspection of Engineer/Inspector on
demand.
A certified copy of results of process control testing done on samples of
elastomer used in the production of the lot shall be appended and shall
include at least the following information:
Composition of compound – raw elastomer and ash content, the grade of
raw elastomer used (including name, source, age on shelf), test results of
hardness, tensile strength, elongation at break, compression set,
accelerated ageing, etc.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(vii) Certification and marking


Bearings shall be transported to bridge site after final acceptance by
Engineer and shall be accompanied by an authenticated copy of the
certificate to that effect.
An information card giving the following details for the bearings, duly
certified by the manufacturer shall also be appended:
x name of manufacturer,
x date of manufacture
x elastomer grade used,
x bearing dimensions,
x production batch no.,
x acceptance lot no.,
x date of testing,
x specific bridge location, if any
x explanation of markings used on the bearing.
All bearings shall have suitable index markings identifying the information.
The markings shall be made in indelible ink or flexible paint and if
practicable should be visible after installation. The top of the bearing and
direction of installation shall be indicated.
(viii) Storage and handling
Each elastomeric bearing shall be clearly labelled or marked. The bearing
shall be wrapped in a cover. They shall be packed in timber crates with
suitable arrangement to prevent movement and to protect corners and
edges.
Care shall be taken to avoid mechanical damage, contamination with oil,
grease and dirt, undue exposure to sunlight and weather to the bearings
during transport and handing prior to and during installation.
(ix) Installation
Bearings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and under the supervision of the manufacturer’s
representative.
Installation of multiple bearings one behind the other on a single line of
support shall be identical dimensions.
Bearings must be placed between true horizontal surfaces (maximum
tolerance 0.2 percent perpendicular to the load) and at true plan position
of their control lines marked on receiving surfaces (maximum tolerance ±3
mm).
Concrete surfaces shall be free from local irregularities (maximum
tolerance ± 1 mm in height).
For cast-in-place concrete construction of superstructure, where bearings
are installed prior to its concreting, the forms around the bearings shall be
soft enough for easy removal. Forms shall also fit the bearings snugly and
prevent any leakage of mortar grout. Any mortar contaminating the
bearings during concreting shall be completely removed before setting.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

For precast concrete superstructure elements, fixing of bearing to them


may be done by application of epoxy resin adhesive to interface, after
specified surface preparation. The specifications for adhesive material,
workmanship and control shall be approved by the Engineer. Care shall
be taken to guard against faulty application and consequent behaviour of
the adhesive layer as a lubricant. The bonding by the adhesive shall be
deemed effective only as a device for installation and shall not be deemed
to secure bearings against displacement for the purpose of design.
(x) Maintenance
The bearing shall be subject to planned maintenance care.
The exposed bearing surface shall be maintained clean and free from
contamination with grease, oil etc.
After installation routine maintenance inspection of all bearings shall be
made till the expiry of the Defects Liability Period to check for any surface
cracking or signs of damage, deterioration or distress.
Damaged bearings shall be replaced immediately. To avoid difference in
stiffness, all adjacent bearings on the same line of support shall also be
replaced.
(c) Tar paper bearing
Where shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall provide tar paper bearings. The product shall consist of preformed sheets
or strips made of clean granulated cork securely bound together by a suitable
asphalt binder and encased between two layers of felt, conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M213.
802 STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINTS
(a) Components
Single Strip seal expansion joints shall have at least 80 mm movement capacity,
and double strip seal shall have minimum 160 mm movement, and they
comprise the following components :
x claw leg profiled edge beams of extruded rolled steel of good weldability
and high notch toughness,
x vulcanized polychloroprene strip seal of high tear strength, a high resistance
to aging and insert to oil, gasoline, and ozone,
x rigid anchor plates welded to the edge beams at staggered intervals, and,
x weldable steel anchor loops to connect the rigid anchor plates to the top
reinforcement of the bridge superstructure.
(b) Materials
Steel for edge beams shall conform to German Standard grade Rst 37-2 or
equivalent approved standard specification. All steel elements shall have an
integral corrosion protection system.
Polychloroprene strip seal shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M297.
Properties of polychloroprene shall conform to Table 18.2.3.1 A and 18.2.3.1 B of
Division II of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
Steel anchor plates and anchor loops shall comply with AASHTO M270.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(c) Fabrication
Rolled steel sections for edge beams shall be supplied in lengths sufficient to
provide for the finished dimensions and profiles shown on the Drawings. Edge
beams shall be cut by means of a miter box saw to fit the finished bridge cross-
section and camber. The profile of the bridge cross-section shall be accurately
marked on workshop benches. After the steel sections are correctly aligned to
that profile they will be clamped securely to the bench, and continuously welded.
Anchor plates shall be flame cut to size and welded to the edge beams at the
intervals shown on the Drawings.
Anchor loops shall be bent to the required shape and welded to the anchor
plates.
The manufacturer shall supply all the appurtenant materials for the installation of
strip seal joints including sealants and waterproofing membranes.
Auxiliary brackets shall be provided to secure the joint assembly during
transportation and storage.
Expansion joint assemblies shall be handled with care and stored off the ground
in storage sheds or containers on wooden pallets.
(d) Installation
The width of the gap shown on the Drawings to allow for movements due to
thermal variations, shrinkage, creep, superstructure deformations and sub-
structure deformations shall be confirmed by the Contractor and conveyed by
him to the manufacturer. The gap dimension shall be preset according to the
temperature at fabrication and the likely temperature at installation.
The dimensions of the recess in the bridge deck required for expansion joint
installation shall be as indicated on the Drawings or modified in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. The recess shall be thoroughly cleaned
and free from any dirt or debris. The exposed reinforcement shall adjusted as
necessary to permit unobstructed lowering of the joint into the recess.
The gap between existing formed concrete surfaces and the formwork for the
concrete in which expansions joints are to be set shall be thoroughly sealed
against the leakage of mortar from freshly placed concrete.
The size of the gap shall be compatible with the mean structure temperature at
the time of installation. This temperature shall be determined in accordance with
a prior arrangement agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer. Should
temperatures vary from the those anticipated for presetting the gap, the
necessary adjustment shall be made prior to placing the concrete.
The joint shall be lowered to its pre-determined position in the prepared recess,
levelled and finally aligned before the anchor loops on one side of the joint are
welded, in accordance with Section 700 of this Specification, to the exposed
reinforcement bars of the structure. Upon completion, the same procedure shall
be followed for the other side of the joint. When the expansion joint is finally held
in position on both sides, the temporary auxiliary brackets shall immediately be
released and removed.
The recess shall then be filled with low shrinkage concrete of the same strength
as that of the contiguous superstructure element and in compliance with Section
700 of this Specification.
During the placing and hardening of concrete under expansion joint components,
relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to which

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

they are being fixed. In particular where strongbacks or templates are used to
locate the two sides or a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both
sides. Screw threads shall be kept clean and free from rust.
Polychloroprene strip seal shall be cut to length by the Contractor and carefully
inserted into the grooves of the steel edge beams without damaging the strip
seal.
After the concrete has sufficiently hardened, sturdy ramps shall be provided and
maintained to protect all expansion joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles shall
cross the joints only by means of such ramps until the Engineer permits their
removal after the carriageway surfacing is placed.
Carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the top of the steel edge
beams. The interface between the surfacing and the steel edge beam shall be a
wedge-shaped seal of approved sealing compound. The external surface of the
exposed steel edge beam shall be thoroughly cleaned before sealing.
(e) Acceptance testing
The acceptance testing of polychloroprene shall be carried out and certified by
an approved laboratory in accordance with the requirements stipulated in Tables
18.2.3.1A and 18.2.3.1B of Division II of AASHTO Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges. The Contractor shall submit test certificates to the Engineer for
verification.
The manufacturer shall provide certificates from laboratories or authorities
approved by the Engineer that confirm compliance with the following criteria:
x the fatigue strength of steel edge beams and anchorages is sufficient to
withstand a minimum of 2 x 106 load change cycles without discernible
damage,
x the joint is water tight under a water pressure of 4 bars,
x the proprietary joint has performed satisfactorily in conditions similar to
those that may be anticipated to prevail at the Site of the Works.
803 FILLER-TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS
This type of joint shall be constructed from the following materials:
x profiled copper strip of minimum thickness 2 mm,
x 20 mm thick compressible bitumen-impregnated fibre board or other approve
expansion joint filler,
x 20 mm thick approved pre-moulded joint filler, and,
x approved joint sealing compound.
Pre-molded joint fillers shall conform to one of the following specifications:
(a) AASHTO M33 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete,
(b) AASHTO M153 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction,
(c) AASHTO M213 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction.
Compressible bitumen-impregnated fibre board or other approve expansion joint filler
shall be cut to shape from full size sheets of material. The use of small off-cuts to fill
the joint shall not be allowed.
Expansion joint materials shall be handled with care by the Contractor and stored off

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

the ground in storage sheds or containers to prevent damage.


Joint gaps shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Surfaces
of joint gaps shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose materials, dirt and
debris, then washed or jetted out.
No joint shall be sealed without inspection and prior approval by the Engineer.
Pre-moulded expansion joint filler shall only be positioned immediately prior to the
placing of the contiguous material. If opposite surfaces of the same joint are to be
placed at different times, joint filler shall not be positioned until the material forming
the second face is about to be placed.
Sealants and joint primers shall be applied in accordance with their manufacturer's
recommendations.
A 100 mm wide by 10 mm deep recess shall be formed in the asphaltic concrete
wearing course above the centerline of filler-type expansion joints. This recess shall
be filled with a compacted coarse sand and bitumen mix containing 6 % bitumen.
All traces of joint materials spilt or splashed on to finished bridge surfaces shall be
removed and the surfaces made good to the Engineer's approval.
804 BRIDGE RAILINGS
(a) General
Bridge railings shall include that part of the structure erected on and above the
footpath for the protection of pedestrians and traffic.
Railings shall not be constructed until falsework has been removed and the
element is self-supporting. Concrete shall be comply with the requirements of
Section 800 of this Specification.
Railings shall be constructed in accordance with the details and dimensions
shown on the Drawings and erected true to line and level. In particular, the
Contractor shall ensure that expansion joints in the railings are constructed
correctly. Posts shall be vertical within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 metre. Posts
shall be set into pockets with non-shrinking mortar.
Railing materials shall be handled and stored above ground on platforms or
skids such that they are kept free form damage or contamination by grease or
dirt.
(i) Cast-in-place concrete railings
Cast-in-place concrete handrails shall be constructed from concrete
Grade M 30 using maximum nominal size of aggregate in the mix 10 mm
in accordance with the requirements of Section 700 of this Specification.
Forms for cast-in-place concrete railings shall either be of single width
boards or shall be lined with suitable material approved by the Engineer.
Form joints shall not be situated on plane surfaces.
All mouldings, panel work, bevels and chamfers shall be constructed in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. All corners in the
finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from
cracks, spalls or other defects. Posts shall be cast in a single pour.
(ii) Pre-cast concrete handrails
Pre-cast concrete handrails shall be constructed from concrete Grade M
30 using maximum nominal size of aggregates in the mix 10 mm in
accordance with the requirements of Section 700 of this Specification.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

805 (a) DRAINAGE SPOUTS


This work consists of providing and installing spouts and pipes for bridge deck
drainage.
Drainage spouts shall be fabricated from mild steel, complying with AASHTO
M160, to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. The drainage assembly shall
be seam welded for water tightness and then hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication to produce a minimum thickness of galvanized coating of 75 Pm in
accordance with AASHTO M111. Drainage spouts shall be provided at the
intervals shown on the Drawings.
Before placing concrete, the galvanized assemblies shall be given two coats of
bituminous paint and secured firmly in the positions shown on the Drawings.
The gap between drainage spouts and their corresponding cut-outs in the deck
slab formwork shall be thoroughly sealed against the leakage of mortar from
freshly placed concrete.
After the 75-80 mm thick asphalt concrete has been laid, any gaps in the
vicinity of drainage spouts shall be thoroughly sealed with an approved material
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. After the asphaltic concrete wearing course
has been laid, the entire interface between the drainage spout assembly and
the wearing course shall be thoroughly sealed with an approved material to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The discharge from drainage spouts shall be kept away from the deck structure
by providing extensions to the spouts as necessary.
(b) WEEP HOLES
PVC weep holes 100mm diameter shall be provided in abutments and return
walls between lowest water level and highest flood level at the rate of 1.0m
from center to center (staggered horizontally and vertically) slanting download
to river face. The filter material in 600mm thickness shall be provided behind
return wall and abutment in its full height and length.
806 DECK WATERPROOFING UNDER AC WEARING COAT
The Contractor shall carry out the waterproofing layer in accordance with the working
drawing and by the instruction of the Engineer.
The water proofing material shall be liquid- sprayed type made of either acrylic or
polyurethane. Three operations shall be involved (a) application of primer, (b)
application of membrane, (c) application of tack or bonding coat. Approved primer
shall be applied for sealing the substrate (existing concrete wearing coat) and
enhance the bonding of the membrane to the substrate. Approved type Membrane of
acrylics or polyurethane categories shall be sprayed in two coats. Approved tack or
bonding coat over the membrane shall be applied to enhance the bonding of the
proposed overlay of bituminous mix. Relevant portion of AASHTO M 200 shall apply.
The locations with deteriorated concrete shall be cleaned to the depth of
deterioration and filled with fresh concrete of approved grade and cured as directed
by the engineer and any coating shall be applied only after the concrete is at least 14
days old.
807 ANCHOR STEEL BOLTS

The anchor steel bolts shall conform to AASHTO 314. Nuts and washers shall
conform to AASHTO 291, and AASHTO 294 respectively. The bolts shall be provided
to anchor the steel bearings base plates to the concrete pedestal.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

808 FLOOR PLATES TO INSPECTION GALLERY


Approved quality anti slip 6 mm thick checkered steel plates (AASHTO M160, M170)
shall be provided and fixed using bolts and nuts to the existing steel beams of the
inspection gallery. The floor plates hall be duly primed and painted and the rate shall
be inclusive for supplying, fixing with all accessories including necessary anti-
corrosive primes and paints.
809 PAINTING OF THE EXISTING STEEL COMPONENTS
The existing steel girders, bracings including all the components of inspection gallery
shall be cleaned by sandblasting or suitable method approved by the engineer. On
approval and acceptance of the cleaned surfaces, two coats of drying type oil primer
(of approved quality) shall be applied. One undercoat micaceous iron oxide
pigmented drying oil type paint (approved quality) shall be applied followed by one
finishing coat. All corners and crevices shall be duly cleaned and painted. The total
dry film thickness should be from 165 – 190 μm.
810 LUBRICATING THE STEEL BEARINGS
The lubricant shall be of approved branded type for such work, and shall consist of
graphite with metallic lubricants and lubricating binder and shall be approved by the
Engineer before application. The lubricant shall be compressed into the identified
recesses under hydraulic pressure of 85 Mpa to from a dense non-plastic inserts.
The lubricant shall project outside, at least 0.25 mm beyond the face of the lubricated
recesses. The working temperature shall be as specified by the manufacturer /
supplier and the Engineer.
811 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) Item: Elastomeric bearings
Unit: no. of each size
The rate for elastomeric bearings shall include for the costs of:
x design, drawings and submissions to the Engineer,
x material
x fabrication
x provision, transportation, handling, and storage,
x all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the installation of
bearings,
x testing,
x laboratory testing charges,
x attendance on laboratory personnel,
x attendance of the manufacturer,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 801 of this Specification and
Clause 18.2 of Division II of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges.
(b) Item: Tar paper bearings
Unit: m2
The unit for tar paper bearings shall be the square meter. The area of tar
bearing shall be calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The rate for tar paper bearings shall include for the costs of:
x materials,
x transportation, handling and storage,
x testing,
x all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the installation of tar
paper bearings,
x any protective measures required, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 801 of this Specification.
(c) Item: Strip seal expansion joints
Unit: m
The unit for strip seal expansion joints shall be the metre measured as the
plan length between the inside faces of handrail columns indicated on the
Drawings.
The rate for strip seal expansion joints shall include for the costs of:
x materials,
x transportation, handling and storage,
x all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the installation and
sealing of the joint,
x testing,
x forming the joint recess including formwork provision,
x installation of proprietary bridge expansion joints in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations,
x fixing anchor plates by welding anchor reinforcement loops to the exposed
deck reinforcement in the joint recess,
x placing, compacting and curing concrete around the expansion joint,
x sealing the interface between the asphaltic concrete wearing course and
the steel edge beams,
x any protective measures required, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 802 of this Specification.
(d) Item: Filler-type expansion joints
Unit: m
The unit of measurement for filler-type expansion joints shall be the metre.
The length shall be calculated from the Drawings.
The rate for expansion joints shall include for the costs of:
x materials including prefabricated copper strip,
x transportation, handling and storage,
x all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the installation and
sealing of the joint,
x forming the joint including formwork provision,
x any sealants, pre-moulded joint filler or bitumen-impregnated

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

compressible fibre board required,


x placing, compacting and curing concrete around the joint,
x forming a recess in the asphaltic concrete wearing course and filling it with
a sand bitumen mixture, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 803 of this Specification.
(e) Item: Bridge railings
Unit: cum
The unit for reinforced concrete bridge railings shall be the linear metre.
Bridge railings shall be measured as the sum of the plan length of panels
indicated on the Drawings.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for the provision of pre-
moulded filler or expansion joints for concrete bridge railings.
The rate for reinforced concrete bridge railings shall include for the costs of:
x materials,
x transportation, handling and storage,
x formwork provision,
x reinforcement,
x all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the construction of the
railings,
x any sealants, pre-moulded joint filler or expansion joints required, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 804 of this Specification.
(f) Drainage spouts
Unit: no
(g) Weep holes
This item is incidental to abutment and return wall work. No additional
payment shall be made on this account.
(h) Item: Waterproofing of deck under AC wearing coat
Unit: m2
Waterproofing layer shall be measured from the working drawing by square
meter and shall be inclusive of supplying and applying primer, membrane and
tack/ bond coat as specified in section 806.
The rate for this work shall be inclusive of
x providing and applying primer and tack coat
x cleaning the old concrete surface before applying the primer by
sandblasting or suitable method approved by the engineer
x the locations with deteriorated concrete shall be cleaned to the depth of
deterioration and filled with fresh concrete of approved grade and
cured as directed by the engineer
(i) Item: High strength anchor bolts
Unit: No.
The rate shall include supply, fixing in position with priming and accessories

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

of nuts and washers.


(j) Item: Chequered floor plates
Unit: Sqm
The rate shall be inclusive of supply, fixing with all accessories nuts and bolts
and priming and painting.
(k) Item: Painting steel components
Unit: tone
The rate shall be inclusive of supplying and applying (by spray / brush) two
priming coat followed by two painting coats. The cleaning is incidental to the
rate. All formwork /scaffolding arrangements for access to the components for
painting with tools and labour shall be inclusive in the rate. The normal
weight of the section painted shall be computed from the standard weight
tables. Weight of nuts, bolts shall not be computed separately, their painting
shall be incidental to the rate. Where sections are not in the standard weight
table, unit weight of 7.84 x 103 kg /cum shall be taken for all calculations.
(l) Item: Lubricating steel bearings
Unit: no.
The rate shall include supply and compressing into the recess under specified
hydraulic pressure. All equipments, labour, used for this work shall be
inclusive in the rate. The expenses on the arrangements for inspection
access to the bearings shall be incidental to the rate.

Section 800. Miscellaneous bridge works 8-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 900 - ROAD FURNITURE AND MARKING

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 900 - ROAD FURNITURE

901 MARKER POSTS 9-4


(a) Edge marker posts 9-4
(b) Retroreflective edge marker posts 9-4
(c) Kilometer marker posts 9-4
(d) Culvert markings 9-4
902 FENCING 9-4
903 PERMANENT ROAD SIGNS 9-4
904 GUARDRAILS 9-6
(a) Materials 9-6
(i) Beams 9-6
(ii) Posts 9-6
(iii) Spacer blocks 9-6
(iv) Erection of guardrail 9-6
(v) Tolerances 9-7
905 STREET LIGHT 9-7
906 SNOW AND SAND PROTECTION DIKE 9-7
907 CONCRETE CURB 9-7
(a) Erection of curbs 9-7
(b) Tolerances 9-7
908 ROAD MARKINGS 9-7
(a) Equipment 9-7
(b) Surface preparation 9-8
(c) Setting-out of road traffic markings 9-8
(d) Environmental limitations 9-8
(e) Execution of road traffic markings 9-8
(f) Application of glass beads 9-9
(g) Tolerances 9-9
(h) Protection from traffic 9-9
(i) Faulty workmanship or materials 9-10
909 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9-10
(a) Item: Marker and Kilometer posts 9-10
(b) Item: Fencing 9-10
(c) Permanent road signs 9-11
(i) Item: Warning signs 9-11
(ii) Item: Regulatory, prohibitory, and mandatory signs 9-11
(iii) Item: Standard informative signs 9-11

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(iv) Item: Direction signs 9-11


(d) Item: Guardrail 9-11
(e) Item: Street light 9-12
(f) Item: Snow and sand protection dike 9-12
(g) Item: Concrete curbs 9-12

(h) Item: Reflective hot applied thermoplastic road marking 9-13


material
(i) White lines, unbroken, 150 mm wide 9-13
(ii) While lines, broken, 150 mm wide 9-13
(iii) White lines, unbroken, 100 mm wide 9-13
(iv) White lettering, figures and symbols 9-13

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

901 MARKER POSTS


(a) Edge marker posts
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide and erect edge marker posts with such dimensions and at such intervals
as specified in the standards being currently followed in Mongolia and as shown
in the Drawings. The edge marker posts shall be erected at the outer edge of the
shoulder with their tops at a constant height above the edge of the carriageway.
Edge marker posts shall be erected and painted with two coats of an approved
white and red epoxy paint as shown in the Drawings and shall be kept clean until
the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate. Damaged edge marker posts shall be
replaced with new posts of same type.
(b) Retroreflective edge marker posts
Retroreflective edge marker posts shall be installed at the ends of safety islands
at intersections with local and branch roads in compliance with the Drawings.
(c) Kilometre marker posts
The Contractor shall provide and erect kilometre marker posts in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings. The kilometre marker posts shall be
erected at the offset distance from the road centreline indicated on the Drawings
or instructed by the Engineer.
Kilometre marker posts shall be erected and painted with two coats of an
approved white epoxy paint. The distances along the road shall be indicated by
means of an approved retroreflective plate fixed to the front face as instructed by
the Engineer. Kilometer marker posts and their retroreflective plates shall be
kept clean until the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate. Damaged kilometre
marker posts and their plates shall be replaced with new ones of same type.
(d) Culvert markings
The Contractor shall mark the chainage, serial number, number of channels and
dimension of the culvert by red permanent paints on the front face of outlet
headwall 150 mm below the top of headwall near to its vertical axis. Culvert
markings shall be kept clear until the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for culvert marking.
902 FENCING
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
provide and erect fences including excavation and backfilling and complying with the
details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Fencing shall comprise 110 mm diameter fencing posts at 5 m centres, 150 mm
diameter straining posts at a maximum of 200 m centres and at ends and change of
direction points, intermediate droppers at 2.5 m from each post and five strands of
12½ SWG galvanized steel four point round barbed wire complying with the
requirements of AASHTO M280 and all necessary nails, clips, binding wire and other
materials.
All timber for fencing shall be well seasoned hardwood to the approval of the
Engineer. Prior to delivery of materials to Site, the Contractor shall submit samples to
the Engineer for testing to verify that the correct treatment has been applied.
903 PERMANENT ROAD SIGNS
All permanent road signs shall comply with the requirements of MNS 4597:2003
unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer. The posts shall be of steel duly painted
as per specifications. Sheets of sign board shall be of smooth, hard and corrosion

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

resistant aluminum alloy of thickness not less than 2.5 mm.

The Contractor shall obtain road signs from a manufacturer approved by the
Engineer and before placing any order for the manufacturer of road signs he shall
submit to the Engineer two copies of the following information:
(a) name of the firm from which the road signs are to be obtained, together with the
place of manufacture or fabrication,
(b) a description of the items to be supplied,
(c) the manufacturer's specification together with a description of quality, grade,
weight and strength,
(d) manufacturer's test certificates, or recent test results carried out on similar items
by an authority or laboratory recognised by the Engineer,
(e) a sample sign, post and fittings that shall be stored on Site for the Engineer.

The manufacturer or supplier shall submit to the Engineer, via the Contractor, the
following information:
x instructions in respect of the assembly and erection of the signs,
x details of any limitation in location or usage,
x instructions on the operation and maintenance of the signs.
The manufacturer shall provide a warranty for his product valid for a 1 year period in
such a form as is acceptable to the Engineer.
The permanent road signs shall be retroreflective. The retroreflective sheeting shall
comply with the requirements of Section 1100 of this Specification, and shall be
applied by mechanical vacuum-heat application method to the approval of the
Engineer. The sign plate shall be covered by clear lacquer of a make recommended
by the manufacturer of the retroreflective material.
Permanent road signs shall comply with the requirements of BS 873 Parts 2, 6 and 7
in respect of quality including the pre-treatment, preparation and protective coatings
for the frame, posts and fittings. Unless directed otherwise posts, frames, fittings and
the backs of signs shall be painted with a finish coat of grey. Bolts and nuts shall be
spot-welded after erection to prevent theft, and a grey epoxy paint shall be applied to
all areas so treated.
Finished sign plate (with sign face attached) shall be clearly and durably marked on
the back, with the following information in English and Mongolian:
x the number of the Standard Specification to which they have been
manufactured,
x the name, trade mark or other means of identification of the manufacturer or
supplier,
x the classification of any retroreflective material used in the manufacture of the
sign face,
x the month and year of assembly.
These markings shall be in characters legible at a normal reading distance and shall
be sufficiently durable to last the expected life of the sign plate to which it is applied.
The Contractor shall excavate in any material for the foundation of the road signs,
provide and place concrete Grade M 20, embedded all round and under the posts
and backfill the remaining excavation all as shown on the Drawings or directed by the

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Engineer. Foundations for signs of areas over 5 m2 shall not be covered up until they
have been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall cut back trees and vegetation to permit visibility and shall not
permit material to be dumped so as to obscure signs.
All signs shall be maintained and cleaned as necessary by the Contractor such that
they are kept in a clear and legible condition until a Defects Liability Certificate is
issued by the Engineer.
904 GUARDRAILS
The contractor shall provide guardrails in accordance with the dimensions and
erection details shown on the Drawings.
Guardrails shall be constructed at the locations indicated on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.
(a) Materials
(i) Beams
Beams for guardrails shall be Class A with a Type 1 finish in accordance
with AASHTO M180 and shall be procured from a manufacturer approved
by the Engineer.
(ii) Posts
Steel posts of the material used in beams of guardrails shall be provided
as per details in the drawing conforming to AASHTO M180.
(iii) Spacer blocks
Spacer blocks shall be made as shown in the drawing and the material
shall conform to AASHTO M180.
(iv) Erection of guardrail
Guardrail shall be erected in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published instructions and the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Approximate locations for guardrail are shown on the Drawings but
precise details will be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer as
construction proceeds. Generally, in those sections where guardrail is
instructed, earthworks and shoulders shall be widened as directed by the
Engineer to maintain the full width of shoulder from the edge of
carriageway to the inside face of the guardrail.
The Contractor shall excavate for the posts in any material and provide
the guardrail with all posts, blocks, nuts, washers and shall repair
galvanizing, backfill around the posts and remove surplus material to
spoil.
When erection is complete and the section has been approved by the
Engineer the nuts shall be spot welded to the guardrail or to the bolt to
stop their removal.
Galvanized coating damaged by spot welding or cutting shall be
renovated either by the use of low melting point zinc alloy repair rods or
powders made specifically for this purpose, or by the use of at least two
coats of good quality inorganic zinc-rich primer complying with the
requirements of AASHTO M300.

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(v) Tolerances
Guardrail shall be erected at the instructed or detailed offsets and levels
from the pavement centreline and shall be correct within a tolerance of +
20 mm in line and level. Adjacent plates shall not vary in line or grade by
more than 5 mm measured from a line extended from one plate to the end
of the adjacent plate.
905 STREET LIGHT
The Contractor shall provide and install street light in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings. Prior to installation of street light, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer, for approval, detailed proposals including structural details,
height, dimensions spacings, location of the installations, the type and power of the
lanterns, foundations, wiring, fitting, fixing etc. all. The illumination system should be
free from glare.
906 SNOW AND SAND PROTECTION DIKE
The Contractor shall erect snow and sand protection dikes at locations in accordance
with details shown on the Drawings.
Materials to be used and method statement for construction of the dike shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
907 CONCRETE CURBS
(a) Erection of curbs
Concrete curbs shall be constructed in the vicinity of junctions and where
instructed by the Engineer in accordance with the Drawings. Density of bedding
material shall not be lass than 98% MDD. The curbs shall be laid on a concrete
bed and secured by concrete mixture from outer side. The grade of concrete
shall be 15/20. After the securing concrete has gained full required strength the
curb shall be backfilled and compacted to the density acceptable by the
Engineer.
(b) Tolerances
The gap between the curbs shall not exceed r 2 mm than specified in the
Drawings. Inside vertical and upper horizontal surface levels of two adjoining
curbs shall not differ by more than 1 mm.
908 ROAD MARKINGS
All road markings shall comply with the requirements of MNS 4759:2003 unless
instructed otherwise by the Engineer. The dimensions and configurations of road
traffic markings shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The locations of each type of road marking shall be instructed by the Engineer. The
colour for road marking shall be bright white and in some places yellow.
Reflectorized thermoplastic pavement striping material shall comply with the
requirements of AASHTO M249.
Glass beads used in traffic paints shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO
M247.
(a) Equipment
Equipment shall comprise :
x mechanical broom for cleaning the road surface,
x mechanized road marking apparatus with integral mechanized glass bead

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

sprayer.
Road marking and the surface application of glass beads shall only be carried out by
mechanical means.
Road marking machines shall have the capability of marking at a uniform rate of
application and thickness. They shall have the capability to mark lines of a uniform
width within the tolerances specified with sharp edges and without running,
feathering or splashing.
Road marking machines shall have the capability of being adjusted to mark lines of
different widths and shall have a minimum operating velocity of 5 km/h.
Hot thermoplastic material shall be mechanically extruded to produce a line thickness
of between 3.2 and 4.8 mm. The Contractor shall conduct Site trials to demonstrate
the satisfactory performance of his equipment to the Engineer.
Letters, figures and symbols shall be marked on the road by means of stencils.
(b) Surface preparation
Traffic markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces only after sufficient time has
elapsed to allow for the evaporation of volatile substances from the bitumen.
The surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of watering,
brooming or compressed air as required. Before road marking commences, the road
surface shall be clean and dry and completely free from soil, dust, grease, petroleum
products or other deleterious material.
(c) Setting –out of road traffic markings
The letters, figures, symbols and lines shall be set out by means of paint spots, 10
mm in diameter, of the same colour as that of the intended traffic marking. Paint
spots shall be at such frequencies as will ensure that road traffic markings are
accomplished accurately and in no case at an interval greater than 1.5 m.
The positions of the start and finish of different line types shall be indicated on the
road. The positions and outlines of other markings shall be marked in chalk on the
road surface. The setting out of road traffic markings shall be subject to inspection
and approval by the Engineer prior to the commencement of road marking activities.
(d) Environmental limitations
The Contractor shall suspend road marking activities if:
x the road surface is damp,
x the relative humidity exceeds 80%,
x ambient temperatures are less than 10 °C,
x wind velocities are such that, in the opinion of the Engineer, road marking
activities are likely to be adversely affected.
(e) Execution of road traffic markings
Thermoplastic material shall be applied as letters, figures, symbols, broken and
unbroken lines as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
Thermoplastic material shall be applied to the molten state by mechanical means
with surface application of glass bead in a single layer. Before road marking
machines are used to mark the Permanent Works, the Contractor shall carry out Site
trials to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, on a suitable site which does
not form part of the Permanent Works, that such machines are capable of performing
in compliance with this Specification. If any adjustments should be required, the

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Contractor shall carry out such further Site trials and adjustments as shall prove
necessary until machines are correctly adjusted and approved Site trials have been
conducted.
After Site trials have been conducted, only approved machines, operated by
personnel experienced in their use shall be utilized to mark the Permanent Works.
Rates of application of road marking materials shall be checked and adjusted if
necessary on a daily basis.
Thermoplastic material shall be stored and prepared in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
The rate of application of road marking paint shall be sufficient to give continuous
coverage and a minimum thickness of 3.2 mm over the whole area to be painted.
This rate of application will vary according to the surface texture of the road and shall
be determined by the Engineer during Site trials.
(f) Application of glass beads
The Contractor shall apply glass beads to road markings by means of spraying
device, forming an integral part of the road marking machine, immediately after the
application of the road marking material and in one continuous operation. Machines
that apply beads by means of gravity only shall not be used.
The rate of application of glass beads to thermoplastic material shall be 0.35 kg/m2 or
such other rate as may be instructed by the Engineer.
(g) Tolerances
Road traffic markings shall be performed to an accuracy within the following
tolerances
- Width
The width of lines and other markings shall not deviate from the specified width
by more than 5%.
- Position
The position of letters, figures, symbols or lines shall not deviate from that
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer by more than 20 mm in
any direction.
- Alignment
The alignment of any edge of a line parallel to the road centreline shall not
deviate from that shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer by more
than 10 mm in 15 m.
- Broken lines
The length of segments of any broken line parallel to the road centreline shall
not deviate from that shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer by
more than 150 mm.
- Lines on horizontal curves
Both broken and unbroken lines on horizontal curves shall not be marked as
chords but shall follow the correct arc not deviating from it by more than 20 mm.
(h) Protection from traffic
After the application of road marking materials, road traffic markings shall be
protected against damage by traffic until reflective thermoplastic material has
sufficiently hardened. The Contractor shall provide, erect and remove all such

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

warning signs, barriers, cones, boards or other protective measures as may be


required.
(i) Faulty workmanship or materials
Rejected road traffic markings and any marking material that has been deposited on
the road surface, structures, signs or other surfaces shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own expense and in such a way that they will not be revealed in the
future.

909 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


(a) Item : Marker and Kilometer posts
Unit : no. of each type
Marker posts shall be measured by the number of each type ordered to be
constructed.
The rate for marker posts shall include for the costs of:
x all labour and materials,
x setting out,
x excavation in any material for certain depth,
x providing, storing and transporting marker and kilometer posts and their
appurtenances as necessary,
x painting as required,
x providing, placing, compacting and curing concrete Grade M 20
marker post foundations,
x backfill the remaining excavation including compaction,
x disposing of surplus excavated material in an approved spoil area, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 901 of this Specification.
(b) Item : Fencing
Unit : m
The unit for fencing shall be the metre. Fencing shall be measured by the
length instructed by the Engineer to be permanently erected or the constructed
length which ever is the shorter. No payment shall be made for any temporary
fencing erected by the Contractor pursuant to temporary Works or his
obligations in respect of Section 100, Section 200 or Section 300 of this
Specification.
The rate for fencing shall include for the costs of:
x providing all labour, materials and fittings,
x fabrication, transportation and storage,
x excavation in any material to any depth,
x providing, placing and curing concrete Grade M 20 in foundations where
specified,
x backfill the remaining excavation including compaction,
x disposal of surplus excavated material in an approved spoil area, and,

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x complying with the requirements of Clause 902 of this Specification.


(c) Permanent road signs
The rates for permanent road signs shall include for the costs of:
x providing all labour and materials including posts and fittings,
x fabrication, transportation and storage,
x excavation in any material to any depth,
x erection installation and provision of temporary supports,
x providing, placing, and curing concrete Grade M 20,
x backfill the remaining excavation including compaction,
x disposal of surplus excavated material in an approved spoil area,
x complying with the requirements of Section 1100 of this Specification, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 903 of this Specification.
(i) Item : Warning signs
Unit : no.
Warning signs shall be measured by the number of each size
instructed to be erected by the Engineer.
(ii) Item : Regulatory, prohibitory, and mandatory signs
Unit : no.
Regulatory, prohibitory, and mandatory signs shall be measured by
the number of each size instructed to be erected by the Engineer.
(iii) Item : Standard informative signs
Unit : no.
Standard informative signs shall be measured by the number of each
size instructed to be erected by the Engineer.
(iv) Item : Direction signs
Unit : m2
Direction signs shall be measured by the area of each sign shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
(d) Item: Guardrail
Unit: m
The unit of measurement for Guardrail shall be the metre. Payment shall be
made for the length instructed to be erected or the constructed length
whichever is the shorter.
The rate for guardrail shall include for the costs of:
x provision and transportation of all materials, including treated posts and
fittings,
x labour,
x excavation in any material to any depth,
x erection, installation and providing temporary supports,

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

x concrete Grade M 20 in foundations where required,


x backfill the remaining excavation including compaction,
x disposal of surplus excavated material in an approved spoil area,
x construction of terminal sections,
x complying with the requirements of Section 100 of this Specification.
x complying with the requirements of Clause 904 of this Specification.
(e) Item: Street light
Unit: no.
Street light shall be measured by the number instructed to be installed by the
Engineer.
The rate for street light shall include for the cost of:
x providing all labour and materials including posts and fittings,
x fabrication, transportation and storage,
x excavation in any material to any depth,
x erection, installation and provision of temporary supports,
x painting,
x providing, placing, compacting and curing concrete Grade M 20, embed all
round and under the posts,
x backfill the remaining excavation including compaction,
x disposal of surplus excavated material in an approved spoil area, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 905 of this Specification.
(f) Item: Snow and sand protection dike
Unit: m
The unit for snow and sand protection dike shall be the meter. Snow fence
shall be measured by the length instructed by the Engineer to be permanently
erected or the constructed length whichever is the shorter. No payment shall
be made for any temporary snow fence erected by the Contractor pursuant to
temporary works.
The rate for snow and sand protection dike shall include for the costs of:
x excavation in any material to certain depth loading and transportation,
x grading, watering, if required, and compacting the material,
x removing debris, if required, topsoil stripping of areas for material
excavation and depositing,
x backfilling and grading the remaining excavation to the satisfaction of the
Engineer,
x full compensation of all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals required to
complete the work, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 906 of this Specification.
(g) Item: Concrete curbs
Unit: m

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Concrete curbs shall be measured by the length instructed by the Engineer.


The unit rate for concrete curbs shall include for the costs of :
x compaction of ground bed
x loading, transporting and concrete curbs and concrete mixture,
x erecting the curbs, filling the gaps,
x placing the concrete mixture to outer side of the curbs and compacting,
x maintaining,
x full compensation of all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals required to
complete the work, and,
x complying with the requirements of Clause 907 of this Specification.
(h) Reflective hot applied thermoplastic road marking material
(i) Item : White lines, unbroken, 150 mm wide
Unit : m
(ii) Item : White lines, broken, 150 mm wide
Unit : m
(iii) Item : White lines, unbroken, 100 mm wide
Unit : m
(iv) Item : White lettering, figures and symbols
Unit : m2
The unit of measurement for marking lines parallel to the road centreline shall
be the kilometre excluding the gaps (if any) of each specified width of line. The
unit of measurement for marking lines across to the road centreline shall be the
metre of each specified width of line. The quantity paid for shall be the
measured length of line marked in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer.
The unit of measurement for lettering, figures and symbols shall be the square
metre The quantity paid for shall be the measured surface area of the lettering,
figures and symbols marked in accordance with the instruction of the Engineer.
The rates for road traffic marking above shall include for the costs of:
x providing, testing, transporting and storing all materials necessary,
x provision of road marking equipment,
x all necessary labour,
x setting out,
x road marking operations and control of traffic,
x variations in the rates of application of materials,
x protection measures,
x complying with the requirements of Section 1100 of this Specification.

Section 900. Road furniture and markings 9-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1000 - DAYWORK

Section 1000.Daywork 10-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1000 - DAYWORK


1001 GENERAL 10-3

1002 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 10-3

(a) Contractor's equipment 10-3

(b) Contractor's labour 10-3


(c) Percentage addition to Sub-Clause 1002 (b) above for the
10-4
Contractor's overheads and profit
(d) Materials 10-4

(e) Percentage addition to Sub-Clause 1002 (d) above for the


10-4
Contractor's overheads and profit

Section 1000.Daywork 10-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1001 GENERAL
In accordance with Sub-Clause 13.6 of the Conditions of Contract the Engineer may
instruct that additional or substituted work be executed on a Daywork basis. The
Contractor shall only be reimbursed on a Daywork basis for the execution of work for
which a prior written instruction pursuant to Sub-Clause 13.6 was issued. The
Contractor shall give 24 hours notice to the Engineer of his intention to carry out any
Daywork.
Provisional items are included in the Daywork Section of the Bills of Quantities to
cover the payment of equipment, labour and materials for work executed in
accordance with the Engineer's instructions on a Daywork basis by the Contractor or
by his Subcontractors.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer not later than 56 days from the date of
receipt of the Engineer's notice to commence the Works pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.1
of the Conditions of Contract a sample pro-forma for keeping Daywork records that
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit Daywork returns on such approved proforma to the
Engineer which shall include applicable details in respect of the prior written
instruction for the Daywork and all equipment and labour hours expended and
materials used on the Daywork within 24 hours of the Daywork being carried out.
1002 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) Contractor's equipment
Payment shall only be made for the time each item of equipment was in fact
working on Daywork. The hours worked by a particular item of equipment shall
be as recorded on the engine hour meter or tachograph or as otherwise agreed
with the Engineer. If an item of equipment should be partially idle whilst being
used on Daywork and its time spent on Daywork is recorded as elapsed time
rather than time as recorded by engine meter or tachograph, reimbursement
shall be made at 50% of the rate entered in the Bills of Quantities.
The rates for equipment shall include for the costs of the following:
(i) supervision, including foremen, team leaders, gangers, chargehands and
the like, and transport of supervisory staff,
(ii) transporting or the travelling of each item of equipment to and from the
place of Daywork,
(iii) operators, drivers, drivers assistants and attendance by mechanics
including overtime,
(iv) electric power, water, fuel, lubricants and other consumables and
equipment,
(v) power cables, delivery or suction pipes and fittings, steam or air hoses
and tackle, and all other appurtenances of whatever nature required for
the safe and efficient operation of the equipment,
(vi) maintenance, spare parts, drill bits and chisel points and all costs of
repairs and sharpening,
(vii) depreciation, licensing, insurance, taxes, overheads, profits, and any
other costs or allowances, and,
(viii) complying with the requirements of Section 100 and Clause 1001 of this
Specification.
(b) Contractor's labour
Payment shall only be made for the time each class of labour is in fact working

Section 1000.Daywork 10-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

on Daywork.
Payment shall only be made for labourers and tradesmen engaged in productive
manual work. The costs of non-productive supervisory staff shall be deemed to
be included in the Contractor's percentage addition.
Labour costs shall be reimbursed on the basis of the hourly wages paid for
labourers and tradesmen at the rates stated in the Contractor's Wages Register.
The Contractor shall submit proof of the wages paid with his Daywork returns.
Daywork shall only be carried out outside normal working hours, as defined in
Clause 108 of this Specification, on the prior written instruction of the Engineer
and reimbursement for overtime at the statutory rate shall only be made if the
Engineer should have given such instruction.
(c) Percentage addition to Sub-Clause 1002 (b) above for the Contractor's
overheads and profit.
A percentage shall be added to the amount certified for Daywork labour to cover
the Contractor's overheads and profit.
In his percentage addition to the hourly wages paid to labourers and tradesmen
the Contractor shall include for the costs of the following:
(i) supervision, including non productive foremen, team leaders, gangers,
chargehands and the like,
(ii) transport of supervisory staff, labour and tradesmen to and from the
place of Daywork,
(iii) any special allowance to such labour in respect of subsistence, bonuses,
feeding, housing, holidays, overhead charges in respect of recruitment,
camp administration, welfare and insurance,
(iv) overtime allowances for Daywork performed within normal working hours,
(v) the supply, transportation to the Site, use, maintenance and renewal of small
tools used on Daywork, such as picks, shovels, barrows, trowels, hand saws,
buckets, trestles, staging, ladders, hammers, chisels, electric drills, disc
grinders and other small power tools and all items of a like nature and
protective clothing,
(vi) all other costs which the Contractor may incur in the employment of
labour including attendance, consumables, overheads, profit and any
other costs or allowances,
(vii) complying with the requirements of Section 100 and Clause 1001 of this
Specification.
(d) Materials
The cost of materials used on Daywork shall be reimbursed at current market
price. The current market price for materials shall be deemed to be the basic
cost of the items, including taxes and less any discount, in Ulaanbaatar. The
Contractor shall submit proof of payment of invoices to verify those costs. The
net weights, volumes and areas as appropriate of those materials embodied in
the Permanent Works shall be verified by the Engineer and certified for
payment. In calculating net quantities no allowance for waste shall be made.
(e) Percentage addition to Sub-Clause 1002 (d) above for the Contractor's
overheads and profit.
A percentage shall be added to the amount certified for Daywork materials to
allow for wastage, transport from Ulaanbaatar to the Site and about the Site,
storage, handling, the Contractor's attendance and all other costs, overheads
and profit.

Section 1000.Daywork 10-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1100 – QUALITY ASSURANCE

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1100 – QUALITY ASSURANCE

1101 SCOPE OF SECTION 11-4


1102 TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR 11-4
1103 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS OF MATERIALS 11-4
1104 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11-5
(a) Standard Specifications and Methods of Testing 11-5
(b) Sieves 11-5
1105 SOILS AND GRAVELS 11-5
(a) Sampling and preparation of samples 11-5
(b) Standard methods of testing 11-5
1106 STONE, AGGREGATES, SAND AND FILLER 11-7
(a) Sampling and preparation of samples 11-7
(b) Standard methods of test 11-7
1107 PORTLAND CEMENT 11-8
1108 CONCRETE 11-8
1109 BITUMINOUS BINDERS 11-9
(i) Tests of Straight-run bitumen 11-9
(ii) Tests of cutback bitumen 11-9
(a) Requirements for bituminous binder 11-10
(i) General 11-10
(ii) Straight-run bitumen 11-10
(iii) Cutback bitumen 11-11
1110 BITUMINOUS MIXES 11-11
(a) Samples and sampling 11-11
(b) Standard methods of testing 11-11
1111 REINFORCING STEEL 11-12
1112 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS 11-12
1113 ROAD SIGNS 11-12
(a) Paint for road signs 11-12
(b) Other paints 11-13
1114 ROAD MARKING 11-13
1115 RETROREFLECTIVE MATERIALS FOR ROAD SIGNS 11-13
1116 COLOURS FOR ROAD SIGNS 11-13

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1117 GUARDRAIL 11-14


1118 TRIALS TO CONFIRM EQUIPMENT USE, CONSTRUCTION 11-14
METHODS AND COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Laboratory trials 11-14
(b) Site trials 11-14
1119 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL TESTING FOR EARTHWORK AND 11-15
PAVEMENT LAYERS AND BACKFILL TO DRAINAGE WORKS AND
STRUCTURES
1120 FREQUENCY OF TESTING 11-16
(a) Calibration of nuclear density testing equipment 11-16
(b) Test frequency requirements 11-16
(i) Applicable Tests 11-16
(ii) Test Frequency 11-18
(iii) Bituminous pavement works 11-20
1121 TOLERANCES 11-22
(a) Horizontal alignment 11-22
(b) Thickness of pavement layers 11-22
(c) Surface levels of formation and pavement layers 11-22
(d) Surface regularity 11-22
(e) Cutting and embankment slopes 11-23
(f) Width of cuttings and embankments 11-23
(g) Depth of side drains 11-23
(h) Concrete structures 11-23
(i) Concrete elements for substructure 11-23
(ii) Concrete elements for superstructure 11-24
(i) Construction control testing 11-24
1122 RECTIFICATION OF WORKS OUTSIDE PERMITTED TOLERANCES 11-24
(a) Eathworks 11-24
(b) The 300 mm non-frost subgrade layer below formation level 11-25
(c) Base and subbase 11-25
(d) Asphalt concrete surfacing 11-25

1123 LOAD TEST ON RCC PIPE 11-26

1124 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 11-26

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1101 SCOPE OF SECTION


This Section covers specifications, tests and methods of testing that are required for
the selection and control of the quality of materials and for control of workmanship,
trials and construction control testing.
1102 TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide, use and maintain Site laboratories throughout the
period of execution of the Works and until such time as a Taking-Over Certificate for
the whole of the Works has been issued pursuant to Sub-Clause 10.1 of the
Conditions of Contract. The Site laboratories shall be operated under the direction
and overall control of the Engineer and shall be used for carrying out contract-related
testing by the Engineer or the Contractor or both jointly, with all testing resources
including laboratory staff provided by the Contractor. .
The Contractor shall provide competent staff (minimum 1 laboratory engineer, 2
laboratory technicians and 4 laboratory helpers for each site laboratory) and sufficient
equipment for performing such sampling and tests as may be required for the
selection and control of the quality of materials and for the control of workmanship in
accordance with this Specification and the Contractor's Project Quality Control Plan
pursuant to Clause 109 of this Specification. The frequency of the Contractor's
construction control testing shall be in accordance with his Project Quality Control
Plan and not less than the guidelines set out in Clause 1120 of this Specification
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall carry out tests on all
materials to be incorporated in the Works and on all finished work.
The Contractor shall carry out all tests required and shall provide copies to the
Engineer of the results of such tests before submitting materials and finished work to
the Engineer for approval. In appropriate circumstances and as required in this
Specification, tests on industrially manufactured materials may be carried out at the
place of manufacture and, in such cases, the Contractor shall furnish manufacturers’
test data in its original form. If it is held by the Engineer that the test data provided by
the manufacturer are inconsistent or otherwise unreliable, the Contractor shall
arrange for the testing of manufactured materials at an independent test laboratory
well equipped for carrying out the required tests, as instructed and approved by the
Engineer. Manufactured materials for which the test data have not been accepted by
the Engineer shall not be brought to site of work.
The Engineer shall be allowed unrestricted access to the Contractor's sampling
operations, testing facilities, equipment, services of laboratory staff and records of
test results. The Engineer shall have the rights to witness all tests and to instruct
tests forming part of or supplementary to the Project Quality Control Plan to be
performed by the Contractor's laboratory staff, including the testing of manufactured
products at their place of manufacture.
1103 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS OF MATERIALS
All materials used in or upon the Works shall comply with this Specification and shall
be acceptable to the Engineer. Where so specified, the material shall comply with the
Standard Specification named or with an alternative Standard Specification in
accordance with the requirements of Clause 111 of this Specification.
If a material has been specified by manufacturer's trade name, the product of another
manufacturer will be acceptable provided that it is demonstrated by the Contractor
and agreed by the Engineer to be in all respects of equivalent or higher quality than
the named product and the Engineer's prior approval has been obtained.
Samples of all materials proposed for incorporation into the Works shall be submitted
to the Engineer and shall, where required by the Project Quality Control Plan or
otherwise instructed, be tested and the test results submitted to the Engineer for

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

approval prior to the material being delivered in bulk to the Site.


If it is required in accordance with this Specification certain materials are to be
tested at independent external testing laboratories, then the Contractor shall be liable
for all costs arising therefrom, including, but not limited to:
x laboratory testing charges,
x provision of samples,
x transportation of samples from the Site to the testing laboratory and, if
applicable, back to Site,
x attendance on laboratory personnel.
The Engineer shall be informed one week in advance of the program of testing at
the independent laboratory and he shall be entitled to be present at the time and
place of testing.
1104 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Standard Specifications and Methods of Testing
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer or indicated elsewhere in this
Specification, all materials incorporated in the Works shall comply with
“Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling
and Testing Part 1A & 1B Specifications, as adopted by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). The
methods of sampling and testing of materials incorporated in the Works shall be
in accordance with Part 2A and 2B, Tests of the aforementioned AASHTO
publication.
For tests required to be carried out according to these specifications but not
included in AASHTO Test Methods or not indicated otherwise in this
Specification, the provision of British Standard Specifications (or other similar
internationally used Specifications, as directed or agreed to by the Engineer)
shall apply.
(b) Sieves
ASTM E11 sieves shall be used for all tests. The sieve series in mm and Pm
(microns) is as follows:
Coarse 100, 75, 63, 50, 37.5, 25.0, 19.0, 16.0, 13.2, 12.5, 9.5, 6.3, 4.75, 4.00
mm
Fine 2.80, 2.36, 2.00, 1.70, 1.40, 1.18, 1.00 mm, 850, 600, 500, 425, 355,
300, 250, 212, 180, 150, 125,75, 63 Pm
1105 SOILS AND GRAVELS
(a) Sampling and preparation of samples
Sampling of soils and gravels and their sample preparation shall be carried out
as specified in:
(i) AASHTO T87-86 (2000) - Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil
Aggregate Samples for Test,
(ii) AASHTO T146-96 (2000) - Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for
Test
or as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Standard methods of testing
Tests on soils and gravels shall be performed in accordance with the standard

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

methods given in Table 11-1.


Laboratory compaction testing in accordance with AASHTO T180-01 standard
method of test for density-moisture relations of soils using a 4.54 kg rammer and
a 457 mm drop shall be designated "AASHTO T180-01".
Wherever in the text of this Specification the term “x% of the MDD (AASHTO
T180)” is used it shall mean that a standard of compaction shall be achieved
such that the dry density of the compacted material is x% of the maximum dry
density determined from the AASHTO T180-01 compaction test.

TABLE 11-1: Test Procedures Applicable to Soils and Gravels

Description Test Procedure


Particle Size Analysis of Soils AASHTO T88-00
Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils AASHTO T89-02
Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils AASHTO T90-00
Specific Gravity of Soils AASHTO T100-03
Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the AASHTO T176-02
Sand Equivalent Test
The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.55 kg AASHTO T180-01
Rammer and a 457 mm Drop
Density Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method AASHTO T191-02
The California Bearing Ratio AASHTO T193-99
(2003)
Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear AASHTO T238/T239
Methods
Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by AASHTO T239
Nuclear Methods
Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils AASHTO T265-93
(2000)
Density Moisture Content Relationship Vibrating Hammer BS 1377 Test 14
Moisture Content Determination (Laboratory) AASHTO T265-93
(2000)
Moisture Content Determination (Field) AASHTO T217-02

Samples for the AASHTO T180-01 compaction tests shall be taken from the Works
before compaction of the layer concerned begins unless, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the compactive effort proposed by the Contractor is such that the material
characteristics would be altered by the process of compaction, in which case the
samples for the tests shall be taken after all compaction is complete.
Compaction tests on materials which are susceptible to crushing during compaction
shall require a separate new sample to be prepared for the determination of each
point on the moisture/density curve.
The field density and moisture content of soil and granular materials placed in the
Works shall normally be determined by employing nuclear methods in accordance
with AASHTO T310-03 if these methods are, in the opinion of the Engineer, found to
be both practicable and consistent. The standard method of test for density of soil in
place by the sand cone method, AASHTO T191-02 shall be used for initial

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

calibration of the nuclear density testing equipment and for check/comparison tests
during progress of Works, as instructed by the Engineer.
The laboratory compaction test using vibratory hammer, BS 1377 Test 14 shall be
employed as an alternative to AASHTO T180-01 compaction test for crushed
aggregate material, gravel materials lacking in fines and granular materials in general
liable to crushing during compaction in the AASHTO T180-01 test as instructed by
the Engineer. The Maximum Dry Density as defined herein is to be derived from the
test method accordingly. Wherever reference is made to AASHTO T180-01 as a test
method or test criterion in this Specification, such reference shall be taken to include
within its scope BS 1377 Test 14 as an alternative.
1106 STONE, AGGREGATES, SAND AND FILLER
(a) Sampling and preparation of samples
Sampling shall be carried out and the samples shall be prepared in accordance
with AASHTO T2-91 (2000) - Sampling of Aggregates
(b) Standard Methods of Test
Tests on stone, aggregate, sand and filler shall be performed in accordance
with the Standard Methods of Test given in Table 11-2.
Table 11-2: Tests Procedures Applicable to Stone, Aggregates, Sands
and Filler

Description Test Procedure


Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate AASHTO T19-M00
Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method) ASTM C289-02
Material Finer Than 75 Pm Sieve in Mineral AASHTO T11-97
Aggregates by Washing (2000)
Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete AASHTO T21-00
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates AASHTO T27-99
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate AASHTO T84-00
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate AASHTO T85-91
(2000)
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse AASHTO T96-02
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine
Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulphate AASHTO T104-99
or Magnesium Sulphate (2003)
Flakiness Index BS 812
Elongation Index BS 812
Aggregate Crushing Value BS 812
Chloride Content of Fine Aggregates BS 812
Moisture Content Determination (Laboratory) AASHTO T265-93
(2000)
Moisture Content Determination (Field) AASHTO T217-02

In addition to the Standard Methods of Test detailed in Table 11-2 the following tests
are further specified:

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(i) The Average Least Dimension of an aggregate shall be determined as follows:


A representative sample of such a size as to give at least 200 aggregate
particles of each fraction to be tested shall be divided out by means of a riffler.
The sample shall be passed through a sieve with an aperture size of half the
nominal size of the aggregate to be tested and the particles passing the sieve
shall be discarded. The nominal size of aggregate is defined as the smallest
sieve through which at least 85% of the aggregate will pass.
The smallest dimension of each particle retained on the sieve accurate to 0.1
mm shall be measured by means of calipers with platens of at least 5 mm
diameter
(or square). The measurement and the number of particles tested shall be
recorded. The Average Least Dimension is then calculated as the sum of the
smallest dimension of the particles divided by the number of particles
measured.
ii) Rapid Field Test for Chlorides in Aggregates (Quantab Test).
The purpose of this test is to provide a quick method of testing for chlorides at
the point of delivery so that immediate action can be taken to remove any
contaminated load.
1107 PORTLAND CEMENT
Portland cement shall be sampled in accordance with AASHTO T127 Sampling and
Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement, and shall comply with all the requirements of
AASHTO M85, Portland Cement.
Tests on Portland cement for compliance with AASHTO M85 shall be performed by
an independent testing laboratory or as instructed by the Engineer.
Testing in the Site laboratory shall be carried out in accordance with the Standard
Methods of Test given in Table 11-3.
Table 11-3: Test Procedures Applicable to Portland Cement

Description Test Procedure

Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar AASHTO T106-04

Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and AASHTO T162-04


Mortars of Plastic Consistency

1108 CONCRETE
Sampling and testing of concrete shall be performed in accordance with the methods
given in Table 11-4. It is further specified that the test specimens shall be cured at a
temperature of 27 oC + 2 oC. Water to be used in concrete shall be tested in
accordance with AASHTO T26.
Table 11-4: Test procedures Applicable to Concrete
Description Test Procedure
Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement Aggregate Combinations ASTM C227-97
Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete AASHTO T119-99
Weight Per Cubic Foot (or Cubic Metre), Yield and Air Content AASHTO T121-97 (2001)
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar AASHTO T137-04

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Description Test Procedure


Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete AASHTO T141-01
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete AASHTO T157-00
Bleeding of Concrete AASHTO T158-01
Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing AASHTO T161-00
Evaluation by Freezing and Thawing of Air-Entraining AASHTO T188-75 (1999)
Additions to Portland Cement
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete By the Volumetric AASHTO T196-96 (2000)
Method
Methods of Sampling Fresh Concrete BS 1881 Part 1
Methods of Testing Fresh Concrete BS 1881 Part 2
Methods of Making and Curing Test Specimens BS 1881 Part 3
Methods of Testing Concrete for Strength BS 1881 Part 4

1109 BITUMINOUS BINDERS


(i) Tests on straight-run bitumen
Testing of straight-run bitumen shall be performed as instructed by the
Engineer in accordance with the methods (taking into account the latest
updating) as given in Table 11-5.
Table 11-5: Test Procedures Applicable to Straight-Run Bitumen

Description Test Procedures

Solubility of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T44-03

Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup AASHTO T48-04

Penetration of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T49-03

Ductility of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T51-00

Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus) AASHTO T53-96 (2000)

Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous Materials by AASHTO T55-02


Distillation

Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials AASHTO T102-83 (2000)

Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film Oven AASHTO T179-04
Test)

Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens) AASHTO T201-03

Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer AASHTO T202-03

Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials AASHTO T228-04

Determination of the Breaking Point of Solid or Semi-Solid DIN 51011


Bitumens (Fraass method)

(ii) Tests on cutback bitumen


Testing of cutback bitumen shall be performed at an independent testing
laboratory acceptable to the Engineer in accordance with the methods given
in Table 11-6.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 11-6: Test Procedures Applicable to Cutback Bitumen

Description Test Procedure

Residue of Specified Penetration ASTM D 243-02

Solubility of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T44-02

Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup AASHTO T48-04

Penetration of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T49-03

Ductility of Bituminous Materials AASHTO T51-00

Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous Materials AASHTO T55-02


by Distillation

Distillation of Cut-Back Asphaltic (Bituminous) Products AASHTO T78-96


(2000)

Flash Point with Tag Open-Cup Apparatus for Use with AASHTO T79-96
Materials Having a Flash Less than 93.3° C (2000)

Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials AASHTO T102-83


(2000)

Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film AASHTO T179-04


Oven Test)

Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens) AASHTO T201-03

Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials AASHTO T228-04

Determination of the Breaking Point of Solid of Semi- DIN 51011


Solid Bitumens (Fraass method)

(a) Requirements for bituminous binder


(i) General
Before a consignment of bituminous binder is delivered to the Site, the
Contactor shall provide the Engineer with a certificate from the manufacturer,
along with a sample and relevant test reports, attesting that the material to
be supplied complies in all respects with this Specifications. For this
purpose each single delivery of 200 tonnes or under shall constitute a
consignment. If a single delivery may exceed 200 tonnes, each 200 tonnes
or part thereof shall be regarded as a separate consignment.
Any bituminous binder delivered in leaking or damaged containers shall be
rejected.

(ii) Straight-run bitumen


Straight-run bitumen will be used in asphalt concrete mixes for surfacing and
binder course. In respect of 90/130 penetration grade bitumen expected to
be used in asphalt concrete mixes, the bitumen shall comply with the
requirements given in Table 11-7.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 11-7: Specification for 90/130 Penetration Grade Bitumen (AASHTO M 20)

Name of Test Min Max.


Penetration at 25oC, (100g, 5sec.), 0.1mm 90 130
o
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup, C 210 230
o
Ductility at 25 C, 5cm/min., cm 100 -
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 99 -
Loss on heating after Thin-Film Oven Test, % - 1.0
Penetration of residue, percent of original 46 -
Viscosity requirements AASHTO M226
Spot test with Standard Naphtha Solvent Negative
Water content Nil
o
Specific Gravity at 25 C 1.00-1.05
(iii) Cutback bitumen
Rapid-curing cutbacks shall comply with all the requirements of AASHTO
Standard Specification M81 Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type).
Medium-curing cutbacks shall comply with all the requirements of AASHTO
Standard Specification M82 Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type).
1110 BITUMINOUS MIXES
(a) Samples and sampling
Sampling of bituminous mixtures shall be carried out in accordance with
AASHTO T168 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
(b) Standard methods of testing
Testing of bituminous mixes shall be performed in accordance with the methods
given in Table 11-8.
Table 11-8: Test Procedures Applicable to Bituminous Mixes
Description Test Procedure
Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate AASHTO T30-93 (2003)
Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures AASHTO T164-01
Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using AASHTO T166-00
Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures AASHTO T168-03
Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures AASHTO T1109-99 (2004)
Determining Degree of Pavement Compaction of Bituminous- AASHTO T230-68 (2000)
Aggregate Mixtures
Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall AASHTO T245-97 (2001)
Apparatus
Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous Paving AASHTO T269-97 (2003)
Mixtures

1111 REINFORCING STEEL


Steel for the reinforcement of concrete shall comply with either the AASHTO

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Standard Specifications or the British Standards set out in Table 11-9. The
Contractor shall supply certified mill test reports for all reinforcement. Reinforcing
steel shall be tested at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer
for compliance with and in accordance with the applicable specification.
Table 11-9: Specifications Applicable To Reinforcing Steel

Description Specification Number


Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete AASHTO M 31M-03
Reinforcement
Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed for Concrete AASHTO M 221M-03
Reinforcement
Steel Wire, Deformed for Concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 225M-03
Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of BS 4449
Concrete
Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete BS 4483

1112 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS


Concrete pipes shall comply with the AASHTO Standard Specifications set out in
Table 11-10 except that their dimensions and reinforcement details shall be as
shown on the Drawings.
Table 11-10: Specifications Applicable to Concrete Pipe and Box Culvert
Description Specification Number
Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer AASHTO M 170M-04
Pipe (Metric)

Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer AASHTO M 259M-00


Pipe (Metric) AASHTO M 273M-00

Concrete for concrete pipes shall comply with the requirements of Section 700 of this
Specification.
Reinforcement for reinforced concrete pipes shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO M 170M.
Reinforcement for reinforced concrete box culvert shall comply with the requirements
of AASHTO M 259M-00 AASHTO M 273M-00.
All concrete shall be compacted either by spinning or vibrating.
All concrete pipes shall be cured in accordance with the applicable Standard
Specification in Table 11-10. No pipe shall be used in the Works until it is twenty one
days old. The date of casting shall be indelibly marked on the barrel.
Concrete pipes shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Standard
Specification in Table 11-10.
1113 ROAD SIGNS
(a) Paint for road signs
Road signs, posts and fittings shall be prepared, treated and painted in accordance
with the requirements of MNS 4597:2003.
(b) Other paints

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

All other paints used in the Works shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1114 ROAD MARKING
Road marking paint shall be reflectorized with glass beads, conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M249 White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic Striping
Material (Solid Form) and AASHTO M247 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints. The
relevant provisions of MNS 4759 shall be followed as per Engineer’s direction.
1115 RETROREFLECTIVE MATERIALS FOR ROAD SIGNS
The retroreflective material shall comply with AASHTO M268 Retroreflective
Sheeting for Traffic Control.
It is further specified that:
(a) The retroreflective material, when applied to the sign plate, shall give the
appearance of a continuous reflecting surface under any angle of observation. It
shall consist of a smooth exterior film with spherical lenses embedded beneath
the surface, and shall have a protected, precoated adhesive backing which shall
be tack-free, heat-activated for mechanical vacuum-heat application. The
combination of various elements shall result in a non-exposed lens type optical
reflecting system. The retroreflective material shall be applied in accordance
with the instructions from the manufacturer of the retroreflective material used.
(b) The retroreflective surface of the sign shall be weather resistant and shall show
no appreciable cracking, blistering, crazing or dimensional changes after 2 years
unprotected outdoor exposure at 45° upwards inclination to the vertical facing
West in Ulaanbaatar
(c) When retroreflective surface are laminated to the base materials, the adhesion
shall be such that the retroreflective material shall resist peeling, scuffing and
marring during normal handling or shocking off when jabbed with a spatula at
20° C. It shall withstand 8 hours of soaking in water at 25° C without any
noticeable edge lifting or curling. The adhesive shall have no staining effect on
the retroreflective material. The adhesive shall permit the retroreflective material
to adhere securely 48 hours after application at temperatures between - 40° C
and + 93o C.
(d) When bent around a 20 mm diameter mandrel at a temperature of 20° C, the
retroreflective material applied to an aluminium panel of 0.5 mm thickness shall
show no evidence of cracking around the outside of the bend.
(e) When a 25 mm diameter steel ball is dropped from 2 metres height onto the
retroreflective face of the sign specimen at the ambient temperature of 20° C,
the retroreflective material around the impact point shall show no evidence of
cracking or peeling off.
(f) After immersion of a specimen of retroreflective sign material for 10 minutes in
methyl alcohol, kerosene or turpentine, or for 1 minute in toluene or xylol, the
retroreflective material shall show no evidence of dissolving, puckering or
blistering. The retroreflective material shall be capable of withstanding washing
with a mixture of water and mild detergent, turpentine and methanol.
(g) The retroreflective surface shall be such as to be readily refurbished by cleaning
and recoating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1116 COLOURS FOR ROAD SIGNS
Standard colours to be used for signs, posts and fittings shall be as described in the
relevant British Standard as follows:
Red BS 381C No. 537

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Blue BS 4800 No. 18 E 53


Yellow BS 381C No. 537
Green BS 4800 No. 14 C 39
Grey BS 4800 No. 10 A 11
Cream BS 381C No. 352
White BS 873 Part 1 - Clause 1-3.2
Black BS 873 Part 1 - Clause 1-3.3
1117 GUARDRAIL
Guardrails and associated components shall be Class A with Type 1 finish
complying with AASHTO M180 Corrugated Sheet Steel Beams for Highway
Guardrail, where the posts shall also be of the same material as the beam.
1118 TRIALS TO CONFIRM EQUIPMENT USE, CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS
a) Laboratory trials
Laboratory trials shall be carried out by the Contractor and in consultation with
the Engineer on materials for earthworks and pavement layers that are to be
incorporated into the Works in their natural or processed state. Such trials shall
be conducted to establish relationships between specified end product
requirements of materials and properties that can be readily determined in the
field for construction control purposes.
For mixed materials, the composition which meets the specified requirements
and is accepted by the Engineer shall be used in Site trials that shall comply with
the requirements of Sub-Clause 1118 (b) of this Specification. Such Site trials
shall demonstrate if it possible to meet all the requirements specified for the
complete pavement course utilizing that proposed mix.
The laboratory trials on both mixed and natural materials shall be completed and
the Contractor’s proposals based thereon shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least two weeks before the Contractor commences to prove the proposed
material in Site trials in accordance with Sub-Clause 1118 (b) of this
Specification.
b) Site trials
Full-scale laying and compaction Site trials shall be carried out by the Contractor
on all earthwork and pavement materials and mixes proposed for incorporation
into the Works using the same equipment and methods proposed by the
Contractor for the construction of the Works. The Contractor shall ensure the
continuity of mix proportions and that materials are thoroughly mixed to achieve
a homogeneous state.
The trials shall be carried out to enable the Contractor to demonstrate the
adequacy of his equipment and construction methods to place, process and
compact the material to the specified density and confirm that the other specified
requirements for each completed earthwork or pavement layer can so be met.
Each trial area shall be at least 100 metres long and of the full construction
width. Material shall be placed and compacted to achieve the depth specified.
The trial area may form part of the Works provided that it fully complies with this
specification. Any areas which do not comply with this Specification shall be
removed and further trials shall be carried out.
The contractor shall allow in his program for conducting Site trials and for

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

carrying out the required tests on them. The trial on each pavement layer shall
be undertaken at least 21 days ahead of the Contractor proposing to commence
full-scale work on that layer.
The Contractor shall compact each type of material over the range of
compactive efforts required for each earthwork or pavement layer in which he
proposes to incorporate the material. The following data shall be recorded for
each level of compactive effort at each Site trial:
x the composition and grading of the material before the site trial,
x the composition and grading of the material after compaction,
x the moisture content at the time of compaction and the optimum moisture
content for the specified compaction,
x the type, size, tyre pressures, frequency of vibration and the number of
passes of the compaction equipment,
x the maximum dry density or target density as appropriate measured on a
sample before and at intervals throughout the Site trial,
x the density achieved,
x the compacted thickness of the layer,
x any other relevant information as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor and the Engineer shall perform at least eight sets of tests on
each 100 metre long trial section for each separate earthwork or pavement layer
in which the Contractor proposes to incorporate the material. The Site trial shall
be deemed to be successful if all eight sets of test results for each layer meet
the specified requirements for the material. The data recorded in the Site trial
shall provide the basis for determining the method for providing, placing and
processing each particular material and selection of construction equipment, as
to be proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer, in order to
achieve the requirements of this Specification. When results from one set of trial
is found inconclusive by the Engineer, the Contractor shall organize more trials
under the direction of the Engineer.
If, during the execution of the Works, the construction control tests should
indicate that the specified requirements for a material are not being continually
achieved, work on that earthwork or pavement layer shall cease until the cause
is investigated and identified by the Contractor. Such investigation may include
further laboratory tests and Site trials on the material to determine a revised set
of data which shall be used to establish a revised method for providing, placing
and processing all subsequent material to be incorporated in that layer.
Agreement by the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a Site trial of proposed
method of construction shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to
comply with the requirements of this Specification.
1119 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL TESTING FOR EARTHWORK AND PAVEMENT
LAYERS AND BACKFILL TO DRAINAGE WORKS AND STRUCTURES
Pursuant to the requirements of this specification and the Project Quality Control
Plan in accordance with Clause 109 of this Specification and Quality Assurance
testing by the Engineer, all earthwork and pavement layers and backfill to drainage
works and structures shall be subject to construction control testing. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have allowed in his program and his tender for time required for
such control testing in the sequence of his operations

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall request in writing the Engineer’s approval for each layer of each
section of earthworks, pavement construction and backfill to drainage works and
structures before starting the construction of the next layer. Such requests shall be
made only when the Contractor has satisfied himself that the section of work
concerned fully complies with the requirements of this Specification. Such requests
shall be accompanied by copies of the Contractor’s test results required by Clause
1102 and 1119 of this Specification.
The Engineer shall thereupon inspect the section for any visible wet spots,
laminations, heaving material (visible on proof-rolling), segregation, presence of
oversize material and for uniformity of mixing and compaction. Provided that such
visual inspection is satisfactory the Engineer shall test the section of the Works
submitted for approval. The Engineer shall inform the Contractor in writing of the
results of those tests and at the same time shall accept or reject the layer and section
concerned.
Works on subsequent layers shall in no circumstances commence until the preceding
layer has been approved and accepted by the Engineer in writing. The Contractor is
wholly responsible for protecting and maintaining the condition of work which has
been submitted for approval.
Should any layer be left unprotected for more than 24 hours subsequent to approval
the Contractor shall request re-approval of the layer. The layer shall again be subject
to proof-rolling, construction control testing and tolerance checks in accordance with
this Specification if so required by the Engineer.
Notwithstanding the Engineer’s approval of a layer, the Contractor shall be
responsible for making good any subsequent damage due to traffic, ingress of water
or any other reason. Should any damage occur the layer shall again be subject to
proof-rolling, construction control testing and tolerance checks in accordance with
this Specification.
1120 FREQUENCY OF TESTING
(a) Calibration of nuclear density testing equipment
Generally a nuclear method for determining field dry density shall be employed.
Initial calibration, calibration curve adjustment and daily standardization of the
nuclear density testing equipment shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO T310, In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). Adjustment of calibration
curves shall be undertaken in parallel with AASHTO T191 Density of Soil In-
Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
(b) Test frequency requirements
The frequency of testing shall be in accordance with the Contractor’s Project
Quality Control Plan in accordance with Clause 109 of this Specification subject
to the minimum requirement stated herein being followed:
(i) Applicable Tests
The applicable tests for each type of construction shall be as indicated in
Table 11-11.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 11-11: Applicable Tests


AASHTO Test
S. No. Type of Construction Other Test Designation
Designation
1 Compaction of existing T180-01
ground
T191-02
T217-02
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
2 Embankment Construction T88-00
T89-02
T90-00
T180-01
T191-02
T217-02
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
3 Non-frost subgrade T11-97 (2000)
T88-00
T89-02
T90-00
T180-01
T191-02
T217-02
T193-99 (2003)
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
4 Gravel shoulder and gravel T11-97 (2000)
surfacing
T88-00
T90-00
T180-01
T191-02
T193-99 (2000)
T217-02
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
5 Subbase T88-00 (i) rapid method by speedy
moisture tester
T89-02
T90-00
T150
T191-02
T193-99 (2003)
T265-93 (2000)
T310-93
6 Grade Crushed Stone Base T27-99 BS812
T84-00
T85-91 (2000)
T96-02

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

AASHTO Test
S. No. Type of Construction Other Test Designation
Designation
T104-99 (2003)
T180-01
T191-02
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
7 Backfilling of Excavations and T11-97 (2000)
Filling for Structures
T27-99
T88-00
T89-02
T90-00
T180-01
T191-01
T193-99 (2003)
T217-02
T265-93 (2000)
T310-03
(ii) Test Frequency
For each source of material of type of material used in the works the
minimum test frequency shall be as in Table 11-12.
Table 11-12: Test Frequencies
S. No. Type of Construction Test Frequency(min)
1 Compaction of existing Moisture-Density Relations One test per 3000 m2 or
ground 250 m along the
alignment
Moisture Content prior to One test per 1000 m2 or
Compaction 100 m along the
alignment
Field Dry Density One test per 500 m2 or
two tests per section
2 Embankment Moisture-Density Relations One test per 2000 m3
Construction Particle Size Analysis One test per 1000 m3
Plasticity Index One test per 1000 m3
Liquid Limit One test per 1000 m3
Moisture Content prior to One test per 600 m2 of
Compaction each layer or 3 tests per
section
Field Dry Density One test per 600 m2 of
each layer or 3 tests per
section
3 Non-frost subgrade Moisture-Density Relations One test per 1000 m3
Particle Size Analysis One test per 500 m3
Percent Swell and CBR (set One test per 1000 m3
of 3 specimens)
Plasticity Index One test per 500 m3
Liquid Limit One test per 500 m3
Plasticity Product One test per 500 m3
Moisture Content prior to One test per 300 m2 of

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Compaction each layer


Field Dry Density One test per 300 m2 or 3
tests per section

4 Gravel shoulder and Moisture-Density Relations One test per 1000 m3


gravel surfacing Plasticity Index One test per 500 m3
Gradation One test per 500 m3
CBR (Set of 3 specimens) One test per 500 m3
Moisture Content prior to One test per 500 m2 of
Compaction each layer
Field dry density One test per 250 m2 of 3
tests per section
5 Subbase Moisture-Density Relations One test per 1000 m3
Plasticity Index One test per 250 m3
Liquid Limit One test per 250 m3
Uniformity Coefficient One test per 250 m3
Plasticity Modulus One test per 250 m3
CBR (set of 3 specimens) One test per 250 m3
Gradation One test per 250 m3
Moisture Content prior to One test per 500 m2 of
Compaction each layer
Field dry density One test per 250 m2 or 3
tests per section
6 Graded Crushed Moisture-Density relations One test per 500 m3
Stone Base Sodium sulphate soundness One test per 500 m3
Flakiness Index One test per 500 m3
Water absorption One test per 500 m3
Los Angeles Abrasion One test per 500 m3
Gradation One test per 250 m3
Moisture content prior to One test per 500 m2 of
compaction each layer
Field Dry Density One test per 250 m2 or 3
tests per section
7 Backfilling of Moisture-Density Relations One test per 250 m3
Excavations and Filling Particle Size Analysis One test per 500 m3
for Structures Percent swell and CBR (set One test per 500 m3
of 3 specimens)
Plasticity Index One test per 500 m3
Liquid Limit One test per 500 m3
Moisture Content prior to Two tests per 300 m2
compaction
Field dry density Two tests per 300 m2
Density and Moisture One for each 300 m
8 Cement Treated
Stiffness One for every 30m of
Base/Subbase
road length
UCS/unconfined comp. Twice each day work
strength of field sample
If it is determined by the Engineer that any test or any set of tests done is
inconsistent or variable or otherwise inclusive, such tests shall be

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

repeated or the frequency of testing may be increased if so directed by


the Engineer.
For each new material encountered as determined by the Engineer,
minimum 2 sets of tests as above shall be carried out irrespective of the
quantity of the materials.
(iii) Bituminous pavement works
(A) Binder
Tests according to AASHTO T44, T49 and T202 shall be
undertaken at least once for each day of work or at least once per
20,000 litres delivered to Site. Tests required for full compliance
of Clause 1109 shall be carried out at least once for every
200,000 litres delivered at site.
(B) Aggregates
The aggregate properties listed below shall be determined on
opening up of each new source of aggregate and whenever the
Engineer considers that the aggregate properties may have
altered and at least once for every 500 m3 of material produced:
• Grading,
• Los Angeles Abrasion,
• Sodium Sulphate Soundness,
• Flakiness Index.,
• Sand Equivalent,
• Soluble Salts and Deleterious Matter.
• Real and Apparent Specific Gravity and Absorption in
the Mixed Aggregate.
• Voids.
(C) Mineral Filler
The grading and bulk density shall be determined once per 50
tonnes of filler used, and when the source of filler is changed.
(D) Bituminous mixture (from the mixing plant)
The following properties of the bituminous mixture as appropriate
to the type of mix specified, shall be determined every 750
Tonne/ twice in a day’s work of production or part thereof mixing
time of samples taken from the mixing plant:
• Bitumen content,
• Grading,
• Marshall stability,
• Flow,
• Absorbed water,
• Voids.
(E) Bituminous mixture (on cores from the compacted layer)
The following properties of the bituminous mixture, as appropriate
to the type of mix specified, shall be determined at least once for
every 600 m2 of mix laid from pairs of core samples cut from the
compacted layer:
• Bitumen content,

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

• Grading,
• Density,
• Voids.
FREQUENCY OF TEST (WORDS USED ASPHALT AND
BITUMEN ARE SYNONYM OF EACH OTHER)
Prime Coat/ (i) Quality
Tack Coat/ Fog of Number of samples per lot and tests as specified
Spray binder
(ii) Binder temperature
for application At regular close intervals
(iii) Rate of spread
of Binder One test per 500 m2 and not less than two tests
per day
Dense
(i) Quality of binder Number of samples per lot and tests as specified
Bituminous
Macadam/Semi (ii) Aggregate Impact
Dense Value/Los Angeles One test per 50 m3 of aggregate
Bituminous Abrasion Value
Concrete/
Asphalt/Bitumino (iii) Flakiness Index
One test per 50 m3 of aggregate
us and Elongation Index
Concrete
Initially one set of 3 representative specimens for
each source of supply. Subsequently when
(iv) Stripping Value
warranted by changes in the quality of
aggregates
(v) Soundness
(Magnesium Same Initially, one determination by each method for
each source of supply, then as warranted by
as mentioned under change in the quality of the aggregates.
and Sodium
Sulphate)
Initially one set of 3 representative specimens for
vi) Water absorption of each source of supply. Subsequently when
aggregates warranted by changes in the quality of
aggregates
(vii) Sand equivalent As required
test
(viii) Plasticity Index As required
(ix) Polished stone As required, for Semi Dense Bituminous
value Concrete/ Bituminous Concrete
(x) Percentage of When gravel is used, one test per 50 m3 of
fractured faces aggregate
One set of tests on individual constituents and
mixed aggregate from the dryer for each 400
(xi) Mix grading tones of mix subject to a minimum of two tests
per plant per day
For each 400 tones of mix produced, a set of 3
Marshall specimens to be prepared and tested
(xii) Stability of Mix for stability, flow value, density and void content
subject to a minimum of two sets being tested
per plant per day
Initially one set of 3 representative specimens for
(xiii) Water sensitivity each source of supply. Subsequently when
of mix warranted by changes in the quality of
aggregates (if required)
(xiv) Swell test on the As required for the bituminous concrete
mix

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-21


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(xv) Control of
temperature of
binder in boiler,
aggregate in the At regular close intervals
dryer and mix at
the time of laying
and rolling
(xvi) Control of binder One test for each 400 tones of mix subject to a
content and minimum of two tests per day per plant
grading of the mix
(xvii) Rate of spread Regular control through material checks on the
of mixed material weight of mixed material and layer thickness
(xviii) Density of One test per 250 m2 area
compacted layer

1121 TOLERANCES
(a) Horizontal alignment
The horizontal alignment shall be determined from the centerline of the
pavement surface as shown on or calculated from the Drawings. The
ٛ centerline coordinates of the pavement surface as constructed and offsets
therefrom shall be correct within a tolerance of ± 10 mm.
(b) Thickness of pavement layers
The average thickness of any pavement layer measured at five points in any
length of 100 m shall not be less than 100% nor more than 120% of the
thickness specified or instructed by the Engineer. In addition the thickness of
any pavement layer measured at any point shall not be less than 95% nor more
than 125% of the thickness specified or instructed by the Engineer.
(c) ©Surface levels of formation and pavement layers
The level measured at any point on the surface of a finished pavement layer or
formation level shall not deviate from the corresponding level calculated from the
Drawings by more than the tolerances shown in Table 11-13.
For verification of compliance with Table 11-13, additional measurements of
surface levels shall be taken at points to be selected by the Engineer along
every 10 m of ٛ centerline, at the centerline and at the edge on each side of a
particular level and at 1.75 m centers transversely to the road centerline at the
base course and pavement of main road and at 1.0 m centers transversely at
the base course and pavement of the access road. At the junctions the requisite
grid point spacings to verify compliance shall be determined by the Engineer.
(d) Surface regularity
The surface regularity of a finished pavement layer or formation level shall be
tested at points decided by the Engineer with a rigid steel straight-edge, 3 m
long, placed parallel or perpendicular to the centerline of the road. The
maximum allowable deviation of the surface below the straight-edge shall be as
given in Table 11-13.
In addition the longitudinal slope or transverse crossfall shall not deviate from
that shown on the Drawings by more than the tolerances shown in Table11-13.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-22


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Table 11-13: Surface Tolerances for Formation Level and Pavement Layers
Layer Max. deviation Max. depth Max. deviation
from surface below 3 m from slope or
level straight-edge crossfall
Asphalt concrete surfacing ҏ + 5 mm 3 mm + ҏ0.20%
Dense Asphalt base + ҏ6 mm 5 mm ҏ + 0.20%
Crushed stone Base + 10 mm 8 mm ҏ+ 0.25%
Subbase and shoulders + 15 mm 12 mm ҏ+ 0.40%
Subgrade + 25 mm 20 mm ҏ 0.50%
+
Cement - treated base/ + 10 mm + 10 mm + 0.25%
subbase

(e) Cutting and embankment slopes


In the final trimmed slope of cuttings and embankments a tolerance of + 0.20
shall be permitted. That is if the specified slope is 1 in 2 (1 vertical in 2
horizontal) then acceptable slopes shall be not steeper than 1 in 2 or flatter than
1 in 2,2.

(f) Width of cuttings and embankments


The tolerance permitted in the width of the bottom of cuttings, measured as the
horizontal distance between the centerline of the road and the toe of the cut
slope, shall be ± 200 mm.
The width of embankments measured as the horizontal distance between the
centre line of the road and the top of the fill slope shall not be less than that
shown on the Drawings or not more +100 mm than that shown on the Drawings.

(g) Depth of side drains


The depth of side drains, measured as the difference in level at the edge of the
finished shoulder and the invert level of the side drain, shall not be less than that
shown on the Drawings nor exceed that shown on the Drawings by more than
100 mm.
(h) Concrete structures
(i) Concrete elements for substructure
Concrete elements for substructure shall be constructed within the
tolerances set out in Table 11-14.
Table 11-14: Tolerances for Concrete Elements for Substructure
Category Tolerance
Variation from specified cross-sectional dimensions + 10 mm, - 5 mm
Displacement from specified position in plan 10 mm
Variation from specified level of top surfaces +ҏ10 mm
Variation from specified level of bearing areas +ҏ5 mm
Variation from plumb over full height 10 mm
Allowable deviation of the surface below 3 m straight- 3 mm
edge, bearing areas
Allowable deviation of the surface below 3 m straight- 5 mm

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-23


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Category Tolerance
edge, all other areas

(ii) Concrete elements for superstructure


Concrete elements for superstructure shall be constructed within the
tolerances set out in Table 11-15.
Table 11-15: Tolerances for Concrete Elements for Superstructure
Category Tolerance
Variation from specified thickness of slabs, box girder slabs + 10 mm, - 5 mm
and T-girder flanges
Variation from specified web thickness + 10 mm, - 5 mm
Variation from specified overall depth or width +ҏ5 mm
Variation from specified overall length and length between +ҏ10 mm
bearings
Allowable deviation of the surface below 3 m straight-edge 5ҏmm
or template

(i) Construction control testing


Unless otherwise directed, values set out in this Specification are minimum or
limiting values and the workmanship shall only be considered satisfactory if all
tests, taken at the frequency set out in the Project Quality Control Plan or
specified in this Specification, are at least equal to that specified in the relevant
section.
1122 RECTIFICATION OF WORKS OUTSIDE PERMITTED TOLERANCES
Where any tolerances specified in Clause 1121 of this Specification are exceeded,
the Contractor shall determine the full extent of the area which is out of tolerance and
shall make good the surface of the pavement, earthworks or formation layer in the
manner prescribed below. The minimum area to be reworked shall be 3 m wide and
30 m long.
(a) Earthworks
Wherever the slope of a cutting is steeper or the slope of an embankment slope
is flatter than the specified gradient, the slope shall be trimmed to the specified
gradient. Wherever the slope of an embankment is steeper than the specified
gradient, the Contractor shall bench the slope and place and compact fill
material and trim the slope all in accordance with the requirements of Section
300 of the Specifications. Where the slope of a cutting is flatter than specified,
no payment shall be made for any additional earthworks and ordinarily no
rectification will be required, with the exception that any instability or erosion
engendered by the extra cutting shall be made good at the expense of the
Contractor.
Where the width of a cutting is less than or the width of an embankment is
greater than the specified width, the Contractor shall trim the cutting or
embankment to the specified width. Where the width of a cutting is greater than
or the width of an embankment is less than the specified width, the Contractor
shall bench the slope and place and compact fill material and trim the slope all
in accordance with the requirements of Section 300 of this Specification.
Where the depth of a side drain is less than that specified, the side drain shall be
trimmed to the specified depth. Where the depth of the side drain is greater than

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-24


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

that specified, the side drain shall be scarified, backfilled with selected fill
material compacted to a dry density of at least 90% MDD (AASHTO T180) such
that the specified side drain depth is achieved.
Where the results of the construction control tests fail to meet the requirements
of this Specification the full depth of the layer shall be reworked such that
compliance is achieved. The area to be reworked shall be the whole section
submitted for approval or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a length of at least
50 m each side of the test failure location over the full width of the section.
(b) The 300 mm non-frost subgrade layer below formation level
Where levels or widths are out of tolerance, the full depth of the layer shall be
reworked to comply with the requirements of this Specification. The area treated
shall be at least 30 m long and 3 m wide or such area to be determined by the
Engineer.
Where the results of the construction control tests fail to meet the requirements
of this Specification the full depth of the layer shall be reworked such that
compliance is achieved. The area to be reworked shall be the whole section
submitted for approval or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a length of at least
50 m each side of the test failure location over the full width of the section.
(c) Base and subbase
Base and subbase comprises graded crushed stone and natural, screened or
crushed gravel respectively including CTB works. Where levels or widths and
surface regularity of base are out of tolerance as well as levels or widths of
subbase are out of tolerance to the minus , the full depth of the layer shall be
removed from the pavement and replaced such that compliance with the
requirements of this Specification is achieved. However, levels or widths of
subbase are out of tolerance to the plus, not exceeding 50 mm, the layer may be
graded to the dimensions specified in the Specification. If the Engineer does not
agree with the above-mentioned action, the full depth of the layer shall be
removed and replaced. The area treated shall be at least 30 m long and 3 m
wide or such area to be determined by the Engineer.
Where the results of the construction control tests fail to meet the requirements
of this Specification the full depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced
such that compliance is achieved. The area to be treated shall be the whole
section submitted for approval or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a length of at
least 50 m each side of the test failure location over the full width of the section.
(d) Asphaltic concrete surfacing
In the event that the tolerances specified m Clause 1121 of this Specification are
exceeded such that the thickness of the layer is too small, the Contractor shall
remove the full depth of the layer and replace it with fresh material laid and
compacted to comply with the Specification. The area treated shall be at least 30
m long and 3 m wide or such area to be determined by the Engineer. Material
shall be laid in one operation. Where the tolerances are exceeded such that the
thickness of the layer is too large, the Contractor shall remove the excess
material by milling, using equipment and procedures approved by the Engineer.
Where the results of the construction control tests for asphalt concrete surfacing
tests fail to meet the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall
remove the full depth of the layer and replace it in accordance with the
Specification. The area to be treated shall be the whole section submitted for
approval or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a length of at least 15 m each side
of the test failure location over the full width of the section.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-25


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1123 LOAD TEST OF REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE


The pipes shall conform to AASHTO M 170. At least 1.5 % pipes (for any pipe
diameter) shall be tested using external load three-edge-bearing test method of
AASHTO T-280 as directed by the Engineer. The load test expenses on RCC pipe
shall be incidental to the corresponding item rate.

1124 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


No separate measurement and payment shall be made for testing of materials,
construction trials and construction control testing. The Contractor shall be deemed
to have allowed in his rates and prices for the cost of complying with all the
requirements of this Section 1100 of this Specification.

Section 1100. Quality Assurance 11-26


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1200 - PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12-1


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

SECTION 1200 - PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT


1201 General 12-3
1202 Water Quality 12-3
1203 Air Quality 12-3
1204 Noise 12-4
1205 Control of Wastes 12-4
1206 Emergency Response 12-4
1207 Measurement 12-4

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12-2


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

1200 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT


1201 General
This section of the Specification sets out limitations on the Contractor`s activities
specifically intended to protect the environment.
The contractor shall take all necessary measures and precautions and otherwise
ensure that the execution of the works and all associated operations on site or off-
site are carried out in conformity with statutory and regulatory environmental
requirements including those prescribed elsewhere in this document.
The Contractor shall take all measures and precautions to avoid any nuisance or
disturbance arising from the execution of the Works. This shall wherever possible be
achieved by suppression of the nuisance at source rather than abatement of the
nuisance once generated.
In the event of any spoil, debris, waste or any deleterious substance from the Site
being deposited on any adjacent land, the Contractor shall immediately remove all
such material and restore the affected area to its original state to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
1202 Water Quality
The contractor shall prevent any interference with the supply to or abstraction from,
and prevent any pollution of, water resources (including underground percolating
water) as a result of the execution of Works.
Areas where water is regularly or repetitively used for dust suppression purposes
shall be laid to fall to specially-constructed settlement tanks to permit sedimentation
of particulate matter. After settlement tanks to permit sedimentation of particulate
matter. After settlement, the water may be re-used for dust suppression and rinsing.
All water and other liquid waste products arising on the Site shall be collected and
disposed of at a location on or off the Site and in manner that shall not cause either
nuisance or pollution.
The Contractor shall not discharge or deposit any matter arising from the execution
of the Works into any waters except with the permission of the Engineer and the
regulatory authorities concerned
The Contractor shall at all times ensure that all existing stream courses and drains
within, and adjacent to, the Site are kept safe and free from any debris and any
materials arising from the Works.
The Contractor shall protect all watercourses, waterways, ditches, canals, drains,
lakes and the like from pollution as a result of the execution of the Work.
1203 Air Quality
a. The Contractor shall devise and arrange methods of working to minimise dust,
gaseous or other air-borne emissions and carry out the Works in such a manner
as to minimise adverse impacts on air quality.
b. The Contractor shall utilize effective water sprays during delivery manufacture,
processing and handling of materials when dust is likely to be created, and to
dampen stored materials during dry and windy weather. Stockpiles of material or
debris shall be dampened prior to their movement, except where this is contrary
to the Specification.
c. Any vehicle with an open load-carrying area used for transporting potentially dust
producing material shall have properly fitting side and tail boards. Materials
having the potential to produce dust shall not be loaded to a level higher than the

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12-3


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

side and tail boards, and shall be covered with a clean tarpaulin in good
condition. The tarpaulin shall be properly secured and extend at least 300 mm
over the edges of the side and tail boards.
d. In the event that the Contractor is permitted to use gravel or earth road for
haulage, he shall provide suitable measures for dust palliation, if these are, in the
opinion of the Engineer, necessary. Such measures may include spraying the
road surface with water at regular intervals.
1204 Noise
a. The Contractor shall consider noise as an environmental constraint in his
planning and execution of the Works.
b. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures so that the operation of all
mechanical equipment and construction processes on and off the Site shall not
cause any unnecessary or excessive noise, taking into account applicable
environment requirements. The Contractor shall use all necessary measures and
shall maintain all plant and silencing equipment in good condition so as to
minimize the noise emission during construction works.
1205 Control of Wastes
a. The Contractor shall control the disposal of all forms of waste generated by the
construction operations and in all associated activities. No uncontrolled
deposition or dumping shall include, but shall not be limited to, all forms of fuel
and engine oils, all types of bituminous mixtures etc. the Contractor shall make
specific provision for the proper disposal of these and other waste products,
conforming to local regulations and acceptable to the Engineer.
1206 Emergency Response
a. The contractor shall plan and provide for remedial measures to be implemented
in the event of occurrence of emergencies such as spillages of oil or bitumen or
chemicals.
b. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a statement of the measures he
intends to implement in the event of such an emergency which shall include a
statement of how he intends to provide personnel adequately trained to
implement such measures.
1207 Measurement
No separate measurement shall be made in respect of compliance by the
Contractor with the provisions of this Section of the Specification. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have made allowance for such compliance with these provisions
in the preparation of his prices for items of work included in the Bills of Quantities and
full compensation for such compliance will be deemed to be covered by them.

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12-4


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Special Specification for Environmental Management

The following provisions expand the related specifications and requirements above.

1208 Environmental Management

1208.1 General Provisions

The Contractor shall take all necessary measures and precautions and otherwise ensure
that the execution of the Works and all associated operations on the Work Sites or off-site
are carried out in conformity with statutory and regulatory environmental requirements of
the Government of Mongolia and the Standard Specification, where the more stringent
shall apply. The Contractor shall take all measures and precautions to avoid any nuisance
or disturbance arising from the execution of Project Activities. This shall, wherever
possible, be achieved by suppression of the nuisance at source rather than abatement of
the nuisance once generated.

1208.2 Preparation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Engineer’s approval an Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) within 30 days of the commencement date according to Clause
8.1 of the Conditions of Contract. The EMP shall be formulated to meet the requirements
specified in Section 1209 below under the following headings:

- 1. Management Acknowledgements
- 2. Organization & Staffing
- 3. Communications And Reporting
- 4. Environmental Control Provisions
- 5. Health and Safety Provisions

The Engineer may require periodic reviews, including updating of the EMP during the
Works.

1208.3 Appointment of Environmental Safety Officer (ESO)

The Contractor shall submit for approval the name and details (full CV) of his proposal
for an ESO to the Engineer within 14 days of the commencement date according to
Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract. The ESO shall be responsible for day-to-day
issues of environmental management. The Contractor shall obtain approval of such
person being appointed, who shall be in position to carry out his duties prior to Works
activities commencing on site except as may be agreed in exceptional circumstances in
writing with the Engineer.

1208.4 Environmental Baseline Surveys

The Contractor shall conduct Environmental Baseline Surveys according to the


requirements of this Clause.

1208.5 Safety Induction

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 5


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Contractor, whilst in possession of the site, shall be responsible for the safety
measures undertaken in accordance with the Specifications to protect the workforce and
staff of the Contractor’s own staff as well as the Engineer’s supervision staff and shall
conduct in this respect Safety Induction Courses for all personnel involved with the
Works and who are required to supervise any activity prior to their attending any part of
the Works.

1209 Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

1209.1 Management Acknowledgement

(i) Certification and Commitment

The EMP submitted by the Contractor shall provide a signed statement from the
Contractor’s Managing Director(s) attesting to a commitment that all environmental
protection, safety, and industrial health aspects of the Contract will be given highest
priority in the discharge of contractual obligations and certifying a commitment to
the provisions in the EMP as approved by the Engineer.

(ii) Statutory Understanding and Compliance

The Plan shall provide a statement attesting the firm’s understanding of, and means
of ensuring due compliance with, the statutory regulations relating to construction
work in the Government of Mongolia, specifically in regard to compliance with:

(a) All safety and industrial health legislation including, without limitation, the Rules
and Regulation of the Government of Mongolia and the authorities having
jurisdiction.
(b) All current environmental laws and regulations related to the following, but not
limited to:
- Noise;
- Vibration;
- Air pollution;
- Water contamination;
- Solid waste disposal;
- Liquid waste disposal;
- Sanitary conditions (water supply, sewerage, etc.);
- Use of explosives; and
- Protection of public traffic, etc.

(iii) Availability of Documents

The Plan shall state where copies of safety and industrial health regulations and
documents will be available on the construction site and verify that all regulations
and documents have been or will be available.

(iv) Management of Subcontractors

The requirements of this and related sections and obligations therein shall include for
execution of parts of the Works by the approved subcontractors whilst the Contractor

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 6


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

shall:

(a) Provide subcontractors with copies of the EMP whilst incorporating such
provisions into all sub-contracts and ensure compliance with such plan under the
Contract.

(b) Require all subcontractors to appoint a safety representative who shall be


available on the site throughout the operational period of the respective sub-contract
and ensure as far as is practically possible that staff and employees of subcontractors
are conversant with appropriate parts of the EMP and the statutory regulations.

1209.2 Organization and Staffing

(i) Organization Chart

The Plan shall include an organization chart identifying (by job title and by the name
of the individual) the personnel to be engaged solely for environmental protection,
safety and traffic control. The chart and the supporting text shall identify participants
and their areas of responsibility.

(ii) Identification of Responsibilities

The Plan shall provide a description of the responsibilities of the


Environment/Safety Staff appearing on the Organization Chart

(iii) Nomination of the Proposed Environment/Safety Officer (ESO)

The Plan shall indicate the name of the proposed ESO. The ESO shall be responsible
for day-to-day environmental management on the site.

(iv) Certification Related to the Environment/Safety Officer (ESO)

The Plan shall certify that:

ƒ The ESO will be appointed and assigned duties throughout the period of the
Contract entirely connected with the environmental, safety, and traffic control
activities on the Site.

ƒ The proposed ESO is suitably qualified and experienced to supervise and


monitor compliance with the EMP and will, in particular but without limitation,
carry out auditing of the operation of the EMP in accordance with a rolling
program to be submitted, from time to time, to the Engineer for his consent.

ƒ The ESO will not be removed from the site without the express written
permission of the Engineer. Within fourteen (14) days of any such removal or
notice of intent of removal, a replacement ESO will be nominated for approval
by the Engineer.

ƒ The ESO will be provided with supporting staff in accordance with the staffing
levels set out in the Plan. The supporting shall include at least one (1) Deputy
ESO whose appointment shall also be subject to approval by the Engineer.. The

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 7


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Deputy ESO shall be capable of assuming the duties and functions of the ESO
whenever necessary.

ƒ The ESO shall be empowered to instruct all employees of the Contractor and
Subcontractors to cease operations and shall take the appropriate action as is
necessary and within his limits of delegation by informing others as may be
appropriate to prevent unsafe working practices or other infringements of the
Plan or the statutory regulations.

ƒ The ESO shall maintain a daily site diary comprehensively recording all relevant
matters concerning site environmental management, safety and traffic control,
inspections and audits, related incidents and the like. The site diary shall be
available at all times for inspection by the Engineer and his staff.

(v) Contact Information

Contact information for all Environment/Safety Staff shall be provided in the Plan.

(vi) Qualifications of the Proposed Staff

Curriculum vita (CVs) and other relevant information explaining the qualifications
of the proposed staff and demonstrating their ability to perform the duties assigned
shall be provided with the Plan.

1209.3 Reporting Procedures

(i) Communications & Routine Reporting Procedures

The Plan shall explain the proposed interaction and communication procedures
between construction personnel and environmental protection, safety and traffic
control staff, including:

ƒ Communication facilities.

ƒ Routine communication and reporting systems.

(ii) Environmental and Safety Reports

The following environmental and safety reports shall be submitted:

ƒ Initial Environmental Baseline Report. as described in Section 1209.4

ƒ Regular Environmental and Safety Reports. The Contractor shall undertake


safety and environmental inspections and report weekly and shall provide copies
of such reports to the Engineer each month for the duration of the Contract.

ƒ Incorporation of Summaries in the Project Monthly Reports. Summaries of these


reports will be included in the Project’s Monthly Progress Reports.

(iii) Notification of Accidents

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 8


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

The Plan shall verify that provisions have been made to ensure that:

ƒ The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any accidents which
occur whether on-site or off-site in connection with the Works and in which the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Engineer as the case may be appropriate are
directly or indirectly involved and which result in any injuries to any persons.

ƒ The initial notification may be verbal and shall be followed by a written and
reasonably comprehensive report within 24 hours of the accident taking care so
as to notify facts and not attribute responsibility.

(iv) Communications with Sub-Contractors

The EMP shall specify:

ƒ The means by which environmental management, health and safety and traffic
control and industrial health matters and requirements will be communicated to
Subcontractors at all levels and their due compliance with the EMP and all
relevant statutory regulations. Subcontractors shall be supplied with copies of
the EMP which shall be deemed part of the sub-contract and which may include
attendance at training programs, circulation of newsletters and other means as
specified by the Plan.

ƒ The procedures for reviewing and monitoring compliance with the EMP and
statutory regulations. This could include, for example, the inclusion of
performance against environmental and safety criteria as a part the daily and/or
weekly site inspections.

1209.4 Environmental Control Provisions

The EMP shall contain:


- A site plan for each construction site indicating the major environmental
requirements as in section (i) below;
- Environmental Baseline Work Programs;
- Monitoring Schedules;
- Verification of Arrangements for Required Equipment; and
- Other Environmental Provisions as noted below.

Detailed requirements are as follows.

(i) Site Plans

The EMP shall include site plans for each construction site and staging area,
indicating the locations and arrangements of all storage areas and work sites subject
to activities that may result in environmental impacts. At a minimum, the site plans
must indicate the following:

ƒ The Basic Site Organization. The basic site organization shall be provided by a
site plan at a scale of 1:1,000.

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 9


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

ƒ Hard Surface Areas. Areas within the site where there is a regular movement of
vehicles shall have an acceptable hard surface and be kept clear of loose surface
material and shall be so indicated on the required site plan.

ƒ Waste Disposal and Site Drainage Systems. The following conditions shall
apply:

- Waste Disposal. All water and waste products arising on the site shall be
collected, removed from the site via a suitable and properly designed temporary
drainage system and disposed of at a location and in a manner that will cause
neither pollution nor nuisance The site plan shall indicate the system proposed
and the locations of related facilities in the site, including latrines, holding
areas, etc. There shall be no direct discharge of sanitary or wash water to
surface water. Disposal of materials such as, but not limited to, lubricating oil
and onto the ground or water bodies shall be prohibited. Liquid material storage
containment areas shall not drain directly to surface water. Liquid material
storage containment areas equipped with drains shall be valved, and the valve
shall be maintained locked in the closed position with supervisory control of the
key. Lubricating and fuel oil spills shall be cleaned up immediately and spill
clean-up materials shall be stocked and maintained at the storage area.

- Drainage. The site plan shall be devised to ensure that run-off from excavations
in the different parts of the Works is not deposited directly into any
watercourse, stream, or canal and shall indicate the system proposed, including
the locations of retention ponds and other facilities. There shall be no direct
discharge of sanitary wastewater, wash water, chemicals, spoil, waste oil or
solid waste generated in connection with the Works to surface water bodies.

x Locations of Water Quality Monitoring Stations. Locations for surface water


quality monitoring stations according to (ii) below shall be indicated.

x Locations of Fuelling Operations. Fuelling operations shall occur only within


containment areas

x Temporary Construction Facilities Relative to Watercourses. The site plans


shall be devised to ensure that, insofar as possible, all temporary construction
facilities are located at least 50 metres away from an existing water course,
stream, or canal.

x Other Water-Related Facilities. Site Plans must indicate adequate precautions


to ensure that no spoil or debris of any kind are allowed to be pushed, washed
down, fallen or be deposited on land or water bodies adjacent to the Site.

ƒ Location of Batching Plant(s). Dry mix batching shall be carried out in a totally
enclosed area with exhaust to suitable fabric filters. The locations of these
facilities should be clearly illustrated by the site plans.

ƒ Location of Wheel Washing Facilities. The Contractor shall provide a wash pit
or a wheel washing and/or vehicle cleaning facility at the exits from the
excavation sites. The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicle are properly

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 10


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

cleaned (bodies and tyres are free of sand and mud) prior to leaving the
construction site and entering public areas and ensure that water or debris from
such cleaning operations is contained and not deposited into nearby drains and
watercourses. The locations of these facilities shall be clearly illustrated by the
site plans.

ƒ Location of Sand and Aggregate Storage Provisions. The Contractor shall


implement dust suppression measures that shall include, but not be limited to the
following:

- Stockpiles of sand and aggregate greater than 20 cubic meters for use in
concrete manufacture shall be enclosed on three sides, with walls extending
above the pile and two (2) meters beyond the front of the piles.

- Cement and other such fine-grained materials delivered in bulk shall be stored
in closed silos fitted with a high-level alarm indicator. The high-level alarm
indicators shall be interlocked with the filling line such that in the event of the
hopper approaching an overfull condition, an audible alarm will operate, and the
pneumatic line to the filling tanker will close.

ƒ Conveying Systems. Where dusty materials are being discharged to vehicles


from a conveying system at a fixed transfer point, a three-sided roofed enclosure
with a flexible curtain across the entry shall be provided. Exhaust fans shall be
provided for this enclosure and vented to a suitable fabric filter system.
Locations and essential details for these facilities shall be indicated on the site
plan as warranted.

ƒ Other Air Quality Features. Construction walls will be provided in all locations
where strong winds could cause the blowing of dust and debris. The Plan shall
indicate where such facilities are proposed.

ƒ Conformance with the Montréal Protocol. All refrigerants and fire extinguishing
materials shall be in accordance with Montréal Protocol which specifies
acceptable materials for these purposes.

ƒ Locations of Proposed Air Quality Monitoring Stations. Sheltered air quality


monitoring stations are required at each location for baseline air quality
monitoring. The Contractor shall construct suitable access, hard standing and a
galvanized wire fence and gate at each monitoring station. The exact location
and direction of the monitoring equipment at each monitoring station shall be
agreed with the Engineer. The locations proposed should be clearly illustrated by
the site plans.

ƒ Locations of Liquid and Toxic Material Storage Areas. The site plans shall
specify the locations for the storage of liquid materials and toxic materials
including the following such conditions to avoid adverse impacts due to
improper fuel and chemical storage:

- All fuel and chemical storage (if any) shall be sited on an impervious base within
a bund and secured by fencing. The storage area shall be located away from any

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 11


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

watercourse or wetlands. The base and bund walls shall be impermeable and of
sufficient capacity to contain 110 percent of the volume of tanks.

- Filling and refueling shall be strictly controlled and subject to formal procedures
and will take place within areas surrounded by bunds to contain spills / leaks of
potentially contaminating liquids.

- All valves and trigger guns shall be resistant to unauthorized interference and
vandalism and be turned off and securely locked when not in use.

- The contents of any tank or drum shall be clearly marked. Measures shall be
taken to ensure that no contaminated discharges enter any drain or watercourses.

- Disposal of lubricating oil and other potentially hazardous liquids onto the
ground or water bodies will be prohibited.

- Should any accidental spills occur, immediate clean up will be undertaken and all
cleanup materials stored in a secure area for disposal to a site authorised for
disposal of hazardous waste.

ƒ Explanations of Proposed Site Drainage Systems. Locations likely to be subject


to water quality impacts or significant runoff (construction camps, staging areas,
etc.) and an explanation of the proposed site drainage system shall be indicated
on the site plans.

ƒ Noise Monitoring Stations. The Contractor will carry out noise monitoring at
such points within the Site or outside the Site and at times as shall be determined
by the Engineer. The location(s) proposed should be clearly illustrated by the Site
Plan(s).

(ii) Standards and Required Equipment

The Contractor shall comply with prevailing standards and regulations of the
Government of Mongolia. In instances in which the requirements of the
Specifications and those of the Government of Mongolia differ (if any), the more
stringent shall apply. Instrumented monitoring as called for herein will require sub-
contractor services for which the following should be noted:

ƒ Air Quality. Air quality monitoring will require:

- A high volume air sampler and associated equipment and shelters in accordance
with accepted international practice.

- A direct reading dust meter capable of reading one-hour TSP in the range 0.1-
100 mg/m3. The dust (TSP) levels will be measured by the High Volume
Method for Total Suspended Particulates.

- Equipment capable of providing the monitoring specified by the Monitoring

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 12


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

Plan.

- Suitable access, hard standing and a galvanized wire fence and gate at each
monitoring station at locations on the site boundaries.

- Equipment as necessary to ensure that all samples collected as part of the


monitoring program shall be analyzed according to accepted international
practice.

ƒ Water Quality. All sampling and analysis shall be in conformance with standard
methods and standards of the Government of Mongolia.

ƒ Noise. Equipment as necessary to ensure monitoring meeting the requirements of


the Government of Mongolia is required. Baseline noise monitoring shall
conform to standard methods and standards of the Government of Mongolia.

(iii) Environmental Baseline Work Program

The following are required as a part of the environmental baseline survey (EBS):
ƒ Air Quality Baseline. Air quality baseline monitoring shall be carried out within
28 days of notification of the commencement date under Clause 8.1 of the
Conditions of Contract as is practicable, to determine ambient levels of the air
pollutants indicated by below at specified monitoring stations. The baseline
monitoring is required to be carried out for a one-week period with
measurements to be taken at each monitoring station according to the frequency
schedule below. The Plan shall indicate when the Contractor proposes to
undertake the required baseline air quality survey and shall provide references to
locations of each monitoring station indicated on the accompanying site plan(s)
as appropriate. The locations shall be approved by the Engineer.

Pre-Construction Monitoring: Air Quality


Parameters Frequency Locations Standards
Within a one-week period:
ƒ Particulates (TSP) ƒ A Continuous
ƒ Others as determined period of at
warranted by the least 24
Not less than two
Engineer could hours;
points in each
include: ƒ Second
Construction
o Sulfur Dioxide (SO 2 ) measuremen As agreed
Package.
o Nitrogen Dioxide t for at least with Engineer
Additional
(NO 2 ) one two- and EPA.
locations to be
o Carbon Monoxide hour period.
determined on the
(CO) ƒ Third
basis of the EMP.
o Ozone (O 3 ) measuremen
o Ammonia (NH 3 ) t for at least
o Hydrocarbons (HC) one two-
hour period.

ƒ Water Quality Baseline. Pre-construction water quality monitoring shall be carried

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 13


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

out twice within a one-week period to establish baseline conditions at locations


determined in consultation with the Engineer and shall include locations likely to be
subject to water quality impacts or significant runoff (construction camps, staging
areas, etc.) and shall include

Pre-Construction Monitoring: Water Quality


Parameters Frequency Locations Standards
ƒ Suspended solids (SS) As determined warranted by Not less than two
ƒ Biological Oxygen the Engineer. points in each
Demand (BOD) Construction
ƒ Dissolved oxygen Package. As specified
(DO), Additional by EPA.
ƒ Conductivity locations to be
ƒ Fecal coliform, determined on the
ƒ Oil and grease basis of EMP.

ƒ Noise Baselines. Baseline noise monitoring will be conducted at agreed upon


areas continuously over a period of seven days at sensitive locations. The Plan
shall indicate when and where the Contractor proposes to undertake the required
baseline noise survey and provide references to locations indicated by the
accompanying site plan(s) as appropriate. The proposed locations shall be
approved by the Engineer.

(iv) Monitoring Schedules

The following scheduling provisions shall apply in regard to routine periodic


monitoring during the Contract:

ƒ Air Quality. Air quality impact shall be monitored not less than once per month
during the course of the Works. Monitoring results shall be submitted to
Engineer two (2) working days of the completion of the monitoring period for
analysis and review. Actions taken in response to the monitoring results shall
also be required. Additional monitoring shall be undertaken as deemed
warranted by the Engineer.

ƒ Water Quality Monitoring. Monitoring of runoff from the site areas, construction
camps, staging areas and camps etc., shall be undertaken not less than once per
month and additional monitoring may be required at the discretion of the
Engineer if warranted by site observations. Analytical reports may be required
by the Engineer to explain anomalies and problems encountered. Actions taken
in response to the monitoring results shall also be required.

ƒ Noise Monitoring. Off-site noise levels due to construction activities shall not
exceed a Leq of 70 dBA at any time and, insofar as possible, shall not exceed 55
dBA during the day (6:00 to 8:00 PM) and 40 dBA at night (8:00 PM to 6:00
AM).

Noise levels during times of site activity shall be measured as follows:

During any activity likely to be a source of significant vibration the Contractor shall

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 14


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

record vibration levels at locations agreed with the Engineer at least twice daily. The
frequency of monitoring may be relaxed if it can be shown that vibration levels are
consistent and within acceptable levels. Theses shall be done at times during the
active use of the equipment likely to be a source of vibration.

Noise shall be monitored not less than once per month and more frequently if
determined warranted by the Engineer.

In all cases, monitoring results shall be submitted to the Engineer within two (2)
working days of the completion of the monitoring period for analysis and review.
The Contractor shall, at the same time, propose any action to be taken or needed in
response to the monitoring results for the approval by the Engineer.

Other Environmental Control, Provisions

Related to Air Quality

The Plan shall indicate understanding that:

(a) No furnaces, boilers or other similar plant or equipment using any fuel that may
produce air pollutants will be installed without prior written consent of the
Engineer.

(b) There will be no burning of debris or other materials, which shall be taken to
approved disposal sites

(c) Dust suppression measures including but not limited to the following shall be
implemented:

- Stockpiles of sand and aggregate greater than 20 cubic meters for use in concrete
manufacture shall be enclosed on three sides, with walls extending above the pile
and two (2) metres beyond the front of the piles. Locations shall be indicated by the
EMP.

- Effective water sprays shall be used during the delivery and handling of all raw sand
and aggregate, and other similar materials, when dust is likely to be created and to
dampen all stored materials during dry and windy weather.

- Areas within the Site where there is a regular movement of vehicles shall have an
acceptable hard surface and be kept clear of loose surface material. Locations shall
be indicated by the EMP.

- Conveyor belts shall be fitted with wind-boards, and conveyor transfer points and
hopper discharge areas shall be enclosed to minimize dust emission. All conveyors
carrying materials that have the potential to create dust shall be totally enclosed and
fitted with belt cleaners. Locations shall be indicated by the EMP.

- Cement and other such fine-grained materials delivered in bulk shall be stored in
closed silos fitted with a high-level alarm indicator. The high-level alarm indicators
shall be interlocked with the filling line such that in the event of the hopper

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 15


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

approaching an overfull condition, an audible alarm will operate, and the pneumatic
line to the filling tanker will close. Locations shall be indicated by the EMP.

- Cement manufactured from dredging of off-shore coral reef resources will not be
used in the Project.

- All air vents on cement silos shall be fitted with suitable fabric filters provided with
either shaking or pulse-air cleaning mechanisms. The fabric filter area shall be
determined using an air-cloth ratio (filtering velocity) of 0.01 - 0.03 m/s.

- Weigh hoppers shall be vented to a suitable filter.

- The filter bags in the cement silo dust collector must be thoroughly shaken after
cement is blown into the silo to ensure adequate dust collection for subsequent
loading.

- Adequate dust suppression including water bowsers with spray bars.

- Areas of reclamation shall be completed, including final compaction, as quickly as


possible consistent with good practice to limit the creation of wind blown dust.

- All non-bituminous / unsurfaced roads forming access to parts of the construction


areas of the Site shall be kept moist by spraying

- All vehicles, while parked on the Site, will be required to have their engines turned
off.

- All equipment and machinery on the Site will be checked at least weekly and make
all necessary corrections and or repairs to ensure compliance with safety and air
pollution requirements.

- All vehicles will be properly cleaned (bodies and tyres are free of sand and mud)
prior to leaving the site areas. The necessary cleaning facilities will be provided on
site to ensure that no water or debris from such cleaning operations is deposited off-
site. Locations should be indicated by the EMP.

- All trucks used for transporting materials to and from the site will be covered with
canvas tarpaulins, or other acceptable type cover (which shall be properly secured)
to prevent debris and/or materials from falling from or being blown off the
vehicle(s).

- Construction walls will be provided in all locations where strong winds could cause
the blowing of dust and debris.

(d) At any concrete batching plant or crushing plant being operated on the Site the
following additional conditions shall be complied with:

- Dust nuisance as a result of construction activities will be avoided. An air pollution


control system shall be installed and shall be operated whenever the plant is in
operation.

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 16


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

- Where dusty materials are being discharged to vehicles from a conveying system at
a fixed transfer point, a three-sided roofed enclosure with a flexible curtain across
the entry shall be provided. Exhaust fans shall be provided for this enclosure and
vented to a suitable fabric filter system. Locations shall be indicated by the EMP

- Any vehicles with an open load carrying area used for moving potentially dust-
producing materials shall have properly fitting side and tailboards. Materials
having the potential to create dust shall not be loaded to a level higher than the side
and tail boards, and shall be covered by a clean tarpaulin in good condition. The
tarpaulin shall be properly secured and shall extend at least 300 mm over the edges
of the side and tailboards.

- The concrete batching plant and crushing plant sites and ancillary areas will be
frequently cleaned and watered to minimize any dust emissions.

- Dry mix batching shall be carried out in a totally enclosed area with exhaust to
suitable fabric filters.

Related to Water Quality

Other water quality provisions will include but will not be limited to the following:

- All existing stream courses and drains within, and adjacent to, the Site will be kept
safe and free from any debris and any excavated materials arising from the Works.
Chemicals, sanitary wastewater, spoil, waste oil and concrete agitator washings will
not be deposited in the watercourses.

- All water and waste products arising on the Site will be collected, removed from the
Site via a suitable and properly designed temporary drainage system and disposed
of at a location and in a manner that will cause neither pollution nor nuisance.

- Drainage works will be constructed, maintained, removed and reinstated as


necessary and all other precautions necessary for the avoidance of damage by
flooding and silt washed down from the Works will be taken. Adequate precautions
will be taken to ensure that no spoil or debris of any kind are allowed to be pushed,
washed down, fallen or be deposited on land adjacent to the Site.

- In the event of any spoil or debris from construction works being deposited on
adjacent land or any silt washed down to any area, then all such spoil, debris or
material and silt shall be immediately removed and the affected land and areas
restored to their natural state by the Contractor.

ƒ Downstream slopes will be stabilized with concrete, rock gabions or walls to


avoid erosion where warranted as directed by the Engineer.

ƒ Construction camps and other potential sources waste and debris are properly
sited and provided with drainage and wastewater facilities.

Related to Noise and Vibration

To avoid potential adverse noise and vibration impacts, the Contractor shall:

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 17


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

- Provide prior public notification of construction operations prior to commencing


works.

- Repair any damage caused as the result of vibrations generated from or by the use of
his equipment, plant, and machinery.

- Erect temporary noise barriers where schools are within 50 metres of construction
activities.

- Ensure that all exhaust systems will be maintained in good working order; properly
designed engine enclosures and intake silencers will be employed; and regular
equipment maintenance will be undertaken.

- Ensure that stationary equipment will be placed as far from sensitive zones as
practical and is selected to minimize objectionable noise impacts being provided with
shielding mechanisms where possible.

- Schedule operations to coincide with periods when people would least likely be
affected; work hours and work days will be limited to less noise-sensitive times.
Hours-of-work will be approved by the site engineer having due regard for possible
noise disturbance to the local residents or other activities.

Related to Protection of Historic and Cultural Resources

To avoid potential adverse impacts to historic and cultural resources, if any, the
Contractor shall:

- Protect sites of known antiquities, historic and cultural resources by the placement of
suitable fencing and barriers;

- The Contractor will undertake formal public meetings prior to construction works to
identify potential historic and cultural sites that may be affected by Project works.

- Not locate construction camps within 500 meters from cultural resources.

- Adhere to accepted international practice and all applicable historic and cultural
preservation requirements of the government of Mongolia, including all appropriate local
government entities

- In the event of discoveries of cultural or historic artifacts (movable or immovable) in the


course of the work, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the
findings and shall notify the Engineer and concerned local level and central government
levels representatives of the Ministry of Education, Culture and Science of Mongolia
since the owner of the cultural or historic artifacts is the Government of Mongolia
according to existing legislations..

Related Land Transportation

Construction operations will be conducted in a manner to minimize their impact on land


communications in and around the areas of construction. Measures to accomplish this

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 18


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

requirement may include but not be limited to the following:

- Transportation of materials and equipment carried out in accordance with Government


of Mongolia regulations.

- Avoiding transportation of materials and equipment on live traffic routes on the roads
with asphalt pavement during busy periods to avoid exacerbation of possible congestion.

- Installation of proper and sufficient temporary traffic management systems

- Proper supervision of drivers to ensure awareness and adherence to regulations.

- Stipulate control of drivers in such way as to prevent or deter drivers from using alcohol
and drugs whilst in employment.

- The storage of construction materials.

The Contractor will be responsible for all road damage that may occur from the
transporting of materials and equipment to and from the Works and will be
responsible for implementing all necessary repairs and/or restoration at no cost to the
Employer

1209.5 Health and Safety Provisions

The Contractor shall ensure as far as practicable that the health, safety and welfare of
employees and all other persons on site are secured and general are protected from
hazards created by the Project. The Contractor shall prepare and implement a Health
and Safety Plan (HSP), which shall be approved by the Engineer. The HSP will
address but is not limited, the following:

x Site Security, including securing of excavations, hazardous materials, etc.


x Confined space safety procedures
x Excavation and trenching safety measures
x Emergency Response plans
x First Aid facilities, equipment and materials
x Protective clothing and safety equipment
x Safety Training Program for Contractor Staff
x On-Site Safety Publicity
x HIV/-AIDS Awareness Program
x H&S Management monitoring and reporting

All occupational health and safety measures will comply with these Specifications
and the contract and applicable Government of Mongolia regulations, and
international good practice, where the more stringent will apply.

(i) Emergency Response Plan

The EMP shall include an emergency response plan to deal with accidents and

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 19


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

emergencies, including environmental/public health emergencies associated with


hazardous material spills and similar events,

(ii) First Aid Base

The Contractor shall provide a fully equipped first aid base climatically controlled to
maintain the temperature of the inside of the building at 20 degrees C, plus or minus.

(iii) On-Site Safety Publicity

The Contractor shall ensure that safety, rescue and industrial health matters are given
a high degree of publicity to all persons regularly or occasionally on the Site.
Posters drawing attention to site safety, rescue and industrial health regulation shall
be made or obtained from the appropriate sources and shall be displayed
prominently in areas of the Site where Contractor and SubContractor staff and
labour, Engineer’s staff and Site visitors will take notice.

(iv) Safety Training Program

The Contractor shall include in the EMP a safety training program which shall
consist of:

ƒ Initial Safety Induction Course. All workmen shall be required to attend a safety
induction course prior to undertaking any work in connection with the Works.

ƒ Periodic Safety Training Courses. Periodic safety courses shall be conducted for
all Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s employees including all
operatives and staff involved in supervision and management not less than once
every six months. Subcontractor employees will be required to participate in
relevant training courses appropriate to the nature, scale and duration of the
subcontract works.

ƒ Safety Meetings. Regular safety meetings will be conducted on a monthly basis


and shall require attendance by the safety representatives of Subcontractors. The
Engineer shall be invited to attend at his discretion. The minutes of all safety
meetings will be taken and sent to the Engineer within seven (7) days of the
meeting.

ƒ Safety Inspections. The Contractor shall regularly inspect, test and maintain all
safety equipment, scaffolds, guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and
other means of access, lifting, lighting, signing and guarding equipment. Lights
and signs shall be kept clear of obstructions and legible to read. Equipment,
which is damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not in working order, shall be
repaired or replaced immediately.

ƒ Safety Equipment and Clothing. The Contractor shall ensure that safety
protection equipment and protective clothing are available for use as required
and effective measures are employed to ensure proper utilization and necessary
replacement of such equipment and clothing.

ƒ Safe use of Construction Plant and Equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 20


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

equipment is fitted with appropriate safety devices including effective safety


catches for crane hooks and other lifting devices, automatic warning devices
and, where applicable, an up-to-date test certificate, for cranes and hoists.

ƒ Requirements for Sub-Contractors’ Safety Plans. Subcontractors will be supplied


with copies of the EMP and provisions will be incorporated into all sub-
contracts. All subcontractors will be required to appoint a safety representative
who shall be available on the Site throughout the operational period of the
respective sub-contract unless the Engineer’s approval to the contrary is given in
writing.

(v) HIV-Aids Awareness Program

The Contractor shall:

(a) Appoint under subcontract an Approved Service Provider to


provide an HIV Awareness Program to the Contractor’s
Personnel and the project affected communities along the road
right of way as soon as practicable after the Contractor’s
Personnel arrive at the Site but in any case within two weeks
after the Contractor’s Personnel arrive at Site and to repeat such
HIV Awareness Program at intervals not exceeding four months.

(b) Give any representative of the Approved Service Provider, the


Employer and the National HIV/AIDS Authority all reasonable
access to the Site in connection with the HIV Awareness
Program;

(c) If the National Aids Authority has not provided the names of
available Approved Service Providers within two weeks after
being asked select its own service provider after consultation
with the appropriate UNAIDS and/or National HIV/AIDS
Authority office;

(d) Instruct the Contractor’s Personnel to attend the HIV Awareness


Program in the course of their employment and during their
normal working hours or any period of overtime provided for in
the relevant employment contracts and uses all reasonable
endeavours to ensure this instruction is followed;

(e) Provide suitable space for delivery of the HIV Awareness


Program and do nothing to dissuade the Contractor’s Personnel
from attending the HIV Awareness Program;

(f) As soon as practicable, notify the Infectious Diseases Research


Center of its sub-contract with an Approved Service Provider to
facilitate the Infectious Diseases Research Center’s audit of
Approved Service Providers;

(g) Give all reasonable cooperation to the Infectious Diseases


Research Center if it exercises its right to audit the provision by

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 21


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

the Approved Service Provider of the HIV Awareness Program.

(h) Make condoms available complying with the requirements of


ISO 4074 to all contractor’s employees at readily accessible
points on the site, suitably protected from the elements, for the
duration of the contract;

(i) Either place and maintain HIV/AIDS awareness posters of size


of not less than A1 in areas which are highly trafficked by
construction workers, or provide construction workers with a
pamphlet, in languages largely understood by construction
workers, which reinforce the outcomes of the HIV Awareness
Program stated in (a) above;

(j) Encourage voluntary HIV/STD testing, and

(k) Provide information on services concerning counselling support


and care of those that are or might be infected.

The Contractor shall not be required to undertake or pay for


treatment or medication for personnel found to be suffering from
HIV/AIDS. Such personnel shall not be discriminated against
however.

(vi) The exposure to such HIV Awareness Program shall, as a minimum,


result in personnel being able to:

a) Communicate the existence of problems of HIV and be able to


outline the consequences of transmission of HIV to or from the local
community;

b) Recall and communicate the mode of HIV transmission and


preventative measures including the proper use of the condom.

c) Be aware of the advantages of abstinence/avoidance

(vii) Reporting

(a) The Contractor shall prepare and attach to his claims for
payment a brief report which outlines how the actions taken by
the contractor in the period for which payment is claimed satisfy
the requirements and a schedule which lists the names, identity
numbers, trade / occupation and name of Employer of all
construction workers exposed to the program.

(b) The Engineer shall certify the report described in (vii) (a).
whenever a claim for payment is issued to the Employer.

(viii) Where a clinic is provided on behalf of the Contractor on site, the


Contractor shall ensure that such clinic provides to the Contractor’s
personnel, on request and without charge:

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 22


Construction of Choir-Sainshand Road Technical Specifications

(a) Counseling and advice on AIDS in compliance with UNAIDS or


National HIV/AIDS Authority guidelines; and

(b) Condoms that comply with either the current ISO standard or
WHO/UNAIDS Specification and Guidelines for Condoms 1998
or any more recent equivalent publication by the National
HIV/AIDS Authority.

(ix) The Contractor shall be entitled to be reimbursed by the Employer for


any payments made under a sub-contract made on either cost incurred in
accordance with the relevant provisions in the Contract, and in particular,
for the amounts included in the Bill of Quantities;

(x) Where the Contract does not provide for reimbursement of named costs,
the amount paid by the Contractor to the Approved Service Provider
shall be added to any lump sum to be paid by the Employer to the
Contractor under the Contract and, before such lump sum is paid, the
Contractor shall provide to the Employer evidence of:

(a) Payment of the amount claimed to the Approved Service


Provider; and

(b) Provision of the HIV Awareness Program (e.g., a Compliance


certificate issued by the Approved Service Provider).

(xi) Where the Contractor sub-contracts any of its obligations under the
Clause of the Contract it shall require any sub-contractor to comply with
sub-clauses of the Contract as if it were the Contractor.

1209 Traffic Management Provisions

The traffic control plan, which will be prepared in accordance with the Specifications,
and will address requirements and principles of this section with respect to site security
and Contractor, Engineer, Site visitors and general public safety.

Section 1200. Protection of the environment 12- 23

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen